Académique Documents
Professionnel Documents
Culture Documents
Manufacturer:
ABB AB
Substation Automation Products
SE-721 59 Västerås
Sweden
Telephone: +46 (0) 21 34 20 00
Facsimile: +46 (0) 21 14 69 18
www.abb.com/substationautomation
Table of contents
Table of contents
Section 1 Introduction.....................................................................27
Introduction to the technical reference manual.................................27
About the complete set of manuals for an IED............................27
About the technical reference manual.........................................28
Design of the Technical reference manual (TRM).......................29
Introduction.............................................................................29
Principle of operation..............................................................29
Input and output signals.........................................................32
Function block........................................................................32
Setting parameters.................................................................32
Technical data........................................................................32
Intended audience.......................................................................33
Related documents......................................................................33
Revision notes.............................................................................34
Introduction..................................................................................89
Setting parameters......................................................................90
Signal matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)..............................................90
Introduction..................................................................................90
Principle of operation...................................................................90
Function block.............................................................................91
Input and output signals..............................................................91
Signal matrix for binary outputs (SMBO)..........................................91
Introduction..................................................................................91
Principle of operation...................................................................92
Function block.............................................................................92
Input and output signals..............................................................92
Signal matrix for mA inputs (SMMI)..................................................93
Introduction..................................................................................93
Principle of operation...................................................................93
Function block.............................................................................93
Input and output signals..............................................................93
Signal matrix for analog inputs (SMAI).............................................94
Introduction..................................................................................94
Principle of operation...................................................................94
Function block.............................................................................94
Input and output signals..............................................................95
Setting parameters......................................................................95
Summation block 3 phase (SUM3Ph)..............................................97
Introduction..................................................................................97
Principle of operation...................................................................97
Function block.............................................................................98
Input and output signals..............................................................98
Setting parameters......................................................................98
Authority status (AUTS)....................................................................99
Introduction..................................................................................99
Principle of operation...................................................................99
Function block...........................................................................100
Output signals............................................................................100
Setting parameters....................................................................100
Goose binary receive......................................................................101
Function block...........................................................................101
Input and output signals............................................................101
Setting parameters....................................................................103
Logic diagram.......................................................................106
Function block...........................................................................106
Input and output signals............................................................106
Setting parameters....................................................................107
Technical data...........................................................................107
Setting parameters....................................................................164
Technical data...........................................................................166
Mho impedance supervision logic..................................................167
Introduction................................................................................167
Principle of operation.................................................................168
Fault inception detection......................................................168
Function block...........................................................................169
Input and output signals............................................................169
Setting parameters....................................................................170
Phase selection with load encroachment (PDIS, 21).....................171
Introduction................................................................................171
Principle of operation.................................................................172
Phase-to-earth fault..............................................................173
Phase-to-phase fault............................................................175
Three phase faults................................................................176
Load encroachment..............................................................177
Minimum operate currents....................................................180
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................181
Function block...........................................................................185
Input and output signals............................................................185
Setting parameters....................................................................186
Technical data...........................................................................187
Full scheme distance protection, quadrilateral for Mho..................187
Introduction................................................................................188
Principle of operation.................................................................188
Full scheme measurement...................................................188
Impedance characteristic.....................................................189
Minimum operating current...................................................190
Measuring principles............................................................191
Directional lines....................................................................192
Simplified logic diagrams......................................................194
Function block...........................................................................197
Input and output signals............................................................197
Setting parameters....................................................................197
Technical data...........................................................................198
Faulty phase identification with load enchroachment (PDIS,
21)..................................................................................................199
Introduction................................................................................199
Principle of operation.................................................................200
The phase selection function................................................200
Function block...........................................................................210
Input and output signals............................................................210
Setting parameters....................................................................211
Technical data...........................................................................212
Directional impedance Mho (RDIR)................................................212
Introduction................................................................................213
Principle of operation.................................................................213
Directional impedance element for mho characteristic,
ZDM......................................................................................213
Additional distance protection directional function for
earth faults, ZDA .................................................................215
Function block...........................................................................217
Input and output signals............................................................218
Setting parameters....................................................................219
Phase preference logic...................................................................220
Introduction................................................................................220
Principle of operation.................................................................220
Function block...........................................................................223
Input and output signals............................................................223
Setting parameters....................................................................223
Technical data...........................................................................224
Power swing detection (RPSB, 78)................................................225
Introduction................................................................................225
Principle of operation.................................................................225
Resistive reach in forward direction.....................................226
Resistive reach in reverse direction.....................................227
Reactive reach in forward and reverse direction..................228
Basic detection logic.............................................................228
Operating and inhibit conditions...........................................230
Function block...........................................................................231
Input and output signals............................................................231
Setting parameters....................................................................232
Technical data...........................................................................233
Power swing logic (RPSL, 78)........................................................234
Introduction................................................................................234
Principle of operation.................................................................234
Communication and tripping logic........................................234
Blocking logic.......................................................................235
Function block...........................................................................237
Input and output signals............................................................237
Setting parameters....................................................................238
Technical data...........................................................................238
Pole slip protection (PPAM, 78)......................................................238
Introduction................................................................................238
Principle of operation.................................................................239
Function block...........................................................................242
Input and output signals............................................................242
Setting parameters....................................................................243
Technical data...........................................................................244
Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based
(SFCV) ...........................................................................................244
Introduction................................................................................244
Principle of operation.................................................................244
Function block...........................................................................247
Input and output signals............................................................247
Setting parameters....................................................................247
Technical data...........................................................................248
Setting parameters....................................................................324
Technical data...........................................................................325
Directional underpower protection (PDUP, 32)..............................325
Introduction................................................................................325
Principle of operation.................................................................326
Low pass filtering..................................................................328
Calibration of analog inputs..................................................329
Function block...........................................................................330
Input and output signals............................................................330
Setting parameters....................................................................331
Technical data...........................................................................332
Directional overpower protection (PDOP, 32)................................333
Introduction................................................................................333
Principle of operation.................................................................334
Low pass filtering..................................................................336
Calibration of analog inputs..................................................336
Function block...........................................................................337
Input and output signals............................................................338
Setting parameters....................................................................338
Technical data...........................................................................340
Broken conductor check (PTOC, 46)..............................................340
Introduction................................................................................340
Principle of operation.................................................................340
Function block...........................................................................342
Input and output signals............................................................342
Setting parameters....................................................................343
Technical data...........................................................................343
Time delay............................................................................358
Blocking................................................................................360
Design..................................................................................360
Function block...........................................................................362
Input and output signals............................................................362
Setting parameters....................................................................363
Technical data...........................................................................365
Two step residual overvoltage protection (PTOV, 59N).................366
Introduction................................................................................366
Principle of operation.................................................................366
Measurement principle.........................................................367
Time delay............................................................................367
Blocking................................................................................370
Design..................................................................................371
Function block...........................................................................372
Input and output signals............................................................372
Setting parameters....................................................................372
Technical data...........................................................................375
Overexcitation protection (PVPH, 24).............................................375
Introduction................................................................................376
Principle of operation.................................................................376
Measured voltage.................................................................378
Operate time of the overexcitation protection.......................379
Cooling.................................................................................382
OEX protection function measurands...................................382
Overexcitation alarm............................................................383
Logic diagram.......................................................................384
Function block...........................................................................384
Input and output signals............................................................384
Setting parameters....................................................................385
Technical data...........................................................................386
Voltage differential protection (PTOV, 60)......................................387
Introduction................................................................................387
Principle of operation.................................................................387
Function block...........................................................................388
Input and output signals............................................................389
Setting parameters....................................................................389
Technical data...........................................................................390
Loss of voltage check (PTUV, 27)..................................................390
Introduction................................................................................390
Principle of operation.................................................................391
Function block...........................................................................392
Input and output signals............................................................392
Setting parameters....................................................................393
Technical data...........................................................................393
Section 11 Control..........................................................................455
Synchronizing, synchrocheck and energizing check (RSYN,
25)..................................................................................................455
Introduction................................................................................455
Principle of operation.................................................................456
Basic functionality.................................................................456
Logic diagrams.....................................................................456
Function block...........................................................................464
Input and output signals............................................................465
Setting parameters....................................................................467
Technical data...........................................................................469
Autorecloser (RREC, 79)................................................................470
Introduction................................................................................470
Principle of operation.................................................................471
Logic Diagrams....................................................................471
Auto-reclosing operation Off and On....................................471
Auto-reclosing mode selection.............................................471
Start auto-reclosing and conditions for start of a reclosing
cycle ....................................................................................472
Control of the auto-reclosing open time for shot 1...............473
Long trip signal.....................................................................474
Time sequence diagrams.....................................................480
Function block...........................................................................483
Input and output signals............................................................483
Setting parameters....................................................................485
Technical data...........................................................................487
Apparatus control (APC).................................................................488
Introduction................................................................................488
Principle of operation.................................................................488
Bay control (QCBAY).................................................................489
Introduction...........................................................................489
Principle of operation............................................................489
Function block......................................................................490
Input and output signals.......................................................491
Setting parameters...............................................................491
Local/Remote switch (LocalRemote, LocRemControl)..............491
Introduction...........................................................................491
Principle of operation............................................................491
Function block......................................................................492
Input and output signals.......................................................493
Setting parameters...............................................................494
Switch controller (SCSWI).........................................................495
Introduction...........................................................................495
Principle of operation............................................................495
Function block......................................................................500
Input and output signals.......................................................500
Setting parameters...............................................................501
Circuit breaker (SXCBR)...........................................................502
Introduction...........................................................................502
Principle of operation............................................................502
Function block......................................................................507
Input and output signals.......................................................507
Setting parameters...............................................................508
Function block......................................................................551
Logic diagram.......................................................................552
Input and output signals.......................................................553
Interlocking for bus-section disconnector (A1A2_DC)...............555
Introduction...........................................................................555
Function block......................................................................555
Logic diagram.......................................................................556
Input and output signals.......................................................558
Interlocking for busbar earthinggrounding switch (BB_ES).......559
Introduction...........................................................................559
Function block......................................................................559
Logic diagram.......................................................................560
Input and output signals.......................................................560
Interlocking for double CB bay (DB)..........................................560
Introduction...........................................................................560
Function block......................................................................561
Logic diagrams.....................................................................562
Input and output signals ......................................................569
Interlocking for 1 1/2 CB (BH)....................................................572
Introduction...........................................................................572
Function blocks....................................................................573
Logic diagrams.....................................................................575
Input and output signals.......................................................582
Horizontal communication via GOOSE for interlocking.............588
Function block......................................................................588
Input and output signals.......................................................588
Setting parameters...............................................................590
Logic rotating switch for function selection and LHMI
presentation (SLGGIO)...................................................................590
Introduction................................................................................590
Principle of operation.................................................................591
Functionality and behaviour ................................................592
Graphical display..................................................................592
Function block...........................................................................594
Input and output signals............................................................595
Setting parameters....................................................................596
Selector mini switch (VSGGIO)......................................................596
Introduction................................................................................596
Principle of operation.................................................................597
Function block...........................................................................597
Input and output signals............................................................597
Setting parameters....................................................................598
Generic double point function block (DPGGIO)..............................598
Introduction................................................................................599
Principle of operation.................................................................599
Function block...........................................................................599
Input and output signals............................................................599
Setting parameters....................................................................599
Single point generic control 8 signals (SPC8GGIO).......................600
Introduction................................................................................600
Principle of operation.................................................................600
Function block...........................................................................600
Input and output signals............................................................600
Setting parameters....................................................................601
Principle of operation.................................................................617
Current reversal logic...........................................................617
Weak end infeed logic..........................................................617
Function block...........................................................................619
Input and output signals............................................................619
Setting parameters....................................................................619
Technical data...........................................................................620
Local acceleration logic (PLAL)......................................................620
Introduction................................................................................621
Principle of operation.................................................................621
Zone extension.....................................................................621
Loss-of-load acceleration.....................................................622
Function block...........................................................................622
Input and output signals............................................................622
Setting parameters....................................................................623
Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection
(PSCH, 85).....................................................................................624
Introduction................................................................................624
Principle of operation.................................................................624
Blocking scheme..................................................................625
Permissive under/overreach scheme...................................626
Unblocking scheme..............................................................627
Function block...........................................................................628
Input and output signals............................................................628
Setting parameters....................................................................629
Technical data...........................................................................629
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual
overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85).................................................630
Introduction................................................................................630
Principle of operation.................................................................630
Directional comparison logic function...................................630
Fault current reversal logic...................................................631
Weak and infeed logic..........................................................631
Function block...........................................................................633
Input and output signals............................................................633
Setting parameters....................................................................633
Technical data...........................................................................634
Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase
segregated communication (PSCH) ..............................................634
Introduction................................................................................635
Principle of operation.................................................................635
Current reversal logic ..........................................................635
Function block...........................................................................637
Input and output signals............................................................637
Setting parameters....................................................................639
Technical data...........................................................................639
Section 13 Logic.............................................................................641
Tripping logic (PTRC, 94)...............................................................641
Introduction................................................................................641
Principle of operation.................................................................641
Logic diagram.......................................................................643
Function block...........................................................................646
Input and output signals............................................................646
Setting parameters....................................................................647
Technical data...........................................................................648
Trip matrix logic (GGIO).................................................................648
Application.................................................................................648
Principle of operation.................................................................648
Function block...........................................................................650
Input and output signals............................................................650
Setting parameters....................................................................651
Configurable logic blocks (LLD)......................................................652
Introduction................................................................................652
Inverter function block (INV)......................................................652
OR function block (OR).............................................................652
AND function block (AND).........................................................653
Timer function block (Timer)......................................................654
Pulse timer function block (PULSE)..........................................655
Exclusive OR function block (XOR)...........................................655
Set-reset with memory function block (SRM)............................656
Controllable gate function block (GT)........................................657
Settable timer function block (TS).............................................657
Technical data...........................................................................658
Fixed signal function block (FIXD)..................................................659
Introduction................................................................................659
Principle of operation.................................................................659
Function block...........................................................................659
Input and output signals............................................................659
Setting parameters....................................................................660
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion B16I..........................................660
Introduction................................................................................660
Principle of operation............................................................660
Function block......................................................................661
Input and output signals.......................................................661
Setting parameters...............................................................662
Boolean 16 to Integer conversion with logic node representation
(B16IGGIO)....................................................................................662
Introduction................................................................................662
Principle of operation.................................................................662
Function block...........................................................................663
Input and output signals............................................................663
Setting parameters....................................................................664
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion (IB16)........................................664
Introduction................................................................................664
Principle of operation.................................................................664
Function block...........................................................................665
Input and output signals............................................................665
Setting parameters....................................................................666
Integer to Boolean 16 conversion with logic node representation
(IB16GGIO)....................................................................................666
Introduction................................................................................666
Principle of operation.................................................................666
Function block...........................................................................667
Input and output signals............................................................667
Setting parameters....................................................................668
Section 14 Monitoring.....................................................................669
Measurements (MMXU).................................................................669
Introduction................................................................................670
Principle of operation.................................................................671
Measurement supervision....................................................671
Service values (MMXU, SVR)..............................................676
Current Phasors (MMXU, CP)..............................................680
Voltage phasors (MMXU, VN and VP).................................681
Sequence quantities (MSQI, CSQ and VSQ).......................681
Function block...........................................................................681
Input and output signals............................................................683
Setting parameters....................................................................685
Technical data...........................................................................699
Event counter (GGIO).....................................................................700
Introduction................................................................................700
Principle of operation.................................................................700
Reporting..............................................................................701
Design..................................................................................701
Function block...........................................................................701
Input signals..............................................................................701
Setting parameters....................................................................702
Technical data...........................................................................702
Event function (EV).........................................................................702
Introduction................................................................................702
Principle of operation.................................................................702
Function block...........................................................................704
Input and output signals............................................................704
Setting parameters....................................................................705
Fault locator (RFLO).......................................................................707
Introduction................................................................................707
Principle of operation.................................................................708
Measuring Principle..............................................................709
Accurate algorithm for measurement of distance to fault.....709
The non-compensated impedance model............................712
IEC 60870-5-103..................................................................713
Function block...........................................................................713
Input and output signals............................................................713
Setting parameters....................................................................714
Technical data...........................................................................715
Measured value expander block.....................................................715
Introduction................................................................................715
Principle of operation.................................................................716
Function block...........................................................................716
Input and output signals............................................................716
Disturbance report (RDRE)............................................................717
Introduction................................................................................717
Principle of operation.................................................................718
Function block...........................................................................725
Input and output signals............................................................726
Setting parameters....................................................................728
Technical data...........................................................................739
Event list (RDRE)...........................................................................740
Introduction................................................................................740
Principle of operation.................................................................740
Function block...........................................................................741
Input signals..............................................................................741
Technical data...........................................................................741
Indications (RDRE).........................................................................741
Introduction................................................................................741
Principle of operation.................................................................742
Function block...........................................................................743
Input signals..............................................................................743
Technical data...........................................................................743
Event recorder (RDRE)..................................................................743
Introduction................................................................................743
Principle of operation.................................................................744
Function block...........................................................................744
Input signals..............................................................................744
Technical data...........................................................................744
Trip value recorder (RDRE)............................................................745
Introduction................................................................................745
Principle of operation.................................................................745
Function block...........................................................................746
Input signals..............................................................................746
Technical data...........................................................................746
Disturbance recorder (RDRE)........................................................746
Introduction................................................................................746
Principle of operation.................................................................747
Memory and storage............................................................747
IEC 60870-5-103..................................................................749
Function block...........................................................................749
Input and output signals............................................................749
Setting parameters....................................................................749
Technical data...........................................................................749
Section 15 Metering.......................................................................751
Pulse counter logic (GGIO)............................................................751
Introduction................................................................................751
Principle of operation.................................................................751
Function block...........................................................................753
Input and output signals............................................................753
Setting parameters....................................................................754
Technical data...........................................................................754
Energy metering and demand handling (MMTR)...........................755
Introduction................................................................................755
Principle of operation.................................................................755
Function block...........................................................................756
Input and output signals............................................................756
Setting parameters....................................................................757
Principle of operation............................................................762
Function block......................................................................762
Input and output signals.......................................................762
Setting parameters...............................................................762
Setting parameters....................................................................763
Technical data...........................................................................763
LON communication protocol.........................................................764
Introduction................................................................................764
Principle of operation.................................................................764
Setting parameters....................................................................782
Technical data...........................................................................783
SPA communication protocol.........................................................783
Introduction................................................................................783
Principle of operation.................................................................783
Communication ports...........................................................791
Design.......................................................................................792
Setting parameters....................................................................792
Technical data...........................................................................793
IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol.....................................793
Introduction................................................................................793
Principle of operation.................................................................793
General.................................................................................793
Communication ports...........................................................803
Function block...........................................................................803
Input and output signals............................................................805
Setting parameters....................................................................810
Technical data...........................................................................814
Automation bits (AUBI)...................................................................814
Introduction................................................................................814
Principle of operation.................................................................814
Function block...........................................................................815
Input and output signals............................................................815
Setting parameters....................................................................816
Single command, 16 signals (CD)..................................................831
Introduction................................................................................831
Principle of operation.................................................................832
Function block...........................................................................832
Input and output signals............................................................832
Setting parameters....................................................................833
Multiple command (CM) and Multiple transmit (MT).......................833
Introduction................................................................................833
Principle of operation.................................................................834
Design.......................................................................................834
General.................................................................................834
Function block...........................................................................834
Input and output signals............................................................835
Setting parameters....................................................................837
Section 18 Hardware......................................................................847
Overview.........................................................................................847
Variants of case- and HMI display size.....................................847
Case from the rear side.............................................................849
Hardware modules.........................................................................854
Overview....................................................................................854
Combined backplane module (CBM).........................................855
Introduction...........................................................................855
Functionality.........................................................................855
Design..................................................................................856
Universal backplane module (UBM)..........................................858
Introduction...........................................................................858
Functionality.........................................................................858
Design..................................................................................858
Power supply module (PSM).....................................................860
Introduction...........................................................................860
Design..................................................................................860
Technical data......................................................................861
Numeric processing module (NUM)..........................................861
Introduction...........................................................................861
Functionality.........................................................................862
Block diagram.......................................................................863
Local human-machine interface (LHMI)....................................863
Transformer input module (TRM)..............................................863
Introduction...........................................................................863
Design..................................................................................864
Technical data......................................................................864
Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization
(ADM) .......................................................................................865
Introduction...........................................................................865
Design..................................................................................865
Section 19 Labels...........................................................................917
Different labels................................................................................917
Section 22 Glossary.......................................................................959
Glossary.........................................................................................959
Section 1 Introduction
en06000097.vsd
The Operator’s Manual (OM) contains instructions on how to operate the protection
IED during normal service once it has been commissioned. The operator’s manual
can be used to find out how to handle disturbances or how to view calculated and
measured network data in order to determine the cause of a fault.
The IED 670 Engineering guide (EG) contains instructions on how to engineer the
IED 670 products. The manual guides to use the different tool components for IED
670 engineering. It also guides how to handle the tool component available to read
disturbance files from the IEDs on the basis of the IEC 61850 definitions. The third
part is an introduction about the diagnostic tool components available for IED 670
products and the PCM 600 tool.
The IEC 61850 Station Engineering guide contains descriptions of IEC 61850
station engineering and process signal routing. The manual presents the PCM 600
and CCT tool used for station engineering. It describes the IEC 61850 attribute editor
and how to set up projects and communication.
1.1.3.1 Introduction
Describes how the function works, presents a general background to algorithms and
measurement techniques. Logic diagrams are used to illustrate functionality.
Logic diagrams
Logic diagrams describe the signal logic inside the function block and are bordered
by dashed lines.
Signal names
Input and output logic signals consist of two groups of letters separated by two dashes.
The first group consists of up to four letters and presents the abbreviated name for
the corresponding function. The second group presents the functionality of the
particular signal. According to this explanation, the meaning of the signal BLKTR in
figure 4 is as follows:
• BLKTR informs the user that the signal will BLOCK the TRIP command from
the under-voltage function, when its value is a logical one (1).
Input signals are always on the left hand side, and output signals on the right hand
side. Settings are not displayed.
Input and output signals can be configured using the CAP531 tool. They can be
connected to the inputs and outputs of other functions and to binary inputs and outputs.
Examples of input signals are BLKTR, BLOCK and VTSU. Examples output signals
are TRIP, START, STL1, STL2, STL3.
Setting parameters
Signals in frames with a shaded area on their right hand side represent setting
parameter signals. These parameters can only be set via the PST or LHMI. Their
values are high (1) only when the corresponding setting parameter is set to the
symbolic value specified within the frame. Example is the signal Block TUV=Yes.
Their logical values correspond automatically to the selected setting value.
Internal signals
Internal signals are illustrated graphically and end approximately. 2 mm from the
frame edge. If an internal signal path cannot be drawn with a continuous line, the
suffix -int is added to the signal name to indicate where the signal starts and continues,
see figure 3.
BLKTR
TEST
TEST
&
Block TUV=Yes BLOCK-int.
>1
BLOCK
VTSU
BLOCK-int.
&
STUL1N
BLOCK-int.
& >1 & TRIP
t
STUL2N
BLOCK-int.
START
&
STUL3N
STL1
STL2
STL3
xx04000375.vsd
External signals
Signal paths that extend beyond the logic diagram and continue in another diagram
have the suffix “-cont.”, see figure 2 and figure 3.
STZMPP-cont.
>1
STCND
& STNDL1L2-cont.
1L1L2
STNDL2L3-cont.
&
1L2L3
& STNDL3L1-cont.
1L3L1
& STNDL1N-cont.
1L1N
& STNDL2N-cont.
1L2N
STNDL3N-cont.
&
1L3N
>1 STNDPE-cont.
>1
1--VTSZ 1--STND
>1 &
1--BLOCK
BLK-cont.
xx04000376.vsd
STNDL1N-cont.
>1
STNDL2N-cont. 15 ms
& t STL1
STNDL3N-cont.
STNDL1L2-cont. >1 15 ms
& t STL2
STNDL2L3-cont.
15 ms
STNDL3L1-cont. & t STL3
>1
15 ms
& t START
>1
BLK-cont.
xx04000377.vsd
Input and output signals are presented in two separate tables. Each table consists of
two columns. The first column contains the name of the signal and the second column
contains the description of the signal.
Input signals are always on the left hand side, and output signals on the right hand
side. Settings are not displayed. Special kinds of settings are sometimes available.
These are supposed to be connected to constants in the configuration scheme, and are
therefore depicted as inputs. Such signals will be found in the signal list but described
in the settings table.
IEC 61850 - 8 -1
CAP531 Name Logical Node
Inputs TUV1-
PH2PUVM
U3P TRIP
BLOCK TR1
BLKTR1 TR1L1
BLKST1 TR1L2
BLKTR2 TR1L3
Outputs
BLKST2 TR2
TR2L1
TR2L2
TR2L3
START
ST1
ST1L1
ST1L2
ST1L3
ST2 Diagram
ST2L1 Number
ST2L2
ST2L3
en05000330.vsd
These are presented in tables and include all parameters associated with the function
in question.
The technical data section provides specific technical information about the function
or hardware described.
Requirements
The system engineer must have a thorough knowledge of protection systems,
protection equipment, protection functions and the configured functional logics in
the protective devices. The installation and commissioning personnel must have a
basic knowledge in the handling electronic equipment.
The local human machine interface is available in a small, and a medium sized
model. The principle difference between the two is the size of the LCD. The small
size LCD can display seven line of text and the medium size LCD can display the
single line diagram with up to 15 objects on each page.
The local human machine interface is equipped with an LCD that can display the
single line diagram with up to 15 objects.
The local human-machine interface is simple and easy to understand – the whole front
plate is divided into zones, each of them with a well-defined functionality:
2.2.1 Introduction
The small sized HMI is available for 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 x 19” case. The LCD on the
small HMI measures 32 x 90 mm and displays 7 lines with up to 40 characters per
line. The first line displays the product name and the last line displays date and time.
The remaining 5 lines are dynamic. This LCD has no graphic display potential.
2.2.2 Design
The LHMI is identical for both the 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 cases. The different parts of the
small LHMI is shown in figure 7
1 2 3
en05000055.eps
8 7
3 Indication LEDs
4 Label
5 Local/Remote LEDs
6 RJ 45 port
7 Communication indication LED
8 Keypad
2.3.1 Introduction
The 1/2, 3/4 and 1/1 x 19” cases can be equipped with the medium size LCD. This is
a fully graphical monochrome LCD which measures 120 x 90 mm. It has 28 lines
with up to 40 characters per line. To display the single line diagram, this LCD is
required.
2.3.2 Design
The different parts of the medium size LHMI is shown in figure 8The LHMI, exists
in an IEC version and in an ANSI version. The difference is on the keypad operation
buttons and the yellow LED designation.
1 2 3
en05000056.eps
8 7
2.4 Keypad
The keypad is used to monitor and operate the IED. The keypad has the same look
and feel in all IEDs in the IED 670 series. LCD screens and other details may differ
but the way the keys function is identical. The keypad is illustrated in figure 9.
The keys used to operate the IED are described below in table 1.
The help key brings up two submenus. Key operation and IED information.
Opens the main menu, and used to move to the default screen.
The Local/Remote key is used to set the IED in local or remote control mode.
The E key starts editing mode and confirms setting changes when in editing mode.
The right arrow key navigates forward between screens and moves right in editing mode.
Key Function
The left arrow key navigates backwards between screens and moves left in editing mode.
The up arrow key is used to move up in the single line diagram and in menu tree.
The down arrow key is used to move down in the single line diagram and in menu tree.
2.5 LED
2.5.1 Introduction
The LED module is a unidirectional means of communicating. This means that events
may occur that activate a LED in order to draw the operators attention to something
that has occurred and needs some sort of action.
There are alarm indication LEDs and hardware associated LEDs on the right hand
side of the front panel. The alarm LEDs are found to the right of the LCD screen.
They can show steady or flashing light. Flashing would normally indicate an alarm.
The alarm LEDs are configurable using the PCM 600 tool. This is because they are
dependent on the binary input logic and can therefore not be configured locally on
the HMI. Some typical alarm examples follow:
The RJ45 port has a yellow LED indicating that communication has been established
between the IED and a computer.
The Local/Remote key on the front panel has two LEDs indicating whether local or
remote control of the IED is active.
2.6.1 Introduction
The adaptation of the LHMI to the application and user preferences is made with:
2.6.3.1 Design
The function block LHMI (LocalHMI) controls and supplies information about the
status of the status indication LEDs. The input and output signals of LHMI are
configured with the PCM 600 tool.
The function block can be used if any of the signals are required in a configuration
logic.
See section "Status indication LEDs" for information about the LEDs.
en05000773.vsd
Signal Description
YELLOW-F Yellow LED on the LCD-HMI is flashing
CLRPULSE A pulse is provided when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are
cleared
LEDSCLRD Active when the LEDs on the LCD-HMI are not active
2.6.4.1 Introduction
The function block HLED (LEDMonitor) controls and supplies information about
the status of the indication LEDs. The input and output signals of HLED are
configured with the PCM 600 tool. The input signal for each LED is selected
individually with the PCM 600 Signal Matrix Tool (SMT). LEDs (number 1–6) for
trip indications are red and LEDs (number 7–15) for start indications are yellow.
Each indication LED on the LHMI can be set individually to operate in six different
sequences; two as follow type and four as latch type. Two of the latching sequence
types are intended to be used as a protection indication system, either in collecting or
restarting mode, with reset functionality. The other two are intended to be used as
signalling system in collecting (coll) mode with an acknowledgment functionality.
The light from the LEDs can be steady (-S) or flickering (-F). For details, refer to
Technical reference manual.
2.6.4.2 Design
The information on the LEDs is stored at loss of the auxiliary power to the IED in
some of the modes of the HLED. The latest LED picture appears immediately after
the IED is successfully restarted.
Operating modes
• Collecting mode
• LEDs which are used in collecting mode of operation are accumulated
continuously until the unit is acknowledged manually. This mode is
suitable when the LEDs are used as a simplified alarm system.
• Re-starting mode
• In the re-starting mode of operation each new start resets all previous active
LEDs and activates only those which appear during one disturbance. Only
LEDs defined for re-starting mode with the latched sequence type 6
(LatchedReset-S) will initiate a reset and a restart at a new disturbance. A
disturbance is defined to end a settable time after the reset of the activated
input signals or when the maximum time limit has elapsed.
Acknowledgment/reset
• From local HMI
• The active indications can be acknowledged/reset manually. Manual
acknowledgment and manual reset have the same meaning and is a
common signal for all the operating sequences and LEDs. The function is
positive edge triggered, not level triggered. The acknowledgment/reset is
performed via the Reset-button and menus on the LHMI. For details, refer
to the “Operators manual”.
• Automatic reset
• The automatic reset can only be performed for indications defined for re-
starting mode with the latched sequence type 6 (LatchedReset-S). When
the automatic reset of the LEDs has been performed, still persisting
indications will be indicated with a steady light.
Operating sequences
The sequences can be of type Follow or Latched. For the Follow type the LED follow
the input signal completely. For the Latched type each LED latches to the
corresponding input signal until it is reset.
The figures below show the function of available sequences selectable for each LED
separately. For sequence 1 and 2 (Follow type), the acknowledgment/reset function
is not applicable. Sequence 3 and 4 (Latched type with acknowledgement) are only
working in collecting mode. Sequence 5 is working according to Latched type and
collecting mode while sequence 6 is working according to Latched type and re-
starting mode. The letters S and F in the sequence names have the meaning S = Steady
and F = Flash.
At the activation of the input signal, the indication operates according to the selected
sequence diagrams below.
In the sequence diagrams the LEDs have the characteristics shown in figure 11.
en05000506.vsd
Sequence 1 (Follow-S)
This sequence follows all the time, with a steady light, the corresponding input
signals. It does not react on acknowledgment or reset. Every LED is independent of
the other LEDs in its operation.
Activating
signal
LED
en01000228.vsd
Sequence 2 (Follow-F)
This sequence is the same as sequence 1, Follow-S, but the LEDs are flashing instead
of showing steady light.
Sequence 3 (LatchedAck-F-S)
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. Every LED is
independent of the other LEDs in its operation. At the activation of the input signal,
the indication starts flashing. After acknowledgment the indication disappears if the
signal is not present any more. If the signal is still present after acknowledgment it
gets a steady light.
Activating
signal
LED
Acknow.
en01000231.vsd
Sequence 4 (LatchedAck-S-F)
This sequence has the same functionality as sequence 3, but steady and flashing light
have been alternated.
Sequence 5 (LatchedColl-S)
This sequence has a latched function and works in collecting mode. At the activation
of the input signal, the indication will light up with a steady light. The difference to
sequence 3 and 4 is that indications that are still activated will not be affected by the
reset i.e. immediately after the positive edge of the reset has been executed a new
reading and storing of active signals is performed. Every LED is independent of the
other LEDs in its operation.
Activating
signal
LED
Reset
en01000235.vsd
Sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S)
In this mode all activated LEDs, which are set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S), are
automatically reset at a new disturbance when activating any input signal for other
LEDs set to sequence 6 (LatchedReset-S). Also in this case indications that are still
activated will not be affected by manual reset, i.e. immediately after the positive edge
of that the manual reset has been executed a new reading and storing of active signals
is performed. LEDs set for sequence 6 are completely independent in its operation of
LEDs set for other sequences.
Definition of a disturbance
A disturbance is defined to last from the first LED set as LatchedReset-S is activated
until a settable time, tRestart, has elapsed after that all activating signals for the LEDs
set as LatchedReset-S have reset. However if all activating signals have reset and
some signal again becomes active before tRestart has elapsed, the tRestart timer does
not restart the timing sequence. A new disturbance start will be issued first when all
signals have reset after tRestart has elapsed. A diagram of this functionality is shown
in figure 15.
From
disturbance
length control ³1 New
per LED ³1 disturbance
set to
sequence 6
tRestart
& t
&
³1
³1
&
en01000237.vsd
In order not to have a lock-up of the indications in the case of a persisting signal each
LED is provided with a timer, tMax, after which time the influence on the definition
of a disturbance of that specific LED is inhibited. This functionality is shown i
diagram in figure 16.
Activating signal
To LED
To disturbance
AND
tMax length control
t
en05000507.vsd
Disturbance
t Restart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
en01000239.vsd
Figure 18 shows the timing diagram for a new indication after tRestart time has
elapsed.
Disturbance Disturbance
t Restart t Restart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
en01000240.vsd
Figure 19 shows the timing diagram when a new indication appears after the first one
has reset but before tRestart has elapsed.
Disturbance
t Restart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
en01000241.vsd
Disturbance
t Restart
Activating
signal 1
Activating
signal 2
LED 1
LED 2
Automatic
reset
Manual
reset
en01000242.vsd
en05000508.vsd
3.1.1 Introduction
In order to get correct measurement results as well as correct protection operations
the analog input channels must be configured and properly set. For power measuring
and all directional and differential functions the directions of the input currents must
be properly defined. The measuring and protection algorithms in IED 670 are using
primary system quantities and the set values are done in primary quantities as well.
Therefore it is extremely important to properly set the data about the connected current
and voltage transformers.
en05000456.vsd
The CT and VT ratio and the name on respective channel is done under General
settings/Analog module in the parameter settings tool PST.
The function blocks are not represented in the configuration tool. The
signals appear only in the SMT tool when a TRM is included in the
configuration with the function selector tool. In the SMT tool they can
be mapped to the desired virtual input (SMAI) of the IED670 and used
internally in the configuration.
Table 10: Basic general settings for the ANALOGIN9I3U (TC40-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint2 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec2 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim2 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint3 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec3 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim3 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint4 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec4 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim4 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint5 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec5 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim5 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
CTStarPoint6 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec6 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim6 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
Table continued on next page
Table 11: Basic general settings for the ANALOGIN6I6U (TD40-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
CTStarPoint1 FromObject - ToObject - ToObject= towards
ToObject protected object,
FromObject= the
opposite
CTsec1 1 - 10 1 1 A Rated CT secondary
current
CTprim1 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated CT primary
current
Table continued on next page
3.2 Authorization
To safeguard the interests of our customers, both the IED 670 and the tools that are
accessing the IED 670 are protected, subject of authorization handling. The concept
of authorization, as it is implemented in the IED 670 and the associated tools is based
on the following facts:
The IED users can be created, deleted and edited only with the User Management
Tool (UMT) within PCM 600. The user can only LogOn or LogOff on the LHMI of
the IED, there are no users, groups or functions that can be defined on the IED LHMI.
Figure 23: Right-clicking to get the User Management Tool – “IED Users”.
By left-clicking on the “IED Users” submenu, the tool will open in the right-side
panel:
By default, the IEDs are delivered so that users are not required to log on to operate
the IED. The default user is the SuperUser. Before doing any changes to the User
Management in the IED it is recommendable that the administrator uploads the Users
and Groups existent in the IED.
If situation requires so, one can restore the factory settings, overwriting all existing
settings in the User Management Tool database.
If the administrator marks the check box “User must logon to this IED”, then the
fields under the “User Management” tab are becoming accessible and one can add,
delete and edit users.
To add a new user, the administrator will press the button that is marked with a black
arrow, see figure 25 on the “User” subtab:
Upon pressing this button, a window will appear, enabling the administrator to enter
details about the user, assign an access password and (after pressing “Next” and
advancing to the next window) assign the user to a group:
Once the new user is created, it will appear in the list of users. Once in the list, there
are several operations that can be performed on the users, shown in figure 28
The “Group” subtab is displaying all the pre-defined groups and gives short details
of the permissions allowed to the members of a particular group:
It also allows the administrator to add another (already created) user to a group, in
the same way it could assign one more group to an user, on the “Users” subtab.
Finally, after the desired users are created and permissions assigned to them by means
of user groups, the whole list must be downloaded in the IED, in the same way as
from the other tools:
No. Description
1 Upload from IED
2 Download to IED
Once a user is created and downloaded into the IED, that user can perform a LogOn,
introducing the password assigned in the tool.
If there is no user created, an attempt to log on will cause the display to show a message
box saying: “No user defined!”
If one user leaves the IED without logging off, then after the timeout (set in Settings
\General Settings\HMI\Screen\ Display Timeout ) elapses, the IED will return to a
Guest state, when only reading is possible. The display time out is set to 60 minutes
at delivery.
If there are one or more users created with the UMT and downloaded into the IED,
then, when a user intentionally attempts a LogOn or when the user attempts to perform
an operation that is password protected, the LogOn window will appear
The cursor is focused on the “User identity” field, so upon pressing the “E” key, one
can change the user name, by browsing the list of users, with the “up” and “down”
arrows. After choosing the right user name, the user must press the “E” key again.
When it comes to password, upon pressing the “E” key, the following character will
show up: “$”. The user must scroll for every letter in the pasword. After all the letters
are introduced (passwords are case sensitive!) choose OK and press “E” key again.
3.3.1 Introduction
The self-supervision function listens and reacts to internal system events, generated
by the different built-in self-supervision elements. The internal events are saved in
an internal event list.
The self-supervision status can be monitored from the local HMI or a SMS/SCS
system.
Under the Diagnostics menu in the local HMI the present information from the self-
supervision function can be reviewed. The information can be found under
Diagnostics\Internal Events or Diagnostics\IED Status\General. Refer to the
“Installation and Commissioning manual” for a detailed list of supervision signals
that can be generated and displayed in the local HMI.
Some signals are available from the IES (IntErrorSign) function block. The signals
from this function block are sent as events to the station level of the control system.
The signals from the IES function block can also be connected to binary outputs for
signalization via output relays or they can be used as conditions for other functions
if required/desired.
Individual error signals from I/O modules can be obtained from respective module
in the Signal Matrix Tool. Error signals from time synchronization can be obtained
from the time synchronization block TIME.
Self supervision provides several status signals, that tells about the condition of the
IED. As they provide information about the internal life of the IED, they are also
called internal signals. The internal signals can be divided into two groups. One group
handles signals that are always present in the IED; standard signals. Another group
handles signals that are collected depending on the hardware configuration. The
standard signals are listed in table 12. The hardware dependent internal signals are
listed in table 13. Explanations of internal signals are listed in table 14.
The analog signals to the A/D converter is internally distributed into two different
converters, one with low amplification and one with high amplification, see figure
32.
Figure 32: Simplified drawing of A/D converter for the 600 platform.
The technique to split the analog input signal into two A/D converters with different
amplification makes it possible to supervise the incoming signals under normal
conditions where the signals from the two converters should be identical. An alarm
is given if the signals are out of the boundaries. Another benefit is that it improves
the dynamic performance of the A/D conversion.
When the signal is within measurable limits on both channels, a direct comparison
of the two channels can be performed. If the validation fails, the CPU will be informed
and an alarm will be given.
en04000392.vsd
Table 15: Output signals for the InternalSignal (IS---) function block
Signal Description
FAIL Internal fail
WARNING Internal warning
CPUFAIL CPU fail
CPUWARN CPU warning
TSYNCERR Time synchronization status
RTCERR Real time clock status
3.4.1 Introduction
Use the time synchronization source selector to select a common source of absolute
time for the IED when it is a part of a protection system. This makes comparison of
events and disturbance data between all IEDs in a SA system possible.
Time definitions
The error of a clock is the difference between the actual time of the clock, and the
time the clock is intended to have. The rate accuracy of a clock is normally called the
clock accuracy and means how much the error increases, i.e. how much the clock
gains or loses time. A disciplined clock is a clock that “knows” its own faults and
tries to compensate for them, i.e. a trained clock.
Synchronization principle
From a general point of view synchronization can be seen as a hierarchical structure.
A module is synchronized from a higher level and provides synchronization to lower
levels.
Syncronization from
a higher level
Module
Optional syncronization of
modules at a lower level
en05000206.vsd
The IED has a built-in Real Time Clock (RTC) with a resolution of one nanosecond.
The clock has a built-in calendar that handles leap years through 2098.
RTC at startup
At IED startup, the internal time is free running. If the RTC is still alive since the last
up time, the time in the IED will be quite accurate (may drift 35 ppm), but if the RTC
power has been lost during power off (will happen after 5 days), the IED time will
start at 1970-01-01. For more information, please refer to section "Time
synchronization startup procedure" and section "Example, binary synchronization".
thereafter set to the correct value. After the initial setting of the clock, one of three
things will happen with each of the coming synchronization messages, configured as
“fine”:
• If the synchronization message, that is similar to the other messages from its
origin has an offset compared to the internal time in the IED, the message is used
directly for synchronization, that is for adjusting the internal clock to obtain zero
offset at the next coming time message.
• If the synchronization message has an offset that is large compared to the other
messages, a “spike-filter” in the IED will remove this time-message.
• If the synchronization message has an offset that is large, and the following
message also has a large offset, the spike filter will not act and the offset in the
synchronization message will be compared to a threshold that defaults to 100
milliseconds. If the offset is more than the threshold, the IED is brought into a
safe state and the clock is thereafter set to the correct time. If the offset is lower
than the threshold, the clock will be adjusted with 1000 ppm until the offset is
removed. With an adjustment of 1000 ppm, it will take 100 seconds or 1.7
minutes to remove an offset of 100 milliseconds.
Synchronization messages configured as coarse will only be used for initial setting
of the time. After this has been done, the messages are checked against the internal
time and only an offset of more than 10 seconds will reset the time.
Rate accuracy
In the REx670 IED, the rate accuracy at cold start is about 100 ppm, but if the IED
is synchronized for a while, the rate accuracy will be approximately 1 ppm if the
surrounding temperature is constant. Normally it will take 20 minutes to reach full
accuracy.
Three main alternatives of external time synchronization are available. Either the
synchronization message is applied via any of the communication ports of the IED
as a telegram message including date and time or as a minute pulse, connected to a
binary input, or via GPS. The minute pulse is used to fine tune already existing time
in the IEDs.
properly, there must be a SNTP-server present, preferably in the same station. The
SNTP synchronization provides an accuracy that will give 1 ms accuracy for binary
inputs. The IED itself can be set as a SNTP-time server.
• Coarse message is sent every minute and comprises complete date and time, i.e.
year, month, day, hours, minutes, seconds and milliseconds.
• Fine message is sent every second and comprises only seconds and milliseconds.
IEC60870-5-103 is not used to synchronize the relay, but instead the offset between
the local time in the relay and the time received from 103 is added to all times (in
events and so on) sent via 103. In this way the relay acts as it is synchronized from
various 103 sessions at the same time. Actually, there is a “local” time for each 103
session.
The minute pulse is connected to any channel on any Binary Input Module in the IED.
The electrical characteristic is thereby the same as for any other binary input.
The definition of a minute pulse is that it occurs one minute after the last pulse. As
only the flanks are detected, the flank of the minute pulse shall occur one minute after
the last flank.
Pulse data:
en05000251.vsd
The default time-out-time for a minute pulse is two minutes, and if no valid minute
pulse is received within two minutes a SYNCERR will be given.
If contact bounces occurs, only the first pulse will be detected as a minute pulse. The
next minute pulse will be registered first 60 s - 50 ms after the last contact bounce.
If the minute pulses are perfect, e.g. it is exactly 60 seconds between the pulses,
contact bounces might occur 49 ms after the actual minute pulse without effecting
the system. If contact bounces occurs more than 50 ms, e.g. it is less than 59950 ms
between the two most adjacent positive (or negative) flanks, the minute pulse will
not be accepted.
fourth minute pulse will occur on a minute border. After the first three minutes, the
time in the IED will be good if the coarse time is set properly via the HMI or the RTC
backup still keeps the time since last up-time. If the minute pulse is removed for
instance for an hour, the internal time will drift by maximum the error rate in the
internal clock. If the minute pulse is returned, the first pulse automatically is rejected.
The second pulse will possibly be rejected due to the spike filter. The third pulse will
either synchronize the time, if the time offset is more than 100 ms, or adjust the time,
if the time offset is small enough. If the time is set, the application will be brought to
a safe state before the time is set. If the time is adjusted, the time will reach its
destination within 1.7 minutes.
The DNP3.0 communication can be the source for the course time synchronization,
while the fine time synchronization needs a source with higher accuracy.
The IRIG interface to the IED supplies two possible synchronization methods, IRIG-
B and PPS.
IRIG-B
IRIG-B is a protocol used only for time synchronization. A clock can provide local
time of the year in this format. The “B” in IRIG-B states that 100 bits per second are
transmitted, and the message is sent every second. After IRIG-B there is a number of
figures stating if and how the signal is modulated and the information transmitted.
To receive IRIG-B there are two connectors in the IRIG module, one galvanic BNC
connector and one optical ST connector. IRIG-B 12x messages can be supplied via
the galvanic interface, and IRIG-B 00x messages can be supplied via either the
galvanic interface or the optical interface, where x (in 00x or 12x) means a figure in
the range 1-7.
“00” means that a base band is used, and the information can be fed into the IRIG-B
module via the BNC contact or an optical fiber. “12” means that a 1 kHz modulation
is used. In this case the information must go into the module via the BNC connector.
The IRIG Module also takes care of IEEE1344 messages that are sent by many IRIG-
B clocks, as IRIG-B previously did not have any year information. IEE1344 is
compatible with IRIG-B and contains year information and information of time-zone.
It is recommended to use IEEE 1344 for supplying time information to the IRIG
module. In this case, also send the local time in the messages, as this local time plus
the TZ Offset supplied in the message equals UTC at all times.
PPS
An optical PPS signal can be supplied to the optical interface of the IRIG module.
The PPS signal is a transition from dark to light, that occurs 1 second +- 2 us after
another PPS signal. The allowed jitter of 2 us is settable.
en05000425.vsd
Table 17: Output signals for the TIME (TIME-) function block
Signal Description
TSYNCERR Time synchronization error
RTCERR Real time clock error
Table 18: Basic general settings for the TimeSynch (TSYN-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
CoarseSyncSrc Off - Off - Coarse time
SPA synchronization
LON source
SNTP
FineSyncSource Off - Off - Fine time
SPA synchronization
LON source
BIN
GPS
GPS+SPA
GPS+LON
GPS+BIN
SNTP
GPS+SNTP
SyncMaster Off - Off - Activate IEDas
SNTP-Server synchronization
master
TimeAdjustRate Slow - Fast - Adjust rate for time
Fast synchronization
Table 19: Basic general settings for the TimeSynch (TSYN-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
CoarseSyncSrc Off - Off - Coarse time
SPA synchronization
LON source
SNTP
DNP
FineSyncSource Off - Off - Fine time
SPA synchronization
LON source
BIN
GPS
GPS+SPA
GPS+LON
GPS+BIN
SNTP
GPS+SNTP
IRIG-B
GPS+IRIG-B
PPS
SyncMaster Off - Off - Activate IEDas
SNTP-Server synchronization
master
TimeAdjustRate Slow - Slow - Adjust rate for time
Fast synchronization
Table 25: Basic general settings for the TimeSynchIRIGB (TIRI-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
SynchType BNC - Opto - Type of
Opto synchronization
TimeDomain LocalTime - LocalTime - Time domain
UTC
Encoding IRIG-B - IRIG-B - Type of encoding
1344
1344TZ
TimeZoneAs1344 MinusTZ - PlusTZ - Time zone as in 1344
PlusTZ standard
3.5.1 Introduction
Use the six sets of settings to optimize IED operation for different system conditions.
By creating and switching between fine tuned setting sets, either from the human-
machine interface or configurable binary inputs, results in a highly adaptable IED
that can cope with a variety of system scenarios.
A setting group is selected by using the local HMI, from a front connected personal
computer, remotely from the station control or station monitoring system or by
activating the corresponding input to the ACGR function block.
Each input of the function block can be configured to connect to any of the binary
inputs in the IED. To do this the PCM 600 configuration tool must be used.
The external control signals are used for activating a suitable setting group when
adaptive functionality is necessary. Input signals that should activate setting groups
must be either permanent or a pulse exceeding 400 ms.
More than one input may be activated at the same time. In such cases the lower order
setting group has priority. This means that if for example both group four and group
two are set to activate, group two will be the one activated.
Every time the active group is changed, the output signal SETCHGD is sending a
pulse.
The parameter MAXSETGR defines the maximum number of setting groups in use to
switch between.
The above example also includes seven output signals, for confirmation of which
group that is active.
The SGC function block has an input where the number of setting groups used is
defined. Switching can only be done within that number of groups. The number of
setting groups selected to be used will be filtered so only the setting groups used will
be shown on the PST setting tool.
ACGR-
ActiveGroup
ACTGRP1 GRP1
ACTGRP2 GRP2
ACTGRP3 GRP3
ACTGRP4 GRP4
ACTGRP5 GRP5
ACTGRP6 GRP6
SETCHGD
en05000433.vsd
SGC--
NoOfSetGrp
MAXSETGR
en05000716.vsd
Table 27: Input signals for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function block
Signal Description
ACTGRP1 Selects setting group 1 as active
ACTGRP2 Selects setting group 2 as active
ACTGRP3 Selects setting group 3 as active
ACTGRP4 Selects setting group 4 as active
ACTGRP5 Selects setting group 5 as active
ACTGRP6 Selects setting group 6 as active
Table 28: Output signals for the ActiveGroup (ACGR-) function block
Signal Description
GRP1 Setting group 1 is active
GRP2 Setting group 2 is active
GRP3 Setting group 3 is active
GRP4 Setting group 4 is active
GRP5 Setting group 5 is active
GRP6 Setting group 6 is active
SETCHGD Pulse when setting changed
3.6.1 Introduction
Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings
from the local HMI or PST. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test
mode. When leaving the test mode, i.e. entering normal mode, these blockings are
disabled and everything is set to normal operation. All testing will be done with
actually set and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus
mistakes are avoided.
While the IED is in test mode, the ACTIVE output of the function block TEST is
activated. The other two outputs of the function block TEST are showing which is
the generator of the “Test mode: On” state — input from configuration (OUTPUT
output activated) or setting from LHMI (SETTING output activated).
While the IED is in test mode, the yellow START LED will flash and all functions
are blocked. Any function can be de-blocked individually regarding functionality and
event signalling.
Most of the functions in the IED can individually be blocked by means of settings
from the local HMI. To enable these blockings the IED must be set in test mode (the
output ACTIVE in function block TEST is set to true), see example in figure 39.
When leaving the test mode, i.e. entering normal mode, these blockings are disabled
and everything is set to normal operation. All testing will be done with actually set
and configured values within the IED. No settings will be changed, thus no mistakes
are possible.
The blocked functions will still be blocked next time entering the test mode, if the
blockings were not reset.
The blocking of a function concerns all output signals from the actual function, so no
outputs will be activated.
The TEST function block might be used to automatically block functions when a test
handle is inserted in a test switch. A contact in the test switch (RTXP24 contact 29-30)
can supply a binary input which in turn is configured to the TEST function block.
Each of the protection functions includes the blocking from TEST function block. A
typical example from the undervoltage function is shown in figure 39.
The functions can also be blocked from sending events over IEC 61850 station bus
to prevent filling station and SCADA databases with test events e.g. during a
maintenance test.
U Disconnection
Normal voltage
U1<
U2<
tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1
tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min
IntBlkStVal2
Time
Block step 1
Block step 2
en05000466.vsd
en05000443.vsd
Table 31: Input signals for the Test (TEST-) function block
Signal Description
INPUT Sets terminal in test mode when active
Table 32: Output signals for the Test (TEST-) function block
Signal Description
ACTIVE Terminal in test mode when active
OUTPUT Test input is active
SETTING Test mode setting is (On) or not (Off)
NOEVENT Event disabled during testmode
Table 33: Basic general settings for the Test (TEST-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
TestMode Off - Off - Test mode in
On operation (On) or not
(Off)
EventDisable Off - Off - Event disable during
On testmode
CmdTestBit Off - Off - Command bit for test
On required or not during
testmode
3.7.1 Introduction
There are two functions that allow you to identify each IED individually:
ProductInformation function has seven pre-set, settings that are unchangeable but
nevertheless very important:
• IED Type
• ProductDef
• FirmwareVer
• IEDMainFunType
• SerialNo.
• Ordering No.
• ProductionDate.
Diagnostics/IED Status/ProductIdentifiers
They are very helpful in case of support process (such as repair or maintenance).
TerminalID function is allowing you to identify the individual IED in your system,
not only in the substation, but in a whole region or a country.
3.8.1 Introduction
The SMBI function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the Signal
Matrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the
“Application manual”, chapter “Engineering of the IED”). It represents the way
binary inputs are brought in for one IED 670 configuration.
en05000434.vsd
Table 35: Output signals for the SMBI (SI01-) function block
Signal Description
BI1 Binary input 1
BI2 Binary input 2
BI3 Binary input 3
BI4 Binary input 4
BI5 Binary input 5
BI6 Binary input 6
BI7 Binary input 7
BI8 Binary input 8
BI9 Binary input 9
BI10 Binary input 10
3.9.1 Introduction
The SMBO function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the
Signal Matrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the
“Application manual”, chapter “Engineering of the IED”). It represents the way
binary outputs are sent from one IED 670 configuration.
en05000439.vsd
Table 36: Input signals for the SMBO (SO01-) function block
Signal Description
BO1 Signal name for BO1 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO2 Signal name for BO2 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO3 Signal name for BO3 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO4 Signal name for BO4 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO5 Signal name for BO5 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO6 Signal name for BO6 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO7 Signal name for BO7 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO8 Signal name for BO8 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO9 Signal name for BO9 in Signal Matrix Tool
BO10 Signal name for BO10 in Signal Matrix Tool
3.10.1 Introduction
The SMMI function block is used within the CAP tool in direct relation with the
Signal Matrix Tool SMT (please see the overview of the engineering process in the
“Application manual”, chapter “Engineering of the IED”). It represents the way
milliamp (mA) inputs are brought in for one IED670 configuration.
The outputs on the SMMI are normally connected to the MVGGIO function block
for further use of the mA signals.
en05000440.vsd
Table 37: Output signals for the SMMI (SMI1-) function block
Signal Description
AI1 Analog milliampere input 1
AI2 Analog milliampere input 2
AI3 Analog milliampere input 3
AI4 Analog milliampere input 4
AI5 Analog milliampere input 5
AI6 Analog milliampere input 6
3.11.1 Introduction
The SMAI function block (or the pre-processing function block, as it is also known)
is used within the PCM 600 in direct relation with the Signal Matrix Tool SMT (please
see the overview of the engineering process in the “Application manual”, chapter
“Engineering of the IED”). It represents the way analog inputs are brought in for one
IED 670 configuration.
The output singal AI1 to AI4 are direct output of the in SMT connected input to AI1
to AI4. AIN is always the neutral current, calculated residual sum or the signal
connected to AI4. Note that function block will always calculate the residual sum of
current/voltage if the input is not connected in SMT. Applications with a few
exceptions (HEDIF, BBDIF) shall always be connected to AI3P.
PR01-
SMAI
BLOCK SYNCOUT
DFTSPFC SPFCOUT
GRPNAME AI3P
AI1NAME AI1
AI2NAME AI2
AI3NAME AI3
AI4NAME AI4
TYPE AIN
NOSMPLCY
en05000705.vsd
PR02-
SMAI
BLOCK AI3P
GRPNAME AI1
AI1NAME AI2
AI2NAME AI3
AI3NAME AI4
AI4NAME AIN
TYPE
en07000130.vsd
Table 38: Input signals for the SMAI (PR01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block group 1
DFTSYNC Synchronisation of DFT calculation
DFTSPFC Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT
calculation
Table 39: Output signals for the SMAI (PR01-) function block
Signal Description
SYNCOUT Synchronisation signal from internal DFT reference function
SPFCOUT Number of samples per fundamental cycle from internal DFT
reference function
AI3P Group 1 analog input 3-phase group
AI1 Group 1 analog input 1
AI2 Group 1 analog input 2
AI3 Group 1 analog input 3
AI4 Group 1 analog input 4
AIN Group 1 analog input residual for disturbance recorder
Table 40: Input signals for the SMAI (PR02-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block group 2
Table 41: Output signals for the SMAI (PR02-) function block
Signal Description
AI3P Group 2 analog input 3-phase group
AI1 Group 2 analog input 1
AI2 Group 2 analog input 2
AI3 Group 2 analog input 3
AI4 Group 2 analog input 4
AIN Group 2 analog input residual for disturbance recorder
Table 42: Basic general settings for the SMAI (PR01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
DFTRefExtOut InternalDFTRef - InternalDFTRef - DFT reference for
AdDFTRefCh1 external output
AdDFTRefCh2
AdDFTRefCh3
AdDFTRefCh4
AdDFTRefCh5
AdDFTRefCh6
AdDFTRefCh7
AdDFTRefCh8
AdDFTRefCh9
AdDFTRefCh10
AdDFTRefCh11
AdDFTRefCh12
External DFT ref
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - InternalDFTRef - DFT reference
AdDFTRefCh1
AdDFTRefCh2
AdDFTRefCh3
AdDFTRefCh4
AdDFTRefCh5
AdDFTRefCh6
AdDFTRefCh7
AdDFTRefCh8
AdDFTRefCh9
AdDFTRefCh10
AdDFTRefCh11
AdDFTRefCh12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - Ph-N - Input connection type
Ph-Ph
TYPE 1-2 1 1 Ch 1=Voltage,2=Current
Table 43: Advanced general settings for the SMAI (PR01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Negation Off - Off - Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 1 10 % Limit for frequency
calculation in % of
UBase
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base Voltage
Table 44: Basic general settings for the SMAI (PR02-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - InternalDFTRef - DFT reference
AdDFTRefCh1
AdDFTRefCh2
AdDFTRefCh3
AdDFTRefCh4
AdDFTRefCh5
AdDFTRefCh6
AdDFTRefCh7
AdDFTRefCh8
AdDFTRefCh9
AdDFTRefCh10
AdDFTRefCh11
AdDFTRefCh12
External DFT ref
ConnectionType Ph-N - Ph-N - Input connection type
Ph-Ph
TYPE 1-2 1 1 Ch 1=Voltage,2=Current
Table 45: Advanced general settings for the SMAI (PR02-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Negation Off - Off - Negation
NegateN
Negate3Ph
Negate3Ph+N
MinValFreqMeas 5 - 200 1 10 % Limit for frequency
calculation in % of
UBase
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base Voltage
3.12.1 Introduction
The SUM3Ph function block is used in order to get the sum of two sets of 3 ph analog
signals (of the same type) for those IED functions that might need it.
en05000441.vsd
Table 46: Input signals for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block
DFTSYNC Synchronisation of DFT calculation
DFTSPFC Number of samples per fundamental cycle used for DFT
calculation
G1AI3P Group 1 analog input 3-phase group
G2AI3P Group 2 analog input 3-phase group
Table 47: Output signals for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function block
Signal Description
AI3P Group analog input 3-phase group
AI1 Group 1 analog input
AI2 Group 2 analog input
AI3 Group 3 analog input
AI4 Group 4 analog input
Table 48: Basic general settings for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
SummationType Group1+Group2 - Group1+Group2 - Summation type
Group1-Group2
Group2-Group1
-
(Group1+Group2)
DFTReference InternalDFTRef - InternalDFTRef - DFT reference
AdDFTRefCh1
External DFT ref
Table 49: Advanced general settings for the Sum3Ph (SU01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
FreqMeasMinVal 5 - 200 1 10 % Amplitude limit for
frequency calculation
in % of Ubase
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage
3.13.1 Introduction
The AUTS function block (or the authority status function block) is an indication
function block, which informs about two events related to the IED and the user
authorization:
• the fact that at least one user has tried to log on wrongly into the IED and it was
blocked (the output USRBLKED)
• the fact that at least one user is logged on (the output LOGGEDON)
en06000503.vsd
Table 50: Output signals for the AuthStatus (AUTS-) function block
Signal Description
USRBLKED At least one user is blocked by invalid password
LOGGEDON At least one user is logged on
en07000047.vsd
Table 51: Input signals for the GooseBinRcv (GB01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of output signals
INSTNAME Instance name in Signal Matrix Tool
Table 52: Output signals for the GooseBinRcv (GB01-) function block
Signal Description
OUT1 Binary output 1
OUT1VAL Valid data on binary output 1
OUT2 Binary output 2
OUT2VAL Valid data on binary output 2
OUT3 Binary output 3
OUT3VAL Valid data on binary output 3
OUT4 Binary output 4
OUT4VAL Valid data on binary output 4
OUT5 Binary output 5
OUT5VAL Valid data on binary output 5
OUT6 Binary output 6
OUT6VAL Valid data on binary output 6
OUT7 Binary output 7
OUT7VAL Valid data on binary output 7
OUT8 Binary output 8
OUT8VAL Valid data on binary output 8
OUT9 Binary output 9
OUT9VAL Valid data on binary output 9
OUT10 Binary output 10
OUT10VAL Valid data on binary output 10
OUT11 Binary output 11
OUT11VAL Valid data on binary output 11
OUT12 Binary output 12
OUT12VAL Valid data on binary output 12
OUT13 Binary output 13
OUT13VAL Valid data on binary output 13
OUT14 Binary output 14
OUT14VAL Valid data on binary output 14
OUT15 Binary output 15
OUT15VAL Valid data on binary output 15
OUT16 Binary output 16
OUT16VAL Valid data on binary output 16
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
OUT1NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT2NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT3NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT4NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT5NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT6NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT7NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT8NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT9NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT10NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT11NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT12NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT13NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT14NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT15NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
OUT16NAM Signal name for reservation request in Signal Matrix Tool
Table 53: Basic general settings for the GooseBinRcv (GB01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off/On
On
4.1.1 Introduction
The high impedance differential protection can be used when the involved CT cores
have the same turn ratio and similar magnetizing characteristic. It utilizes an external
summation of the phases and neutral current and a series resistor and a voltage
dependent resistor externally to the relay.
The logic diagram see figure 49 shows the operation principles for the high impedance
differential protection function. It is a basically a simple one step relay with an
additional lower alarm level. The function can be totally blocked totally or only
tripping, can be blocked, by activating inputs from external signals.
en05000363.vsd
Table 54: Input signals for the HZPDIF_87 (HZD1-) function block
Signal Description
ISI Group signal for current input
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTR Block of trip
Table 55: Output signals for the HZPDIF_87 (HZD1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip signal
ALARM Alarm signal
MEASVOLT Measured RMS voltage on CT secondary side
Table 56: Basic parameter group settings for the HZPDIF_87 (HZD1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
U>Alarm 2 - 500 1 10 V Alarm voltage level in
volts on CT
secondary side
tAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Time delay to activate
alarm
U>Trip 5 - 900 1 100 V Operate voltage level
in volts on CT
secondary side
SeriesResistor 10 - 20000 1 250 ohm Value of series
resistor in Ohms
5.1.1 Introduction
The line distance protection is a five zone full scheme protection with three fault loops
for phase to phase faults and three fault loops for phase to earth fault for each of the
independent zones. Individual settings for each zone in resistive and reactive reach
gives flexibility for use onoverhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.
The function has a functionality for load encroachment which increases the possibility
to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines(see figure 51).
Forward
operation
Reverse
operation
en05000034.vsd
The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a
sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single phase auto-reclosing.
The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with
different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in
complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines etc.
The execution of the different fault loops within the IED670 are of full scheme type,
which means that each fault loop for phase to earth faults and phase to phase faults
for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.
Figure 52 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five,
impedance-measuring zones l.
en05000458.vsd
Figure 52: The different measuring loops at line-earth fault and phase-phase
fault.
The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one independent
distance protection relay with six measuring elements.
The distance measuring zone include six impedance measuring loops; three intended
for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as three-phase
faults.
The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-directional
impedance characteristics presented in figure 53 and figure 54. The phase-to-earth
characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase
characteristic presents the per-phase reach.
X0 - X1
Xn =
3
X1+Xn R0 - R1
Rn =
3
f N f N
R (Ohm/loop)
RFPE RFPE
X1+Xn
X (Ohm/phase)
2·X1
R (Ohm/phase)
RFPP RFPP
2·X1
The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in
figure 55. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault) resistive
reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.
ILn R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
UL1
element
Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1 RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)
0
IN (R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )
IL1 R1 + j X1 Phase-to-phase
UL1 element L1-L2
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase RFPP
L1-L2 IL2
UL2 (Arc resistance)
R1 + j X1
where:
n designates anyone of the three phases (1, 2 or 3) and
m represents the phase that is leading phase n with 120 degrees (i.e. 3, 1 or 2).
The R1 and jX1 in figure 55 represents the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The RFPE and RFPP is the eventual fault
resistance in the fault place.
Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 55, there is of course fault
current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration
merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.
The theoretical parameters p and q outline the area of operation in quadrant 1 when
varied from 0 to 1.0. That is, for any combination of p and q, where both are between
0 and 1.0, the corresponding impedance is within the reach of the characteristic.
X X X
R R R
en05000182.vsd
The operation of the distance measuring zone is blocked if the magnitude of input
currents fall below certain threshold values.
For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all
phase-to-earth loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase
currents.
ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. IN is the RMS value of the vector
sum of the three phase currents, i.e. residual current 3I0.
ILmLn is the RMS value of the vector difference between phase currents Lm and Ln.
Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The
calculation of the apparent impedances at ph-ph faults follows equation 1 (example
for a phase L1 to phase L2 fault).
UL1 – UL2
Zapp = -------------------------
I L1 – IL2
(Equation 1)
Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective
phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3)
U L1
Z app = ------------------------------
I L1 + I N × KN
(Equation 2)
Where:
UL1, IL1 and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN is defined as:
X0 - X1
KN =
3X1
where X0 and X1 is zero and positive sequence reactance from the measuring point
to the fault on the protected line.
Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in relay point. This results in the same
reach along the line for all types of faults.
The formula given in equation 3 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder applications.
When load is considered in the case of single line to earth fault, conventional distance
protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end. REx670
has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such applications.
Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter.
The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into
memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of
voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples (DI) are brought
from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.
The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to
the loop impedance according to equation 4,
X Di
U = R × i + ------ × -----
w 0 Dt
(Equation 4)
X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R × Re ( I ) + ------ × ------------------
w0 Dt
(Equation 5)
X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R × Im ( I ) + ------ × -----------------
w0 Dt
(Equation 6)
with
w0 = 2 × p × f 0
(Equation 7)
where:
Re designates the real component of current and voltage,
Im designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and
f0 designates the rated system frequency
The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real value
of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation
for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:
Im ( U ) × DRe ( I ) – Re ( U ) × D Im ( I )
R m = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) × Im ( I ) – D Im ( I ) × Re ( I )
(Equation 8)
Re ( U ) × Im ( I ) – Im ( U ) × Re ( I )
Xm = w 0 × Dt × -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) × Im ( I ) – DIm ( I ) × Re ( I )
(Equation 9)
The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set
zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping
results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive
voltage transformers or by other factors.
The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse
directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked
positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited
directional sensitivity for faults close to the relay point.
The evaluation of the directionality takes place in the function block ZD.
Equation 10 and equation 11 are used to classify that the fault is in forward direction
for line-to-earth fault and phase-phase fault.
For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is according to.
where:
ArgDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set
to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 115 degrees, see figure 57.
U1L1 is positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1
U1L1L2M is memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively.(see figure 57) and it should not be changed unless system studies have
shown the necessity.
The ZD gives a binary coded signal on the output STDIR depending on the evaluation
where STFWL1N=1 adds 1, STRVL1N=1 adds 2, STFWL2N=1 adds 4 etc.
ArgNegRes
ArgDir
R
en05000722.vsd
Figure 57: Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault
For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored.
• If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set terminal rated current IBase), the condition seals
in.
• If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
• If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in
the reverse direction remains in operation.
• If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets
until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.
The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from
the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the zone
measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition
separately. It is connected to the PHS function block output STCDZ.
The internal input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the
distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both
forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the relevant
signals on the STDIR input depending on the setting of the parameter
OperationDir. It shall be configured to the STDIR output on the ZD block.
Composition of the phase starting signals for a case, when the zone operates in a non-
directional mode, is presented in figure 59.
Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates
in directional (forward or reverse) mode, see figure 60.
STNDL1N
AND
DIRL1N
OR STZMPE.
&
STNDL2N
DIRL2N AND
STNDL3N 15 ms
OR STL1
& t
DIRL3N AND
STNDL1L2
DIRL1L2 AND 15 ms
OR STL2
& t
STNDL2L3
DIRL2L3 AND
15 ms
OR STL3
STNDL3L1 & t
DIRL3L1 AND
OR STZMPP
&
BLK
15 ms
OR START
& t
en05000778.vsd
Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented
in figure 61.
Figure 61: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one
ZM01-
ZMQPDIS_21
I3P TRIP
U3P TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
VTSZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND
en06000256.vsd
ZD01-
ZDRDIR
I3P STDIR
U3P
en05000681.vsd
Table 58: Input signals for the ZMQPDIS_21 (ZM01-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current input
U3P Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK Block of function
VTSZ Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR Blocks all trip outputs
STCND External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND External directional condition
Table 59: Output signals for the ZMQPDIS_21 (ZM01-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 Trip signal from phase L3
START General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 Start signal from phase L1
STL2 Start signal from phase L2
STL3 Start signal from phase L3
STND Non-directional start, issued from any phase or loop
Table 60: Input signals for the ZDRDIR (ZD01-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group connection
U3P Group connection
Table 61: Output signals for the ZDRDIR (ZD01-) function block
Signal Description
STDIR All start signals binary coded
Table 62: Basic parameter group settings for the ZMQPDIS_21 (ZM01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - On - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current, i.e.
rated current
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage, i.e.
rated voltage
OperationDir Off - Forward - Operation mode of
Non-directional directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
X1 0.10 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/p Positive sequence
reactance reach
R1 0.10 - 1000.00 0.01 5.00 ohm/p Positive seq.
resistance for zone
characteristic angle
X0 0.10 - 9000.00 0.01 100.00 ohm/p Zero sequence
reactance reach
R0 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 15.00 ohm/p Zero seq. resistance
for zone characteristic
angle
RFPP 1.00 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach in ohm/loop,
Ph-Ph
RFPE 1.00 - 9000.00 0.01 100.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach in ohm/loop,
Ph-E
OperationPP Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Phase-Phase
loops
Timer tPP Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Zone timer, Ph-
Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay of trip, Ph-
Ph
OperationPE Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Phase-Earth
loops
Timer tPE Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Zone timer, Ph-
E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay of trip, Ph-
E
IMinOpPP 10 - 30 1 20 %IB Minimum operate
delta current for
Phase-Phase loops
IMinOpPE 10 - 30 1 20 %IB Minimum operate
phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpIN 5 - 30 1 5 %IB Minimum operate
residual current for
Phase-Earth loops
Table 63: Basic parameter group settings for the ZMQAPDIS_21 (ZM02-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - On - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current, i.e.
rated current
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage, i.e.
rated voltage
OperationDir Off - Forward - Operation mode of
Non-directional directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
X1 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 40.00 ohm/p Positive sequence
reactance reach
R1 0.10 - 1000.00 0.01 5.00 ohm/p Positive seq.
resistance for zone
characteristic angle
X0 0.50 - 9000.00 0.01 120.00 ohm/p Zero sequence
reactance reach
R0 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 15.00 ohm/p Zero seq. resistance
for zone characteristic
angle
RFPP 1.00 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach in ohm/loop,
Ph-Ph
RFPE 1.00 - 9000.00 0.01 100.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach in ohm/loop,
Ph-E
OperationPP Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Phase-Phase
loops
Timer tPP Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Zone timer, Ph-
Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay of trip, Ph-
Ph
OperationPE Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Phase-Earth
loops
Timer tPE Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Zone timer, Ph-
E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay of trip, Ph-
E
IMinOpPP 10 - 30 1 20 %IB Minimum operate
delta current for
Phase-Phase loops
IMinOpPE 10 - 30 1 20 %IB Minimum operate
phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
Table 64: Parameter group settings for the ZDRDIR (ZD01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
ArgNegRes 90 - 175 1 115 Deg Angle to blinder in
second quadrant for
forward direction
ArgDir 5 - 45 1 15 Deg Angle to blinder in
fourth quadrant for
forward direction
IMinOp 1 - 99999 1 10 %IB Minimum operate
current in % of IBase
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base Current
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base Voltage
5.2.1 Introduction
The line distance protection is a five zone full scheme protection with three fault loops
for phase to phase faults and three fault loops for phase to earth fault for each of the
independent zones. Individual settings for each zone resistive and reactive reach gives
flexibility for use onoverhead lines and cables of different types and lengths.
The function has a functionality for load encroachment which increases the possibility
to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded linessee figure 51.
Forward
operation
Reverse
operation
en05000034.vsd
The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a
sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single phase auto-reclosing.
Built-in adaptive load compensation algorithm for the quadrilateral function prevents
overreaching of zone1 at load exporting end at phase to earth faults on heavily loaded
power lines.
The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with
different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in
complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines etc.
The execution of the different fault loops within the IED670 are of full scheme type,
which means that each fault loop for phase to earth faults and phase to phase faults
for forward and reverse faults are executed in parallel.
Figure 65 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five,
impedance-measuring zones.
en05000458.vsd
Figure 65: The different measuring loops at line-earth fault and phase-phase
fault.
The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compared to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. Each distance protection zone performs like one independent
distance protection relay with six measuring elements.
The distance measuring zone include six impedance measuring loops; three intended
for phase-to-earth faults, and three intended for phase-to-phase as well as three-phase
faults.
The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-directional
impedance characteristics presented in figure 66 and figure 67. The phase-to-earth
characteristic is illustrated with the full loop reach while the phase-to-phase
characteristic presents the per-phase reach.
X (Ohm/loop)
X 0PE - X 1RVPE
XNRV =XX00PE --
PG X31XRVPE
1RVPG
XNRV =
XNRV =
3 3
XX
X00
PE
0 PE
-X
PG --1X 11FWPE
XFWPE
FWPG
XNFW =
XNFW==
XNFW
X1FWPE+XNFW 3 33
jN jN
R (Ohm/loop)
RFRVE RFFWPE
X1RVPE+XNRV
X (Ohm/phase)
j j
R (Ohm/phase)
RFRVPP RFFWPP
2 2
X1RVPP
The fault loop reach with respect to each fault type may also be presented as in
figure 68. Note in particular the difference in definition regarding the (fault) resistive
reach for phase-to-phase faults and three-phase faults.
ILn R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
UL1
element
Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1 RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)
0
IN (R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 )
IL1 R1 + j X1 Phase-to-phase
UL1 element L1-L2
Phase-to-phase
fault in phase RFPP
L1-L2 IL2
UL2 (Arc resistance)
R1 + j X1
where:
n designates anyone of the three phases (1, 2 or 3) and
m represents the phase that is leading phase n with 120 degrees (i.e. 3, 1 or 2).
The R1 and jX1 in figure 68 represents the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The RFPE and RFPP is the eventual fault
resistance in the fault place.
Regarding the illustration of three-phase fault in figure 68, there is of course fault
current flowing also in the third phase during a three-phase fault. The illustration
merely reflects the loop measurement, which is made phase-to-phase.
X X X
R R R
en05000182.vsd
The operation of the distance measuring zone is blocked if the magnitude of input
currents fall below certain threshold values.
For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all
phase-to-earth loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase
currents.
ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. IN is the RMS value of the vector
sum of the three phase currents, i.e. residual current 3I0.
ILmLn is the RMS value of the vector difference between phase currents Lm and Ln.
Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits. The
calculation of the apparent impedances at ph-ph faults follows equation 12 (example
for a phase L1 to phase L2 fault).
UL1 – UL2
Zapp = -------------------------
I L1 – IL2
(Equation 12)
Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective
phase.
U L1
Z app = ------------------------------
I L1 + I N × KN
(Equation 13)
Where:
UL1, IL1 and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN is defined as:
X0 - X1
KN =
3X1
where X0 and X1 is zero and positive sequence reactance from the measuring point
to the fault on the protected line.
Here IN is a phasor of the residual current at the relay point. This results in the same
reach along the line for all types of faults.
The formula given in equation 14 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder applications.
When load is considered in the case of single line to earth fault, conventional distance
protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end. REx670
has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such applications.
Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter.
The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into
memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of
voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples (DI) are brought
from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.
The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to
the loop impedance according to equation 15,
X Di
U = R × i + ------ × -----
w 0 Dt
(Equation 15)
X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R × Re ( I ) + ------ × ------------------
w0 Dt
(Equation 16)
X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R × Im ( I ) + ------ × -----------------
w0 Dt
(Equation 17)
with
w0 = 2 × p × f 0
(Equation 18)
where:
Re designates the real component of current and voltage,
Im designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and
f0 designates the rated system frequency
The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real value
of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation
for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:
Im ( U ) × DRe ( I ) – Re ( U ) × D Im ( I )
R m = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) × Im ( I ) – D Im ( I ) × Re ( I )
(Equation 19)
Re ( U ) × Im ( I ) – Im ( U ) × Re ( I )
Xm = w 0 × Dt × -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) × Im ( I ) – DIm ( I ) × Re ( I )
(Equation 20)
The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set
zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping
results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive
voltage transformers or by other factors.
The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse
directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked
positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited
directional sensitivity for faults close to the relay point.
In the basic distance protection function, the control of the memory for polarizing
voltage is performed by an under voltage control. In case of series compensated line,
a voltage reversal can occur with a relatively high voltage also when the memory
must be locked. Thus, a simple undervoltage type of voltage memory control can not
be used in case of voltage reversal. In the option for series compensated network the
At a three phase fault when no positive sequence voltage remains (all three phases
are disconnected) the memory is used for direction polarization during 100 ms.
The memory predicts the phase of the positive sequence voltage with the pre-fault
frequency. This extrapolation is made with a high accuracy and it is not the accuracy
of the memory that limits the time the memory can be used. The network is at a three
phase fault under way to a new equilibrium and the post-fault condition can only be
predicted accurately for a limited time from the pre-fault condition.
In case of a three phase fault after 100 ms the phase of the memorized voltage can
not be relied upon and the directional measurement has to be blocked. The achieved
direction criteria are sealed-in when the directional measurement is blocked and kept
until the impedance fault criteria is reset (the direction is stored until the fault is
cleared).
This memory control allows in the time domain unlimited correct directional
measurement for all unsymmetrical faults also at voltage reversal. Only at three phase
fault within the range of the set impedance reach of the criteria for control of the
polarization voltage the memory has to be used and the measurement is limited to
100 ms and thereafter the direction is sealed-in. The special impedance measurement
to control the polarization voltage is set separately and has only to cover (with some
margin) the impedance to fault that can cause the voltage reversal.
The evaluation of the directionality takes place in the function block ZDS.
Equation 21 and equation 22 are used to classify that the fault is in forward direction
for line-to-earth fault and phase-phase fault.
U 1L1M
- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1
(Equation 21)
For the L1-L2 element, the equation in forward direction is according to.
U 1L1L 2 M
- ArgDir < arg < ArgNeg Re s
I L1L 2
(Equation 22)
where:
ArgDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set
to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 115 degrees, see figure 70.
U1L1L2M is memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively.(see figure 70) and it should not be changed unless system studies have
shown the necessity.
The ZDS gives a binary coded signal on the output STDIR depending on the
evaluation where STFWL1N=1 adds 1, STRVL1N=1 adds 2, STFWL2N=1 adds 4
etc.
ArgNegRes
ArgDir
R
en05000722.vsd
Figure 70: Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault
The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from
the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the zone
measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition
separately. It is connected to the PHS function block output STCDZ.
The internal input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the
distance measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both
forward and reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the relevant
signals on the STDIR input depending on the setting of the parameter
OperationDir. It shall be configured to the STDIR output on the ZDS block.
Composition of the phase starting signals for a case, when the zone operates in a non-
directional mode, is presented in figure 72.
Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates
in directional (forward or reverse) mode, see figure 73.
STNDL1N
AND
DIRL1N
OR STZMPE.
&
STNDL2N
DIRL2N AND
STNDL3N 15 ms
OR STL1
& t
DIRL3N AND
STNDL1L2
DIRL1L2 AND 15 ms
OR STL2
& t
STNDL2L3
DIRL2L3 AND
15 ms
OR STL3
STNDL3L1 & t
DIRL3L1 AND
OR STZMPP
&
BLK
15 ms
OR START
& t
en05000778.vsd
Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented
in figure 74.
Figure 74: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one
ZMC1-
ZMCPDIS_21
I3P TRIP
U3P TRL1
BLOCK TRL2
VTSZ TRL3
BLKTR START
STCND STL1
DIRCND STL2
STL3
STND
en07000036.vsd
ZDS1-
ZDSRDIR
I3P STFW
U3P STRV
STDIRCND
en07000035.vsd
Table 66: Input signals for the ZMCPDIS_21 (ZMC1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current input
U3P Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK Block of function
VTSZ Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR Blocks all trip outputs
STCND External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND External directional condition
Table 67: Output signals for the ZMCPDIS_21 (ZMC1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 Trip signal from phase L3
START General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 Start signal from phase L1
STL2 Start signal from phase L2
STL3 Start signal from phase L3
STND Non-directional start, issued from any phase or loop
Table 68: Input signals for the ZDSRDIR (ZDS1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group connection for current
U3P Group connection for voltage
Table 69: Output signals for the ZDSRDIR (ZDS1-) function block
Signal Description
STFW Start in forward direction
STRV Start in reverse direction
STDIRCND Binary coded directional information per measuring loop
Table 70: Basic parameter group settings for the ZMCPDIS_21 (ZMC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - On - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current, i.e.
rated current
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage, i.e.
rated voltage
OperationDir Off - Forward - Operation mode of
Non-directional directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
OperationPP Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Phase-Phase
loops
X1FwPP 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/p Positive sequence
reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, forward
R1PP 0.10 - 1000.00 0.01 5.00 ohm/p Positive seq.
resistance for
characteristic angle,
Ph-Ph
RFFwPP 1.00 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach, Ph-Ph, forward
X1RvPP 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/p Positive sequence
reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, reverse
RFRvPP 1.00 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
Timer tPP Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Zone timer, Ph-
Ph
tPP 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay of trip, Ph-
Ph
OperationPE Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Phase-Earth
loops
X1FwPE 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/p Positive sequence
reactance reach, Ph-
E, forward
R1PE 0.10 - 1000.00 0.01 5.00 ohm/p Positive seq.
resistance for
characteristic angle,
Ph-E
X0PE 0.50 - 9000.00 0.01 100.00 ohm/p Zero sequence
reactance reach, Ph-
E
R0PE 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 47.00 ohm/p Zero seq. resistance
for zone characteristic
angle, Ph-E
RFFwPE 1.00 - 9000.00 0.01 100.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach, Ph-E, forward
Table continued on next page
Table 71: Basic parameter group settings for the ZMCAPDIS_21 (ZMC2-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - On - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current, i.e.
rated current
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage, i.e.
rated voltage
OperationDir Off - Forward - Operation mode of
Non-directional directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
OperationPP Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Phase-Phase
loops
X1FwPP 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/p Positive sequence
reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, forward
R1PP 0.10 - 1000.00 0.01 5.00 ohm/p Positive seq.
resistance for
characteristic angle,
Ph-Ph
RFFwPP 1.00 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach, Ph-Ph, forward
X1RvPP 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/p Positive sequence
reactance reach, Ph-
Ph, reverse
RFRvPP 1.00 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
Table continued on next page
Table 72: Basic parameter group settings for the ZDSRDIR (ZDS1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
OperationSC NoSeriesComp - SeriesComp - Special directional
SeriesComp criteria for voltage
reversal
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base setting for
current level
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base setting for
voltage level
Table continued on next page
Table 73: Distance measuring zone, quadrilateral characteristic for series compensated lines
(PDIS, 21)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Number of zones 5 with selectable direction -
Minimum operate residual (5-30)% of Ibase -
current, zone 1
Minimum operate current, Ph-Ph (10-30)% of Ibase -
and Ph-E
Positive sequence reactance, (0.10-3000.00) Ω/phase ± 2.0% static accuracy
zone 1 ± 2.0 degrees static angular
accuracy
Positive sequence resistance, (0.50-3000.00) Ω/phase Conditions:
zone 2-5 Voltage range: (0.1-1.1) x Ur
Positive sequence resistance (0.10-1000.00) Ω/phase Current range: (0.5-30) x Ir
Angle: at 0 degrees and 85
Zero sequence reactance, zone 1 (0.10-9000.00) Ω/phase degrees
Zero sequence resistance, (0.50-9000.00) Ω/phase
zone 2-5
Zero sequence resistance (0.50-3000.00) Ω/phase
Fault resistance, Ph-E (1.00-9000.00) Ω/loop
Fault resistance, Ph-Ph (1.00-3000.00) Ω/loop
Dynamic overreach <5% at 85 degrees measured with -
CCVT’s and 0.5<SIR<30
Impedance zone timers (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Operate time 24 ms typically -
Reset ratio 105% typically -
Reset time 30 ms typically -
5.3.1 Introduction
The numerical mho line distance protection is a five zone full scheme protection for
back-up detection of short circuit and earth faults. The full scheme technique provides
back-up protection of power lines with high sensitivity and low requirement on
remote end communication. The fivezones have fully independent measuring and
settings which gives high flexibility for all types of lines.
The modern technical solution offers fast operating time down to ¾ cycles.
The IED can be used up to the highest voltage levels. It is suitable for the protection
of heavily loaded lines and multi-terminal lines where the requirement for tripping is
one, two- and/or three pole.
The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a
sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single phase auto-reclosing.
jX
Operation area
en07000117.vsd
The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with
different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in
complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines etc.
The integrated control and monitoring functions offers effective solutions for
operating and monitoring all types of transmission and sub transmission lines.
The execution of the different fault loops within the REx 6xx are of full scheme type,
which means that each fault loop for phase to earth faults and phase to phase faults
are executed in parallel.
The use of full scheme technique gives faster operation time compare to switched
schemes which mostly uses a start element to select correct voltages and current
depending on fault type. So each distance protection zone performs like one
independent distance protection relay with six measuring elements.
The distance function consists of five instances. Each instance can be selected to be
either forward or reverse with cross polarized mho characteristic alternatively self
polarized offset Mho characteristics with reverse offset. The operating characteristic
is in accordance to figure 78 below where zone5 is selected offset Mho.
jX X
Mho, zone4
Mho, zone3
Zs=0
Mho, zone2
R
Mho, zone1
Zs=Z1
Zs=2Z1
en06000400.vsd
Figure 78: Mho, offset Mho characteristic and the source impedance influence on the Mho characteristic
The mho characteristic has a dynamic expansion due to the source impedance. Instead
of crossing the origin as for the offset mho in the left figure 78, which is only valid
where the source impedance is zero, the crossing point is moved to the coordinates
of the negative source impedance given an expansion of the circle shown in the right
figure 78.
The polarisation quantities used for the mho circle is 100% memorized positive
sequence voltages. This will give a somewhat less dynamic expansion of the mho
circle during faults. However, if the source impedance is high, the dynamic expansion
of the mho circle might lower the security of the function too much with high loading
and mild power swing conditions.
The mho distance element has a load encroachment function which cut off a section
of the characteristic when enabled. The function is enabled by setting the setting
parameter LoadEnchMode to On. Enabling of the load encroachment function
increases the possibility to detect high resistive faults without interfering with the
load impedance. The algorithm for the load encroachment is located in the PHSM
function, where also the relevant settings can be found. Information about the load
encroachment from the PHS to the zone measurement is given in binary format to the
input signal LDCND.
Each impedance zone can be switched On and Off by the setting parameter
Operation.
Each zone can also be set to Non-directional, Forward or Reverse by setting the
parameter DirMode .
The operation for phase to earth and phase to phase fault can be individually switched
On and Off by the setting parameter OpModePE and OpModePP.
For critical applications such as for lines with high SIRs as well as CVTs, it is possible
to improve the security by setting the parameter ReachMode to Underreach. In this
mode the reach for faults close to the zone reach is reduced by 20% and the filtering
is also introduced to increase the accuracy in the measuring. If the ReachMode is set
to Overreach no reduction of the reach is introduced and no extra filtering introduced.
The latter setting is recommended for overreaching pilot zone, zone 2 or zone 3
elements and reverse zone where overreaching on transients is not a major issue either
because of less likelihood of overreach with higher settings or the fact that these
elements do not initiate tripping unconditionally.
The zone reach for phase to earth fault and phase to phase fault is set individually in
polar coordinates. The impedance is set by the parameters ZPE and ZPP and the
corresponding arguments by the parameters ZAngPE and ZAngPP.
Compensation for earth return path for faults involving earth is done by setting the
parameter KNMag and KNAng where KNMag is the magnitude of the earth return
path and KNAng is the difference of angles between KNMag and ZPE. KNMag and
KNAng are defined according to equation 23 and equation 24.
Z0-Z1
KNMag =
3 × Z1
(Equation 23)
æ Z0-Z1 ö
KNAng = ( ZAngPE ) - arg ç ÷
è 3 × Z1 ø (Equation 24)
Where:
Z0 is the complex zero sequence impedance of the line in ohm/phase
Z1 is the complex positive sequence impedance of the line in ohm/phase
ZAngP line angle of the positive line impedance
E
• activating of the input BLKHSIR blocks the instantaneous part of the algorithm
for high SIR values
• activating of the input BLKTRIP blocks all output signals
• activating the input BLKPE blocks the phase-to-earth fault loop outputs
• activating the input BLKPP blocks the phase-to-phase fault loop outputs
The activation of signal BLKZ can either be by external fuse failure function or from
the loss of voltage check in the Mho supervision logic (ZSMGAPC). In both cases
the output BLKZ in the Mho supervision logic shall be connected to the input BLKZ
in the Mho distance function block (ZMHODIS 21).
The input signal BLKZMTD is activated during some ms after fault has been detected
by the Mho supervision logic to avoid unwanted operations due to transients. It shall
be connected to the BLKZMTD output signal at the Mho supervision function.
At SIR values >10, the use of electronic CVT might cause overreach due to the built
in resonance circuit in the CVT which reduce the secondary voltage for a while. The
input BLKHSIR shall be connected to the output signal HSIR on the Mho supervision
logic for increasing of the filtering and high SIR values. This is valid only when
permissive underreach scheme is selected by setting ReachMode=Underreach.
Phase-to-phase fault
Mho
The plain Mho circle has the characteristic as figure 79The condition for deriving the
angle β is according to equation 25.
where:
the voltage vector difference between phases L1 and L2
U L1 L 2
ZPP the positive sequence impedance setting for phase to phase fault
Upol is the polarizing voltage
IL1L2·X
Ucomp = UL1L2 - IL1L2 • ZPP
IL1L2 • ZPP
ß
Upol
UL1L2
IL1L2·R
en07000109.vsd
Offset Mho
The characteristic for offset mho is a circle where two points on the circle are the
setting parameters ZPP and ZRevPP. The vector ZPP in the impedance plane has the
settable angle AngZPP and the angle for ZRevPP is AngZPP+180°.
The condition for operation at phase to phase fault is that the angle β between the two
compensated voltages Ucomp1 and Ucomp2 is greater or equal to 90° figure 80. The
angle will be 90° for fault location on the boundary of the circle.
æ U -IL1L2 × ZPP ö
b = arg ç ÷
è U-(-IL1L2 × ZRevPP) ø (Equation 28)
where:
U
ZRevPP = is the positive sequence impedance setting for phase to phase fault in
reverse direction
IL1L2jX
U
Ucomp2 = U = IF•ZF=UL1L2
IL1L2R
- IL1L2 • Z RevPP
en07000110.vsd
Figure 80: Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vectors for phase
L1 to L2 fault.
and
where
ArgDir is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant
ArgNegRes is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant
β is calculated according to equation 29
The directional information is brought to the mho distance measurement from the
mho directional element as binary coded information to the input DIRCND. See
chapter Mho directional element for information about the mho directionalety
element.
IL1L2jX
ZPP
UL1L2
ArgNegRes f
IL1L2
ArgDir
en07000111.vsd
Figure 81: Simplified offset mho characteristic in forward direction for phase
L1 to L2 fault.
and
The β is derived according to equation 29 for the mho circle and φ is the angle between
the voltage and current.
ZPP
ArgNegRes
ϕ
IL1L2
ArgDir R
UL1L2
ZRevPP
en06000469.eps
Phase-to-earth fault
Mho
The measuring of earth faults uses earth return compensation applied in a
conventional way. The compensation voltage is derived by considering the influence
from the earth return path.
For a earth fault in phase L1A, we can derive the compensation voltage Ucomp see
figure 83 as
where
Upol is the polarizing voltage (memorized UL1 for Phase L1 to earth fault)
(
Z1+ZN = Z 1 × 1 + KN )
Table continued on next page
where
Z1 positive sequence impedance of the line (Ohm/phase)
KN zero sequence compensator factor
The angle β between the Ucomp and the polarize voltage Upol for a L1 to earth fault
is
ë ( )
b = arg é U L1 - I L1 + IN × KN × ZPE ù - arg(Upol)
û (Equation 36)
where:
UL1 = phase voltage in faulty phase L1
KN Z0-Z1
= the setting parameter for the
3 × Z1 zero sequence
compensation consisting of
the magnitude KN and the
angle KNAng.
Upol = 100% of positive sequence memorized voltage UL1
It is to be noted that the angle KNAng is the difference angle between the positive
sequence impedance ZPE and the impedance ZN for the earth return path see figure
83
IL1·X KNAng
IL1·ZN
Ucomp
IL1• Zloop
IL1·ZPE
Upol
f
IL1 (Ref) IL1·R
en06000472.vsd
Figure 83: Simplified offset mho characteristic and vectordiagram for phase
L1 to earth fault.
Operation occurs if
90 £ b £ 270
(Equation 39)
Offset Mho
The characteristic for offset mho at earth fault is a circle containing the two vectors
from the origin ZPE and ZRevPE where ZPE and ZrevPE are the settting reach for
the positive sequence impedance in forward respective reverse direction. The vector
ZPE in the impedance plane has the settable angle AngZPE and the angle for ZRevPP
is AngZPE+180°
The condition for operation at phase to earth fault is that the angle β between the two
compensated voltages Ucomp1 and Ucomp2 is greater or equal to 90° see figure
84. The angle will be 90° for fault location on the boundary of the circle.
where
is the phase L1 phase voltage
U L1
IL1L 2 • jX
UL1
U comp2 = UL1 - (-IL1 • ZRevPE)
IL1L2 • R
- I L1 • Z Re vPe
en 06000465.vsd
IAB•jX
V comp1 = VA - IA • ZPE
IA • ZPE
VA
V comp2 = VA - (-IA • ZRevPE)
I AB • R
- IA • Z RevPe
en 06000465_ansi. vsd
Figure 84: Simplified offset mho characteristic and voltage vector for phase L1
to L2 fault.
Operation occurs if
90 £ b £ 270
(Equation 42)
where
ArgDir is the setting parameter for directional line in fourth quadrant
ArgNegRes is the setting parameter for directional line in second quadrant.
β is calculated according to equation 40
IL1 jX
UL1
ArgNegRes f
IL1 IL1·R
ArgDir
en 06000466.vsd
Figure 85: Simplified characteristic for offset mho in forward direction for L1 to
earth fault.
The conditions for operation of offset Mho in reverse direction for L1 to earth fault
will be 90<β<270 and 180°-Argdir<φ<ArgNegRes+180°.
The β is derived according to equation 40 for the offset Mho circle and φ is the angle
between the voltage and current.
ZPE
ArgNegRes
ϕ
IL1
ArgDir R
UL1
ZRevPE
en06000470.eps
ZPE
ArgNegRes
ϕ
IA
ArgDir R
VA
ZRevPE
en06000470_ansi.eps
Figure 86: Simplified characteristic for offset Mho in reverse direction for L1 to
earth fault.
en06000423.vsd
Table 74: Input signals for the ZMHPDIS_21 (ZMH1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Connection for current sample signals
U3P Connection for voltage sample signals
CURR_INP Connection for current signals
VOLT_INP Connection for voltage signals
POL_VOLT Connection for polarizing voltage
BLOCK Block of function
BLKZ Block due to fuse failure
BLKZMTD Block signal for blocking of time domaine function
BLKHSIR Blocks time domain function at high SIR
BLKTRIP Blocks all operate output signals
BLKPE Blocks phase-to-earth operation
BLKPP Blocks phase-to-phase operation
DIRCND External directional condition
STCND External start condition (loop enabler)
LDCND External load condition (loop enabler)
Table 75: Output signals for the ZMHPDIS_21 (ZMH1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip General
TRL1 Trip phase L1
TRL2 Trip phase L2
TRL3 Trip phase L3
TRPE Trip phase-to-earth
TRPP Trip phase-to-phase
START Start General
STL1 Start phase L1
STL2 Start phase L2
STL3 Start phase L3
STPE Start phase-to-earth
STPP Start phase-to-phase
Table 76: Basic parameter group settings for the ZMHPDIS_21 (ZMH1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - ON - Operation Off/On
ON
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage
DirMode Off - Forward - Direction mode
Offset
Forward
Reverse
LoadEnchMode Off - Off - Load enchroachment
ON mode Off/On
ReachMode OverReach - OverReach - Reach mode Over/
Underreach Underreach
OpModePE Off - ON - Operation mode Off /
ON On of Phase-Earth
loops
ZPE 0.005 - 3000.000 0.001 30.000 ohm/p Positive sequence
impedance setting for
Phase-Earth loop
ZAngPE 10 - 90 1 80 Deg Angle for positive
sequence line
impedance for Phase-
Earth loop
KN 0.00 - 3.00 0.01 0.80 - Magnitud of earth
return compensation
factor KN
Table continued on next page
Table 77: Advanced parameter group settings for the ZMHPDIS_21 (ZMH1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
OffsetMhoDir Non-directional - Non-directional - Direction mode for
Forward offset mho
Reverse
OpModetPE Off - ON - Operation mode Off /
ON On of Zone timer, Ph-
E
OpModetPP Off - ON - Operation mode Off /
ON On of Zone timer, Ph-
ph
Table 78: Basic parameter group settings for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base value for current
measurement
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base value for voltage
measurement
PilotMode Off - Off - Pilot mode Off/On
On
Zreach 0.1 - 3000.0 0.1 38.0 ohm Line impedance
IMinOp 10 - 30 1 20 %IB Minimum operating
current for SIR
measurement
Table 79: Advanced parameter group settings for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
DeltaI 0 - 200 1 10 %IB Current change level
in %IB for fault
inception detection
Delta3I0 0 - 200 1 10 %IB Zero seq current
change level in % of
IB
DeltaU 0 - 100 1 5 %UB Voltage change level
in %UB for fault
inception detection
Delta3U0 0 - 100 1 5 %UB Zero seq voltage
change level in % of
UB
SIRLevel 5 - 15 1 10 - Settable level for
source impedance
ratio
5.4.1 Introduction
The Mho impedance supervision logic includes features for fault inception detection
and high SIR detection. It also includes the functionality for loss of potential logic as
well as for the pilot channel blocking scheme.
The Mho Impedance Supervision logic can mainly be decomposed in two different
parts:
The aim for the fault inception detector is to very fast detect that a fault has occurred
on the system.
The fault inception detection detects instantaneous changes in any phase currents or
zero sequence current in combination with a change in the corresponding phase
voltage or zero sequence voltage. If the change of any phase current and
corresponding phase voltage or 3U0 and 3I0 exceeds the setting parameters DeltaI
and DeltaU respectively Delta3U0 and Delta3I0 and the input signal BLOCK is not
activated, the ouput signal FLTDET is activated indicating that a system fault has
occoured.
If the setting pilotMode is set to On in Blocking scheme and the fault inception
function has detected a system fault, a block signal BLKCHST will be issued and
send to remote end in order to block the overreaching zones. Different criteria has to
be fulfilled for sending the BLKCHST signal:
OR
If it is later detected that it was an internal fault that made the function issue the
BLKCHST signal, the function will issue a CHSTOP signal to unblock the remote
end. The criteria that have to be fulfilled for this are:
1. The function has to be in pilot mode, i.e. the setting parameter pilotMode has to
be set to On
2. The carrier send signal should be blocked, i.e. input signal BLOCKCS is On and,
3. A reverse fault should not have been detected while the carrier send signal was
not blocked, i.e.input signals REVSTART and BLOCKCS is not activated.
The function has a built in loss of voltage detection based on the evaluation of the
change in phase voltage or the change in zero sequence voltage (3U0). It operates if
the change in phase voltages exceeds the setting dULevel or 3U0 exceeds the setting
dU0Level.
If loss of voltage is detected, but not a fault inception, the distance protection function
will be blocked. This is also the case if a fuse failure is detected by the external fuse
failure function and activate the input FUSEFAIL. Those blocks are generated by
activating the output BLKZ, which shall be connected to the input BLKZ on the
distance Mho function block.
During fault inception a lot of transients will be developed which in turn might cause
the distance function to overreach. The Mho supervision logic will increase the
filtering during the most transient period of the fault. This is done by activating the
output BLKZMD, which shall be connected to the input BLKZMTD on mho distance
function block.
The SIR function calculates the SIR value as the source impedance divided by the
setting Zreach and activates the output signal HSIR if the calculated value for any of
the six basic shunt faults exceed the setting parameter SIRLevel.The HSIR signal is
intended to block the delta based mho impedance function.
en06000426.vsd
ZSM1-
ZSMGAPC
I3P BLKZMTD
V3P BLKCHST
BLOCK CHSTOP
REVSTART HSIR
BLOCKCS
CBOPEN
en06000426_ansi.vsd
Table 81: Input signals for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Three phase current samples and DFT magnitude
U3P Three phase phase-neutral voltage samples and DFT
magnitude
BLOCK Block of the function
REVSTART Indication of reverse start
BLOCKCS Blocks the blocking carrier signal to remote end
CBOPEN Indicates that the breaker is open
Table 82: Output signals for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function block
Signal Description
BLKZMTD Block signal for blocking of time domained mho
BLKCHST Blocking signal to remote end to block overreaching zone
CHSTOP Stops the blocking signal to remote end
HSIR Indication of source impedance ratio above set limit
Table 83: Basic parameter group settings for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base value for current
measurement
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base value for voltage
measurement
PilotMode Off - Off - Pilot mode Off/On
On
Zreach 0.1 - 3000.0 0.1 38.0 ohm Line impedance
IMinOp 10 - 30 1 20 %IB Minimum operating
current for SIR
measurement
Table 84: Advanced parameter group settings for the ZSMGAPC (ZSM1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
DeltaI 0 - 200 1 10 %IB Current change level
in %IB for fault
inception detection
Delta3I0 0 - 200 1 10 %IB Zero seq current
change level in % of
IB
DeltaU 0 - 100 1 5 %UB Voltage change level
in %UB for fault
inception detection
Delta3U0 0 - 100 1 5 %UB Zero seq voltage
change level in % of
UB
SIRLevel 5 - 15 1 10 - Settable level for
source impedance
ratio
5.5.1 Introduction
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability
limit. Due to environmental considerations the rate of expansion and reinforcement
of the power system is reduced e.g. difficulties to get permission to build new power
lines. The ability to accurately and reliable classify the different types of fault so that
single pole tripping and auto-reclosing can be used plays an important roll in this
matter. The phase selection function is designed to accurately select the proper fault
loop in the distance function dependent on the fault type.
The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may make
fault resistance coverage difficult to achieve. Therefore the function has a built in
algorithm for load encroachment, which gives the possibility to enlarge the resistive
setting of both the phase selection and the measuring zones without interfering with
the load.
The extensive output signals from the phase selection gives also important
information about faulty phase(s) which can be used for fault analysis.
The characteristic is basically non-directional, but the PHS function uses information
from the directional function block to discriminate whether the fault is in forward or
reverse. The directional lines are drawn as "line-dot-dot-line" in the figures below.
1. Residual current criteria, i.e. separation of faults with and without earth
connection
2. Regular quadrilateral impedance characteristic
3. Load encroachment characteristics is always active but can be switched off by
selecting a high setting.
X X X
60°
60° R
R R
60° 60°
en05000668.vsd
The setting of the load encroachment function may influence the total operating
characteristic, (for more information, refer to section "Load encroachment").
The input DIRCND contains binary coded information about the directional coming
from the directionality block. It shall be connected to the STDIR output on the ZD
block. This information is also transferred to the input DIRCND on the distance
measuring zones, i.e. the ZM block. The code built up for the directionality is as
follows:
STDIR= STFWL1*1+STFWL2*2+STFWL3*4+STFWL1L2*8+
+STFWL2L3*16+STFWL3L1*32+STRVL1*64+STRVL2*128+
+STRVL3*256+STRVL1L2*512+STRVL2L3*1024+STRVL3L1*2048
If the binary information is 1 then it will be considered that we have start in forward
direction in phase L1. If the binary code is 5 then we have start in forward direction
in phase L1 and L2 etc.
For a phase-to-earth fault, the measured impedance by PHS function will be according
to equation 43.
ULn
ZPHSn =
ILn
(Equation 43)
where:
n corresponds to the particular phase (n=1, 2 or 3)
The characteristic for the PHS function at phase to earth fault is according to
figure 90. The characteristic has a fixed angle for the resistive boundary in the first
quadrant of 60°.
The resistance RN and reactance XN is the impedance in the earth return path defined
according to equation 44 and equation 45.
R0 - R1
RN =
3
(Equation 44)
X 0 - X1
XN =
3
(Equation 45)
X (ohm/loop)
Kr·(X1+XN)
RFRvPE RFFwPE
X1+XN
60 deg
RFFwPE
RFRvPE R (Ohm/loop)
60 deg
X1
1
Kr =
tan(60 deg)
RFRvPE RFFwPE
Kr·(X1+XN)
en06000396.vsd
Figure 90: Characteristic of PHS for phase to earth fault (setting parameters in
italic), ohm/loop domain
Besides this, the 3I0 residual current must fulfil the conditions according to
equation 46 and equation 47.
3 × I 0 ³ 0.5 × IM in O p
(Equation 46)
3 × I0 ³ INReleasePE
------------------------------------ × Iphmax
100 (Equation 47)
where:
IMinOp is the minimum operation current for forward zones,
INReleasePE is the setting for the minimum residual current needed to enable operation in the ph-E
fault loops (in %) and
Iphmax is the maximum phase current in any of three phases.
For a phase-to-phase fault, the measured by the PHS function will be according to
equation 48.
ULm - ULn
ZPHS =
-2 × ILn
(Equation 48)
ULm is the leading phase voltage, ULn the lagging phase voltage and ILn the phase
current in the lagging phase n.
X (ohm/phase)
0.5·FRvPP 0.5·RFFwPP
Kr·X1
X1
0.5·RFFwPP
60 deg
R (ohm/phase)
60 deg
0.5·RFRvPP
X1
1
Kr =
tan(60 deg)
Kr·X1
0.5·RFRvPP 0.5·RFFwPP
en05000670.vsd
Figure 91: The operation characteristic for PHS at phase-to-phase fault (setting
parameters in Italic), ohm/phase domain
In the same way as the condition for phase-to-earth fault, there are current conditions
that have to be fulfilled in order to release the phase-to-phase loop. Those are
according to equation 49 or equation 50.
3I 0 < IN Re leasePE
(Equation 49)
where:
INRelease is 3I0 limit for releasing phase-to-earth measuring loops,
INBlockPP is 3I0 limit for blocking phase-to-phase measuring loop and
Iphmax is maximal magnitude of the phase currents.
The operation condition for three phase faults are the same as for phase-to-phase fault
i.e. equation 48, equation 49 and equation 50 are used to release the operation of the
function.
X (ohm/phase)
4 × X1
3
90 deg
0.5·RFFwPP·K3
X1·K3 4 × RFFwPP
6
R (ohm/phase)
0.5·RFRvPP·K3
K3 = 2 / sqrt(3)
30 deg
en05000671.vsd
Figure 92: The characteristic of PHS for three phase fault (setting parameters
in italic)
Each of the six measuring loops has its own load (encroachment) characteristic based
on the corresponding loop impedance. The load encroachment functionality is always
active, but can be switched off by selecting a high setting.
The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 93. As illustrated, the resistive
blinders are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the angle of the
sector is the same in all four quadrants.
RLdFw
ARGLd ARGLd
R
ARGLd ARGLd
RLdRv
en05000196.vsd
When STCNDI is selected the operation characteristic will be as the right illustration
in figure 94. The reach will in this case be limit by the minimum operation current
and the distance measuring zones.
X X
R R
STCNDZ STCNDI
en05000197.vsd
When the "phase selection" is set to operate together with a distance measuring zone
the resultant operate characteristic could look something like in figure 95. The figure
shows a distance measuring zone operating in forward direction. Thus, the operate
area is highlighted in black.
"Phase selection"
"quadrilateral" zone
Load encroachment
characteristic
Directional line
en05000673.vsd
X (ohm/phase)
Phase selection
”Quadrilateral” zone
R (ohm/phase)
en05000674.vsd
Figure 96: Operation characteristic for PHS in forward direction for three-phase
fault, ohm/phase domain
The operation of the PHS function is blocked if the magnitude of input currents falls
below certain threshold values.
The phase-to-earth loop Ln is blocked if ILn<IMinOpPE, where ILn is the RMS value
of the current in phase Ln.
Figure 97: Phase-to-phase and phase-to-earth operating conditions (residual current criteria)
en06000258.vsd
Table 85: Input signals for the FDPSPDIS_21 (PHS--) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current input
U3P Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK Block of function
DIRCND External directional condition
Table 86: Output signals for the FDPSPDIS_21 (PHS--) function block
Signal Description
STFWL1 Fault detected in phase L1 - forward direction
STFWL2 Fault detected in phase L2 - forward direction
STFWL3 Fault detected in phase L3 - forward direction
STFWPE Earth fault detected in forward direction
STRVL1 Fault detected in phase L1 - reverse direction
STRVL2 Fault detected in phase L2 - reverse direction
STRVL3 Fault detected in phase L3 - reverse direction
STRVPE Earth fault detected in reverse direction
STNDL1 Non directional start in L1
STNDL2 Non directional start in L2
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
STNDL3 Non directional start in L3
STNDPE Non directional start, phase-earth
STFW1PH Start in forward direction for single-phase fault
STFW2PH Start in forward direction for two- phase fault
STFW3PH Start in forward direction for thre-phase fault
STPE Current conditions release of phase-earth measuring
elements
STPP Current conditions release of phase-phase measuring
elements
STCNDZ Start condition (PHS,LE and I based)
STCNDI Start condition (LE and I based)
Table 87: Basic parameter group settings for the FDPSPDIS_21 (PHS--) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current for
current settings
INBlockPP 10 - 100 1 40 %IPh 3I0 limit for blocking
phase-to-phase
measuring loops
INReleasePE 10 - 100 1 20 %IPh 3I0 limit for releasing
phase-to-earth
measuring loops
RLdFw 1.00 - 3000.00 0.01 80.00 ohm/p Forward resistive
reach within the load
impedance area
RLdRv 1.00 - 3000.00 0.01 80.00 ohm/p Reverse resistive
reach within the load
impedance area
ArgLd 5 - 70 1 30 Deg Load angle
determining the load
impedance area
X1 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 40.00 ohm/p Positive sequence
reactance reach
X0 0.50 - 9000.00 0.01 120.00 ohm/p Zero sequence
reactance reach
RFFwPP 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach, Ph-Ph, forward
RFRvPP 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach, Ph-Ph, reverse
RFFwPE 1.00 - 9000.00 0.01 100.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach, Ph-E, forward
Table continued on next page
Table 88: Phase selection with load encroachment, quadrilateral characteristic (PDIS, 21)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Minimum operate current (5-30)% of Ibase ± 1.0% of Ir
5.6.1 Introduction
The line distance protection is a five zone protection with three fault loops for phase
to earth fault for each of the independent zones. Individual settings for each zone
resistive and reactive reach gives flexibility for use on overhead lines and cables of
different types and lengths.
The function has a functionality for load encroachment which increases the possibility
to detect high resistive faults on heavily loaded lines (see figure 51).
The independent measurement of impedance for each fault loop together with a
sensitive and reliable built in phase selection makes the function suitable in
applications with single phase auto-reclosing.
The distance protection zones can operate, independent of each other, in directional
(forward or reverse) or non-directional mode. This makes them suitable, together with
different communication schemes, for the protection of power lines and cables in
complex network configurations, such as parallel lines, multi-terminal lines etc.
The different fault loops within the IED 670 are operating in parallel in the same
principle as a full scheme measurement..
Figure 102 presents an outline of the different measuring loops for the basic five,
impedance-measuring zones l.
en07000080.vsd
Figure 102: The different measuring loops at line-earth fault and phase-phase
fault.
The distance measuring zone include three impedance measuring loops; one fault
loop for each phase.
The distance measuring zone will essentially operate according to the non-directional
impedance characteristics presented in figure 103. The characteristic is illustrated
with the full loop reach.
X0 - X1
Xn =
3
X1+Xn R0 - R1
Rn =
3
f N f N
R (Ohm/loop)
RFPE RFPE
X1+Xn
ILn R1 + j X1
Phase-to-earth
UL1
element
Phase-to-earth
fault in phase L1 RFPE
(Arc + tower
resistance)
0
IN (R0-R1)/3 +
j (X0-X1)/3 ) en06000412.vsd
The R1 and jX1 in figure 104 represents the positive sequence impedance from the
measuring point to the fault location. The RFPE is presented in order to “convey” the
fault resistance reach.
X X X
R R R
en05000182.vsd
The operation of the distance measuring zone is blocked if the magnitude of input
currents fall below certain threshold values.
For zone 1 with load compensation feature the additional criterion applies, that all
phase-to-earth loops will be blocked when IN < IMinOpIN, regardless of the phase
currents.
ILn is the RMS value of the current in phase Ln. IN is the RMS value of the vector
sum of the three phase currents, i.e. residual current 3I0.
Fault loop equations use the complex values of voltage, current, and changes in the
current. Apparent impedances are calculated and compared with the set limits.
Here U and I represent the corresponding voltage and current phasors in the respective
phase Ln (n = 1, 2, 3).
U L1
Z app = ------------------------------
I L1 + I N × KN
(Equation 51)
Where:
UL1, IL1 and IN are the phase voltage, phase current and residual current present to the IED
KN is defined as:
X0 - X1
KN =
3X1
where X0 and X1 is zero and positive sequence reactance from the measuring point
to the fault on the protected line.
Here IN is a phasor of the residual current in relay point. This results in the same
reach along the line for all types of faults.
The formula given in equation 52 is only valid for no loaded radial feeder applications.
When load is considered in the case of single line to earth fault, conventional distance
protection might overreach at exporting end and underreach at importing end. REx670
has an adaptive load compensation which increases the security in such applications.
Measuring elements receive current and voltage information from the A/D converter.
The check sums are calculated and compared, and the information is distributed into
memory locations. For each of the six supervised fault loops, sampled values of
voltage (U), current (I), and changes in current between samples (DI) are brought
from the input memory and fed to a recursive Fourier filter.
The filter provides two orthogonal values for each input. These values are related to
the loop impedance according to equation 53,
X Di
U = R × i + ------ × -----
w 0 Dt
(Equation 53)
X D Re ( I )
Re ( U ) = R × Re ( I ) + ------ × ------------------
w0 Dt
(Equation 54)
X DIm ( I )
Im ( U ) = R × Im ( I ) + ------ × -----------------
w0 Dt
(Equation 55)
with
w0 = 2 × p × f 0
(Equation 56)
where:
Re designates the real component of current and voltage,
Im designates the imaginary component of current and voltage and
f0 designates the rated system frequency
The algorithm calculates Rm measured resistance from the equation for the real value
of the voltage and substitute it in the equation for the imaginary part. The equation
for the Xm measured reactance can then be solved. The final result is equal to:
Im ( U ) × DRe ( I ) – Re ( U ) × D Im ( I )
R m = ------------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) × Im ( I ) – D Im ( I ) × Re ( I )
(Equation 57)
Re ( U ) × Im ( I ) – Im ( U ) × Re ( I )
Xm = w 0 × Dt × -------------------------------------------------------------------------------
DRe ( I ) × Im ( I ) – DIm ( I ) × Re ( I )
(Equation 58)
The calculated Rm and Xm values are updated each sample and compared with the set
zone reach. The adaptive tripping counter counts the number of permissive tripping
results. This effectively removes any influence of errors introduced by the capacitive
voltage transformers or by other factors.
The directional evaluations are performed simultaneously in both forward and reverse
directions, and in all six fault loops. Positive sequence voltage and a phase locked
positive sequence memory voltage are used as a reference. This ensures unlimited
directional sensitivity for faults close to the relay point.
The evaluation of the directionality takes place in the function block ZDM.
Equation 59 are used to classify that the fault is in forward direction for line-to-
earth fault.
where:
ArgDir is the setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set
to 15 (= -15 degrees) and
ArgNegRes is the setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default
set to 115 degrees, see figure 106.
U1L1 is positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1
The setting of ArgDir and ArgNegRes is by default set to 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively (see figure 106) and it should not be changed unless system studies have
shown the necessity.
The ZDM gives a binary coded signal on the output STDIRCND depending on the
evaluation where STFWL1N=1 adds 1, STRVL1N=1 adds 2, STFWL2N=1 adds 4
etc.
ArgNegRes
ArgDir
R
en05000722.vsd
Figure 106: Setting angles for discrimination of forward and reverse fault
For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100 ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored.
• If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current
(between 10 and 30% of the set terminal rated current IBase), the condition seals
in.
• If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
• If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in
the reverse direction remains in operation.
• If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, the memory resets
until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its rated value.
The STCND input signal represents a connection of six different integer values from
the phase selection function within the IED, which are converted within the zone
measuring function into corresponding boolean expressions for each condition
separately. It is connected to the PHS function block output STCNDZ.
The input signal DIRCND is used to give condition for directionality for the distance
measuring zones. The signal contains binary coded information for both forward and
reverse direction. The zone measurement function filter out the relevant signals on
the DIRCND input depending on the setting of the parameter OperationDir. It shall
be configured to the DIRCND output on the ZDM block.
STCND
AND STNDL1N
L1N
AND STNDL2N
L2N
STNDL3N
L3N AND
OR STNDPE
OR
VTSZ STND
OR AND
BLOCK
BLK
en06000408.vsd
Composition of the phase starting signals for a case, when the zone operates in a non-
directional mode, is presented in figure 108.
STNDL1N 15 ms
AND t STL1
STNDL2N 15 ms
AND t STL2
STNDL3N 15 ms
AND t STL3
15 ms
AND t START
OR
BLK
en06000409.vsd
Results of the directional measurement enter the logic circuits, when the zone operates
in directional (forward or reverse) mode, see figure 109.
STNDL1N
DIRL1N AND
OR STZMPE.
&
STNDL2N
DIRL2N AND
STNDL3N 15 ms
STL1
& t
DIRL3N AND
15 ms
STL2
& t
15 ms
STL3
& t
BLK
15 ms
OR START
& t
en07000081.vsd
Tripping conditions for the distance protection zone one are symbolically presented
in figure 110.
en07000082.vsd
Figure 110: Tripping logic for the distance protection zone one
en06000454.vsd
Table 89: Input signals for the ZMMPDIS_21 (ZMM1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current input
U3P Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK Block of function
BLKZ Blocks all output by fuse failure signal
BLKTR Blocks all trip outputs
STCND External start condition (loop enabler)
DIRCND External directional condition
Table 90: Output signals for the ZMMPDIS_21 (ZMM1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP General Trip, issued from any phase or loop
TRL1 Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 Trip signal from phase L3
START General Start, issued from any phase or loop
STL1 Start signal from phase L1
STL2 Start signal from phase L2
STL3 Start signal from phase L3
STND Non-directional start, issued from any phase or loop
Table 91: Basic parameter group settings for the ZMMPDIS_21 (ZMM1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - On - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current, i.e.
rated current
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage, i.e.
rated voltage
OperationDir Off - Forward - Operation mode of
Non-directional directionality NonDir /
Forward Forw / Rev
Reverse
X1 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm/p Positive sequence
reactance reach
R1 0.10 - 1000.00 0.01 5.00 ohm/p Positive seq.
resistance for zone
characteristic angle
X0 0.50 - 9000.00 0.01 100.00 ohm/p Zero sequence
reactance reach
R0 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 15.00 ohm/p Zero seq. resistance
for zone characteristic
angle
RFPE 1.00 - 9000.00 0.01 100.00 ohm/l Fault resistance
reach in ohm/loop,
Ph-E
Timer tPE Off - On - Operation mode Off /
On On of Zone timer, Ph-
E
tPE 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay of trip, Ph-
E
IMinOpPE 10 - 30 1 20 %IB Minimum operate
phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpIN 5 - 30 1 5 %IB Minimum operate
residual current for
Phase-Earth loops
5.7.1 Introduction
The operation of transmission networks today is in many cases close to the stability
limit. Due to environmental considerations the rate of expansion and reinforcement
of the power system is reduced e.g. difficulties to get permission to build new power
lines. The ability to accurate and reliable classifying the different types of fault so
that single pole tripping and auto-reclosing can be used plays an important roll in this
matter. The phase selection function is design to accurate select the proper fault loop
in the distance function dependent on the fault type.
The heavy load transfer that is common in many transmission networks may in some
cases interfere with the distance protection zone reach and cause unwanted operation.
Therefore the function has a built in algorithm for load encroachment, which gives
the possibility to enlarge the resistive setting of the measuring zones without
interfering with the load.
The output signals from the phase selection function produce important information
about faulty phase(s) which can be used for fault analysis as well.
The phase selection function can be decomposed into four different parts:
The function can be de-activated and activated by setting the parameter Operation
Off/On The total function can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK.
The aim of the delta based phase selector is to provide very fast and reliable phase
selection for releasing of tripping from the high speed Mho element and as well as is
essential to Directional Comparison Blocking scheme (DCB), which uses Power Line
Carrier (PLC) communication system across the protected line.
The current and voltage samples for each phase passes through a notch filter that
filters out the fundamental components. Under steady state load conditions or when
no fault is present, the output of the filter is zero or close to zero. When a fault occurs,
currents and voltages change resulting in sudden changes in the current and voltages
resulting in non-fundamental waveforms being introduced on the line. At this point
the notch filter produces significant non-zero output. The filter output is processed
by the delta function. The algorithm uses an adaptive relationship between phases to
determine if a fault has occurred, and determines the faulty phases.
The current and voltage delta phase selector gives a real output signal if the following
criteria is fulfilled (only phase L1 shown):
Max(ΔUL1,ΔUL2,ΔUL3)>DeltaUMinOp
Max(ΔIL1,ΔIL2,ΔIL3)>DeltaIMinOp
where:
ΔUL1, ΔUL2 and ΔUL3 are the voltage change between sample t and sample t-1
DeltaUMinOp and DeltaIMinOp are the minimum harmonic level settings for the voltage and current filters
to decide that a fault has occured indeed. A slow evolving fault may not
produce sufficient harmonics to detect the fault; however, in such a case
speed is no longer the issue and the sequence components phase
selector will operate.
The delta voltages ΔULn and delta current ΔILn (n prefix for phase order) are the
voltage and current between sample t and sample t-1.
The delta phase selector employs adaptive techniques to determine the fault type. The
logic determines the fault type by summing up all phase values and dividing by the
largest value. Both voltages and currents are filtered out and evaluated. The condition
for fault type classification for the voltage and currents can be expressed as
The output signal is 1 for single line to earth fault, 2 for phase to phase fault and 3
for three phase fault. At this point the filer does not know if ground was involved or
not.
Typically there are induced harmonics in the non-faulted lines that will affect the
result. This method allows for a significant tolerance in the evaluation of FaultType
over its entire range.
When a single fault has been detected, the logic determines the largest quantity, and
asserts that phase. If phase to phase fault is detected, the two largest phase quantities
will be detected and asserted as outputs.
The faults detected by the delta based phase selector are coordinated in a separate
block. Different phases of faults may be detected at slightly different times due to
differences in the angles of incidence of fault on the waveshape. The output is forcet
to wait a certain time. If the timer expires, if no other fault detection on the other
phases is not detected, the fault is deemed as phase-to-ground. This way a premature
single phase to earth fault detection is not released for a phase-phase fault. If, however,
ground current is detected before the timer expires, the phase to ground fault is
released sooner.
If another phase picks up during the delay, the wait time is reduced by a certain
amount. Each detection of either ground or additional phases further reduce the initial
wait time and allow the delta phase selector output to be asserted sooner. There is not
wait time, if for example, all three phases are faulty.
The delta function is released if the input DELTAREL is activated at the same time
as input DELTABLK is not activated. Activating the DELTABLK input will block
the delta function. The release signal has an internal pulse timer of 100 ms. When the
DELTAREL signal has disappeared the delta logic is reset. In order not to get too
abrupt change, the reset is decayed in pre-defined steps.
The complementary based zero sequence current function evaluates the presence of
earth fault by calculating the 3I0 and comparing the result with the setting parameter
INtoMaxI. The output signal is used to release the earth fault loop. It is a complement
to the earth fault signal built-in in the sequence based phase selector. The condition
for releasing the phase to earth loop are as follows:
|3I0|>maxIph · INto Im ax ·
where:
|3I0| is the magnitude of the zero sequence current 3I0
maxIph is the maximum magnitude of the phase currents
INtoImax is a setting parameter for the relation between the magnitude of 3I0 and the maximum
phase current
The earth fault loop is also released if the evaluation of the zero sequence current by
the main sequence function meets the following conditions:
|3I0|>IMinOp · k1
|3I0|>maxIph · IN RelPE
where:
IMinOp is the settings of the minimum operate phase current
INRelPE is the setting of 3I0 limit for release of phase-to-earth measuring loop in % of IBase
k1 is a design parameter
IBase is the setting of the base current (A)
In systems where the source impedance for zero sequence is high the change of zero
sequence current may not be secure. In those cases the sequence based phase selector
will automatically change from evaluation of zero sequence current to evaluation of
zero and negative sequence voltage. So the release of earth fault loop can also be done
if the following conditions are fulfilled:
|3U0|>U2*k2
|3U0|>U1*k3
|U1|>k
and
3I0<IMinOp*k5
OR
3I0<ILmax · INRelPE
where:
3U0 is the magnitude of the zero sequence voltage
U2 is the magnitude of the negative sequence voltage at the relay measuring point of phase
L1
k2, k3, k4 and k5 are design parameters
ILmax is the maximal phase current
IMinOp is the setting of minimum operate phase current in % of IBase
VC 60°
C-A sector
VB 0°
180° B-C sector
A-B sector
VA
300°
en06000383_ansi.vsd
The phase to phase loop for the faulty phases will be determined if the angle between
the sequence voltages U2 and U1 lies within the sector defined according to figure
112 and the following conditions are fulfilled:
|U2|>U2MinOp
|U1|>U1MinOP
where:
U1MinOP and U2MinOp are the setting parameters for positive sequence and negative sequence
minimum operate voltage
If there is a three phase fault, there will not be any release of the individual phase
signals, even if the general conditions for U2 and U1 are fulfilled.
The first condition determines faulty phase at single line to earth fault by determine
the argument between V2 and I0.
80°
200°
L1-N sector
320°
en06000384.vsd
The angle is calculated in a directional function block and gives the angle in radians
as input to the V2I0 function block. The input angle is released only if the fault is in
forward direction. This is done by the directional element. The fault is classified as
forward direction if the angle between U0 and I0 lies between 20 to 200 degrees see
figure 114.
Forward 20°
200° Reverse
en06000385.vsd
Figure 114: Directional element used to release the measured angle between
U2 and I0
The input radians are summarized with an offset angle and the result evaluated. If the
angle is within the boundaries for a specific sector, the phase indication for that sector
will be active see figure 113. Only one sector signal is allowed to be activated at the
same time.
The sector function for condition1 has an internal release signal which is active if the
main sequence function has classified the angle between U0 and I0 as valid. The
following conditions must be fulfilled for activating the release signals:
|U2|>U2MinOp
|3I0|>IMinOp · 0.5
|3I0|>ILmax · INRelPE
where:
U2 and IN are the magnitude of the negative sequence voltage and zero sequence current (3I0)
U2MinOp is the setting parameter for minimum operate negative sequence voltage
IMinOp is the setting parameter for minimum operate phase current
INRelPE is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for releasing phase to earth loop
The angle difference is phase shifted by 180 degrees if the fault is in reverse direction.
The condition2 looks at the angle relationship between the negative sequence voltage
U2 and the positive sequence voltage U1. Since this is a phase to phase voltage
relationship, there is no need for shifting phases if the fault is in reverse direction. A
phase shift is introduced so that the fault sectors will have the same angle boarders
as for condition1. If the calculated angle between U2 and U1 lies within one sector,
the corresponding phase for that sector will be activated. The condition2 is released
if both the following conditions are fulfilled:
· |U2|>U2MinOp
· |U1|>U1MinOP
where:
|U1| and |U2| are the magnitude of the positive and negative sequence voltage
U1MinOP and are the setting parameter for positive sequence and negative sequence
minimum operate voltage.
140°
L3-N sector
20°
U1L1
(Ref)
L1-N sector
L2-N sector
260° en06000413.vsd
If both conditions are true and there is sector match, the fault is deemed as single
phase to ground. If the sectors, however, do not match the fault is determined to be
the complement of the second condition, i.e. a phase to phase to ground fault.
E.g.
Condition 1 Condition 2 Fault type
L3-G L3-G L3-G
L2-G L1-G L2-L3-G
The sequence phase selector is blocked when earthis not involved or if a three phase
fault is detected.
|U1|>U1Level
|I1|>I1Level
or
|I1|>IMaxLoad
where:
U1 and I1 are the positive sequence voltage and current magnitude
U1Level and I1Level are the setting of limits for positive sequence voltage and current
The output signal for detection of three phase fault is only released if not earth fault
and phase to phase fault in the main sequence function is detected.
The conditions for not detecting earth fault are the inverse of equation 5 to10.
The condition for not detecting phase to phase faults is determined by three
conditions. Each of them gives condition for not detecting phase to phase fault. Those
are:
Condition1:
earth fault is detected
or
|IN|>IMinOP*k2
and
|IN|>ILmax*INRelPE
Condition2:
Condition2 for phase to earth and phase to phase faults are not fulfilled
Table continued on next page
and
ILmax<IMinOp
and
|I2|<ILmax*I2ILmax
Condition3:
|IN|>maxIL*INBlockPP
or
|I2|<maxIL*I2maxIL
where:
ILmax is the maximum of the phase currents IL1, IL2 and IL3
INRelPE is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for release of phase to earthfault loops
|I2| is the magnitude of the negative sequence current
I2ILmax is the setting parameter for the relation between negative sequence current to the maximum
phase current in percent of IBase
INBlockP is the setting parameter for 3I0 limit for blocking phase to phase measuring loops
P
a a>b FaultPriority
DeltaIL1 then c=a c Adaptive release
b else c=a dependent on result
from Delta logic
DeltaUL1
Sequence based
function a<b
a
L1L2 fault
then c=b c
OR b else c=a OR
L1N fault
3 Phase fault
STL1
IL1Valid &
BLOCK
en06000386.vsd
The outline of the characteristic is presented in figure 117. As illustrated, the resistive
reach are set individually in forward and reverse direction while the angle of the sector
is the same in all four quadrants. The reach for the phase selector will be reduced by
the load encroachment function, see right figure 117.
X jX
RLd
ArgLd ArgLd
R
ArgLd R
ArgLd
RLd
Operation area
en06000414.vsd
Outputs
The output of the sequence components based phase selector and the delta logic phase
selector activates the output signal(s) STL1, STL2 and STL3PU_A, PU_B and
PU_C. If the phase to earth loop have been released, then the signal STE will be
activated as well.
The phase selector also gives binary coded signals that are connected to the zone
measuring element for opening the correct measuring loop(s). This is done by the
signal STCNDPHS. If only one phase is enable (L1, L2 or L3), the corresponding
phase to ground element is enabled as well. Earth is expected to be made available
for two and three phase faults for the correct output to be asserted. The fault loop is
indicated by one of the decimal numbers below:
0= no faulted phases
1= L1N
2= L2N
3= L3N
4= -L1L2N
Table continued on next page
5= -L2L3N
6= -L3L1N-CAG
7= -L1L2L3N
8= -L1L2
9= -L2L3
10= -L3L1
11= L1L2L3
An additional logic is applied to handle the cases when phase to earthoutputs are to
be asserted when the ground input G is not asserted.
The output signal STCNDPLE is activated when the load encroachment is operating.
STCNDPLE shall be connected to the input STCND for selected quadrilateral
impedance measuring zones (ZM0x) to be blocked. The signal STCNDLE shall be
connected to the input LDCND for selected Mho impedans measuring zones (ZMMx)
en06000429.vsd
Table 93: Input signals for the FMPSPDIS (PHM-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current
U3P Group signal for voltage
BLOCK Block of function
ZSTART Start from underimpdeance function
TR3PH Three phase tripping initiated
1POLEAR Single pole autoreclosing in progress
Table 94: Output signals for the FMPSPDIS (PHM-) function block
Signal Description
STL1 Fault detected in phase L1
STL2 Fault detected in phase L2
STL3 Fault detected in phase L3
STPE Earth fault detected
STCNDPHS Binary coded starts from phase selection
STCNDPLE Binary coded starts from ph sel with load encroachment
STCNDLE Binary coded starts from load encroachment only
START Indicates that something has started
Table 95: Basic parameter group settings for the FMPSPDIS (PHM-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage
IMaxLoad 10 - 5000 1 200 %IB Maximum load for
identification of three
phase fault in % of
IBase
RLd 1.00 - 3000.00 0.01 80.00 ohm/p Load encroachment
resistive reach in
ohm/phase
ArgLd 5 - 70 1 20 Deg Load encroachment
inclination of load
angular sector
Table 96: Advanced parameter group settings for the FMPSPDIS (PHM-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
DeltaIMinOp 5 - 100 1 10 %IB Delta current level in
% of IBase
DeltaUMinOp 5 - 100 1 20 %UB Delta voltage level in
% of UBase
U1Level 5 - 100 1 80 %UB Pos seq voltage limit
for identification of 3-
ph fault
I1LowLevel 5 - 200 1 10 %IB Pos seq current level
for identification of 3-
ph fault in % of IBase
U1MinOp 5 - 100 1 20 %UB Minimum operate
positive sequence
voltage for ph sel
Table continued on next page
Table 97: Faulty phase identification with load encroachment (PDIS, 21)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Minimum operate current (5-30)% of Ibase ± 1.0% of Ir
5.8.1 Introduction
The phase-to-earth impedance elements can be optionally supervised by a phase
unselective directional function (phase unselective, because it is based on
symmetrical components).
The evaluation of the directionality takes place in the function block ZDM. Equation
62 and equation 63 are used to classify that the fault is in the forward direction for
phase-to-earth fault and phase-phase fault respectively.
Where:
ArgDir Setting for the lower boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
15 (= -15 degrees)
ArgNegRes Setting for the upper boundary of the forward directional characteristic, by default set to
115 degrees, see figure 119
U1L1 Positive sequence phase voltage in phase L1
U1L1L2M Memorized voltage difference between phase L1 and L2 (L2 lagging L1)
The default settings for ArgDir and ArgNegRes are 15 (= -15) and 115 degrees
respectively (see figure 119) and they should not be changed unless system studies
show the necessity.
X
Zset reach point
ArgNegRes
-ArgDir R
-Zs
en06000416.vsd
For close-in three-phase faults, the U1L1M memory voltage, based on the same
positive sequence voltage, ensures correct directional discrimination.
The memory voltage is used for 100ms or until the positive sequence voltage is
restored. After 100ms, the following occurs:
• If the current is still above the set value of the minimum operating current the
condition seals in.
• If the fault has caused tripping, the trip endures.
• If the fault was detected in the reverse direction, the measuring element in
the reverse direction remains in operation.
• If the current decreases below the minimum operating value, no directional
indications will be given until the positive sequence voltage exceeds 10% of its
rated value.
The directional function block ZDM has the following output signals:
The STDIRCND output provides an integer signal that depends on the evaluation and
is derived from a binary coded signal as follows:
Values for the following parameters are calculated, and may be viewed as service
values:
• resistance phase L1
• reactance phase L1
• resistance phase L2
• reactance phase L2
• resistance phase L3
• reactance phase L3
• direction phase L1
• direction phase L2
• direction phase L3
5.8.2.2 Additional distance protection directional function for earth faults, ZDA
A Mho element needs a polarizing voltage for its operation. The positive-sequence
memory-polarized elements are generally preferred. The benefits include:
There are however some situations that can cause security problems like reverse phase
to phase faults and double phase to earth faults during high load periods. To solve
these, additional directional element is used.
For phase to earth faults, directional elements using sequence components are very
reliable for directional discrimination. The directional element can be based on one
of following types of polarization:
• Zero-sequence voltage
• Negative-sequence voltage
• Zero-sequence current
These additional directional criteria are evaluated in the function block ZDA.
Zero-sequence voltage polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the zero-
sequence voltage and the zero-sequence current at the location of the protection. The
measurement principle is illustrated in figure 120.
- 3U 0
AngleOp
AngleRCA
3I 0
en06000417.vsd
Zero-sequence current polarization is utilizing the phase relation between the zero-
sequence current at the location of the protection and some reference zero-sequence
current, for example the current in the neutral of a power transformer.
Z0 SA I0 I0
Z0 Line Z0 SB
Charac te ris tic
ang le
U0 U0
K*I0
U0 + K*I0
IF
en06000418.vsd
Note that the sequence based additional directional element cannot give per phase
information about direction to fault. This is why it is an AND-function with the normal
directional element that works on a per phase base. The release signals are per phase
and to have a release of a measuring element in a specific phase both the additional
directional element, and the normal directional element, for that phase must indicate
correct direction.
Normal
directional Release of distance
element measuring element
L1N, L2N, L3N L1N, L2N, L3N
AND
Additional
directional AND per
element phase
en06000419.vsd
ZDM1-
ZDMRDIR
I3P DIR_CURR
U3P DIR_VOLT
DIR_POL
STFW
STRV
STDIRCND
en06000422.vsd
ZDA1-
ZDARDIR
I3P STFWPE
U3P STRVPE
I3PPOL DIREFCND
DIRCND
en06000425.vsd
Table 98: Input signals for the ZDMRDIR (ZDM1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P group connection for current abs 1
U3P group connection for voltage abs 1
Table 99: Output signals for the ZDMRDIR (ZDM1-) function block
Signal Description
DIR_CURR Group connection
DIR_VOLT Group connection
DIR_POL Group connection
STFW Start in forward direction
STRV Start in reverse direction
STDIRCND Binary coded directional information per measuring loop
Table 100: Input signals for the ZDARDIR (ZDA1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Current signals
U3P Voltage signals
I3PPOL Polarisation current signals
DIRCND Binary coded directional signal
Table 101: Output signals for the ZDARDIR (ZDA1-) function block
Signal Description
STFWPE Forward start signal from phase-to-ground directional
element
STRVPE Reverse start signal from phase-to-ground directional
element
DIREFCND Start direction Binary coded
Table 102: Basic parameter group settings for the ZDMRDIR (ZDM1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 - Base setting for
current level
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 - Base setting for
voltage level
DirEvalType Impedance - Comparator - Directional evaluation
Comparator mode Impedance /
Imp/Comp Comparator
ArgNegRes 90 - 175 1 115 Deg Angle of blinder in
second quadrant for
forward direction
ArgDir 5 - 45 1 15 Deg Angle of blinder in
fourth quadrant for
forward direction
IMinOpPE 5 - 30 1 5 %IB Minimum operate
phase current for
Phase-Earth loops
IMinOpPP 5 - 30 1 10 %IB Minimum operate
delta current for
Phase-Phase loops
Table 103: Basic parameter group settings for the ZDARDIR (ZDA1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base setting for
current values
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base setting for
voltage level in kV
PolMode -3U0 - -3U0 - Polarization quantity
-U2 for opt dir function for
IPol P-E faults
Dual
-3U0Comp
-U2comp
AngleRCA -90 - 90 1 75 Deg Characteristic relay
angle (= MTA or base
angle)
I> 1 - 200 1 5 %IB Minimum operation
current in % of IBase
UPol> 1 - 100 1 1 %UB Minimum polarizing
voltage in % of UBase
IPol> 5 - 100 1 10 %IB Minimum polarizing
current in % of IBase
Table 104: Advanced parameter group settings for the ZDARDIR (ZDA1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
AngleOp 90 - 180 1 160 Deg Operation sector
angle
Kmag 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 40.00 ohm Boost-factor in -
U0comp and -
U2comp polarization
5.9.1 Introduction
Phase Preference Logic (PPL) is intended to be used in isolated or high impedance
earthed networks where there is a requirement to trip only one of the faulty lines at
cross-country fault.
The phase preference logic inhibits tripping for single-phase-to-earth faults in isolated
and high impedance-earthed networks, where such faults are not to be cleared by
distance protection. For cross-country faults, the logic selects either the leading or
the lagging phase-earth loop for measurement and initiates tripping of the preferred
fault based on the selected phase preference. A number of different phase preference
combinations are available for selection.
The function has 10 operation modes which can be set by the parameter Mode. The
different modes and their explanation are shown in table 105 below.
The function can be divided into two parts; one labeled Voltage and Current
Discrimination and the second one labeled Phase Preference Evaluation, see
figure 125.
The aim with the voltage and current discrimination part is to discriminate faulty
phases and to determine if there is a cross country fault. If cross country fault is
detected, an internal signal “Detected cross country fault” is created and sent to the
phase preference part to be used in the evaluation process for determining the
condition for trip.
The voltage discrimination part gives phase segregated start signals STUL1,
STUL2 or STUL3 if the respective measured phase voltage is below the setting
parameter UPN< at the same time as the zero sequence voltage is above the setting
parameter 3U0>, see figure 125.
The internal signal for detection of cross country fault, DetectCrossContry, that come
from the voltage and current discrimination part of the function can be achieved in
three different ways:
1. The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter IN for a time longer
than the setting of pick-up timer tIN
2. The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter IN at the same time
as the magnitude of 3U0 has been above the setting parameter 3U0> during a
time longer than the setting of pick-up timer tUN
3. The magnitude of 3I0 has been above the setting parameter IN at the same time
as one of the following conditions are fulfilled:
• the measured phase-to phase voltage in at least one of the phase
combinations has been below the setting parameter UPP< for more than
20 ms.
• At least one of the phase voltages are below the setting parameter UPN<
for more than 20 ms
The second part, Phase preference evaluation, uses the internal signal
DetectCrossCountry from the voltage and current evaluation together with the input
signal STCND and the information from the setting parameter OperMode to
determine the condition for trip. To release the phase preference logic at least two out
of three phases must be faulty. The fault classification whether it is a single line to
earth or cross country fault and which phase to be tripped at cross country fault is
converted into a binary coded signal and sent to the distance protection measuring
zone to release the correct measuring zone according to the setting of OperMode.
This is done by activating the output ZREL and it shall be connected to the input
STCND on the distance zone measuring element.
The input signal STCNDC consist of binary information of fault type and is connected
to the Phase selector output STCND. The fault must be activated in at least two phases
to be classified as a cross country fault in the phase preference part of the logic.
The input signals RELLx are additional fault release signals that can be connected to
external protection functions through binary input.
The trip output can be blocked by setting the parameter Blk1PhTr to On.
The output start and trip signals can be blocked by activating the input BLOCK
UL1
STUL1
UL2 AND
UL3
UL1UL2 STUL2
AND
UL2UL3
UL3UL1
IN Voltage and STUL3
AND
UN Current
Discrimination
UPN< OR START
AND
UPP<
IN>
Detect Cross-
UN> Country fault
AND
TRL1
AND
OperatingMode
RELL1N TRL2
Phase Preference AND
RELL2N Evaluation
TRL3
RELL3N AND
STCND
AND
AND OR
AND
AND
Blk1PhTr
BLOCK
en06000323.vsd
en07000029.vsd
Table 106: Input signals for the PPLPHIZ (PPL1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current input
U3P Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK Block of function
RELL1N Release condition for the L1 to earth loop
RELL2N Release condition for the L2 to earth loop
RELL3N Release condition for the L3 to earth loop
STCND Integer coded external release signals
Table 107: Output signals for the PPLPHIZ (PPL1-) function block
Signal Description
START Indicates start for earth fault(s), regardless of direction
ZREL Integer coded output release signal
Table 108: Basic parameter group settings for the PPLPHIZ (PPL1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.01 400.00 kV Base voltage
OperMode No Filter - No Filter - Operating mode
NoPref (c=cyclic,a=acyclic)
1231c
1321c
123a
132a
213a
231a
312a
321a
UPN< 10.0 - 100.0 1.0 70.0 %UB Operate value of
phase undervoltage
(% of UBase)
UPP< 10.0 - 100.0 1.0 50.0 %UB Operate value of line
to line undervoltage
(% of UBase)
3U0> 5.0 - 70.0 1.0 20.0 %UB Operate value of
residual voltage (% of
UBase)
IN> 10 - 200 1 20 %IB Operate value of
residual current (% of
IBase)
tUN 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Pickup-delay for
residual voltage
tOffUN 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Dropoff-delay for
residual voltage
tIN 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.150 s Pickup-delay for
residual current
5.10.1 Introduction
Power swings may occur after disconnection of heavy loads or trip of big generation
plants.
Power swing detection function is used to detect power swings and initiate block of
selected distance protection zones. Occurrence of earth fault currents during a power
swing can block the power swing detection function to allow fault clearance.
Its principle of operation is based on the measurement of the time it takes for a power
swing transient impedance to pass through the impedance area between the outer and
the inner characteristics. Power swings are identified by transition times longer than
a transition time set on corresponding timers. The impedance measuring principle is
the same as that used for the distance protection zones. The impedance and the
characteristic passing times are measured in all three phases separately. One-out-of-
three or two-out-of-three operating modes can be selected according to the specific
system operating conditions.
X1OutFw jX ZL R1LIn
X1InFw DFw
j
DRv
R1FInRv R1FInFw
DFw
ARGLd j
ARGLd
DRv
DFw
DFw
R
DFw
DRv
DFw
RLdInRv RLdInFw
DRv
RLdOutRv RLdOutFw
j DRv X1InRv
X1OutRv
en05000175.vsd
æ U L1 ö
Reçç ÷÷ £ Rset
è IL1 ø (Equation 64)
æ U L1 ö
Imçç ÷÷ £ Xset
è I L1 ø (Equation 65)
The Rset and Xset are R and X boundaries which are more explained in the following
sections.
where:
kLdRFw is a settable multiplication factor less than 1
The slope of the load encroachment inner and outer boundary is defined by setting
the parameter ARGLd.
The load encroachment in the fourth quadrant uses the same settings as in the first
quadrant (same ARGLd and RLdOutFw and calculated RLdInFw).
The quadrilateral characteristic in the first quadrant is tilted to get a better adaptation
to the distance zones. The angle is the same as the line angle and derived from the
setting of the reactive reach inner boundary X1InFw and the line resistance for the
inner boundary R1LIn. The fault resistance coverage for the inner boundary is set by
the parameter R1FInFw.
From the setting parameter RLdOutFw and the calculated value RLdInFw a distance
between the inner and outer boundary, DFw, is calculated. This value is valid for R
direction in first and fourth quadrant and for X direction in first and second quadrant.
From the setting parameter RLdOutRv and the calculated value RLdInRv a distance
between the inner and outer boundary, DRv, is calculated. This value is valid for R
direction in second and third quadrant and for X direction in third and fourth quadrant.
The inner resistive characteristic in the second quadrant outside the load
encroachment part corresponds to the setting parameter R1FInRv for the inner
boundary. The outer boundary is internally calculated as the sum of DRv+R1FInRv.
The inner resistive characteristic in the third quadrant outside the load encroachment
zone consist of the sum of the settings R1FInRv and the line resistance R1LIn. The
argument of the tilted lines outside the load encroachment is the same as the tilted
lines in the first quadrant. The distance between the inner and outer boundary is the
same as for the load encroachment in reverse direction i.e. DRv.
The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in forward direction correspond to the
setting parameter X1InFw and the outer boundary is defined as X1InFw + DFw,
where:
DFw = RLdOutFw - KLdRFw · RLdOutFw
The inner characteristic for the reactive reach in reverse direction correspond to the
setting parameter X1InRv for the inner boundary and the outer boundary is defined
as X1InRv + DRv.
where:
DRv = RLdOutRv - KLdRRv · RLdOutRv
The operation of the function is only released if the magnitude of the current is above
the setting of the min operating current, IMinOpPE.
• The "1-of-3" operating mode is based on detection of power swing in any of the
three phases. Figure 128 presents a composition of a detection signal PSD-DET-
L1 in this particular phase.
• The "2-of-3" operating mode is based on detection of power swing in at least two
out of three phases. Figure 129 presents a composition of the detection signals
DET1of3 and DET2of3.
The tP1 timer in figure 128 serve as detection of initial power swings, which are
usually not as fast as the later swings are. The tP2 timer become activated for the
detection of the consecutive swings, if the measured impedance exit the operate area
and returns within the time delay, set on the tW waiting timer. The upper part of
figure 128 (input signal ZOUTL1, ZINL1, AND-gates and tP-timers etc.) are
duplicated for phase L2 and L3. All tP1 and tP2 timers in the figure have the same
settings.
Figure 129: Detection of power-swing for 1-of-3 and 2-of-3 operating mode
ZOUTL1 ZOUT
OR
ZOUTL2 ZINL1
ZIN
ZOUTL3 AND ZINL2 OR
ZINL3
tEF
TRSP
t AND
I0CHECK
10 ms
AND t
BLKI02 OR
tR1
AND t INHIBIT
OR
-loop
tR2
BLKI01 AND t
BLOCK
-loop
DET1of3 - int.
REL1PH
AND
BLK1PH
tH
DET2of3 - int. OR t
REL2PH
AND
BLK2PH OR START
AND
EXTERNAL
en05000114.vsd
Figure 130 presents a simplified logic diagram for the PSD function. The internal
signals DET1of3 and DET2of3 relate to the detailed logic diagrams in figure 128 and
figure 129 respectively.
The load encroachment characteristic can be switched off by setting the parameter
OperationLdCh = Off, but notice that the DFw and DRv will still be calculated. The
characteristic will in this case be only quadrilateral.
There are four different ways to form the internal INHIBIT signal:
en06000264.vsd
Table 110: Input signals for the ZMRPSB_78 (PSD1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current input
U3P Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK Block of function
BLKI01 Block inhibit of start output for slow swing condition
BLKI02 Block inhibit of start output for subsequent residual current
detection
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
BLK1PH Block one-out-of-three-phase operating mode
REL1PH Release one-out-of-three-phase operating mode
BLK2PH Block two-out-of-three-phase operating mode
REL2PH Release two-out-of-three-phase operating mode
I0CHECK Residual current (3I0) detection used to inhibit start output
TRSP Single-pole tripping command issued by tripping function
EXTERNAL Input for external detection of power swing
Table 111: Output signals for the ZMRPSB_78 (PSD1-) function block
Signal Description
START Power swing detected
ZOUT Measured impedance within outer impedance boundary
ZIN Measured impedance within inner impedance boundary
Table 112: Basic parameter group settings for the ZMRPSB_78 (PSD1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Mode On /
On Off
X1InFw 0.10 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm Inner reactive
boundary, forward
R1LIn 0.10 - 1000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm Line resistance for
inner characteristic
angle
R1FInFw 0.10 - 1000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm Fault resistance
coverage to inner
resistive line, forward
X1InRv 0.10 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm Inner reactive
boundary, reverse
R1FInRv 0.10 - 1000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm Fault resistance line
to inner resistive
boundary, reverse
OperationLdCh Off - On - Operation of load
On discrimination
characteristic
RLdOutFw 0.10 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm Outer resistive load
boundary, forward
ArgLd 5 - 70 1 25 Deg Load angle
determining load
impedance area
RLdOutRv 0.10 - 3000.00 0.01 30.00 ohm Outer resistive load
boundary, reverse
Table continued on next page
Table 113: Advanced parameter group settings for the ZMRPSB_78 (PSD1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
tP1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.045 s Timer for detection of
initial power swing
tP2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.015 s Timer for detection of
subsequent power
swings
tW 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.250 s Waiting timer for
activation of tP2 timer
tH 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.500 s Timer for holding
power swing START
output
tR1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.300 s Timer giving delay to
inhibit by the residual
current
tR2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 2.000 s Timer giving delay to
inhibit at very slow
swing
5.11.1 Introduction
Power Swing Logic (RPSL) is a complementary function to Power Swing Detection
(PSD) function. It provides possibility for selective tripping of faults on power lines
during system oscillations (power swings or pole slips), when the distance protection
function should normally be blocked. The complete logic consists of two different
parts:
Communication and tripping logic as used by the power swing distance protection
zones is schematically presented in figure 132.
STDEF
AR1P1 &
STPSD tCS
CS
BLOCK & t &
CSUR
BLKZMPS
tBlkTr &
tTrip t
t
CACC TRIP
>1
CR &
en06000236.vsd
Figure 132: Simplified logic diagram – power swing communication and tripping
logic
The complete logic remains blocked as long as there is a logical one on the BLOCK
functional input signal. Presence of the logical one on the STDEF functional input
signal also blocks the logic as long as this block is not released by the logical one on
the AR1P1 functional input signal. The functional output signal BLKZMPS remains
logical one as long as the function is not blocked externally (BLOCK is logical zero)
and the earth-fault is detected on protected line (STDEF is logical one), which is
connected in three-phase mode (AR1P1 is logical zero). Timer tBlkTr prolongs the
duration of this blocking condition, if the measured impedance remains within the
operate area of the PSD function (STPSD input active). The BLKZMPS can be used
to block the operation of the power-swing zones.
Logical one on functional input CSUR, which is normally connected to the TRIP
functional output of a power swing carrier sending zone, activates functional output
CS, if the function is not blocked by one of the above conditions. It also activates the
TRIP functional output.
Initiation of the CS functional output is possible only, if the STPSD input has been
active longer than the time delay set on the security timer tCS.
Simultaneous presence of the functional input signals PLTR_CRD and CR (local trip
condition) also activates the TRIP functional output, if the function is not blocked by
one of the above conditions and the STPSD signal has been present longer then the
time delay set on the trip timer tTrip.
Figure 133 presents the logical circuits, which control the operation of the
underreaching zone (zone 1) at power swings, caused by the faults and their clearance
on the remote power lines.
&
BLKZMH
&
STZML tZL
STZMLL
BLOCK & t >1
&
STMZH tDZ
STZMPSD & t
>1
STPSD
&
-loop
en06000237.vsd
The logic is disabled by a logical one on functional inputBLOCK. It can start only if
the following conditions are simultaneously fulfilled:
• STPSD functional input signal must be a logical zero. This means, that the PSD
function must not detect power swinging over the protected power line.
• STZMPSD functional input must be a logical one. This means that the impedance
must be detected within the external boundary of the PSD function.
• STZMOR functional input must be a logical one. This means that the fault must
be detected by the overreaching distance protection zone, for example zone 2.
The STZMURPS functional output, which can be used in complete terminal logic
instead of a normal distance protection zone 1, becomes active under the following
conditions:
• If the STZMUR signal appears at the same time as the STZMOR or if it appears
with a time delay, which is shorter than the time delay set on timer tDZ.
• If the STZMUR signal appears after the STZMOR signal with a time delay longer
than the delay set on the tDZ timer, and remains active longer than the time delay
set on the tZL timer.
The BLKZMOR functional output signal can be used to block the operation of the
higher distance protection zone, if the fault has moved into the zone 1 operate area
after tDZ time delay.
en07000026.vsd
Table 115: Input signals for the ZMRPSL (PSL1-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
STZMUR Start of the underreaching zone
STZMOR Start of the overreaching zone
STPSD Power swing detected
STDEF Start from Earth Fault Protection in forward or reverse
direction
STZMPSD Operation of Power Swing Detection external characteristic
CACC Overreaching ZM zone to be accelerated
AR1P1 Single pole auto-reclosing in progress
CSUR Carrier send by the underreaching power-swing zone
CR Carrier receive signal during power swing detection operation
Table 116: Output signals for the ZMRPSL (PSL1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip through Power Swing Logic
STZMURPS Start of Underreaching zone controlled by PSL to be used in
configuration
BLKZMUR Block trip of underreaching impedance zone
BLKZMOR Block trip of overreaching distance protection zones
CS Carrier send signal controlled by the power swing
Table 117: Basic parameter group settings for the ZMRPSL (PSL1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
tDZ 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.050 s Permitted max oper
time diff between
higher and lower zone
tDZMUR 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Delay for oper of
underreach zone with
detected diff in oper
time
tCS 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Conditional timer for
sending the CS at
power swings
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Conditional timer for
tripping at power
swings
tBlkTr 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.300 s Timer for blocking the
overreaching zones
trip
5.12.1 Introduction
Sudden events in an electrical power system such as large changes in load, fault
occurrence or fault clearance, can cause power oscillations referred to as power
swings. In a non-recoverable situation, the power swings become so severe that the
synchronism is lost, a condition referred to as pole slipping. The main purpose of the
pole slip protection is to detect, evaluate, and take the required action for pole slipping
occurrences in the power system. The electrical system parts swinging to each other
can be separated with the line/s closest to the centre of the power swing allowing the
two systems to be stable as separated islands.
The movements in the impedance plain can be seen in figure 135. The transient
behaviour is described by the transient e.m.f's EA and EB, and by X'd, XT and the
transient system impedance ZS.
Zone 1 Zone 2
EB X’d XT XS EA
REG 670
B A
jX
XS
Pole slip
impedance XT
d Apparent generator
movement impedance R
X’d
en06000437.vsd
where:
X'd = transient reactance of the generator
• the minimum current exceeds 0.10 IN (IN is IBase parameter set under general
setting).
• the maximum voltage falls below 0.92 UBase
• the voltage Ucos (the voltage in phase with the generator current) has an angular
velocity of 0.2...8 Hz and
• the corresponding direction is not blocked.
en07000004.vsd
Figure 136: Different generator quantities as function of the angle between the
equivalent generators
An alarm is given when movement of the rotor is detected and the rotor angle exceeds
the angle set for 'WarnAngle'.
When the impedance crosses the slip line between ZB and ZC it counts as being in
zone 1 and between ZC and ZA in zone 2. The entire distance ZA-ZB becomes zone
1 when 'EnableZone1' is enabled (external device detects the direction of the centre
of slipping).
After the first slip, the signals 'Zone1' or 'Zone2' and – depending on the direction of
slip - either 'Generator' or 'Motor' are issued.
Every time pole slipping is detected, the impedance of the point where the slip line
is crossed and the instantaneous slip frequency are displayed as measurements.
Further slips are only detected, if they are in the same direction and if the rate of rotor
movement has reduced in relation to the preceding slip or the slip line is crossed in
the opposite direction outside ZA-ZB. A further slip in the opposite direction within
ZA-ZB resets all the signals and is then signalled itself as a first slip.
The 'Trip1' tripping command and signal are generated after n1 slips in zone 1,
providing the rotor angle is less than 'TripAngle'. The 'Trip2' signal is generated after
n2 slips in zone 2, providing the rotor angle is less than 'TripAngle'.
START
AND
0.2 £ Slip.Freq. £ 8 Hz
d ³ startAngle
ZONE1
AND
Z cross line ZA - ZC
ZONE2
AND
Z cross line ZC - ZB
Counter
a
a³b
N1Limit b TRIP1
AND
d £ tripAngle TRIP
OR
Counter
a
N2Limit b a³b TRIP2
AND
en07000005.vsd
en07000030.vsd
Table 118: Input signals for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Current group connection
U3P Voltage group connection
BLOCK Block of function
BLKGEN Block operation in generating direction
BLKMOTOR Block operation in motor direction
EXTZONE1 Extension of zone1 with zone2 region
Table 119: Output signals for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Common trip signal
TRIP1 Trip1 after the N1Limit slip in zone1
TRIP2 Trip2 after the N2Limit slip in zone2
START Common start signal
ZONE1 First slip in zone1 region
ZONE2 First slip in zone2 region
GEN Generator is faster then the system
MOTOR Generator is slower then the system
SFREQ Slip frequency
SLIPZOHM Slip impedance in ohms
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
SLIPZPER Slip impedance in percent of ZBase
UCOSKV UCosPhi voltage in kV
UCOSPER UCosPhi voltage in percent of UBase
Table 120: Basic general settings for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IBase 0.1 - 99999.9 0.1 3000.0 A Base Current
(primary phase
current in Amperes)
UBase 0.1 - 9999.9 0.1 20.0 kV Base Voltage
(primary phase-to-
phase voltage in kV)
MeasureMode PosSeq - PosSeq - Measuring mode
L1L2 (PosSeq, L1L2, L2L3,
L2L3 L3L1)
L3L1
InvertCTcurr No - No - Invert current
Yes direction
Table 121: Basic parameter group settings for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation On / Off
On
OperationZ1 Off - On - Operation Zone1 On /
On Off
OperationZ2 Off - On - Operation Zone2 On /
On Off
ImpedanceZA 0.00 - 1000.00 0.01 10.00 % Forward impedance
in % of Zbase
ImpedanceZB 0.00 - 1000.00 0.01 10.00 % Reverse impedance
in % of Zbase
ImpedanceZC 0.00 - 1000.00 0.01 10.00 % Impedance of zone1
limit in % of Zbase
AnglePhi 72.00 - 90.00 0.01 85.00 Deg Angle of the slip
impedance line
StartAngle 0.0 - 180.0 0.1 110.0 Deg Rotor angle for the
start signal
TripAngle 0.0 - 180.0 0.1 90.0 Deg Rotor angle for the
trip1 and trip2 signals
N1Limit 1 - 20 1 1 - Count limit for the
trip1 signal
N2Limit 1 - 20 1 3 - Count limit for the
trip2 signal
Table 122: Advanced parameter group settings for the PSPPPAM_78 (PSP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
ResetTime 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Time without slip to
reset all signals
5.13.1 Introduction
Automatic switch onto fault logic is a function that gives an instantaneous trip at
closing of breaker onto a fault. A dead line detection check is provided to activate the
function when the line is dead.
Mho distance protections can not operate for switch on to fault condition when the
phase voltages are close to zero. An additional logic based on UI Level is used for
this purpose.
The activation from the DLD function is released if the internal signal DeadLine from
the UILevel function is activated at the same time as the input ZACC is not activated
during at least for a duration tDLD and the setting parameter AutoInit is set to On.
When the setting AutoInit is Off the function is activated by an external binary input
BC. To get a trip also one of the following operation modes must be selected by the
parameter Mode:
Mode = Impedance; trip is released if the input ZACC is activated (normal connected
to non directional distance protection zone)
The internal signal DeadLine from the UILevel detector is activated if all three phase
currents and voltages are below the setting IPh< and UPh<.
UI Level based measurement detects the switch onto fault condition even though the
voltage is very low. The logic is based on current change for activation, current level
and voltage level. The internal signal SOTFLevel is activated if the phase voltage and
corresponding phase current is below the setting IPh< and UPh< in any phase.
First of all AutoInit= On is not needed (or in some cases not even wanted) for external
activation and secondly the information is already present in the first sentence of
"Principle of operation"
BLOCK 15
t TRIP
AND
BC
AutiInit=On
200 1000
OR t
ZACC AND t
IL1
deadLine
IL2
IL3
UL1 UILevel detector
UL2
UL3
Iph<
SOTFU ILevel
Uph<
AND
Mode = Impedance
AND OR
Mode = UILevel
OR
AND
Mode = UILvl&Imp
en07000084.vsd
Figure 139: Simplified logic diagram for current and voltage based switch onto fault logic.
en06000459.vsd
Table 124: Input signals for the ZCVPSOF (SFV1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Current DFT
U3P Voltage DFT
BLOCK Block of function
BC External enabling of SOTF
ZACC Distance zone to be accelerated by SOTF
Table 125: Output signals for the ZCVPSOF (SFV1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip output
Table 126: Basic parameter group settings for the ZCVPSOF (SFV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - On - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current (A)
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage L-L (kV)
Mode Impedance - UILevel - Mode of operation of
UILevel SOTF Function
UILvl&Imp
AutoInit Off - Off - Automatic switchonto
On fault initialization
IPh< 1 - 100 1 20 %IB Current level for
detection of dead line
in % of IBase
Table continued on next page
Table 127: Automatic switch onto fault logic, voltage and current based (PSOF)
Parameter Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage, detection of dead line (1–100)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur
Delay following dead line detection input before SOTF (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
function is automatically enabled
Time period after circuit breaker closure in which (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
SOTF function is active
6.1.1 Introduction
The instantaneous three phase overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and
short tripping time to allow use as a high set short-circuit protection function, with
the reach limited to less than typical eighty percent of the fault current line at minimum
source impedance.
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current
(StValMult) via a binary input (ENMULT). In some applications the operation value
needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.
en04000391.vsd
Table 128: Input signals for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Three phase current
BLOCK Block of function
ENMULT Enable current start value multiplier
Table 129: Output signals for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip signal from any phase
TRL1 Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 Trip signal from phase L3
Table 130: Basic parameter group settings for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current
OpMode 2 out of 3 - 1 out of 3 - Select operation
1 out of 3 mode 2-out of 3 / 1-
out of 3
IP>> 1 - 2500 1 200 %IB Operate phase
current level in % of
IBase
Table 131: Advanced parameter group settings for the PHPIOC_50 (IOC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
StValMult 0.5 - 5.0 0.1 1.0 - Multiplier for operate
current level
6.2.1 Introduction
The four step phase overcurrent function has an inverse or definite time delay
independent for each step separately.
All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional
user defined time characteristic.
U3P
TRIP
Harmonic harmRestrBlock
I3P Restraint
Element
enableDir
Mode Selection
enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4
en05000740.vsd
A common setting for all steps, StPhaseSel, is used to specify the number of phase
currents to be high to enable operation. The settings can be chosen: 1 out of 3, 2 out
of 3 or 3 out of 3.
common for all three phases for this step and a common Start signal. It shall be noted
that the selection of measured value (i.e. DFT or RMS) do not influence the operation
of directional part of TOC function. Service value for individually measured phase
currents are available from the TOC function. This feature simplifies testing,
commissioning and in service operational checking of the function.
A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. A set 2nd harmonic current in
relation to the fundamental current is used. The 2nd harmonic current is taken from
the pre-processing of the phase currents and the relation is compared to a set restrain
current level.
The function can use a directional option. The direction of the fault current is given
as current angle in relation to the voltage angle. The fault current and fault voltage
for the directional function is dependent of the fault type. To enable directional
measurement at close in faults, causing low measured voltage, the polarization
voltage is a combination of the apparent voltage (85%) and a memory voltage (15%).
The following combinations are used.
U refL1L 2 = U L1 - U L 2 I dirL1L 2 = I L1 - I L 2
U refL 2 L 3 = U L 2 - U L 3 I dirL 2 L 3 = I L 2 - I L 3
U refL 3 L1 = U L 3 - U L1 I dirL 3 L1 = I L 3 - I L1
U refL1 = U L1 I dirL1 = I L1
U refL 2 = U L 2 I dirL 2 = I L 2
U refL 3 = U L 3 I dirL 3 = I L 3
The directional setting is given as a characteristic angle AngleRCA for the function
and an angle window AngleROA.
Reverse
Uref
RCA
ROA
ROA Forward
Idir
en05000745.vsd
The default value of AngleRCA is –65°. The parameters AngleROA gives the angle
sector from AngleRCA for directional borders.
A minimum current for directional phase start current signal can be set:
IminOpPhSel.
If no blockings are given the start signals will start the timers of the step. The time
characteristic for each step can be chosen as definite time delay or some type of
inverse time characteristic. A wide range of standardized inverse time characteristics
is available. It is also possible to create a tailor made time characteristic. The
possibilities for inverse time characteristics are described in chapter "Time inverse
characteristics".
Different types of reset time can be selected as described in chapter "Time inverse
characteristics".
en06000187.vsd
Table 133: Input signals for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current input
U3P Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTR Block of trip
BLKST1 Block of Step1
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
BLKST2 Block of Step2
BLKST3 Block of Step3
BLKST4 Block of Step4
ENMULT1 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step1
ENMULT2 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step2
ENMULT3 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step3
ENMULT4 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step4
Table 134: Output signals for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip
TR1 Common trip signal from step1
TR2 Common trip signal from step2
TR3 Common trip signal from step3
TR4 Common trip signal from step4
TRL1 Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 Trip signal from phase L3
TR1L1 Trip signal from step1 phase L1
TR1L2 Trip signal from step1 phase L2
TR1L3 Trip signal from step1 phase L3
TR2L1 Trip signal from step2 phase L1
TR2L2 Trip signal from step2 phase L2
TR2L3 Trip signal from step2 phase L3
TR3L1 Trip signal from step3 phase L1
TR3L2 Trip signal from step3 phase L2
TR3L3 Trip signal from step3 phase L3
TR4L1 Trip signal from step4 phase L1
TR4L2 Trip signal from step4 phase L2
TR4L3 Trip signal from step4 phase L3
START General start signal
ST1 Common start signal from step1
ST2 Common start signal from step2
ST3 Common start signal from step3
ST4 Common start signal from step4
STL1 Start signal from phase L1
STL2 Start signal from phase L2
STL3 Start signal from phase L3
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
ST1L1 Start signal from step1 phase L1
ST1L2 Start signal from step1 phase L2
ST1L3 Start signal from step1 phase L3
ST2L1 Start signal from step2 phase L1
ST2L2 Start signal from step2 phase L2
ST2L3 Start signal from step2 phase L3
ST3L1 Start signal from step3 phase L1
ST3L2 Start signal from step3 phase L2
ST3L3 Start signal from step3 phase L3
ST4L1 Start signal from step4 phase L1
ST4L2 Start signal from step4 phase L2
ST4L3 Start signal from step4 phase L3
2NDHARM Block from second harmonic detection
DIRL1 Direction for phase1
DIRL2 Direction for phase2
DIRL3 Direction for phase3
Table 135: Basic general settings for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
MeasType DFT - DFT - Selection between
RMS DFT and RMS
measurement
Table 136: Basic parameter group settings for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage
AngleRCA 40 - 65 1 55 Deg Relay characteristic
angle (RCA)
AngleROA 40 - 89 1 80 Deg Relay operation angle
(ROA)
StartPhSel Not Used - 1 out of 3 - Number of phases
1 out of 3 required for op (1 of 3,
2 out of 3 2 of 3, 3 of 3)
3 out of 3
Table continued on next page
Table 137: Advanced parameter group settings for the OC4PTOC_51_67 (TOC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IMinOpPhSel 1 - 100 1 7 %IB Minimum current for
phase selection in %
of IBase
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 1 20 %IB Operate level of 2nd
harm restrain op in %
of Fundamental
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Selection of reset
IEC Reset curve type for step 1
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Reset time delay used
in IEC Definite Time
curve step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 0.500 - Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
HarmRestrain1 Off - Off - Enable block of step 1
On from harmonic
restrain
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Selection of reset
IEC Reset curve type for step 2
ANSI reset
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Reset time delay used
in IEC Definite Time
curve step 2
tPCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
Table continued on next page
6.3.1 Introduction
The single input overcurrent function has a low transient overreach and short tripping
times to allow use for instantaneous earth fault protection, with the reach limited to
less than typical eighty percent of the line at minimum source impedance. The
function can be configured to measure the residual current from the three phase
current inputs or the current from a separate current input.
There is also a possibility to activate a preset change of the set operation current via
a binary input (enable multiplier MULTEN). In some applications the operation value
needs to be changed, for example due to transformer inrush currents.
The function can be blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The trip signals from the
function can be blocked from the binary input BLKAR, that can be activated during
single pole trip and autoreclosing sequences.
en06000269.vsd
Table 139: Input signals for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Three phase currents
BLOCK Block of function
BLKAR Block input for auto reclose
MULTEN Enable current multiplier
Table 140: Output signals for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip signal
Table 141: Basic parameter group settings for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current
IN>> 1 - 2500 1 200 %IB Operate residual
current level in % of
IBase
Table 142: Advanced parameter group settings for the EFPIOC_50N (IEF1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
StValMult 0.5 - 5.0 0.1 1.0 - Multiplier for operate
current level
6.4.1 Introduction
The four step residual single input overcurrent function has an inverse or definite time
delay independent for each step separately.
All IEC and ANSI time delayed characteristics are available together with an optional
user defined characteristic.
The function can be used as main protection for phase to earth faults.
The function can be used to provide a system back-up e.g. in the case of the primary
protection being out of service due to communication or voltage transformer circuit
failure.
The function can be configured to measure the residual current from the three phase
current inputs or the current from a separate current input.
These inputs are connected from the corresponding pre-processing function blocks
in the Configuration Tool within PCM.
The function always uses Residual Current (i.e. 3Io) for its operating quantity. The
residual current can be:
where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents.
The residual current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of
the fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived. The phasor
magnitude is used within the TEF function to compare it with the set operation current
value of the four stages (Pickup1, Pickup2, Pickup3 or Pickup4). If the residual
current is larger than the set operation current and the step is used in non-directional
mode a signal from the comparator for this step is set to true. This signal will, without
delay, activate the output signal START for this step and a common START signal.
A polarizing quantity is used within the function in order to determine the direction
of the earth fault (i.e. Forward/Reverse).
The function can be set to use voltage polarizing, current polarizing or dual polarizing.
When Voltage Polarizing is selected the function will use the Residual Voltage (i.e.
3Uo) as polarizing quantity U3P. This voltage can be:
function input U3P). This dedicated IED 670 VT input shall be then connected
to open delta winding of a three phase main VT.
2. calculated from three phase voltage input within IED 670 (when the fourth analog
input into the pre-processing block connected to TEF function Analogue Input
U3P is NOT connected to a dedicated VT input of IED 670 in SMT tool). In such
case the pre-processing block will calculate 3Uo from the first three inputs into
the pre-processing block by using the following formula:
where:
UL1, UL2 and UL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase voltages.
Note! In order to use this all three phase-to-ground voltages must be connected to three IED 670 VT
inputs.
The residual voltage is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the phasor of
the fundamental frequency component of the residual voltage is derived. This phasor
is used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order to determine the
direction of the earth fault (i.e. Forward/Reverse). In order to enable voltage
polarizing the magnitude of polarizing voltage shall be bigger than a minimum level
defined by setting parameter UpolMin.
It shall be noted that –3Uo is used to determine the location of the earth fault.Thus
the setting parameter ROT3U0, located under General Settings for Earth Fault
function, has default value of “ROT3U0=180 deg”. This insures the required
inversion of the polarizing voltage within the earth fault function.
When Current Polarizing is selected the function will use the Residual Current (i.e.
3Io) as polarizing quantity IPol. This current can be:
the pre-processing block will calculate 3Io from the first three inputs into the
pre-processing block by using the following formula:
I Pol = 3 × Io = IL1 + IL 2 + IL 3
(Equation 76)
where:
IL1, IL2 and IL3 are fundamental frequency phasors of three individual phase currents. However this
option can be as well only used for some special line protection applications as
explained in the Application Manual.
The residual polarizing current is pre-processed by a discrete Fourier filter. Thus the
phasor of the fundamental frequency component of the residual current is derived.
This phasor is then multiplied with pre-set equivalent Zero Sequence Source
Impedance in order to calculate equivalent Polarizing Voltage UIPol in accordance
with the following formula:
which will be then used, together with the phasor of the operating current, in order
to determine the direction of the earth fault (i.e. Forward/Reverse). In order to enable
current polarizing the magnitude of polarizing current shall be bigger than a minimum
level defined by setting parameter IPollMin.
When Dual Polarizing is selected the function will use the vectorial sum of the voltage
based and current based polarizing in accordance with the following formula:
U TotPol = U UPol + U IPol = 3Uo + ZoS × I Pol = 3Uo + (RNPol+j × XNPol) × I Pol
(Equation 78)
Then the phasor of the total polarizing voltage UTotPol will be used, together with the
phasor of the operating current, to determine the direction of the earth fault (i.e.
Forward/Reverse).
The individual stages within the function can be set as non-directional. When this
setting is selected it is then possible via function binary input BLKSTx (where x
indicates the relevant step within the function) to provide external directional control
(i.e. torque control) by for example using one of the following functions available in
IED 670:
The base quantities shall be entered as setting parameters for every EF function. Base
current shall be entered as rated phase current of the protected object in primary
amperes. Base voltage shall be entered as rated phase-to-phase voltage of the
protected object in primary kV.
Each overcurrent stage uses Operating Quantity IOp (i.e. Residual Current) as
measuring quantity. Every of the four residual overcurrent stage has the following
built-in facilities:
• Time delay related settings. By these parameter settings the properties like
definite time delay, minimum operating time for inverse curves, reset time delay
and parameters to define user programmable inverse curve are defined.
• Supervision by second harmonic blocking feature (i.e. On/Off). By this
parameter setting it is possible to prevent operation of the stage if the second
harmonic content in the residual current exceeds the pre-set level.
• Multiplier for scaling of the set residual current pickup value by external binary
signal. By this parameter setting it is possible to increase residual current pickup
value when function binary input ENMULTx has logical value 1.
Simplified logic diagram for one residual overcurrent stage is shown in the following
figure:
BLKTR
Characteristx=DefTime tx TRINx
|IOP| AND
a OR
a>b
b
ENMULTx
STINx
INxMult AND
X T
INx> F
Inverse
BLKSTx
BLOCK Characteristx=Inverse
2ndH_BLOCK_Int
OR
HarmRestrain1=Disabled
DirModex=Off OR STAGEx_DIR_Int
DirModex=Non-directional
DirModex=Forward
AND OR
FORWARD_Int
DirModex=Reverse
AND
REVERSE_Int
en07000064.vsd
Figure 146: Simplified logic diagram for residual overcurrent stage x , where x=1, 2 ,3 or 4
The function can be completely blocked from the binary input BLOCK. The start
signals from the function for each stage can be blocked from the binary input
BLKSTx. The trip signals from the function can be blocked from the binary input
BLKTR.
It shall be noted that at least one of the four residual overcurrent stages
shall be set as directional in order to enable execution of the
The function has integrated directional feature. As the operating quantity current
IOp is always used. The polarizing method is determined by the parameter setting
polMethod. The polarizing quantity will be selected by the function in one of the
following three ways:
The operating and polarizing quantity are then used inside the directional element, as
shown in the following figure, in order to determine the direction of the earth fault.
Reverse
Area
0.4*IN>Dir
Upol=-3Uo
AngleRCA
0.4*IN>Dir
Forward
Area
Iop=3Io
en07000066.vsd
• Operating Current Pickup IN>Dir. However it shall be noted that the directional
element will be internally enabled to operate as soon as IOp cos(φ - AngleRCA)
is bigger then 40% of IN>Dir.
• Relay characteristic angle AngleRCA which defines the position of Forward &
Reverse areas in the operating characteristic.
These signals shall be used for communication based earth fault teleprotection
schemes (i.e. permissive or blocking).
|IOP|
a
a>b STRV
b AND
REVERSE_Int
0.6
X
a
a>b STFW
IN>Dir b AND
FORWARD_Int
X
0.4
FWD
AND FORWARD_Int
AngleRCA
Characteristic
PolMethod=Voltage
OR
Directional
PolMethod=Current UPolMin
UIPol
RNPol X T
COMPLEX
NUMBER
XNPol 0.0 F STAGE1_DIR_Int
STAGE2_DIR_Int
OR
STAGE3_DIR_Int
STAGE4_DIR_Int
BLOCK AND
en07000067.vsd
Figure 148: Simplified logic diagram for directional supervision element with integrated directional comparison
stage
A harmonic restrain of the function can be chosen. If the ratio of the 2nd harmonic
component in relation to the fundamental frequency component in the residual current
exceeds the pre-set level (defined by parameter setting 2ndHarmStab) any of the four
residual overcurrent stages can be selectively blocked by a parameter setting
HarmRestrainx. When 2nd harmonic restraint feature is active the EF function output
signal 2NDHARMD will be set to logical value one.
In addition to the basic functionality explained above the 2nd harmonic blocking can
be set in such way to seal-in until residual current disappears. This feature might be
required to stabilize the EF function during switching of parallel transformers in the
station. In case of parallel transformers there is a risk of sympathetic inrush current.
If one of the transformers is in operation, and the parallel transformer is switched in,
the asymmetric inrush current of the switched in transformer will cause partial
This feature has been called Block for Parallel Transformers. This 2nd harmonic seal-
in feature will be activated when all of the following three conditions are
simultaneously fulfilled:
Once Block for Parallel Transformers is activated the basic 2nd harmonic blocking
signal will be sealed-in until the residual current magnitude falls below a value defined
by parameter setting UseStartValue (see condition 3 above).
Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature is shown in the following
figure:
BLOCK
2ndHarmStab
X
Extract second
IOP 2NDHARMD
harmonic current a OR
a>b
component
b
Extract
fundamental
q-1
current component
t=70ms OR
t AN OR 2ndH_BLOCK_Int
D
BlkParTransf=On
|IOP|
a
a>b
b
UseStartValue
IN1>
IN2>
IN3>
IN4>
en07000068.vsd
Figure 149: Simplified logic diagram for 2nd harmonic blocking feature and Block for Parallel Transformers
feature
Integrated in the four step residual overcurrent protection are Switch on to fault logic
(SOTF) and Under-Time logic. The setting parameter SOTF is set to activate either
SOTF or Under-Time logic or both. When the circuit breaker is closing there is a risk
to close it onto a permanent fault, for example during an autoreclosing sequence. The
SOTF logic will enable fast fault clearance during such situations. The time during
which SOTF and Under-Time logics will be active after activation is defined by the
setting parameter t4U.
The SOTF logic uses the start signal from step 2 or step 3 for its operation, selected
by setting parameter StepForSOTF. The SOTF logic can be activated either from
change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close command pulse. The
setting parameter ActivationSOTF can be set for activation of CB position open
change, CB position closed change or CB close command. In case of a residual current
start from step 2 or 3 (dependent on setting) the function will give a trip after a set
delay tSOTF. This delay is normally set to a short time (default 100 ms).
The Under-Time logic always uses the start signal from the step 4. The Under-Time
logic will normally be set to operate for a lower current level than the SOTF function.
The Under-Time logic can also be blocked by the 2nd harmonic restraint feature. This
enables high sensitivity even if power transformer inrush currents can occur at breaker
closing. This logic is typically used to detect asymmetry of CB poles immediately
after switching of the circuit breaker. The Under-Time logic is activated either from
change in circuit breaker position or from circuit breaker close and open command
pulses. This selection is done by setting parameter ActUnderTime. In case of a start
from step 4 this logic will give a trip after a set delay tUnderTime. This delay is
normally set to a relatively short time (default 300 ms). Practically the Under-Time
logic acts as circuit breaker pole-discordance protection, but it is only active
immediately after breaker switching. The Under-Time logic can only be used in
solidly or low impedance grounded systems.
activationSOTF
Setting
tpulse
cbPosition
SOTF
posClsPls
Exec AND
PwrMode
Figure 150:
tpulse
cbClosed
NOT SOTFActive
tpulse operationMode
posOpnPls Setting PwrMode
AND
False start Exec
AND
1MRK506275-UEN rev. B
OR
TON
OR
AND
step4in AND
Setting TON
harmonic2ndRestraint AND IN Q AND
Exec NOT PT ET
cbSwitchingFaultDelayTime
Exec
en06000643.vsd
EF Logic Diagram Simplified logic diagram for the complete EF function is shown
REL 670
Section 6
Current protection
signal to
communication
scheme
Directional Check
Element
DirMode
enableDir
harmRestrBlock
3I0 Harmonic
Restraint ³1
Element
CB
DirMode pos
or cmd
enableDir
Mode
Selection enableStep1-4
DirectionalMode1-4
en06000376.vsd
en06000424.vsd
Table 144: Input signals for the EF4PTOC_51N67N (TEF1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Current connection
U3P Polarizing voltage connection
I3PPOL Polarizing current connection
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTR Block of trip
BLKST1 Block of step 1 (Start and trip)
BLKST2 Block of step 2 (Start and trip)
BLKST3 Block of step 3 (Start and trip)
BLKST4 Block of step 4 (Start and trip)
ENMULT1 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step1
ENMULT2 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step2
ENMULT3 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step3
ENMULT4 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for step4
CBPOS Breaker position
CLOSECB Breaker close command
OPENCB Breaker open command
Table 145: Output signals for the EF4PTOC_51N67N (TEF1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip
TRIN1 Trip signal from step 1
TRIN2 Trip signal from step 2
TRIN3 Trip signal from step 3
TRIN4 Trip signal from step 4
TRSOTF Trip signal from earth fault switch onto fault function
START General start signal
STIN1 Start signal step 1
STIN2 Start signal step 2
STIN3 Start signal step 3
STIN4 Start signal step 4
STSOTF Start signal from earth fault switch onto fault function
STFW Forward directional start signal
STRV Reverse directional start signal
2NDHARMD 2nd harmonic block signal
Table 146: Basic parameter group settings for the EF4PTOC_51N67N (TEF1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base value for current
settings
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base value for voltage
settings
AngleRCA -180 - 180 1 65 Deg Relay characteristic
angle (RCA)
polMethod Voltage - Voltage - Type of polarization
Current
Dual
UPolMin 1 - 100 1 1 %UB Minimum voltage
level for polarization
in % of UBase
IPolMin 2 - 100 1 5 %IB Minimum current level
for polarization in % of
IBase
RNPol 0.50 - 1000.00 0.01 5.00 ohm Real part of source Z
to be used for current
polarisation
XNPol 0.50 - 3000.00 0.01 40.00 ohm Imaginary part of
source Z to be used
for current
polarisation
IN>Dir 1 - 100 1 10 %IB Residual current level
for Direction release
in % of IBase
2ndHarmStab 5 - 100 1 20 % Second harmonic
restrain operation in
% of IN amplitude
BlkParTransf Off - Off - Enable blocking at
On parallel transformers
UseStartValue IN1> - IN4> - Current level blk at
IN2> parallel transf (step1,
IN3> 2, 3 or 4)
IN4>
SOTF Off - Off - SOTF operation
SOTF mode (Off/SOTF/
UnderTime Undertime/SOTF
SOTF +undertime)
+UnderTime
ActivationSOTF Open - Open - Select signal that
Closed shall activate SOTF
CloseCommand
StepForSOTF Step 2 - Step 2 - Selection of step used
Step 3 for SOTF
HarmResSOTF Off - Off - Enable harmonic
On restrain function in
SOTF
tSOTF 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Time delay for SOTF
Table continued on next page
Table 147: Advanced parameter group settings for the EF4PTOC_51N67N (TEF1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
ActUnderTime CB position - CB position - Select signal to
CB command activate under time
(CB Pos/
CBCommand)
tUnderTime 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.300 s Time delay for under
time
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Reset curve type for
IEC Reset step 1
ANSI reset
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Reset curve type for
step 1
tPCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tBCrv1 0.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tCCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tPRCrv1 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 0.500 - Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tTRCrv1 0.005 - 100.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter TR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
tCRCrv1 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Parameter CR for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Reset curve type for
IEC Reset step 2
ANSI reset
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Reset curve type for
step 2
tPCrv2 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
tACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 13.500 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
Table continued on next page
6.5.1 Introduction
In networks with high impedance earthing, the phase to earth fault current is
significantly smaller than the short circuit currents. Another difficulty for earth fault
protection is that the magnitude of the phase to earth fault current is almost
independent of the fault location in the network.
Directional residual current can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase to
earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual
current component 3I0 cos φ, where φ is the angle between the residual current and
the residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle. Alternatively the
function can be set to strict 3I0 level with an check of angle 3I0 and cos φ.
Directional residual power can be used to detect and give selective trip of phase to
earth faults in high impedance earthed networks. The protection uses the residual
power component 3I03U0 cos φ, where φ is the angle between the residual current
and the reference residual voltage, compensated with a characteristic angle.
A normal undirectional residual current function can also be used and be with definite
or inverse time delay.
A back-up neutral point voltage function is also available for undirectional sensitive
back-up protection.
In an isolated network, i.e. the network is only coupled to earth via the capacitances
between the phase conductors and earth, the residual current always has -90º phase
shift compared to the reference residual voltage. The characteristic angle is chosen
to -90º in such a network.
In resistance earthed networks or in Petersen coil, with a parallel resistor, the active
residual current component (in phase with the residual voltage) should be used for
the earth fault detection. In such networks the characteristic angle is chosen to 0º.
As the amplitude of the residual current is independent of the fault location the
selectivity of the earth fault protection is achieved by time selectivity.
When should the sensitive directional residual overcurrent protection be used and
when should the sensitive directional residual power protection be used? We have
the following facts to consider:
• In some power systems a medium size neutral point resistor is used. Such a
resistor will give a resistive earth fault current component of about 200 - 400 A
at a zero resistive phase to earth fault. In such a system the directional residual
power protection gives better possibilities for selectivity enabled by inverse time
power characteristics.
6.5.2.1 Introduction
The function is using phasors of the residual current and voltage. Group signals I3P
and U3P containing phasors of residual current and voltage is taken from pre-
processor blocks.
The sensitive directional earth fault protection has the following sub-functions
included:
network as all currents are mainly capacitive. The function operates when 3I0 cos φ
gets larger than the set value.
3I0
= ang(3I0) - ang(3Uref)
-3U0=Uref
3I0 cos
en06000648.vsd
Uref
RCA = -90°, ROA = 90°
3I0
3I0 cos
= ang(3I0) – ang(Uref)
-3U0
en06000649.vsd
For trip, both the residual current 3I0 cos φand the release voltage 3U0, shall be larger
than the set levels: INCosPhi> and UNRel>.
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.
When the function is activated binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tDef the binary output signals
TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated. The trip from this sub-function has definite time
delay.
There is a possibility to increase the operate level for currents where the angle φ is
larger than a set value as shown in the figure below. This is equivalent to blocking of
the function if φ > ROADir. This option is used to handle angle error for the instrument
transformers.
-3U0=Uref RCA = 0°
3I0 cos
ROA
en06000650.vsd
The function will indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction is
defined as 3I0 cos (φ + 180°) ≥ the set value.
It shall also be possible to tilt the characteristic to compensate for current transformer
angle error with a setting RCAComp as shown in the figure below:
Operate area
-3U0=Uref RCA = 0°
Instrument
transformer a
RCAcomp
angle error
Characteristic after
angle compensation
en06000651.vsd
For trip, both the residual power 3I03U0 cos φ, the residual current 3I0 and the release
voltage 3U0, shall be larger than the set levels (SN>, INRel> and UNRel>).
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.
When the function is activated binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tDef or after the inverse time
delay (setting kSN) the binary output signals TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated.
The function shall indicate forward/reverse direction to the fault. Reverse direction
is defined as 3I0 3U0 cos (φ + 180°) ³ the set value.
This variant has the possibility of choice between definite time delay and inverse time
delay.
RCA = 0°
ROA = 80°
Operate area
3I0
80 -3U0
en06000652.vsd
For trip, both the residual current 3I0 and the release voltage 3U0, shall be larger than
the set levels (INDir> and UNREL>) and the angle φ shall be in the set sector (ROADir
and RCADir).
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKTRDIR.
When the function is activated binary output signals START and STDIRIN are
activated. If the activation is active after the set delay tDef the binary output signals
TRIP and TRDIRIN are activated.
Directional functions
For all the directional functions there are directional start signals STFW: fault in the
forward direction, and STRV: start in the reverse direction. Even if the directional
function is set to operate for faults in the forward direction a fault in the reverse
direction will give the start signal STRV. Also if the directional function is set to
operate for faults in the reverse direction a fault in the forward direction will give the
start signal STFW.
This variant shall have the possibility of choice between definite time delay and
inverse time delay. The inverse time delay shall be according to IEC 60255-3.
For trip, the residual current 3I0 shall be larger than the set levels (INNonDir>).
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKNDN.
When the function is activated binary output signal STNDIN is activated. If the
activation is active after the set delay tINNonDir or after the inverse time delay the
binary output signals TRIP and TRNDIN are activated.
There shall also be a separate trip, with its own definite time delay, from this set
voltage level.
For trip, the residual voltage 3U0 shall be larger than the set levels (UN>).
Trip from this function can be blocked from the binary input BLKUN.
When the function is activated binary output signal STUN is activated. If the
activation is active after the set delay tUNNonDir TRIP and TRUN are activated. A
simplified logical diagram of the total function is shown in figure 158.
INNonDir> STNDIN
t TRNDIN
UN> STUN
t TRUN
OpMODE=INcosPhi
IN>
&
INcosPhi>
OpMODE=INUNcosPhi
INUNcosPhi> t
SN
& TRDIRIN
Phi in RCA +- ROA
TimeChar = InvTime
&
OpMODE=IN and Phi
&
TimeChar = DefTime
DirMode = Forw
& ³1
Forw STFW
DirMode = Rev
&
Rev STRV
en06000653.vsd
Figure 158: Simplified logical diagram of the sensitive earth fault current protection
en07000032.vsd
Table 149: Input signals for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current
U3P Group signal for voltage
BLOCK Blocks all the outputs of the function
BLKTR Blocks the operate outputs of the function
BLKTRDIR Blocks the directional operate outputs of the function
BLKNDN Blocks the Non directional current residual outputs
BLKUN Blocks the Non directional voltage residual outputs
Table 150: Basic general settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IBase 1 - 99999 1 100 A Base Current, in A
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 63.50 kV Base Voltage, in kV
Phase to Neutral
SBase 0.05 - 0.05 6350.00 kVA Base Power, in kVA.
200000000.00 IBase*UBase
Table 151: Basic parameter group settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off/On
On
OpMode 3I0Cosfi - 3I0Cosfi - Selection of operation
3I03U0Cosfi mode for protection
3I0 and fi
DirMode Forward - Forward - Direction of operation
Reverse forward or reverse
RCADir -179 - 180 1 -90 Deg Relay characteristic
angle RCA, in deg
RCAComp -10.0 - 10.0 0.1 0.0 Deg Relay characteristic
angle compensation
ROADir 0 - 90 1 90 Deg Relay open angle
ROA used as release
in phase mode, in deg
INCosPhi> 0.25 - 200.00 0.01 1.00 %IB Set level for 3I0cosFi,
directional res over
current, in %Ib
SN> 0.25 - 200.00 0.01 10.00 %SB Set level for
3I03U0cosFi, starting
inv time count, in %Sb
Table continued on next page
Table 152: Advanced general settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
RotResU 0 deg - 180 deg - Setting for rotating
180 deg polarizing quantity if
necessary
Table 153: Advanced parameter group settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.040 s Time delay used for
reset of definite
timers, in sec
tPCrv 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Setting P for customer
programmable curve
tACrv 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 13.500 - Setting A for customer
programmable curve
tBCrv 0.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 - Setting B for customer
programmable curve
tCCrv 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Setting C for
customer
programmable curve
ResetTypeCrv Immediate - IEC Reset - Reset mode when
IEC Reset current drops off.
ANSI reset
tPRCrv 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 0.500 - Setting PR for
customer
programmable curve
tTRCrv 0.005 - 100.000 0.001 13.500 - Setting TR for
customer
programmable curve
tCRCrv 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Setting CR for
customer
programmable curve
Table 154: Basic general settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IBase 1 - 99999 1 100 A Base Current, in A
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 63.50 kV Base Voltage, in kV
Phase to Neutral
SBase 0.05 - 0.05 6350.00 kVA Base Power, in kVA.
200000000.00 IBase*Ubase
Table 155: Basic parameter group settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
OpMode 3I0Cosfi - 3I0Cosfi - Selection of operation
3I03U0Cosfi mode for protection
3I0 and fi
DirMode Forward - Forward - Direction of operation
Reverse forward or reverse
RCADir -179 - 180 1 -90 Deg Relay characteristic
angle RCA, in deg
RCAComp -10.0 - 10.0 0.1 0.0 Deg Relay characteristic
angle compensation
ROADir 0 - 90 1 90 Deg Relay open angle
ROA used as release
in phase mode, in deg
INCosPhi> 0.25 - 200.00 0.01 1.00 %IB Set level for 3I0cosFi,
directional res over
current, in %Ib
SN> 0.25 - 200.00 0.01 10.00 %SB Set level for
3I03U0cosFi, starting
inv time count, in %Sb
INDir> 0.25 - 200.00 0.01 5.00 %IB Set level for
directional residual
over current prot, in
%Ib
tDef 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Definite time delay
directional residual
overcurrent, in sec
SRef 0.03 - 200.00 0.01 10.00 %SB Reference value of
res power for inverse
time count, in %Sb
kSN 0.00 - 2.00 0.01 0.10 - Time multiplier setting
for directional residual
power mode
OpINNonDir> Off - Off - Operation of non-
On directional residual
overcurrent
protection
INNonDir> 1.00 - 400.00 0.01 10.00 %IB Set level for non
directional residual
over current, in %Ib
Table continued on next page
Table 156: Advanced general settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
RotResU 0 deg - 180 deg - Setting for rotating
180 deg polarizing quantity if
necessary
Table 157: Advanced parameter group settings for the SDEPSDE_67N (SDE1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.040 s Time delay used for
reset of definite
timers, in sec
tPCrv 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Setting P for customer
programmable curve
tACrv 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 13.500 - Setting A for customer
programmable curve
tBCrv 0.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 - Setting B for customer
programmable curve
tCCrv 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Setting C for
customer
programmable curve
ResetTypeCrv Immediate - IEC Reset - Reset mode when
IEC Reset current drops off.
ANSI reset
tPRCrv 0.005 - 3.000 0.001 0.500 - Setting PR for
customer
programmable curve
tTRCrv 0.005 - 100.000 0.001 13.500 - Setting TR for
customer
programmable curve
tCRCrv 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 - Setting CR for
customer
programmable curve
Table 158: Sensitive directional residual overcurrent and power protection (PSDE, 67N)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate level for 3I0 cosj (0.25-200.00)% of lbase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
directional residual overcurrent ± 1.0% of I at I > Ir
At low setting:
(2.5-10) mA ± 1.0 mA
(10-50) mA ± 0.5 mA
Operate level for 3I03U0 cosj (0.25-200.00)% of Sbase ± 1.0% of Sr at S £ Sr
directional residual power ± 1.0% of S at S > Sr
At low setting:
(0.25-5.00)% of Sbase ± 10% of set value
Operate level for 3I0 and j (0.25-200.00)% of Ibase ± 1.0% of Ir at £ Ir
residual overcurrent ± 1.0% of I at I > Ir
At low setting:
(2.5-10) mA ± 1.0 mA
(10-50) mA ± 0.5 mA
Operate level for non directional (1.00-400.00)% of Ibase ± 1.0% of Ir at I £ Ir
overcurrent ± 1.0% of I at I > Ir
At low setting:
(10-50) mA ± 1.0 mA
Table continued on next page
6.6.1 Introduction
The increasing utilizing of the power system closer to the thermal limits have
generated a need of a thermal overload function also for power lines.
A thermal overload will often not be detected by other protection functions and the
introduction of the thermal overload function can allow the protected circuit to operate
closer to the thermal limits.
The three phase current measuring function has an I2t characteristic with settable time
constant and a thermal memory.
An alarm level gives early warning to allow operators to take action well before the
line will be tripped.
From the largest of the three phase currents a final temperature is calculated according
to the expression:
2
æ I ö
Q final =ç ÷÷ × Tref
ç I ref
è ø (Equation 80)
where:
I is the largest phase current,
Iref is a given reference current and
æ Dt
ö
Qn = Qn -1 + ( Q final - Q n-1 ) × ç1 - e t ÷
-
è ø (Equation 81)
where:
Qn is the calculated present temperature,
When the component temperature reaches the set alarm level AlarmTemp the output
signal ALARM is set. When the component temperature reaches the set trip level
TripTemp the output signal TRIP is set.
There is also a calculation of the present time to operation with the present current.
This calculation is only performed if the final temperature is calculated to be above
the operation temperature:
æQ - Qoperate ö
toperate = -t × ln ç final
ç Q final - Q n ÷÷
è ø (Equation 82)
The calculated time to trip can be monitored as it is exported from the function as a
real figure TTRIP.
After a trip, caused by the thermal overload protection function, there can be a lockout
to reconnect the tripped circuit. The output lockout signal LOCKOUT is activated
when the device temperature is above the set lockout release temperature setting
ReclTemp.
The time to lockout release is calculated, i.e. a calculation of the cooling time to a set
value. The thermal content of the function can be reset with input RESET.
æQ - Qlockout _ release ö
tlockout _ release = -t × ln ç final ÷÷
ç Q - Q
è final n ø (Equation 83)
Here the final temperature is equal to the set or measured ambient temperature. The
calculated component temperature can be monitored as it is exported from the
function as a real figure.
In some applications the measured current can involve a number of parallel lines.
This is often used for cable lines where one bay connects several parallel cables. By
setting the parameter IMult to the number of parallel lines (cables) the actual current
on one line is used in the protection algorithm. To activate this option the input
ENMULT must be activated.
The function has a reset input: RESET. By activating this input the calculated
temperature is reset to its default initial value. This is useful during testing when
secondary injected current has given a calculated “false” temperature level.
actual temperature
Calculation
of actual
temperature
trip signal
Actual Temp
> TripTemp initiate lockout
Calculation
of time to time to reset of lockout
reset of
lockout
en05000736.vsd
en04000396.vsd
Table 159: Input signals for the LPTTR_26 (THL1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group connection
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTR Block of trip
ENMULT Current multiplyer used when THOL is for two or more lines
AMBTEMP Ambient temperature from external temperature sensor
SENSFLT Validity status of ambient temperature sensor
RESET Reset of internal thermal load counter
Table 160: Output signals for the LPTTR_26 (THL1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip
START Start Signal
ALARM Alarm signal
LOCKOUT Lockout signal
Table 161: Basic parameter group settings for the LPTTR_26 (THL1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 0 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current in A
TRef 0 - 600 1 90 Deg End temperature rise
above ambient of the
line when loaded with
IRef
IRef 0 - 400 1 100 %IB The load current (in
%of IBase) leading to
TRef temperature
IMult 1-5 1 1 - Current multiplier
when function is used
for two or more lines
Tau 0 - 1000 1 45 Min Time constant of the
line in minutes.
AlarmTemp 0 - 200 1 80 Deg Temperature level for
start (alarm)
TripTemp 0 - 600 1 90 Deg Temperature level for
trip
ReclTemp 0 - 600 1 75 Deg Temperature for reset
of lockout after trip
tPulse 0.05 - 0.30 0.01 0.1 s Operate pulse length.
Minimum one
execution cycle
AmbiSens Off - Off - External temperature
On sensor availiable
DefaultAmbTemp -50 - 250 1 20 Deg Ambient temperature
used when AmbiSens
is set to Off.
DefaultTemp -50 - 600 1 50 Deg Temperature raise
above ambient
temperature at
startup
Table 162: Thermal overload protection, one time constant (PTTR, 26)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Reference current (0-400)% of Ibase ± 1.0% of Ir
I = Imeasured
6.7.1 Introduction
The circuit breaker failure function ensures fast back-up tripping of surrounding
breakers. The breaker failure protection operation can be current based, contact based
or adaptive combination between these two principles.
A current check with extremely short reset time is used as a check criteria to achieve
a high security against unnecessary operation.
The breaker failure protection can be single- or three-phase initiated to allow use with
single phase tripping applications. For the three-phase version of the breaker failure
protection the current criteria can be set to operate only if two out of four e.g. two
phases or one phase plus the residual current starts. This gives a higher security to
the back-up trip command.
The function can be programmed to give a single- or three phase re-trip of the own
breaker to avoid unnecessary tripping of surrounding breakers at an incorrect
initiation due to mistakes during testing.
The start signal can be phase selective or general (for all three phases). Phase selective
start signals enable single pole re-trip function. This means that a second attempt to
open the breaker is done. The re-trip attempt can be made after a set time delay. For
transmission lines single pole trip and autoreclosing is often used. The re-trip function
can be phase selective if it is initiated from phase selective line protection. The re-
trip function can be done with or without current check. With the current check the
re-trip is only performed if the current through the circuit breaker is larger than the
operate current level.
The start signal can be an internal or external protection trip signal. If this start signal
gets high at the same time as current is detected through the circuit breaker, the back-
up trip timer is started. If the opening of the breaker is successful this is detected by
the function, both by detection of low RMS current and by a special adapted
algorithm. The special algorithm enables a very fast detection of successful breaker
opening, i.e. fast resetting of the current measurement. If the current detection has
not detected breaker opening before the back-up timer has run its time a back-up trip
is initiated. There is also a possibility to have a second back-up trip output activated
after an added settable time after the first back-up trip.
• The minimum length of the re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-up
trip pulse 2 are settable. The re-trip pulse, the back-up trip pulse and the back-
up trip pulse 2 will however sustain as long as there is an indication of closed
breaker.
• In the current detection it is possible to use three different options: 1 out of 3
where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole, 1 out of
4 where it is sufficient to detect failure to open (high current) in one pole or high
residual current and 2 out of 4 where at least two current (phase current and/or
residual current) shall be high for breaker failure detection.
• The current detection for the residual current can be set different from the setting
of phase current detection.
• It is possible to have different re-trip time delays for single phase faults and for
multi-phase faults.
• The back-up trip can be made without current check. It is possible to have this
option activated for small load currents only.
• It is possible to have instantaneous back-up trip function if a signal is high if the
circuit breaker is insufficient to clear faults, for example at low gas pressure.
Current
AND
BLOCK
Current & t1 tp
STIL1
Contact t TRRETL1
AND AND
START
OR
STL1
OR
TRRET
OR
AND AND
CBCLDL1
Contact
L2 L3
en05000832.vsd
Internal logical signals STIL1, STIL2, STIL3 have logical value 1 when current in
respective phase has magnitude larger than setting parameter IP>.
Internal logical signal STN has logical value 1 when neutral current has magnitude
larger than setting parameter IN>.
t2
1 of 4 t
OR
t3 tp
t TRBU2
2 of 3
AND
CBALARM
CBFLT CBALARM
t
en06000223.vsd
en06000188.vsd
Table 163: Input signals for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Current connection
BLOCK Block of function
START Three phase start of breaker failure protection function
STL1 Start signal of phase L1
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
STL2 Start signal of phase L2
STL3 Start signal of phase L3
CBCLDL1 Circuit breaker closed in phase L1
CBCLDL2 Circuit breaker closed in phase L2
CBCLDL3 Circuit breaker closed in phase L3
CBFLT CB faulty, unable to trip. Back-up trip instantanously.
Table 164: Output signals for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function block
Signal Description
TRBU Back-up trip by breaker failure protection function
TRBU2 Second back-up trip by breaker failure protection function
TRRET Retrip by breaker failure protection function
TRRETL1 Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L1
TRRETL2 Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L2
TRRETL3 Retrip by breaker failure protection function phase L3
CBALARM Alarm for faulty circuit breaker
Table 165: Basic parameter group settings for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current
FunctionMode Current - Current - Detection principle for
Contact back-up trip
Current&Contact
BuTripMode 2 out of 4 - 1 out of 3 - Back-up trip mode
1 out of 3
1 out of 4
RetripMode Retrip Off - Retrip Off - Operation mode of re-
CB Pos Check trip logic
No CBPos Check
IP> 5 - 200 1 10 %IB Operate phase
current level in % of
IBase
IN> 2 - 200 1 10 %IB Operate residual
current level in % of
IBase
t1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay of re-trip
Table continued on next page
Table 166: Advanced parameter group settings for the CCRBRF_50BF (BFP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
I>BlkCont 5 - 200 1 20 %IB Current for blocking of
CB contact operation
in % of IBase
t3 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.030 s Additional time delay
to t2 for a second
back-up trip
tCBAlarm 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Time delay for CB
faulty signal
6.8.1 Introduction
When a power line is taken out of service for maintenance and the line disconnector
is opened in multi-breaker arrangements the voltage transformers will mostly be
outside on the disconnected part. The primary line distance protection will thus not
be able to operate and must be blocked.
The stub protection covers the zone between the current transformers and the open
disconnector. The three phase instantaneous overcurrent function is released from a
NO (b) auxiliary contact on the line disconnector.
BLOCK
TRIP
STIL1 AND
STIL2 OR
STIL3
RELEASE
en05000731.vsd
en05000678.vsd
Table 168: Input signals for the STBPTOC_50STB (STB1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current input
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTR Block of trip
RELEASE Release of stub protection
Table 169: Output signals for the STBPTOC_50STB (STB1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip
START General start
Table 170: Basic parameter group settings for the STBPTOC_50STB (STB1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current
ReleaseMode Release - Release - Release of stub
Continuous protection
I> 1 - 2500 1 200 %IB Operate current level
in % of IBase
Table 171: Advanced parameter group settings for the STBPTOC_50STB (STB1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
t 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay
6.9.1 Introduction
Single pole operated circuit breakers can due to electrical or mechanical failures end
up with the different poles in different positions (close-open). This can cause negative
and zero sequence currents which gives thermal stress on rotating machines and can
cause unwanted operation of zero sequence or negative sequence current functions.
Normally the own breaker is tripped to correct the positions. If the situation
consists the remote end can be intertripped to clear the unsymmetrical load situation.
The pole discordance function operates based on information from auxiliary contacts
of the circuit breaker for the three phases with additional criteria from unsymmetrical
phase current when required.
C.B.
en05000287.vsd
This single binary signal is connected to a binary input of the IED. The appearance
of this signal will start a timer that will give a trip signal after the set delay.
There is also a possibility to connect all phase selective auxiliary contacts (phase
contact open and phase contact closed) to binary inputs of the IED. This is shown in
figure 169
C.B.
+
poleOneOpened from C.B.
en05000288.vsd
In this case the logic is realized within the function. If the inputs are indicating pole
discordance the trip timer is started. This timer will give a trip signal after the set
delay.
The function also has a binary input that can be configured from the autoreclosing
function, so that the pole discordance function can be blocked during sequences with
a single pole open if single pole autoreclosing is used.
The simplified block diagram of the current and contact based pole discordance
function is shown in figure 170.
BLOCK
OR
BLKDBYAR
PolPosAuxCont
AND
POLE1OPN
POLE1CL
POLE2OPN
Discordance
POLE2CL
detection
POLE3OPN
POLE3CL t 150 ms
t TRIP
AND
OR
PD Signal from CB
AND
EXTPDIND
CLOSECMD t+200 ms
OR
OPENCMD
AND
Unsymmetry current
detection
en05000747.vsd
Figure 170: Simplified block diagram of pole discordance function - contact and
current based
• The terminal is in TEST mode (TEST-ACTIVE is high) and the function has
been blocked from the HMI (BlockPD=Yes)
• The input signal BLOCK is high
• The input signal BLKDBYAR is high
The BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the pole discordance
function. It can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to receive a
block command from external devices or can be software connected to other internal
functions of the terminal itself in order to receive a block command from internal
functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal
function outputs.
The BLKDBYAR signal blocks the pole discordance operation when a single phase
autoreclosing cycle is in progress. It can be connected to the output signal AR01-1PT1
if the autoreclosing function is integrated in the terminal; if the autoreclosing function
is an external device, then BLKDBYAR has to be connected to a binary input of the
terminal and this binary input is connected to a signalization “1phase autoreclosing
in progress” from the external autoreclosing device.
If the pole discordance function is enabled, then two different criteria will generate
a trip signal TRIP:
If one or two poles of the circuit breaker have failed to open or to close (pole
discordance status), then the function input EXTPDIND is activated from the pole
discordance signal derived from the circuit breaker auxiliary contacts (one NO contact
for each phase connected in parallel, and in series with one NC contact for each phase
connected in parallel) and, after a settable time interval t (0-60 s), a 150 ms trip pulse
command TRIP is generated by the pole discordance function.
• any phase current is lower than CurrUnsymLevel of the highest current in the
remaining two phases
• the highest phase current is greater than CurrRelLevelof the rated current
If these conditions are true, an unsymmetrical condition is detected and the internal
signal INPS is turned high. This detection is enabled to generate a trip after a set time
delay t (0-60 s) if the detection occurs in the next 200 ms after the circuit breaker has
received a command to open trip or close and if the unbalance persists. The 200 ms
limitation is for avoiding unwanted operation during unsymmetrical load conditions.
The pole discordance function is informed that a trip or close command has been
given to the circuit breaker through the inputs CLOSECMD (for closing command
information) and OPENCMD (for opening command information). These inputs can
be connected to terminal binary inputs if the information are generated from the field
(i.e. from auxiliary contacts of the close and open push buttons) or may be software
connected to the outputs of other integrated functions (i.e. close command from a
control function or a general trip from integrated protections).
en06000275.vsd
Table 173: Input signals for the CCRPLD_52PD (PD01-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current input
BLOCK Block of function
BLKDBYAR Block of function at CB single phase auto re-closing cycle
CLOSECMD Close order to CB
OPENCMD Open order to CB
EXTPDIND Pole discordance signal from CB logic
POLE1OPN Pole one opened indication from CB
POLE1CL Pole one closed indication from CB
POLE2OPN Pole two opened indication from CB
POLE2CL Pole two closed indication from CB
POLE3OPN Pole three opened indication from CB
POLE3CL Pole three closed indication from CB
Table 174: Output signals for the CCRPLD_52PD (PD01-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip signal to CB
START Trip condition TRUE, waiting for time delay
Table 175: Basic parameter group settings for the CCRPLD_52PD (PD01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 - Base current
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.300 s Time delay between
trip condition and trip
signal
ContSel Off - Off - Contact function
PD signal from CB selection
Pole pos aux cont.
CurrSel Off - Off - Current function
CB oper monitor selection
Continuous
monitor
CurrUnsymLevel 0 - 100 1 80 % Unsym magn of
lowest phase current
compared to the
highest.
CurrRelLevel 0 - 100 1 10 %IB Current magnitude for
release of the function
in % of IBase
6.10.1 Introduction
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as
a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.
Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it
does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator
becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the
power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate
as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration
is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect
it to ease the task for the rest of the power system.
Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state.
The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect
the generator itself.
Figure 172 illustrates the reverse power protection with underpower relay and with
overpower relay. The underpower relay gives a higher margin and should provide
better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately
after synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower relay to trip if
the active power from the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the
overpower relay to trip if the power flow from the network to the generator is higher
than 1% depending on the type of turbine.
Q Q
Operate Operate
Line Line
Margin Margin
P P
en06000315.vsd
Chosen current
phasors P
P = POWRE
Q = POWIM
en06000438.vsd
The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 177.
Arone
S = U L1L 2 × I L1* - U L 2 L 3 × I L 3*
PosSeq
S = 3 × U PosSeq × I PosSeq *
L1L2
S = U L1L 2 × ( I L1* - I L 2* )
L2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 × ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 × ( I L 3* - I L1* )
L1
S = 3 × U L1 × I L1*
L3
S = 3 × U L 3 × I L 3*
NegSeq
S = 3 × U NegSeq × I NegSeq *
The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.
To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute
hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) + drop-power1(2)).
For generator low forward power protection the power setting is very low, normally
down to 0.02 pu of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to
a smaller value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2),
Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) + Hysteresis1(2)
For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-
power1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 *
Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value.
If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset
after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop out ant
that the timer of the stage will reset.
In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible
to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This
will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity.
Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:
S = k × SOld + (1 - k ) × SCalculated
(Equation 95)
Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle
Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (i.e. without any additional delay). When
k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k = 0.14.
Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get
class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation
at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and
above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 174.
Amplitude
% of Ir compensation
-10
IAmpComp5 Measured
IAmpComp30 current
IAmpComp100
5 30 100 % of Ir
0-5%: Constant
-10 5-30-100%: Linear
>100%: Constant
Degrees Angle
compensation
-10
IAngComp30 Measured
current
IAngComp5
IAngComp100
5 30 100 % of Ir
-10
en05000652.vsd
The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and
the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance
report. The active power is provided as a MW value: P, or in percent of base power:
PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as a Mvar value: Q, or in percent of base
power: QPERCENT.
en07000027.vsd
Table 178: Input signals for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Current group connection
U3P Voltage group connection
BLOCK Block of function
BLOCK1 Block of stage 1
BLOCK2 Block of stage 2
Table 179: Output signals for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Common trip signal
TRIP1 Trip of stage 1
TRIP2 Trip of stage 2
START Common start
START1 Start of stage 1
START2 Start of stage 2
P Active Power in MW
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
PPERCENT Active power in % of SBASE
Q Reactive power in Mvar
QPERCENT Reactive power in % of SBASE
Table 180: Basic general settings for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Current-Reference
(primary current A)
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Voltage-Reference
(primary voltage kV)
Mode L1, L2, L3 - Pos Seq - Selection of
Arone measured current and
Pos Seq voltage
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3
Table 181: Basic parameter group settings for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
OpMode1 Off - UnderPower - Operation mode 1
UnderPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 0.1 1.0 %SB Power setting for
stage 1 in % of Sbase
Angle1 -180.0 - 180.0 0.1 0.0 Deg Angle for stage 1
TripDelay1 0.010 - 6000.000 0.001 1.000 s Trip delay for stage 1
DropDelay1 0.010 - 6000.000 0.001 0.060 s Drop delay for stage 1
OpMode2 Off - UnderPower - Operation mode 2
UnderPower
Power2 0.0 - 500.0 0.1 1.0 %SB Power setting for
stage 2 in % of Sbase
Angle2 -180.0 - 180.0 0.1 0.0 Deg Angle for stage 2
TripDelay2 0.010 - 6000.000 0.001 1.000 s Trip delay for stage 2
DropDelay2 0.010 - 6000.000 0.001 0.060 s Drop delay for stage 2
Table 182: Advanced parameter group settings for the GUPPDUP_37 (GUP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
k 0.00 - 0.99 0.01 0.00 - Low pass filter
coefficient for power
measurement, P and
Q
Hysteresis1 0.2 - 5.0 0.1 0.5 pu Absolute hysteresis of
stage 1
Hysteresis2 0.2 - 5.0 0.1 0.5 pu Absolute hysteresis of
stage 2
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate current at
5% of Ir
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate current at
30% of Ir
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate current at
100% of Ir
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
5% of Ur
UAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
30% of Ur
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
100% of Ur
IAngComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 Deg Angle calibration for
current at 5% of Ir
IAngComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 Deg Angle calibration for
current at 30% of Ir
IAngComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 Deg Angle calibration for
current at 100% of Ir
6.11.1 Introduction
The task of a generator in a power plant is to convert mechanical energy available as
a torque on a rotating shaft to electric energy.
Sometimes, the mechanical power from a prime mover may decrease so much that it
does not cover bearing losses and ventilation losses. Then, the synchronous generator
becomes a synchronous motor and starts to take electric power from the rest of the
power system. This operating state, where individual synchronous machines operate
as motors, implies no risk for the machine itself. If the generator under consideration
is very large and if it consumes lots of electric power, it may be desirable to disconnect
it to ease the task for the rest of the power system.
Often, the motoring condition may imply that the turbine is in a very dangerous state.
The task of the reverse power protection is to protect the turbine and not to protect
the generator itself.
Figure 176 illustrates the reverse power protection with underpower relay and with
overpower relay. The underpower relay gives a higher margin and should provide
better dependability. On the other hand, the risk for unwanted operation immediately
after synchronization may be higher. One should set the underpower relay to trip if
the active power from the generator is less than about 2%. One should set the
overpower relay to trip if the power flow from the network to the generator is higher
than 1%.
Q Q
Operate Operate
Line Line
Margin Margin
P P
en06000315.vsd
Figure 176: Reverse power protection with underpower relay and overpower
relay
Chosen current
phasors P
P = POWRE
Q = POWIM
en06000567.vsd
The function will use voltage and current phasors calculated in the pre-processing
blocks. The apparent complex power is calculated according to chosen formula as
shown in table 184.
Arone
S = U L1L 2 × I L1* - U L 2 L 3 × I L 3*
PosSeq
S = 3 × U PosSeq × I PosSeq *
L1L2
S = U L1L 2 × ( I L1* - I L 2* )
L2L3
S = U L 2 L 3 × ( I L 2* - I L 3* )
L3L1
S = U L 3 L1 × ( I L 3* - I L1* )
L1
S = 3 × U L1 × I L1*
L2
S = 3 × U L 2 × I L 2*
L3
S = 3 × U L 3 × I L 3*
The active and reactive power is available from the function and can be used for
monitoring and fault recording.
To avoid instability there is a settable hysteresis in the power function. The absolute
hysteresis of the stage1(2) is Hysteresis1(2) = abs (Power1(2) – drop-power1(2)). For
generator reverse power protection the power setting is very low, normally down to
0.02 pu of rated generator power. The hysteresis should therefore be set to a smaller
value. The drop-power value of stage1 can be calculated with the Power1(2),
Hysteresis1(2): drop-power1(2) = Power1(2) – Hysteresis1(2)
For small power1 values the hysteresis1 may not be too big, because the drop-
power1(2) would be too small. In such cases, the hysteresis1 greater than (0.5 *
Power1(2)) is corrected to the minimal value.
If the measured power drops under the drop-power1(2) value the function will reset
after a set time DropDelay1(2). The reset means that the start signal will drop out ant
that the timer of the stage will reset.
In order to minimize the influence of the noise signal on the measurement it is possible
to introduce the recursive, low pass filtering of the measured values for S (P, Q). This
will make slower measurement response to the step changes in the measured quantity.
Filtering is performed in accordance with the following recursive formula:
S = k × SOld + (1 - k ) × SCalculated
(Equation 105)
Where
S is a new measured value to be used for the protection function
Sold is the measured value given from the function in previous execution cycle
k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (i.e. without any additional delay). When
k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. A typical value for k = 0.14.
Measured currents and voltages used in the Power function can be calibrated to get
class 0.5 measuring accuracy. This is achieved by amplitude and angle compensation
at 5, 30 and 100% of rated current and voltage. The compensation below 5% and
above 100% is constant and linear in between, see example in figure 178.
Amplitude
% of Ir compensation
-10
IAmpComp5 Measured
IAmpComp30 current
IAmpComp100
5 30 100 % of Ir
0-5%: Constant
-10 5-30-100%: Linear
>100%: Constant
Degrees Angle
compensation
-10
IAngComp30 Measured
current
IAngComp5
IAngComp100
5 30 100 % of Ir
-10
en05000652.vsd
The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and
the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
Analog outputs from the function can be used for service values or in the disturbance
report. The active power is provided as a MW value: P, or in percent of base power:
PPERCENT. The reactive power is provided as a Mvar value: Q, or in percent of base
power: QPERCENT.
en07000028.vsd
Table 185: Input signals for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Current group connection
U3P Voltage group connection
BLOCK Block of function
BLOCK1 Block of stage 1
BLOCK2 Block of stage 2
Table 186: Output signals for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Common trip signal
TRIP1 Trip of stage 1
TRIP2 Trip of stage 2
START Common start
START1 Start of stage 1
START2 Start of stage 2
P Active Power in MW
PPERCENT Active power in % of SBASE
Q Reactive power in Mvar
QPERCENT Reactive power in % of SBASE
Table 187: Basic general settings for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Current-Reference
(primary current A)
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Voltage-Reference
(primary voltage kV)
Mode L1, L2, L3 - Pos Seq - Selection of
Arone measured current and
Pos Seq voltage
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3
Table 188: Basic parameter group settings for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
OpMode1 Off - OverPower - Operation mode 1
OverPower
Power1 0.0 - 500.0 0.1 120.0 %SB Power setting for
stage 1 in % of Sbase
Angle1 -180.0 - 180.0 0.1 0.0 Deg Angle for stage 1
TripDelay1 0.010 - 6000.000 0.001 1.000 s Trip delay for stage 1
DropDelay1 0.010 - 6000.000 0.001 0.060 s Drop delay for stage 1
OpMode2 Off - OverPower - Operation mode 2
OverPower
Power2 0.0 - 500.0 0.1 120.0 %SB Power setting for
stage 2 in % of Sbase
Angle2 -180.0 - 180.0 0.1 0.0 Deg Angle for stage 2
TripDelay2 0.010 - 6000.000 0.001 1.000 s Trip delay for stage 2
DropDelay2 0.010 - 6000.000 0.001 0.060 s Drop delay for stage 2
Table 189: Advanced parameter group settings for the GOPPDOP_32 (GOP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
k 0.00 - 0.99 0.01 0.00 - Low pass filter
coefficient for power
measurement, P and
Q
Hysteresis1 0.2 - 5.0 0.1 0.5 pu Absolute hysteresis of
stage 1 in % of Sbase
Hysteresis2 0.2 - 5.0 0.1 0.5 pu Absolute hysteresis of
stage 2 in % of Sbase
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate current at
5% of Ir
IAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate current at
30% of Ir
IAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate current at
100% of Ir
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
5% of Ur
UAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
30% of Ur
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
100% of Ur
Table continued on next page
6.12.1 Introduction
Conventional protection functions can not detect the broken conductor condition. The
broken conductor monitoring function (BRC), consisting of continuous current
unsymmetry check on the line where the terminal is connected will give alarm or trip
at detecting broken conductors.
• The difference in currents between the phase with the lowest current and the
phase with the highest current is greater than set percentage Iub> of the highest
phase current
• The highest phase current is greater than the minimum setting value IP>.
• The lowest phase current is below 50% of the minimum setting value IP>
The third condition is included to avoid problems in systems involving parallel lines.
If a conductor breaks in one phase on one line the parallel line will experience an
increase in current in the same phase. This might result in the first two conditions
being satisfied. If the unsymmetrical detection lasts for a period longer than the set
time tOper the TRIP output is activated.
The simplified logic diagram of the broken conductor check function is shown in
figure 180
• The IED is in TEST status and the function has been blocked from the HMI test
menu (BlockBRC=Yes).
• The input signal BLOCK is high.
The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to
receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other
internal functions of the terminal itself in order to receive a block command from
internal functions.
The output trip signal TRIP is a three phase trip. It can be used to command a trip to
the circuit breaker or for alarm purpose only.
TEST
TEST-ACTIVE
&
BlockBRC = Yes
BRC--START
Function Enable
BRC--BLOCK >1
t
BRC--TRIP
& t
Unsymmetrical
Current Detection
STI
IL1<50%IP>
IL2<50%IP> ³1
IL3<50%IP>
en07000122.vsd
Figure 180: Simplified logic diagram for broken conductor check function.
en07000034.vsd
Table 191: Input signals for the BRCPTOC_46 (BRC1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current input
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTR Blocks the operate output
Table 192: Output signals for the BRCPTOC_46 (BRC1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Operate signal of the protection logic
START Start signal of the protection logic
Table 193: Basic parameter group settings for the BRCPTOC_46 (BRC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 0 - 99999 1 3000 A IBase
Iub> 50 - 90 1 50 %IM Unbalance current
operation value in
percent of max
current
IP> 5 - 100 1 20 %IB Minimum phase
current for operation
of Iub> in % of Ibase
tOper 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Operate time delay
Table 194: Advanced parameter group settings for the BRCPTOC_46 (BRC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
tReset 0.010 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Time delay in reset
7.1.1 Introduction
Undervoltages can occur in the power system during faults or abnormal conditions.
The function can be used to open circuit breakers to prepare for system restoration at
power outages or as long-time delayed back-up to primary protection.
The function has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delay.
All the three phase to earth voltages are measured continuously, and compared with
the set values, U1< and U2<. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the
requirements to activate the start outputs. Either "1 out of 3", "2 out of 3" or "3 out
of 3" phases have to be lower than the corresponding set point to issue the
corresponding start signal.
To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time
delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay three different modes are available; inverse
curve A, inverse curve B, and a programmable inverse curve.
k
t=
æ U < -U ö
ç ÷
è U< ø (Equation 108)
k × 480
t= 2.0
+ 0.055
æ U < -U ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷
è U< ø (Equation 109)
é ù
ê ú
ê k×A ú+D
t=
êæ U < -U ö ú
p
êç B × -C÷ ú
ëè U< ø û (Equation 110)
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity.
There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set
to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U< down to U< *(1.0 –
CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: U< *(1.0 – CrvSatn/100). If the programmable
curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100 (Equation 111)
The lowest voltage is always used for the inverse time delay integration. The details
of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in section "Inverse
characteristics".
Trip signal issuing requires that the undervoltage condition continues for at least the
user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time
mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse
time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases
during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time
(tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2pickup for the
inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset. Here it should be noted that after
leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not
sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis area. Note that for the
undervoltage function the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the
voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset
the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during
the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See
figure 182 and figure 183.
tReset
tReset 1
Voltage 1 Measured
START Voltage
Hysteresis
TRIP
U1<
Time
START t1
TRIP
Time
Integrator Froozen Timer
t1
Time
Instantaneous
Linear Decrease
Reset en05000010.vsd
Figure 182: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay
tReset1
Voltage
tReset1
START
START
Hysteresis Measured Voltage
TRIP
U1<
Time
START t1
TRIP
Time Integrator
Froozen Timer
t1
Time
Instantaneous
Linear Decrease
Reset en05000011.vsd
Figure 183: Voltage profile causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay
7.1.2.3 Blocking
The undervoltage function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals
or by parameter settings, where:
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal1, either the
trip output of step 1, or both the trip and the start outputs of step 1, are blocked. The
characteristic of the blocking is set by the IntBlkSel1 parameter. This internal blocking
can also be set to "off" resulting in no voltage based blocking. Corresponding settings
and functionality are valid also for step 2.
In case of disconnection of the high voltage component the measured voltage will get
very low. The event will start both the under voltage function and the blocking
function, as seen in figure 184. The delay of the blocking function must be set less
than the time delay of under voltage function.
U Disconnection
Normal voltage
U1<
U2<
tBlkUV1 <
t1,t1Min
IntBlkStVal1
tBlkUV2 <
t2,t2Min
IntBlkStVal2
Time
Block step 1
Block step 2
en05000466.vsd
7.1.2.4 Design
Step 1
Time integrator TR1L2
MinVoltSelect t1 TRIP
or tReset1
ResetTypeCrv1 TR1L3
TR1
OR
Comparator ST2L1
UL1 < U2< Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector ST2L2
Comparator OpMode2 Phase 2
UL2 < U2< 1 out of 3
2 outof 3 ST2L3
Phase 3 Start
Comparator 3 out of 3
&
UL3 < U2< Trip ST2
Output OR
Step 2
Time integrator TR2L2
MinVoltSelect t2 TRIP
or tReset2
ResetTypeCrv2 TR2L3
TR2
OR
OR START
TRIP
OR
en05000012.vsd
en06000276.vsd
Table 196: Input signals for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function block
Signal Description
U3P Three phase voltages
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTR1 Block of operate signal, step 1
BLKST1 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 Block of operate signal, step 2
BLKST2 Block of step 2
Table 197: Output signals for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip
TR1 Common trip signal from step1
TR1L1 Trip signal from step1 phase L1
TR1L2 Trip signal from step1 phase L2
TR1L3 Trip signal from step1 phase L3
TR2 Common trip signal from step2
TR2L1 Trip signal from step2 phase L1
TR2L2 Trip signal from step2 phase L2
TR2L3 Trip signal from step2 phase L3
START General start signal
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
ST1 Common start signal from step1
ST1L1 Start signal from step1 phase L1
ST1L2 Start signal from step1 phase L2
ST1L3 Start signal from step1 phase L3
ST2 Common start signal from step2
ST2L1 Start signal from step2 phase L1
ST2L2 Start signal from step2 phase L2
ST2L3 Start signal from step2 phase L3
Table 198: Basic general settings for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
ConnType PhN DFT - PhN DFT - Group selector for
PhPh RMS connection type
PhN RMS
PhPh DFT
Table 199: Basic parameter group settings for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage
OperationStep1 Off - On - Enable execution of
On step 1
Characterist1 Definite time - Definite time - Selection of time
Inverse curve A delay curve type for
Inverse curve B step 1
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - 1 out of 3 - Number of phases
2 out of 3 required for op (1 of 3,
3 out of 3 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from
step 1
U1< 1 - 100 1 70 %UB Voltage setting/start
val (DT & IDMT) in %
of UBase, step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 5.00 s Definitive time delay
of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 1
k1 0.05 0.01 0.05 - 1.10 - Time multiplier for the
inverse time delay for
step 1
Table continued on next page
Table 200: Advanced parameter group settings for the UV2PTUV_27 (TUV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.025 s Reset time delay used
in IEC Definite Time
curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Selection of reset
Frozen timer curve type for step 1
Linearly
decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.025 s Time delay in IDMT
reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 1.000 0.001 0.005 - 200.000 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
BCrv1 1.00 0.01 0.50 - 100.00 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 0.1 0.0 - 1.0 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
DCrv1 0.000 0.001 0.000 - 60.000 - Parameter D for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
PCrv1 1.000 0.001 0.000 - 3.000 - Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 1 0 % Tuning param for
prog. under voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.025 s Reset time delay used
in IEC Definite Time
curve step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Selection of reset
Frozen timer curve type for step 2
Linearly
decreased
tIReset2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.025 s Time delay in IDMT
reset (s), step 2
ACrv2 1.000 0.001 0.005 - 200.000 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
BCrv2 1.00 0.01 0.50 - 100.00 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
CCrv2 0.0 0.1 0.0 - 1.0 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
Table continued on next page
7.2.1 Introduction
Overvoltages will occur in the power system during abnormal conditions such as
sudden power loss, tap changer regulating failures, open line ends on long lines.
The function can be used as open line end detector, normally then combined with
directional reactive over-power function or as system voltage supervision, normally
then giving alarm only or switching in reactors or switch out capacitor banks to control
the voltage.
The function has two voltage steps, each of them with inverse or definite time delayed.
The overvoltage function has an extremely high reset ratio to allow setting close to
system service voltage.
The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in
kV, phase-phase.
The overvoltage protection function can be set to measure phase to earth fundamental
value, phase to phase fundamental value, phase to earth RMS value or phase to phase
RMS value. The choise of measuring is done by the parameter ConnType in PST or
LHMI under Generall Settings/Voltage protection. The setting of the analog inputs
are given as primary phase to phase voltage and secondary phase to phase voltage.
The function will operate if the voltage gets higher than the set percentage of the set
base voltage UBase. This means operation for phase to earth voltage over:
All the three phase voltages are measured continuously, and compared with the set
values, U1> and U2>. The parameters OpMode1 and OpMode2 influence the
requirements to activate the start outputs. Either "1 out of 3", "2 out of 3" or "3 out
of 3" phases have to be higher than the corresponding set point to issue the
corresponding start signal.
To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time
delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available; inverse
curve A, inverse curve B, inverse curve C, and a programmable inverse curve.
TD
t=
æ V - Vpickup ö
ç ÷
è Vpickup ø (Equation 114)
k × 480
t= 2.0
æ U -U > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷ - 0.035
è U> ø (Equation 115)
k × 480
t= 3.0
æ U -U > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷ - 0.035
è U> ø
TD × 480
t= 3.0
æ V - Vpickup ö
ç 32 × Vpickup - 0.5 ÷ - 0.035
è ø (Equation 116)
k×A
t= p
+D
æ U -U > ö
çB× -C÷
è U> ø (Equation 117)
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity.
There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set
to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U< down to U< *(1.0 –
CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: U< *(1.0 – CrvSatn/100). If the programmable
curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100 (Equation 118)
The highest phase (or phase to phase) voltage is always used for the inverse time
delay integration, see figure 187. The details of the different inverse time
characteristics are shown in section "Inverse characteristics"
Voltage
IDMT Voltage
UL1
UL2
UL3
Time
en05000016.vsd
Figure 187: Voltage used for the inverse time characteristic integration
Trip signal issuing requires that the overvoltage condition continues for at least the
user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for definite time
mode (DT) and by selected voltage level dependent time curves for the inverse time
mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured voltage ceases
during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset time
(tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the inverse
time) the corresponding start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has
elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start
condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return
back to the hysteresis area. The hysteresis value for each step is settable (HystAbs2)
to allow an high and accurate reset of the function. It is also remarkable that for the
overvoltage function the IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the
voltage fluctuations during the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset
the timer, either the timer is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during
the reset time, or the timer value is linearly decreased during the reset time..
7.2.2.3 Blocking
The overvoltage function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals
where:
7.2.2.4 Design
OR TR1
Comparator ST2L1
UL1 > U2> Phase 1
Voltage Phase
Selector ST2L2
Comparator OpMode2 Phase 2
UL2 > U2> 1 out of 3
2 outof 3 ST2L3
3 out of 3 Phase 3 Start
Comparator &
UL3 > U2> Trip ST2
OR
Output
START Logic TR2L1
Step 2
Time integrator TR2L2
MaxVoltSelect t2 TRIP
or tReset2
ResetTypeCrv2 TR2L3
TR2
OR
START
OR
TRIP
OR
en05000013.vsd
en06000277.vsd
Table 202: Input signals for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function block
Signal Description
U3P Group signal for three phase voltage input
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTR1 Block of operate signal, step 1
BLKST1 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 Block of operate signal, step 2
BLKST2 Block of step 2
Table 203: Output signals for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip
TR1 Common trip signal from step1
TR1L1 Trip signal from step1 phase L1
TR1L2 Trip signal from step1 phase L2
TR1L3 Trip signal from step1 phase L3
TR2 Common trip signal from step2
TR2L1 Trip signal from step2 phase L1
TR2L2 Trip signal from step2 phase L2
TR2L3 Trip signal from step2 phase L3
START General start signal
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
ST1 Common start signal from step1
ST1L1 Start signal from step1 phase L1
ST1L2 Start signal from step1 phase L2
ST1L3 Start signal from step1 phase L3
ST2 Common start signal from step2
ST2L1 Start signal from step2 phase L1
ST2L2 Start signal from step2 phase L2
ST2L3 Start signal from step2 phase L3
Table 204: Basic general settings for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
ConnType PhG - PhG - TBD
PhPh
PhG RMS
PhPh RMS
Table 205: Basic parameter group settings for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage
OperationStep1 Off - On - Enable execution of
On step 1
Characterist1 Definite time - Definite time - Selection of time
Inverse curve A delay curve type for
Inverse curve B step 1
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
OpMode1 1 out of 3 - 1 out of 3 - Number of phases
2 out of 3 required for op (1 of 3,
3 out of 3 2 of 3, 3 of 3) from
step 1
U1> 1 - 200 1 120 %UB Voltage setting/start
val (DT & IDMT) in %
of UBase, step 1
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 5.00 s Definitive time delay
of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 1
k1 0.05 - 1.10 0.01 0.05 - Time multiplier for the
inverse time delay for
step 1
Table continued on next page
Table 206: Advanced parameter group settings for the OV2PTOV_59 (TOV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.025 s Reset time delay used
in IEC Definite Time
curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Selection of reset
Frozen timer curve type for step 1
Linearly
decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.025 s Time delay in IDMT
reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 - 100.00 0.01 1.00 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 - 1.0 0.1 0.0 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
Table continued on next page
7.3.1 Introduction
Residual voltages will occur in the power system during earth faults.
The function can be configured to calculate the residual voltage from the three phase
voltage input transformers or from a single phase voltage input transformer fed from
an open delta or neutral point voltage transformer.
The function has two voltage steps, each with inverse or definite time delayed.
voltages and internally in the protection terminal calculate the corresponding residual
voltage and connect this calculated residual voltage to the TRV function block. The
function has two steps with separate time delays. If the single-phase (residual) voltage
remains above the set value for a time period corresponding to the chosen time delay,
the corresponding trip signal is issued. The time delay characteristic is individually
chosen for the two steps and can be either definite time delay or inverse time delay
The voltage related settings are made in percent of the base voltage, which is set in
kV, phase-phase.
The residual voltage is measured continuously, and compared with the set values,
U1> and U2>.
To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.
The time delay for the two steps can be either definite time delay (DT) or inverse time
delay (IDMT). For the inverse time delay four different modes are available; inverse
curve A, inverse curve B, inverse curve C, and a programmable inverse curve.
TD
t=
æ V - Vpickup ö
ç ÷
è Vpickup ø (Equation 119)
k × 480
t= 2.0
æ U -U > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷ - 0.035
è U> ø (Equation 120)
k × 480
t= 3.0
æ U -U > ö
ç 32 × - 0.5 ÷ - 0.035
è U> ø (Equation 121)
k×A
t= p
+D
æ U -U > ö
çB× -C÷
è U> ø
TD × A
t= P
+D
æ V - Vpickup ö
çB× -C÷
è Vpickup ø (Equation 122)
When the denominator in the expression is equal to zero the time delay will be infinity.
There will be an undesired discontinuity. Therefore a tuning parameter CrvSatn is set
to compensate for this phenomenon. In the voltage interval U> up to U> *(1.0 +
CrvSatn/100) the used voltage will be: U> *(1.0 + CrvSatn/100). If the programmable
curve is used this parameter must be calculated so that:
CrvSatn
B× -C > 0
100 (Equation 123)
The details of the different inverse time characteristics are shown in chapter "Inverse
characteristics".
Trip signal issuing requires that the residual overvoltage condition continues for at
least the user set time delay. This time delay is set by the parameter t1 and t2 for
definite time mode (DT) and by some special voltage level dependent time curves for
the inverse time mode (IDMT). If the start condition, with respect to the measured
voltage ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined
reset time (tReset1 and tReset2 for the definite time and tIReset1 and tIReset2 for the
inverse time) the corresponding start output is reset, after that the defined reset time
has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start
condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return
back to the hysteresis area. It is also remarkable that for the overvoltage function the
IDMT reset time is constant and does not depend on the voltage fluctuations during
the drop-off period. However, there are three ways to reset the timer, either the timer
is reset instantaneously, or the timer value is frozen during the reset time, or the timer
value is linearly decreased during the reset time. See figure 190 and figure 191.
tReset
1
tReset1
Voltage
START
TRIP
U1>
Hysteresis
Measured
Voltage
Time
START t1
TRIP
Time
Integrator Linear Decrease
Froozen Timer
t1
Instantaneous Time
Reset en05000019.vsd
Figure 190: Voltage profile not causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay
tReset1
Voltage tReset1
START TRIP
START
Hysteresis
U1>
Measured Voltage
Time
START t1
TRIP
Time Integrator
Froozen Timer
t1
Time
Instantaneous
Linear Decrease en05000020.vsd
Reset
Figure 191: Voltage profile causing a reset of the start signal for step 1, and definite time delay
7.3.2.3 Blocking
The residual overvoltage function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input
signals where:
7.3.2.4 Design
ST2
Comparator Phase 1
UN > U2> TR2
Start
START &
Trip START
Output OR
Time integrator
Logic
t2 TRIP
tReset2
Step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 TRIP
OR
en05000748.vsd
en06000278.vsd
Table 208: Input signals for the ROV2PTOV_59N (TRV1-) function block
Signal Description
U3P Three phase voltages
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTR1 Block of operate signal, step 1
BLKST1 Block of step 1
BLKTR2 Block of operate signal, step 2
BLKST2 Block of step 2
Table 209: Output signals for the ROV2PTOV_59N (TRV1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip
TR1 Common trip signal from step1
TR2 Common trip signal from step2
START General start signal
ST1 Common start signal from step1
ST2 Common start signal from step2
Table 210: Basic parameter group settings for the ROV2PTOV_59N (TRV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage
OperationStep1 Off - On - Enable execution of
On step 1
Characterist1 Definite time - Definite time - Selection of time
Inverse curve A delay curve type for
Inverse curve B step 1
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
U1> 1 - 200 1 30 %UB Voltage setting/start
val (DT & IDMT), step
1 in % of UBase
t1 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 5.00 s Definitive time delay
of step 1
t1Min 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 1
k1 0.05 - 1.10 0.01 0.05 - Time multiplier for the
inverse time delay for
step 1
HystAbs1 0.0 - 100.0 0.1 0.5 %UB Absolute hysteresis in
% of UBase, step 1
OperationStep2 Off - On - Enable execution of
On step 2
Characterist2 Definite time - Definite time - Selection of time
Inverse curve A delay curve type for
Inverse curve B step 2
Inverse curve C
Prog. inv. curve
U2> 1 - 100 1 45 %UB Voltage setting/start
val (DT & IDMT), step
2 in % of UBase
t2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Definitive time delay
of step 2
t2Min 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Minimum operate
time for inverse
curves for step 2
k2 0.05 - 1.10 0.01 0.05 - Time multiplier for the
inverse time delay for
step 2
HystAbs2 0.0 - 100.0 0.1 0.5 %UB Absolute hysteresis in
% of UBase, step 2
Table 211: Advanced parameter group settings for the ROV2PTOV_59N (TRV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
tReset1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.025 s Reset time delay used
in IEC Definite Time
curve step 1
ResetTypeCrv1 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Selection of reset
Frozen timer curve type for step 1
Linearly
decreased
tIReset1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.025 s Time delay in IDMT
reset (s), step 1
ACrv1 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
BCrv1 0.50 - 100.00 0.01 1.00 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
CCrv1 0.0 - 1.0 0.1 0.0 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
DCrv1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 - Parameter D for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
PCrv1 0.000 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for step 1
CrvSat1 0 - 100 1 0 % Tuning param for
prog. over voltage
IDMT curve, step 1
tReset2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.025 s Time delay in DT
reset (s), step 2
ResetTypeCrv2 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Selection of reset
Frozen timer curve type for step 2
Linearly
decreased
tIReset2 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.025 s Time delay in IDMT
reset (s), step 2
ACrv2 0.005 - 200.000 0.001 1.000 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
BCrv2 0.50 - 100.00 0.01 1.00 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
CCrv2 0.0 - 1.0 0.1 0.0 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for step 2
Table continued on next page
7.4.1 Introduction
When the laminated core of a power transformer or generator is subjected to a
magnetic flux density beyond its design limits, stray flux will flow into non-laminated
components not designed to carry flux and cause eddy currents to flow. The eddy
currents can cause excessive heating and severe damage to insulation and adjacent
parts in a relatively short time. Function has settable inverse operating curve and
independent alarm stage.
Modern design transformers are more sensitive to overexcitation than earlier types.
This is a result of the more efficient designs and designs which rely on the
improvement in the uniformity of the excitation level of modern systems. Thus, if
emergency that includes overexcitation does occur, transformers may be damaged
unless corrective action is promptly taken. Transformer manufacturers recommend
an overexcitation protection as a part of the transformer protection system.
E = 4.44 × f × n × B max × A
(Equation 124)
V E¤f
M = relative æè -------öø = ------------------------
Hz ( Ur ) ¤ ( fr )
(Equation 125)
The IEC 60076 - 1 standard requires that transformers shall be capable of operating
continuously at 10% above rated voltage at no load, and rated frequency. At no load,
the ratio of the actual generator terminal voltage to the actual frequency should not
exceed 1.1 times the ratio of transformer rated voltage to the rated frequency on a
sustained basis, see equation 126.
---- £ 1.1 × Ur
E ------
f fr
(Equation 126)
E V/Hz>
---- £ ---------------------
f fr (Equation 127)
where:
V/Hz> is the maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency.
V/Hz> is an OEX setting parameter. The setting range is 100% to 150%. If the user
does not know exactly what to set, then the standard IEC 60076 - 1, section 4.4, the
default value V/Hz> = 1.10 pu shall be used.
V E¤f
M = relative æè -------öø = --------------
Hz Ur ¤ fr
(Equation 128)
It is clear from the above formula that, for an unloaded power transformer, M = 1 for
any E and f, where the ratio E / f is equal to Ur / fr. A power transformer is not
overexcited as long as the relative excitation is M ≤ V/Hz>, V/Hz> expressed in %.
The relative overexcitation is thus defined as shown in equation 129.
As an example, at a transformer with a 15% short circuit impedance Xsc, the full load,
0.8 power factor, 105% voltage on the load side, the actual flux level in the transformer
core, will not be significantly different from that at the 110% voltage, no load, rated
frequency, provided that the short circuit impedance X can be equally divided
between the primary and the secondary winding: Xleak = Xleak1 = Xleak2 = Xsc /
2 = 0.075 pu..
OEX calculates the internal induced voltage E if Xleak (meaning the leakage
reactance of the winding where OEX is connected) is known to the user. The
assumption taken for 2-winding power transformers that Xleak = Xsc / 2 is
unfortunately most often not true. For a 2-winding power transformer the leakage
reactances of the two windings depend on how the windings are located on the core
with respect to each other. In the case of three-winding power transformers the
situation is still more complex. If a user has the knowledge on the leakage reactance,
then it should applied. If a user has no idea about it, Xleak can be set to Xc/2. The
OEX protection will then take the given measured terminal voltage U, as the induced
voltage E.
If one phase-to-phase voltage is available from the side where OEX protection is
applied, then OEX protection function block shall be set to measure this voltage,
MeasuredU. The particular voltage which is used determines the two currents that
must be used.This must be chosen with the setting MeasuredI.
If, for example, voltage Uab is fed to OEX, then currents Ia, and Ib must be applied,
etc. From these two input currents, current Iab = Ia - Ib is calculated internally by the
OEX protection algorithm. The phase-to-phase voltage must be higher than 70% of
the rated value, otherwise the OEX protection algorithm is exited without calculating
the excitation. ERROR output is set to 1, and the displayed value of relative excitation
V / Hz shows 0.000.
If three phase-to-earth voltages are available from the side where OEX is connected,
then OEX protection function block shall be set to measure positive sequence voltage.
In this case the positive sequence voltage and the positive sequence current are used
by OEX protection. A check is made within OEX protection if the positive sequence
voltage is higher than 70% rated phase-to-earth voltage; below this value, OEX is
exited immediately, and no excitation is calculated. ERROR output is set to 1, and
the displayed value of relative excitation V / Hz shows 0.000.
The frequency value is received from the pre-processing block. The function is in
operation for frequencies within the range of 33-60 Hz and of 42-75 Hz for 50 and
60 Hz respectively.
The so called IEEE law approximates a square law and has been chosen based on
analysis of the various transformers’ overexcitation capability characteristics. They
can match well a transformer core capability.
0.18 × k 0.18 × k
t o p = --------------------------------------------- = ----------------------------------------
2 2
( M – V/Hz> ) overexcitation (Equation 130)
where:
M is excitation, mean value in the interval from t = 0 to t = top
V/Hz> is maximum continuously allowed voltage at no load, and rated frequency, in pu and
k is time multiplier setting for inverse time functions, see figure 195.
Parameter k (“time multiplier setting”) selects one delay curve from the family of curves.
t op
2
ò ( M(t) – V/Hz> ) dt ³ 0.18 × k
0 (Equation 131)
A digital, numerical relay will instead look for the lowest j (i.e. j = n) where it becomes
true that:
n
2
Dt × å ( M(j) – V/Hz> ) ³ 0.18 × k
j=k (Equation 132)
where:
Dt is the time interval between two successive executions of overexcitation function and
M(j) - V/Hz> is the relative excitation at (time j) in excess of the normal (rated) excitation which is given
as Ur/fr.
As long as M > V/Hz> (i.e. overexcitation condition), the above sum can only be
larger with time, and if the overexcitation persists, the protected transformer will be
tripped at j = n.
Inverse delays as per figure 195, can be modified (limited) by two special definite
delay settings, namely tMax and tMin, see figure 194.
delay in s
tMax
overexcitation
tMin
0 Mmax - V/Hz> Overexcitation M-V/Hz>
99001067.vsd
A definite maximum time, tMax, can be used to limit the operate time at low degrees
of overexcitation. Inverse delays longer than tMax will not be allowed. In case the
inverse delay is longer than tMax, OEX trips after tMaxt_MaxTripDelay seconds.
A definite minimum time, tMin, can be used to limit the operate time at high degrees
of overexcitation. In case the inverse delay is shorter than tMin, OEX function trips
after tMint_MinTripDelay seconds. Also, the inverse delay law is no more valid
beyond excitation Mmax. Beyond Mmax (beyond overexcitation Mmax - V/Hz>),
the delay will always be tMin, no matter what overexcitation.
1000
100
k = 60
k = 20
k = 10
10 k=9
k=8
k=7
k=6
k=5
k=4
k=3
k=2
k=1
1
1 2 3 4 5 10 20 30 40
OVEREXCITATION IN % (M-Emaxcont)*100)
en01000373.vsd
The critical value of excitation Mmax is determined indirectly via OEX protection
function setting V/Hz>>. V/Hz>> can be thought of as a no-load-rated-frequency
voltage, where the inverse law should be replaced by a short definite delay, tMin. If,
for example, V/Hz>> = 140 %, then Mmax is according to equation 133.
(V/Hz>>) ¤ f
Mmax = -------------------------
- = 1.40
Ur ¤ fr
(Equation 133)
The Tailor-Made law allows a user to design an arbitrary delay characteristic. In this
case the interval between M = V/Hz>, and M = Mmax is automatically divided into
five equal subintervals, with six delays. (settings t1, t2, t3, t4, t5, and t6) as shown in
the figure 196. These times should be set so that t1 => t2 => t3 => t4 => t5 => t6.
delay in s
tMax
under- tMin
excitation Overexcitation M-Emaxcont
0 Mmax - Emaxcont Excitation M
Emaxcont Mmax
99001068.vsd
Delays between two consecutive points, for example t3 and t4, are obtained by linear
interpolation.
Should it happen that tMax be lower than, for example, delays t1, and t2, the actual
delay would be tMax. Above Mmax, the delay can only be tMin.
7.4.2.3 Cooling
A service value data item called Time to trip, and designated on the display by tTRIP
is available in seconds on the local HMI, or monitoring tool. This value is an
estimation of the remaining time to trip if the overexcitation remained on the level it
had when the estimation was done. This information can be useful with small or
moderate overexcitations. If the overexcitation is so low that the valid delay is
tMax, then the estimation of the remaining time to trip is done against tMax.
V E¤f
M = relative æ -------ö = --------------
è Hzø Uf ¤ fr
(Equation 134)
If less than V / Hz = V/Hz> (in pu) is shown on the HMI display (or read via SM/
RET521), the power transformer is underexcited. If the value of V/Hz is shown which
is equal to V/Hz> (in pu), it means that the excitation is exactly equal to the power
transformer continuous capability. If a value higher than the value of V/Hz> is shown,
the protected power transformer is overexcited. For example, if V/Hz = 1.100 is
shown, while V/Hz> = 110 %, then the power transformer is exactly on its maximum
continuous excitation limit.
The third item of the OEX protection service report is the thermal status of the
protected power transformer iron core, designated on the display by ThermalStatus.
This gives the thermal status in % of the trip value which corresponds to 100%.
Thermal Status should reach 100% at the same time, when tTRIP reaches 0 seconds.
If the protected power transformer is then for some reason not switched off, the
ThermalStaus shall go over 100%.
If the delay as per IEEE law, or Tailor-made Law, is limited by tMax, and/or TMin,
then the Thermal Status will generally not reach 100% at the same time, when tTRIP
reaches 0 seconds. For example, if, at low degrees of overexcitation, the very long
delay is limited by tMax, then the OEX TRIP output signal will be set to 1 before the
Thermal status reaches 100%.
A separate step, AlarmLevel, is provided for alarming purpose. The voltages are
normally set 2% lower and has a definite time delay, tAlarm. This will give the
operator an early abnormal voltages warning.
OVEX: FS = 1 = 2*SI + SU
BLOCK
AlarmLevel
ALARM
SIDE t>tAlarm &
t
Prepool I tAlarm
M>V/Hz>
SI1 t>tMin TRIP
t &
V/Hz> tMin
SI2 Calculation
Ei k
of internal M= M
induced (Ei / f) M IEEE law
SU1 voltage Ei (Ur / fr)
Prepool O ³1
2 M t
Tailor-made law
M>V/Hz>> tMax
Xleak
ERROR
V/Hz>>
en05000162.vsd
Simplification of the diagram is in the way the IEEE and Tailor-made delays are
calculated. The cooling process is not shown. It is not shown that voltage and
frequency are separately checked against their respective limit values.
en05000329.vs
d
Table 213: Input signals for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Current connection
U3P Voltage connection
BLOCK Block of function
RESET Reset operation
Table 214: Output signals for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip from overexcitation function
START Overexcitation above set operate level (instantaneous)
ALARM Overexcitation above set alarm level (delayed)
Table 215: Basic general settings for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
MeasuredU PosSeq - L1L2 - Selection of
L1L2 measured voltage
L2L3
L3L1
MeasuredI L1L2 - L1L2 - Selection of
L2L3 measured current
L3L1
PosSeq
Table 216: Basic parameter group settings for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current (rated
phase current) in A
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage (main
voltage) in kV
V/Hz> 100.0 - 180.0 0.1 110.0 %UB/f Operate level of V/Hz
at no load and rated
freq in % of (Ubase/
frated)
V/Hz>> 100.0 - 200.0 0.1 140.0 %UB/f High level of V/Hz
above which tMin is
used, in % of (Ubase/
frated)
XLeak 0.000 - 200.000 0.001 0.000 ohm Winding leakage
reactance in primary
ohms
TrPulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Length of the pulse for
trip signal (in sec)
tMin 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 7.000 s Minimum trip delay for
V/Hz inverse curve, in
sec
tMax 0.00 - 9000.00 0.01 1800.00 s Maximum trip delay
for V/Hz inverse
curve, in sec
Table continued on next page
Table 217: Advanced parameter group settings for the OEXPVPH_24 (OEX1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
t1Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 0.01 7200.00 s Time delay t1
(longest) for tailor
made curve, in sec
t2Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 0.01 3600.00 s Time delay t2 for tailor
made curve, in sec
t3Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 0.01 1800.00 s Time delay t3 for tailor
made curve, in sec
t4Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 0.01 900.00 s Time delay t4 for tailor
made curve, in sec
t5Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 0.01 450.00 s Time delay t5 for tailor
made curve, in sec
t6Tailor 0.00 - 9000.00 0.01 225.00 s Time delay t6
(shortest) for tailor
made curve, in sec
(0.18 × k )
IEEE : t =
( M - 1) 2
where M = relative (V/Hz) = (E/f)/
(Ur/fr)
Minimum time delay for inverse (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
function
Maximum time delay for inverse (0.00–9000.00) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
function
Alarm time delay (0.000–60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
7.5.1 Introduction
A voltage differential monitoring function is available. It compares the voltages from
two three phase sets of voltage transformers and has one sensitive alarm step and one
trip step. It can be used to supervise the voltage from two fuse groups or two different
voltage transformers fuses as a fuse/MCB supervision function.
Loss of one U1or all U2 voltages will block the differential measurement. This
blocking can be switched off with setting BlkDiffAtULow=No.
The function can be blocked from an external condition with the binary BLOCK input.
It can e.g. be activated from a fuse failure supervision function block.
UDTripL1>
AND
UDTripL1>
AND
AND START
UDAlarmL1>
AND
UDAlarmL1> O tAlarm
AND
R t AND ALARM
UDAlarmL1>
AND
U1<L1
tAlarm
U1<L2 OR t U1LOW
AND
AND
U1<L3
OR
BlkDiffAtULow
U2<L1
t1
U2<L2 AND t U2LOW
AND
U2<L3
BLOCK
en06000382.vsd
en06000528.vsd
Table 219: Input signals for the VDCPTOV_60 (VDC1-) function block
Signal Description
U3P1 Bus voltage
U3P2 Capacitor voltage
BLOCK Block of function
Table 220: Output signals for the VDCPTOV_60 (VDC1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Voltage differential protection operated
START Start of voltage differential protection
ALARM Voltage differential protection alarm
U1LOW Loss of U1 voltage
U2LOW Loss of U2 voltage
UL1DIFF Differential Voltage phase L1
UL2DIFF Differential Voltage phase L2
UL3DIFF Differential Voltage phase L3
Table 221: Basic parameter group settings for the VDCPTOV_60 (VDC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off/On
On
UBase 0.50 - 2000.00 0.01 400.00 kV Base Voltage
BlkDiffAtULow No - Yes - Block operation at low
Yes voltage
UDTrip 0.0 - 100.0 0.1 5.0 %UB Operate level, in % of
UBase
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 1.000 s Time delay for voltage
differential operate, in
milliseconds
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay for voltage
differential reset, in
seconds
U1Low 0.0 - 100.0 0.1 70.0 %UB Input 1 undervoltage
level, in % of UBase
U2Low 0.0 - 100.0 0.1 70.0 %UB Input 2 undervoltage
level, in % of UBase
Table continued on next page
Table 222: Advanced parameter group settings for the VDCPTOV_60 (VDC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
RFL1 0.000 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Ratio compensation
factor phase L1
UCap*RFL1=UL1Bus
RFL2 0.000 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Ratio compensation
factor phase L2
UCap*RFL2=UL2Bus
RFL3 0.000 - 3.000 0.001 1.000 - Ratio compensation
factor phase L3
UCap*RFL3=UL3Bus
7.6.1 Introduction
The loss of voltage detection, (PTUV, 27), is suitable for use in networks with an
automatic System restoration function. The function issues a three-pole trip command
to the circuit breaker, if all three phase voltages fall below the set value for a time
longer the set time and the circuit breaker remains closed.
Additionally, the function is automatically blocked if only one or two phase voltages
have been detected low for more than tBlock.
The LOVPTUV function operates again only if the line has been restored to full
voltage for at least tRestore. Operation of the function is also inhibited by fuse failure
and open circuit breaker information signals, by their connection to dedicated inputs
of the function block.
Due to undervoltage conditions being continuous the trip pulse is limited to a length
set by setting tPulse.
The operation of the function is supervised by the fuse-failure function (VTSU input)
and the information about the open position (CBOPEN) of the associated circuit
breaker.
The BLOCK input can be connected to a binary input of the terminal in order to
receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other
internal functions of the terminal itself in order to receive a block command from
internal functions. The function is also blocked when the IED is in TEST status and
the function has been blocked from the HMI test menu. (BlockLOV=Yes).
TEST-ACTIVE
&
BlockLOV = Yes
LOV-START
LOV--BLOCK >1
Function Enable tTrip tPulse LOV–TRIP
STUL1N & t
STUL2N &
only 1 or 2 phases are low for
Latched at least 10 s (not three)
STUL3N
Enable
&
tBlock
>1 t
tRestore
>1 Set Enable
t
>1
Line restored for
at least 3 s
en07000089.vsd
en07000039.vsd
Table 224: Input signals for the LOVPTUV_27 (LOV1-) function block
Signal Description
U3P Voltage connection
BLOCK Block the all outputs
CBOPEN Circuit breaker open
VTSU Block from voltage circuit supervision
Table 225: Output signals for the LOVPTUV_27 (LOV1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip signal
START Start signal
Table 226: Basic parameter group settings for the LOVPTUV_27 (LOV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off/On
On
UBase 0.1 - 9999.9 0.1 400.0 kV Base voltage
UPE 1 - 100 1 70 %UB Operate voltagein%
of base voltage
Ubase
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 7.000 s Operate time delay
Table 227: Advanced parameter group settings for the LOVPTUV_27 (LOV1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
tPulse 0.050 - 60.000 0.001 0.150 s Duration of TRIP
pulse
tBlock 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Time delay to block
when all 3ph voltages
are not low
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 3.000 s Time delay for enable
the function after
restoration
8.1.1 Introduction
Underfrequency occurs as a result of lack of generation in the network.
The function can be used for load shedding systems, remedial action schemes, gas
turbine start-up etc.
The function is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation may be based
on single phase, phase-to-phase or positive sequence voltage measurement.
To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.
The time delay for the underfrequency function can be either a settable definite time
delay or a voltage magnitude dependent time delay, where the time delay depends on
the voltage level; a high voltage level gives a longer time delay and a low voltage
level causes a short time delay. For the definite time delay, the setting tTrip sets the
time delay
For the voltage dependent time delay the measured voltage level and the settings
UNom, UMin, Exponent, tMax and tMin set the time delay according to figure 204
and equation 136. The setting TimerOperation is used to decide what type of time
delay to apply. The output STARTDUR, gives the time elapsed from the issue of the
start output, in percent of the total operation time available in PST.
Trip signal issuing requires that the underfrequency condition continues for at least
the user set time delay. If the start condition, with respect to the measured frequency
ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset
time, tReset, the start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here
it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be
fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis
area.
On the output of the underfrequency function a 100 ms pulse is issued, after a time
delay corresponding to the setting of TimeDlyRestore, when the measured frequency
returns to the level corresponding to the setting RestoreFreq.
Since the fundamental frequency in a power system is the same all over the system,
except some deviations during power oscillations, another criterion is needed to
decide, where to take actions, based on low frequency. In many applications the
voltage level is very suitable, and in most cases is load shedding preferable in areas
with low voltage. Therefore, a voltage dependent time delay has been introduced, to
make sure that load shedding, or other actions, take place at the right location. At
constant voltage, U, the voltage dependent time delay is calculated according to
equation 136. At non-constant voltage, the actual time delay is integrated in a similar
way as for the inverse time characteristic for the undervoltage and overvoltage
functions.
Exponent
é U - UMin ù
t=ê × ( tMax - tMin ) + tMin
ë UNom - UMin úû (Equation 136)
where:
t is the voltage dependent time delay (at constant voltage),
U is the measured voltage
Exponent is a setting,
UMin, UNom are voltage settings corresponding to
tMax, tMin are time settings.
UMin = 90%
UNom = 100%
tMax = 1.0 s
tMin = 0.0 s
Exponent = 0, 1, 2, 3 and 4
1
0
1
Exponenent
TimeDlyOperate [s]
2
3
0.5 4
0
90 95 100
U [% of UBase]
en05000075.vsd
8.1.2.4 Blocking
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal, both the
start and the trip outputs, are blocked.
8.1.2.5 Design
Block
BLOCK BLKDMAGN
OR
Comparator
U < IntBlockLevel
TimeDlyReset TRIP
100 ms
Comparator RESTORE
TimeDlyRestore
f > RestoreFreq
en05000726.vsd
en06000279.vsd
Table 229: Input signals for the SAPTUF_81 (TUF1-) function block
Signal Description
U3P Voltage connection
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTRIP Blocking operate output.
BLKREST Blocking restore output.
Table 230: Output signals for the SAPTUF_81 (TUF1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Operate/trip signal for frequency.
START Start/pick-up signal for frequency.
RESTORE Restore signal for load restoring purposes.
BLKDMAGN Blocking indication due to low amplitude.
Frequency Measured frequency
Table 231: Basic parameter group settings for the SAPTUF_81 (TUF1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage
StartFrequency 35.00 - 75.00 0.01 48.80 Hz Frequency setting/
start value.
IntBlockLevel 0 - 100 1 50 %UB Internal blocking level
in % of UBase.
Table continued on next page
8.2.1 Introduction
Overfrequency will occur at sudden load drops or shunt faults in the power network.
In some cases close to generating part governor problems can also cause
overfrequency.
The function can be used for generation shedding, remedial action schemes etc. It can
also be used as a sub-nominal frequency stage initiating load restoring.
The function is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation may be based
on single phase, phase-to-phase or positive sequence voltage measurement.
The time delay for the overfrequency function is a settable definite time delay,
specified by the setting tTrip. The output STARTDUR, gives the time elapsed from
the issue of the start output, in percent of the total operation time available in PST.
Trip signal issuing requires that the overfrequency condition continues for at least the
user set time delay. If the start condition, with respect to the measured frequency
ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a user defined reset
time, tReset, the start output is reset, after that the defined reset time has elapsed. Here
it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the start condition must be
fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only return back to the hysteresis
area.
8.2.2.3 Blocking
The overfrequency function can be partially or totally blocked, by binary input signals
or by parameter settings, where:
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlkStVal, both the start
and the trip outputs, are blocked.
8.2.2.4 Design
BLOCK
BLKTRIP BLOCK
OR BLKDMAGN
Comparator
U < IntBlockLevel
Start
&
Trip
Voltage Time integrator Output
Logic
Definite Time Delay START START
Frequency Comparator
f > StartFrequency TimeDlyOperate
TRIP
TimeDlyReset
TRIP
en05000735.vsd
en06000280.vsd
Table 233: Input signals for the SAPTOF_81 (TOF1-) function block
Signal Description
U3P Voltage connection
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTRIP Blocking operate output.
Table 234: Output signals for the SAPTOF_81 (TOF1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Operate/trip signal for frequency.
START Start/pick-up signal for frequency.
BLKDMAGN Blocking indication due to low amplitude.
Frequency Measured frequency
Table 235: Basic parameter group settings for the SAPTOF_81 (TOF1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage
StartFrequency 35.00 - 75.00 0.01 51.20 Hz Frequency setting/
start value.
IntBlockLevel 0 - 100 1 50 %UB Internal blocking level
in % of UBase.
TimeDlyOperate 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Operate time delay in
over/under-frequency
mode.
TimeDlyReset 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay for reset.
8.3.1 Introduction
Rate of change of frequency function gives an early indication of a main disturbance
in the system.
The function can be used for generation shedding, load shedding, remedial action
schemes etc.
The function is provided with an undervoltage blocking. The operation may be based
on single phase, phase-to-phase or positive sequence voltage measurement.
To avoid oscillations of the output start signal, a hysteresis has been included.
The rate-of-change of frequency function has a settable definite time delay, tTrip.
The output STARTDUR, gives the time elapsed from the issue of the start output, in
percent of the total operation time.
Trip signal issuing requires that the rate-of-change of frequency condition continues
for at least the user set time delay, tTrip. If the start condition, with respect to the
measured frequency ceases during the delay time, and is not fulfilled again within a
user defined reset time, tReset, the start output is reset, after that the defined reset
time has elapsed. Here it should be noted that after leaving the hysteresis area, the
start condition must be fulfilled again and it is not sufficient for the signal to only
return back into the hysteresis area.
The RESTORE output of the rate-of-change of frequency function is set, after a time
delay equal to the setting of tRestore, when the measured frequency has returned to
the level corresponding to RestoreFreq, after an issue of the TRIP output signal. If
tRestore is set to 0.000 s the restore functionality is disabled, and no output will be
given. The restore functionality is only active for lowering frequency conditions and
the restore sequence is disabled if a new negative frequency gradient is detected
during the restore period, defined by the settings RestoreFreq and tRestore.
8.3.2.3 Blocking
If the measured voltage level decreases below the setting of IntBlockLevel, both the
start and the trip outputs, are blocked.
8.3.2.4 Design
setting StartFreqGrad is essential, and controls if the function is used for raising or
lowering frequency conditions. The design of the rate-of-change of frequency
function is schematically described in figure 209.
BLOCK
BLKTRIP
BLKRESET BLOCK
OR
Start
Rate-of-Change Time integrator &
Comparator
of Frequency Trip
If
Definite Time Delay Output
[StartFreqGrad<0 START START
Logic
AND
TimeDlyOperate
df/dt < StartFreqGrad]
OR
TimeDlyReset
[StartFreqGrad>0
AND
TRIP
df/dt > StartFreqGrad]
Then
START
100 ms
en05000835.vsd
en06000281.vsd
Table 237: Input signals for the SAPFRC_81 (RCF1-) function block
Signal Description
U3P Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTRIP Blocking operate output.
BLKREST Blocking restore output.
Table 238: Output signals for the SAPFRC_81 (RCF1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Operate/trip signal for frequencyGradient
START Start/pick-up signal for frequencyGradient
RESTORE Restore signal for load restoring purposes.
BLKDMAGN Blocking indication due to low amplitude.
Table 239: Basic parameter group settings for the SAPFRC_81 (RCF1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base setting for the
phase-phase voltage
in kV
StartFreqGrad -10.00 - 10.00 0.01 0.50 Hz/s Frequency gradient
start value. Sign
defines direction.
IntBlockLevel 0 - 100 1 50 %UB Internal blocking level
in % of UBase.
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Operate time delay in
pos./neg. frequency
gradient mode.
RestoreFreq 45.00 - 65.00 0.01 49.90 Hz Restore frequency if
frequency is above
frequency value (Hz)
tRestore 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Restore time delay.
tReset 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay for reset.
I< I>
U< U>
9.1.1 Introduction
The function can be utilized as a negative sequence current protection detecting
unsymmetrical conditions such as open phase or unsymmetrical faults.
The function can also be used to improve phase selection for high resistive earth faults,
outside the distance protection reach, for the transmission line. Three functions are
used which measures the neutral current and each of the three phase voltages. This
will give an independence from load currents and this phase selection will be used in
conjunction with the detection of the earth fault from the directional earth fault
protection function.
When the generator is taken out of service, and non-rotating, there is a risk that the
generator circuit breaker flashes over or is closed by mistake.
To prevent damages on the generator or turbine, it is essential that high speed tripping
is provided in case of inadvertent energization of the generator. This tripping should
be almost instantaneous (< 100 ms).
There is a risk that the current into the generator at inadvertent energization will be
limited so that the “normal” overcurrent or underimpedance protection will not detect
the dangerous situation. The delay of these protection functions might be too long.
For big and important machines, fast protection against inadvertent energizing should,
therefore, be included in the protective scheme.
The function is always connected to three-phase current and three-phase voltage input
in the configuration tool, but it will always measure only one current and one voltage
quantity selected by the end user in the setting tool.
The user can select to measure one of the current quantities shown in table 241.
11 Phase2-Phase3 GF function will measure the current phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase L2 current phasor and phase L3
current phasor (i.e. IL2-IL3)
13 MaxPh-Ph GF function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the maximum
magnitude
14 MinPh-Ph GF function will measure ph-ph current phasor with the minimum
magnitude
15 UnbalancePh-Ph GF function will measure magnitude of unbalance current, which is
internally calculated as the algebraic magnitude difference between the
ph-ph current phasor with maximum magnitude and ph-ph current phasor
with minimum magnitude. Phase angle will be set to 0° all the time
The user can select to measure one of the voltage quantities shown in table 242:
11 Phase2-Phase3 GF function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase L2 voltage phasor and phase L3
voltage phasor (i.e. UL2-UL3)
12 Phase3-Phase1 GF function will measure the voltage phasor internally calculated as the
vector difference between the phase L3 voltage phasor and phase L1
voltage phasor (i.e. UL3-UL1)
It is important to notice that the voltage selection from table 242 is always applicable
regardless the actual external VT connections. The three-phase VT inputs can be
connected to IED as either three phase-to-ground voltages UL1, UL2 & UL3 or three
phase-to-phase voltages UL1L2, UL2L3 & UL3L1). This information about actual VT
connection is entered as a setting parameter for the pre-processing block, which will
then take automatic care about it.
The user can select one of the current quantities shown in table 243 for built-in current
restraint feature:
The parameter settings for the base quantities, which represent the base (i.e. 100%)
for pickup levels of all measuring stages shall be entered as setting parameters for
every GF function.
1. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes, when the
measured Current Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 241.
2. rated phase current of the protected object in primary amperes multiplied by √3
(i.e. 1,732 x Iphase), when the measured Current Quantity is selected from 10 to
15, as shown in table 241.
1. rated phase-to-ground voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 1 to 9, as shown in table 242.
2. rated phase-to-phase voltage of the protected object in primary kV, when the
measured Voltage Quantity is selected from 10 to 15, as shown in table 242.
Two overcurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.
Overcurrent step simply compares the magnitude of the measured current quantity
(see table 241) with the set pickup level. Non-directional overcurrent step will pickup
if the magnitude of the measured current quantity is bigger than this set level. Reset
ratio is settable, with default value of 0.96. However depending on other enabled
built-in features this overcurrent pickup might not cause the overcurrent step start
signal. Start signal will only come if all of the enabled built-in features in the
overcurrent step are fulfilled at the same time.
This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step start if the second-to-first harmonic
ratio in the measured current exceeds the set level.
Directional feature
The overcurrent protection step operation can be can be made dependent on the
relevant phase angle between measured current phasor (see table 241) and measured
voltage phasor (see table 242). In protection terminology it means that the PGPF
function can be made directional by enabling this built-in feature. In that case
overcurrent protection step will only operate if the current flow is in accordance with
the set direction (i.e. Forward, which means towards the protected object, or
Reverse, which means from the protected object). For this feature it is of the outmost
importance to understand that the measured voltage phasor (see table 242) and
measured current phasor (see table 241) will be used for directional decision.
Therefore it is the sole responsibility of the end user to select the appropriate current
and voltage signals in order to get a proper directional decision. The PGPF function
will NOT do this automatically. It will just simply use the current and voltage phasors
selected by the end user to check for the directional criteria.
Table 244 gives an overview of the typical choices (but not the only possible ones)
for these two quantities for traditional directional relays.
Table 244: Typical current and voltage choices for directional feature
Set value for the Set value for the
parameter CurrentInput parameter Comment
VoltageInput
PosSeq PosSeq Directional positive sequence overcurrent function is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45° to -90°
depending on the power
NegSeq -NegSeq Directional negative sequence overcurrent function is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from -45° to -90°
depending on the power system voltage level (i.e. X/R
ratio)
3ZeroSeq -3ZeroSeq Directional zero sequence overcurrent function is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is from 0° to -90°
depending on the power system earthing (i.e. solidly
earthed, earthed via resistor, etc.)
Phase1 Phase2-Phase3 Directional overcurrent function for the first phase is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30° or +45°
Phase2 Phase3-Phase1 Directional overcurrent function for the second phase
is obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30° or +45°
Phase3 Phase1-Phase2 Directional overcurrent function for the third phase is
obtained. Typical setting for RCADir is +30° or +45°
Unbalance current or voltage measurement shall not be used when the directional
feature is enabled.
• the magnitude of the measured current is bigger than the set pick-up level
• the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined by the
relay operate angle, ROADir parameter setting; see figure 211).
U=-3U0
RCADir
Operate region
mta line
en05000252.vsd
where:
RCADir is -75°
ROADir is 50°
The second principle, referred to as "IcosPhi&U" in the parameter setting tool, checks
that:
• that the product I·cos(Φ) is bigger than the set pick-up level, where Φ is angle
between the current phasor and the mta line
• that the phasor of the measured current is within the operating region (defined
by the I·cos(Φ) straight line and the relay operate angle, ROADir parameter
setting; see figure 211).
U=-3U0
RCADir
Operate region
mta line
en05000253.vsd
where:
RCADir is -75°
ROADir is 50°
Note that it is possible to decide by a parameter setting how the directional feature
shall behave when the magnitude of the measured voltage phasor falls below the pre-
set value. User can select one of the following three options:
It shall also be noted that the memory duration is limited in the algorithm to 100 ms.
After that time the current direction will be locked to the one determined during
memory time and it will re-set only if the current fails below set pickup level or voltage
goes above set voltage memory limit.
StartCurr_OC1
VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1
ULowLimit_OC1 UHighLimit_OC1
Selected Voltage
Magnitude
en05000324.vsd
Figure 213: Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Slope mode of operation
StartCurr_OC1
VDepFact_OC1 * StartCurr_OC1
en05000323.vsd
Figure 214: Example for OC1 step current pickup level variation as function of
measured voltage magnitude in Step mode of operation
This feature will simple change the set overcurrent pickup level in accordance with
magnitude variations of the measured voltage. It shall be noted that this feature will
as well affect the pickup current value for calculation of operate times for IDMT
curves (i.e. overcurrent with IDMT curve will operate faster during low voltage
conditions).
IMeasured
ea ain
ar tr
te es
ra *I r
pe eff
O t rCo
es
I>R
IsetHigh
IsetLow
atan(RestrCoeff)
Restraint
en05000255.vsd
This feature will simple prevent overcurrent step to start if the magnitude of the
measured current quantity is smaller than the set percentage of the restrain current
magnitude. However this feature will not affect the pickup current value for
calculation of operate times for IDMT curves. This means that the IDMT curve
operate time will not be influenced by the restrain current magnitude.
When set, the start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (i.e. IDMT) time
delay in accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for
longer time than the set time delay, the overcurrent step will set its trip signal to one.
Reset of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance
with the end user setting.
Two undercurrent protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here. Undercurrent step simply compares the
magnitude of the measured current quantity (see table 241) with the set pickup level.
The undercurrent step will pickup and set its start signal to one if the magnitude of
the measured current quantity is smaller than this set level. The start signal will start
definite time delay with set time delay. If the start signal has value one for longer
time than the set time delay the undercurrent step will set its trip signal to one. Reset
of the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the
setting.
Two overvoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.
Overvoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity
(see table 242) with the set pickup level. The overvoltage step will pickup if the
magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is bigger than this set level. Reset ratio
is settable, with default value of 0.99.
The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (i.e. IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time
than the set time delay, the overvoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of the
start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end
user setting.
Two undervoltage protection steps are available. They are absolutely identical and
therefore only one will be explained here.
Undervoltage step simply compares the magnitude of the measured voltage quantity
(see table 242 with the set pickup level. The undervoltage step will pickup if the
magnitude of the measured voltage quantity is smaller than this set level. Reset ratio
is settable, with default value of 1.01.
The start signal will start definite time delay or inverse (i.e. IDMT) time delay in
accordance with the end user setting. If the start signal has value one for longer time
than the set time delay, the undervoltage step will set its trip signal to one. Reset of
the start and trip signal can be instantaneous or time delay in accordance with the end
user setting.
The inadvertent energization function is realized by means of the general current and
voltage protection function (CAGVPC). The function is configured as shown in
figure 216.
CVGAPC
3IP
3UP TROC1
TROV1
³1
TRUV1
BLKOC1
en06000497.vsd
The setting of the general current and voltage function (typical values) is done as
shown in table 245.
Table 245: The setting of the general current and voltage function
Measured Quantity Pickup in % of generator Time delay in seconds
rating
Undervoltage U< Maximum generator < 70% 10.0 s
Phase to Phase voltage
Overvoltage U> Maximum generator > 85% 1.0 s
Phase to Phase voltage
Overcurrent I> Maximum generator > 50% 0.05 s
Phase current
In normal operation the overvoltage trip signal is activated and the undervotage trip
signal is deactivated. This means that the overcurrent function is blocked.
When the generator is taken out of service the generator voltage gets low. The
overvoltage trip signal will be deactivated and the undervoltage trip signal will be
activated after the set delay. At this moment the block signal to the overcurrent
function will be deactivated.
It the generator is energized at stand still conditions, i.e. when the voltage is zero, the
overcurrent function will operate after the short set delay if the generator current is
larger than the set value.
When the generator is started the overvoltage trip signal will be activared the set time
delay after the moment when the voltage has reached the set value. At this moment
the blocking of the overcurrent function is activated.
The delay of the undervoltage function will prevent false operation at short circuits
in the external power grid.
The simplified internal logics, for the PGPF function are shown in the following
figures.
REx670
ADM PGPF function
individual currents
A/D conversion
Phasors &
samples
en05000169.vsd
Figure 217: Treatment of measured currents within IED for PGPF function
Figure 217 shows how internal treatment of measured currents is done for
multipurpose protection function
The following currents and voltages are inputs to the multipurpose protection
function. They must all be expressed in true power system (primary) Amperes and
kilovolts.
1. Selects one current from the three phase input system (see table "") for internally
measured current.
2. Selects one voltage from the three phase input system (see table "") for internally
measured voltage.
3. Selects one current from the three phase input system (see table "") for internally
measured restraint current.
CURRENT
UC1
nd TRUC1
2 Harmonic
Selected current restraint
STUC2
UC2
TRUC2
2nd Harmonic
restraint
STOC1
OC1 TROC1
STOC2
OC2 TROC2
2nd Harmonic
restraint
Current restraint ³1
UDIRLOW
Directionality DIROC2
Voltage control /
restraint
STOV1
OV1 TROV1
STOV2
OV2 TROV2
STUV1
Selected voltage
UV1 TRUV1
STUV2
UV2 TRUV2
VOLTAGE
en05000170.vsd
Figure 218: PGPF function main logic diagram for built in protection elements
1. The selected currents and voltage are given to built-in protection elements. Each
protection element and step makes independent decision about status of its
START and TRIP output signals.
2. More detailed internal logic for every protection element is given in the following
four figures
3. Common START and TRIP signals from all built-in protection elements & steps
(internal OR logic) are available from multipurpose function as well.
Enable
second
harmonic Second
harmonic check
1 DEF time BLKTROC
selected DEF 1 TROC1
AND
OR
Selected current a
a>b
b
OC1=On STOC1
AND
StartCurr_OC1 BLKOC1
X
Inverse
Selected voltage
Current
Restraint
Feature
Selected restrain current Imeasured > k Irestraint
en05000831.vsd
Figure 219: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overcurrent step i.e. OC1 (step OC2 has the same
internal logic)
Operation_UC1=On
STUC1
en05000750.vsd
Figure 220: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undercurrent step i.e. UC1 (step UC2 has the same
internal logic)
Inverse
Operation_OV1=On
Inverse time
BLKOV1 selected
en05000751.vsd
Figure 221: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first overvoltage step i.e.OV1 (step OV2 has the same
internal logic)
Inverse
Operation_UV1=On
Inverse time
BLKUV1 selected
en05000752.vsd
Figure 222: Simplified internal logic diagram for built-in first undervoltage step i.e.UV1 (step UV2 has the same
internal logic)
en05000372.vsd
Table 246: Input signals for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current input
U3P Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK Block of function
BLKOC1 Block of over current function OC1
BLKOC1TR Block of trip for over current function OC1
ENMLTOC1 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC1
BLKOC2 Block of over current function OC2
BLKOC2TR Block of trip for over current function OC2
ENMLTOC2 When activated, the current multiplier is in use for OC2
BLKUC1 Block of under current function UC1
BLKUC1TR Block of trip for under current function UC1
BLKUC2 Block of under current function UC2
BLKUC2TR Block of trip for under current function UC2
BLKOV1 Block of over voltage function OV1
BLKOV1TR Block of trip for over voltage function OV1
BLKOV2 Block of over voltage function OV2
BLKOV2TR Block of trip for over voltage function OV2
BLKUV1 Block of under voltage function UV1
BLKUV1TR Block of trip for under voltage function UV1
BLKUV2 Block of under voltage function UV2
BLKUV2TR Block of trip for under voltage function UV2
Table 247: Output signals for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP General trip signal
TROC1 Trip signal from overcurrent function OC1
TROC2 Trip signal from overcurrent function OC2
TRUC1 Trip signal from undercurrent function UC1
TRUC2 Trip signal from undercurrent function UC2
TROV1 Trip signal from overvoltage function OV1
TROV2 Trip signal from overvoltage function OV2
TRUV1 Trip signal from undervoltage function UV1
TRUV2 Trip signal from undervoltage function UV2
START General start signal
STOC1 Start signal from overcurrent function OC1
STOC2 Start signal from overcurrent function OC2
STUC1 Start signal from undercurrent function UC1
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
STUC2 Start signal from undercurrent function UC2
STOV1 Start signal from overvoltage function OV1
STOV2 Start signal from overvoltage function OV2
STUV1 Start signal from undervoltage function UV1
STUV2 Start signal from undervoltage function UV2
BLK2ND Block from second harmonic detection
DIROC1 Directional mode of OC1 (nondir, forward,reverse)
DIROC2 Directional mode of OC2 (nondir, forward,reverse)
UDIRLOW Low voltage for directional polarization
CURRENT Measured current value
ICOSFI Measured current multiplied with cos (Phi)
VOLTAGE Measured voltage value
UIANGLE Angle between voltage and current
Table 248: Basic parameter group settings for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
CurrentInput phase1 - MaxPh - Select current signal
phase2 which will be
phase3 measured inside
PosSeq function
NegSeq
3*ZeroSeq
MaxPh
MinPh
UnbalancePh
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
MaxPh-Ph
MinPh-Ph
UnbalancePh-Ph
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base Current
Table continued on next page
Table 249: Advanced parameter group settings for the CVGAPC (GF01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
CurrMult_OC1 2.0 0.1 1.0 - 10.0 - Multiplier for scaling
the current setting
value for OC1
ResCrvType_OC1 Instantaneous - Instantaneous - Selection of reset
IEC Reset curve type for OC1
ANSI reset
tResetDef_OC1 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 0.00 s Reset time delay used
in IEC Definite Time
curve OC1
P_OC1 0.020 0.001 0.001 - 10.000 - Parameter P for
customer
programmable curve
for OC1
A_OC1 0.140 0.001 0.000 - 999.000 - Parameter A for
customer
programmable curve
for OC1
B_OC1 0.000 0.001 0.000 - 99.000 - Parameter B for
customer
programmable curve
for OC1
C_OC1 1.000 0.001 0.000 - 1.000 - Parameter C for
customer
programmable curve
for OC1
PR_OC1 0.500 0.001 0.005 - 3.000 - Parameter PR for
customer
programmable curve
for OC1
Table continued on next page
Start undervoltage, step 1 and 2 (2.0 - 150.0)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur for U<Ur
± 1.0% of U for U>Ur
High and low voltage limit, (1.0 - 200.0)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur for U<Ur
voltage dependent operation ± 1.0% of U for U>Ur
10.1.1 Introduction
Open or short circuited current transformer cores can cause unwanted operation of
many protection functions such as differential, earth fault current and negative
sequence current functions.
The current circuit supervision function compares the residual current from a three
phase set of current transformer cores with the neutral point current on a separate
input taken from another set of cores on the current transformer.
The FAIL output will be set to a logical one when the following criteria are fulfilled:
• The numerical value of the difference |ΣIphase| – |Iref| is higher than 80% of the
numerical value of the sum |ΣIphase| + |Iref|.
• The numerical value of the current |ΣIphase| – |Iref| is equal to or higher than the
set operate value IMinOp.
• No phase current has exceeded Ip>Block during the last 10 ms.
• The current circuit supervision is enabled by setting Operation = On.
The FAIL output remains activated 100 ms after the AND-gate resets when being
activated for more than 20 ms. If the FAIL lasts for more than 150 ms a ALARM will
be issued. In this case the FAIL and ALARM will remain activated 1 s after the AND-
gate resets. This prevents unwanted resetting of the blocking function when phase
current supervision element(s) operate, e.g. during a fault.
Figure 224: Simplified logic diagram for the current circuit supervision
| åI phase | - | I ref |
Slope = 1
Operation
Slope = 0.8
area
I MinOp
| åI phase | + | I ref |
99000068.vsd
Due to the formulas for the axis compared, |SIphase | - |I ref | and |S
I phase | + | I ref | respectively, the slope can not be above 2.
en05000389.vsd
Table 251: Input signals for the CCSRDIF (CCS1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for three phase current input
IREF TBD
BLOCK Block of function
Table 252: Output signals for the CCSRDIF (CCS1-) function block
Signal Description
FAIL Detection of current circuit failure
ALARM Alarm for current circuit failure
Table 253: Parameter group settings for the CCSRDIF (CCS1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A IBase value for
current level
detectors
Ip>Block 5 - 500 1 150 %IB Block of the function
at high phase current,
in % of IBase
IMinOp 5 - 200 1 20 %IB Minimum operate
current differential
level in % of IBase
10.2.1 Introduction
The aim of the fuse failure supervision function (FSD) is to block voltage measuring
functions at failures in the secondary circuits between the voltage transformer and
the IED in order to avoid unwanted operations that otherwise might occur.
The fuse failure supervision function basically has two different algorithms, negative
sequence and zero sequence based algorithm and an additional delta voltage and delta
current algorithm.
The negative sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in isolated
or high-impedance earthed networks. It is based on the negative-sequence measuring
quantities, a high value of voltage 3·U2 without the presence of the negative-sequence
current 3·I2.
The zero sequence detection algorithm is recommended for IEDs used in directly or
low impedance earthed networks. It is based on the zero sequence measuring
quantities, a high value of voltage 3·U0 without the presence of the residual current
3·I0.
A criterion based on delta current and delta voltage measurements can be added to
the fuse failure supervision function in order to detect a three phase fuse failure, which
in practice is more associated with voltage transformer switching during station
operations.
For better adaptation to system requirements, an operation mode setting has been
introduced which makes it possible to select the operating conditions for negative
sequence and zero sequence based function. The selection of different operation
The function can be set in five different modes by setting the parameter OpMode.
The zero sequence function continuously measure the internal currents and voltages
in all three phases and calculate:
The measured signals are compared with their respective set values 3U0< and
3I0>.
The function enable the internal signal fuseFailDetected if the measured zero
sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U0>, the measured zero sequence
current is below the set value 3I0< and the operation mode selector (OpMode is set
to 2 (zero sequence mode). This will activate the output signal BLKU, intended to
block voltage related protection functions in the IED. The output signal BLKZ will
be activated as well if not the internal dead line detection is activaded at the same
time.
If the fuseFailDetected signal is present for more than 5 seconds at the same time as
all phase voltages are below the set value UPh> and the setting parameter ISealIn is
set to On, the function will activate the output signals 3PH, BLKU and BLKZ. The
same signals will aslo be activated if all phase voltages are below the value UPh>,
SealIn=On and any of the phase voltages below the setting value for more than 5
seconds.
It is recommended to always set SealIn to On since this will secure that no unwanted
operation of fuse failure will occur at closing command of breaker when the line is
already energized from the other end. The system voltages shall be normal before
fuse failure is allowed to be activated and initiate block of different protection
functions.
The output signal BLKU can also be activated if no phase voltages is below the setting
UPh> for more than 60 seconds at the same time as the zero sequence voltage is
above the set value 3U0> for more than 5 seconds, all phase currents are below the
setting IDLD< (operate level for dead line detection) and the circuit breaker is closed
(input CBCLOSED is activated). This condition covers for fuse failure at open
breaker position.
Fuse failure condition is unlatched when the normal voltage conditions are restored.
Fuse failure condition is stored in the non volatile memory in the IED. In the new
start-up procedure the IED checks the stored value in its non volatile memory and
establishes the corresponding starting conditions.
TEST
TEST ACTIVE
AND
BlocFuse = Yes
BLOCK
OR
BLKTRIP
fufailStarted AND
OR
All UL less
than Uph>
3PH
AND
SealIn = On AND
5s
Any UL less AND
OR t
than Uph>
setLatch U I
BLKZ
200 ms AND
AND OR
deadLineCondition t
150 ms
MCBOP
t
60 sec
All UL> UPh> t
AND
UN > 3U0> for
t>5 s AND
en06000394.vsd
Figure 227: Simplified logic diagram for fuse failure supervision function, zero sequence based
The input BLOCK signal is a general purpose blocking signal of the fuse failure
supervision function. It can be connected to a binary input of the IED in order to
receive a block command from external devices or can be software connected to other
internal functions of the IED itself in order to receive a block command from internal
functions. Through OR gate it can be connected to both binary inputs and internal
function outputs.
The input BLKSP is intended to be connected to the trip output at any of the protection
functions included in the IED. When activated for more than 20 ms, the operation of
the fuse failure is blocked during a fixed time of 100 ms. The aim is to increase the
security against unwanted operations during the opening of the breaker, which might
cause unbalance conditions for which the fuse failure might operate.
The output signal BLKZ will also be blocked if the internal dead line detection is
activated. The block signal has a 200 ms drop-off time delay.
The input signal MCBOP is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input to
the N.C. auxiliary contact of the miniature circuit breaker protecting the VT secondary
circuit. The MCBOP signal sets the output signals BLKU and BLKZ in order to block
all the voltage related functions when the MCB is open independent of the setting of
OpMode selector. The additional drop-off timer of 150 ms prolongs the presence of
MCBOP signal to prevent the unwanted operation of voltage dependent function due
to non simultaneous closing of the main contacts of the miniature circuit breaker.
The input signal DISCPOS is supposed to be connected via a terminal binary input
to the N.C. auxiliary contact of the line disconnector. The DISCPOS signal sets the
output signal BLKU in order to block the voltage related functions when the line
disconnector is open. The impedance protection function is not affected by the
position of the line disconnector since there will be no line currents that can cause
maloperation of the distance protection. If DISCPOS=0 it signifies that the line is
connected to the system and when the DISCPOS=1 it signifies that the line is
disconnected from the system and the block signal BLKU is generated.
The output BLKU can be used for blocking the voltage related measuring functions
(undervoltage protection, synchro-check etc.) except for the impedance protection.
The function output BLKZ can be used for blocking the impedance protection
function.
The BLKZ will only be activated if not the internal dead line detection is activated
at the same time.
The fuse failure condition is unlatched when the normal voltage conditions are
restored.
When the output 3PH is activated, all three voltage are low.
The negative sequence operates in the same way as the zero sequence, but it calculates
the negative sequence component of current and voltage.
The function enable the internal signal fuseFailDetected if the measured negative
sequence voltage is higher than the set value 3U2>, the measured negative sequence
current is below the value 3I2< and the operation mode selector (OpMode) is set to
1 (negative sequence mode).
The delta function can be activated by setting the parameter OperationDUDI to On.
When it is selected On it operates in parallel with the sequence based algorithm.
The current and voltage is continuously measured in all three phases and the following
quantities are calculated:
The calculated delta quantities are compared with their respective set values DI< and
DU>.
The delta current and delta voltage algorithm, detects a fuse failure if a sufficient
negative change in voltage amplitude without a sufficient change in current amplitude
is detected in each phase separately. This check is performed if the circuit breaker is
closed. Information about the circuit breaker position is brought to the function input
CBCLOSED through a binary input of the IED.
There are two conditions for activating the internal STDU signal and set the latch:
The first criterion requires that the delta condition shall be fulfilled in any phase at
the same time as circuit breaker is closed. Opening circuit breaker at one end and
energizing the line from other end onto a fault could lead to wrong start of the fuse
failure function at the end with the open breaker. If this is considering to bee an
important disadvantage, connect the CBCLOSED input to FALSE. In this way only
the second criterion can activate the delta function.
The second criterion means that detection of failure in one phase together with high
current for the same phase will set the latch. The measured phase current is used to
reduce the risk of false fuse failure detection. If the current on the protected line is
low, a voltage drop in the system (not caused by fuse failure) is not by certain followed
by current change and a false fuse failure might occur. To prevent that the phase
current criterion is introduced.
If the signal setLatchΔUΔI is set (see figure 227) and if all measured voltages are low
(lower than the setting UPh>) the output 3PH will be activated indicating fuse failure
in all three phases. The output BLKU and BLKZ will be activated as well.
If the signal setLatchΔUΔI is activated but not all three phases are below the setting
UPh> only BLKU will be activated.
The BLKZ will be activated as well if not the internal dead line detection is activated.
The fuse failure supervision function can be switched on or off by the setting
parameter Operation to On or Off.
• OMode = 3; Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in parallel
in an OR-condition
• OpMode = 4; Both negative and zero sequence is activated and working in series
(AND-condition for operation)
• OpMode = 5; Optimum of negative and zero sequence (the function that has the
highest magnitude of measured negative and zero sequence current will be
activated).
The function input signal deadLineCondition (see figure 227) is related to the internal
dead line detection function. This signal is activated from the dead line condition
function when the voltage and the current in at least one phase is below their respective
setting values UDLD< and IDLD<. It prevents the blocking of the impedance
protection by a fuse failure detection during dead line condition (that occurs also
during single pole auto-reclosing). The 200 ms drop-off timer prolongs the dead line
condition after the line-energization in order to prevent the blocking of the impedance
protection for unequal pole closing.
en05000700.vsd
Table 255: Input signals for the SDDRFUF (FSD1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Current connection
U3P Voltage connection
BLOCK Block of function
CBCLOSED Active when circuit breaker is closed
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
MCBOP Active when external MCB opens protected voltage circuit
DISCPOS Active when line disconnector is open
BLKTRIP Blocks operation of function when active
Table 256: Output signals for the SDDRFUF (FSD1-) function block
Signal Description
BLKZ Start of current and voltage controlled function
BLKU General start of function
3PH Three-phase start of function
DLD1PH Dead line condition in at least one phase
DLD3PH Dead line condition in all three phases
Table 257: Basic parameter group settings for the SDDRFUF (FSD1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - On - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base current
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base voltage
OpMode Off - UZsIZs - Operating mode
UNsINs selection
UZsIZs
UZsIZs OR
UNsINs
UZsIZs AND
UNsINs
OptimZsNs
3U0> 1 - 100 1 30 %UB Operate level of
residual overvoltage
element in % of
UBase
3I0< 1 - 100 1 10 %IB Operate level of
residual undercurrent
element in % of IBase
3U2> 1 - 100 1 30 %UB Operate level of neg
seq overvoltage
element in % of
UBase
3I2< 1 - 100 1 10 %IB Operate level of neg
seq undercurrent
element in % of IBase
OpDUDI Off - Off - Operation of change
On based function Off/On
Table continued on next page
Section 11 Control
11.1.1 Introduction
The Synchronizing function allows closing of asynchronous networks at the correct
moment including the breaker closing time. The systems can thus be reconnected
after an auto-reclose or manual closing which improves the network stability.
The synchrocheck function checks that the voltages on both sides of the circuit breaker
are in synchronism, or with at least one side dead to ensure that closing can be done
safely.
The function includes a built-in voltage selection scheme for double bus and one- and
a half or ring busbar arrangements.
Manual closing as well as automatic reclosing can be checked by the function and
can have different settings.
The synchronism check function measures the conditions across the circuit breaker
and compares them to set limits. The output is only given when all measured quantities
are simultaneously within their set limits.
The energizing check function measures the bus and line voltages and compares them
to both high and low threshold detectors. The output is only given when the actual
measured quantities match the set conditions.
The synchronizing measures the conditions across the circuit breaker, and it also
determines the angle change occurring during the closing delay of the circuit breaker,
from the measured slip frequency. The output is only given when all measured
conditions are simultaneously within their set limits. The issue of the output is timed
to give closure at the optimal time including the time for the circuit breaker and the
closing circuit.
For single circuit breaker and 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangements, the SYN function
blocks have the capability to make the necessary voltage selection. For single circuit
breaker arrangements, selection of the correct voltage is made using auxiliary contacts
of the bus disconnectors. For 1 1/2 circuit breaker arrangements, correct voltage
selection is made using auxiliary contacts of the bus disconnectors as well as the
circuit breakers
The internal logic for each function block as well as the Input and Outputs and the
setting parameters with default setting and setting ranges is described in this
document. For application related information, please refer to the “Application
manual”.
The logic diagrams that follow illustrate the main principles of the Synchrocheck
function components such as Synchronism check, Energizing check and Voltage
selection, and are intended to simplify the understanding of the function.
Synchronism check
The voltage difference, frequency difference and phase angle difference values are
measured in the IED centrally and are available for the Synchrocheck function for
evaluation. If the bus voltage is connected as phase-phase and the line voltage as
phase-neutral (or the opposite), this need to be compensated. This is done with a
setting, which scales up the line voltage to a level equal to the bus voltage.
When the function is set to OperationSC = On, the measuring will start.
The function will compare the bus and line voltage values with the set values for
UHighBusSC and UHighLineSC.
If both sides are higher than the set values the measured values are compared with
the set values for acceptable frequency, phase angle and voltage difference FreqDiff,
PhaseDiff and UDiff. If a compensation factor is set due to the use of different voltages
on the Bus and Line, the factor is deducted from the line voltage before the comparison
of the phase angle values.
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies
must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The frequency
difference between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured and may
not exceed the set value.
Two sets of settings for frequency difference and phase angle difference are available
and used for the Manual closing and Auto-Reclose functions respectively as required.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSC are available for total block of the complete
Synchrocheck function and block of the Synchronism check function respectively.
TSTSC will allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected
to a separate test output
Two outputs MANSYOK resp. AUTOSYOK are activated when the actual measured
conditions match the set conditions for the respective output. The output signal can
be delayed independently for MANSYOK conditions and for AUTOSYOK.
Synchronizing
When the function is set to OperationSynch=On the measuring will be performed.
The function will compare the values for the bus and line voltage with the set values
for UHighBusSynch and UHighLineSynch which is a supervision that the voltages
are both live. If both sides are higher than the set values the measured values are
compared with the set values for acceptable frequency, rate of change of frequency,
phase angle and voltage difference FreqDiffMax, FreqDiffMin and UDiffSynch.
Measured frequencies between the settings for the maximum and minimum frequency
will initiate the measuring and the evaluation of the angle change to allow operation
to be sent in the right moment including the set tBreaker time. There is a phase angle
release internally to block any incorrect closing pulses. At operation the SYNOK
output will be activated with a pulse tClosePulse and the function reset. The function
will also reset if the syncronizing conditions are not fulfilled within the set
tMaxSynch time. This will then prevent that the functions is by mistake maintained
in operation a long time waiting for conditions to be fulfilled.
The inputs BLOCK and BLKSYNCH are available for total block of the complete
function resp. of the Synchronizing part.
SYN1
OPERATION SYNCH
OFF
ON
TEST MODE
OFF
ON
STARTSYN SYNPROGR
AND
AND
S
BLKSYNCH
OR R
UDiffSynch
50 ms SYNOK
AND
UHighBusSynch AND t
UHighLineSynch OR
FreqDiffMax
AND
TSTSYNOK
FreqDiffMin OR
tClose
FreqRateChange Pulse
AND
fBus&fLine ± 5 Hz tMax
AND
Synch
PhaseDiff < 15 deg SYNFAIL
PhaseDiff=closing angle
en06000636.vsd
Energizing check
Voltage values are measured in the IED centrally and are available for evaluation by
the Synchrocheck function. If the bus voltage is connected as phase-phase and the
line voltage as phase-neutral, (or the opposite) this needs to be compensated. This is
done with a setting, which scales the line voltage to a level equal to the bus voltage.
The function measures voltages on the busbar and the line to verify whether they are
live or dead. This is done by comparing with the set values UHighBusEnerg and
ULowBusEnerg for bus energizing and UHighBusEnergand ULowBusEnerg for line
energizing.
The frequency on both sides of the circuit breaker is also measured. The frequencies
must not deviate from the rated frequency more than +/-5Hz. The frequency
difference between the bus frequency and the line frequency is measured and shall
not exceed a set value.
The Energizing direction can be selected individually for the Manual and the
Automatic functions respectively. When the conditions are met the outputs
AUTOENOK and MANENOK respectively will be activated if the fuse supervision
conditions are fulfilled. The output signal can be delayed independently for
MANENOK conditions and for AUTOENOK. The Energizing direction can also be
The inputs BLOCK and BLKENERG are available for total block of the complete
Synchrocheck function resp. block of the Energizing check function. TSTENOK will
allow testing of the function where the fulfilled conditions are connected to a separate
test output.
OperationSC = On
AND TSTAUTOSY
AND
TSTSC
BLKSC AND
BLOCK OR
AUTOSYOK
AND
0-60 s
AND t
tSCA
UDiffSC 50 ms
AND t
UHighBusSC
UOKSC
AND
UHighLineSC
UDIFFSC
1
FRDIFFA
FreqDiffA 1
PHDIFFA
PhaseDiffA 1
UDIFFME
voltageDifferenceValue
FRDIFFME
frequencyDifferenceValue
PHDIFFME
phaseAngleDifferenceValue
en07000114.vsd
Voltage selection
The voltage selection module including supervision of included voltage transformer
fuses for the different arrangements is a basic part of the Synchrocheck function and
determines the parameters fed to the Synchronism check and Energizing check
functions. This includes the selection of the appropriate Line and Bus voltages and
fuse supervision.
The voltage selection type to be used is set with the parameter CBConfig. The
different alternatives are described below.
If NoVoltageSel is set the default voltages used will be ULine1 and UBus1. This is
also the case when external voltage selection is provided. Fuse failure supervision for
the used inputs must also be connected.
The voltage selection function selected voltages and fuse conditions are the
Synchronism check and Energizing check inputs.
For the disconnector positions it is advisable to use (NO) a and (NC) b type contacts
to supply Disconnector Open and Closed positions but it is of course also possible to
use an inverter for one of the positions.
The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2 and line voltage
transformers. Inputs UB1OK-UB1FF supervise the fuse for Bus 1. UB2OK-UB2FF
supervises the fuse for Bus 2 and ULNOK-ULNFF supervises the fuse for the Line
voltage transformer. The inputs fail (FF) or healthy (OK) can alternatively be used
dependent on the available signal. If a fuse-failure is detected in the selected voltage
source an output signal USELFAIL is set. This output signal is true if the selected
bus or line voltages have a fuse failure. This output as well as the function can be
blocked with the input signal BLOCK. The function logic diagram is shown in figure
231.
B1QOPEN
B1SEL
B1QCLD AND
B2QOPEN B2SEL
1
B2QCLD AND
AND invalidSelection
bus1Voltage
busVoltage
bus2Voltage
UB1OK AND
UB1FF OR
OR
AND selectedFuseOK
UB2OK AND
UB2FF OR USELFAIL
AND
ULN1OK
ULN1FF OR
BLOCK
en05000779.vsd
Figure 231: Logic diagram for the voltage selection function of a single circuit
breaker with double busbars
This voltage selection function uses the binary inputs from the disconnectors and
circuit breakers auxiliary contacts to select the right voltage for the Synchrocheck
(Synchronism and Energizing check) function. For the bus circuit breaker one side
of the circuit breaker is connected to the busbar and the other side is connected either
to line 1, line 2 or the other busbar depending on the arrangement.
The tie circuit breaker is connected either to bus 1 or line 1 on one side and the other
side is connected either to bus 2 or line 2. Four different output combinations are
possible, bus to bus, bus to line, line to bus and line to line.
The function also checks the fuse-failure signals for bus 1, bus 2, line 1 and line 2. If
a fuse-failure is detected in the selected voltage an output signal USELFAIL is set.
This output signal is true if the selected bus or line voltages have a fuse failure. This
output as well as the function can be blocked with the input signal BLOCK.The
function block diagram for the voltage selection of a bus circuit breaker is shown in
232 and for the tie circuit breaker in 233
LN1QOPEN
AND
LN1SEL
LN1QCLD
B1QOPEN
LN2SEL
B1QCLD AND AND
OR
B2SEL
LN2QOPEN
LN2QCLD AND
AND invalidSelection
AND
B2QOPEN
B2QCLD AND
line1Voltage
lineVoltage
line2Voltage
bus2Voltage
UB1OK
UB1FF OR
OR
UB2OK AND
AND selectedFuseOK
UB2FF OR
USELFAIL
ULN1OK AND
AND
ULN1FF OR
ULN2OK
AND
ULN2FF OR
BLOCK
en05000780.vsd
Figure 232: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for a bus circuit breaker in a 1 1/2
breaker arrangement.
LN1QOPEN
LN1SEL
LN1QCLD AND
B1SEL
1
B1QOPEN AND
AND
B1QCLD AND
line1Voltage
busVoltage
bus1Voltage
LN2QOPEN
LN2SEL
LN2QCLD AND
B2SEL
1
OR invalidSelection
B2QOPEN AND
AND
B2QCLD AND
line2Voltage
lineVoltage
bus2Voltage
UB1OK AND
UB1FF OR
OR
UB2OK AND selectedFuseOK
AND
UB2FF OR
USELFAIL
ULN1OK AND
AND
ULN1FF OR
ULN2OK
AND
ULN2FF OR
BLOCK
en05000781.vsd
Figure 233: Simplified logic diagram for the voltage selection function for the tie circuit breaker in 1 1/2
breaker arrangement.
SYN1-
SESRSYN_25
U3PBB1 SYNOK
U3PBB2 AUTOSYOK
U3PLN1 AUTOENOK
U3PLN2 MANSYOK
BLOCK MANENOK
BLKSYNCH TSTSYNOK
BLKSC TSTAUTSY
BLKENERG TSTMANSY
B1QOPEN TSTENOK
B1QCLD USELFAIL
B2QOPEN B1SEL
B2QCLD B2SEL
LN1QOPEN LN1SEL
LN1QCLD LN2SEL
LN2QOPEN SYNPROGR
LN2QCLD SYNFAIL
UB1OK UOKSYN
UB1FF UDIFFSYN
UB2OK FRDIFSYN
UB2FF FRDIFFOK
ULN1OK FRDERIVA
ULN1FF UOKSC
ULN2OK UDIFFSC
ULN2FF FRDIFFA
STARTSYN PHDIFFA
TSTSYNCH FRDIFFM
TSTSC PHDIFFM
TSTENERG UDIFFME
AENMODE FRDIFFME
MENMODE PHDIFFME
MODEAEN
MODEMEN
en06000534.vsd
Table 259: Input signals for the SESRSYN_25 (SYN1-) function block
Signal Description
U3PBB1 Group signal for voltage input busbar 1
U3PBB2 Group signal for voltage input busbar 2
U3PLN1 Group signal for voltage input line 1
U3PLN2 Group signal for voltage input line 2
BLOCK General block
BLKSYNCH Block synchronizing
BLKSC Block synchro check
BLKENERG Block energizing check
B1QOPEN Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus1
B1QCLD Close status for CB or disconnector connected to bus1
B2QOPEN Open status for CB or disconnector connected to bus2
B2QCLD Close status for CB or disconnector connected to bus2
LN1QOPEN Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line1
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
LN1QCLD Close status for CB or disconnector connected to line1
LN2QOPEN Open status for CB or disconnector connected to line2
LN2QCLD Close status for CB or disconnector connected to line2
UB1OK Bus1 voltage transformer OK
UB1FF Bus1 voltage transformer fuse failure
UB2OK Bus2 voltage transformer OK
UB2FF Bus2 voltage transformer fuse failure
ULN1OK Line1 voltage transformer OK
ULN1FF Line1 voltage transformer fuse failure
ULN2OK Line2 voltage transformer OK
ULN2FF Line2 voltage transformer fuse failure
STARTSYN Start synchronizing
TSTSYNCH Set synchronizing in test mode
TSTSC Set synchro check in test mode
TSTENERG Set energizing check in test mode
AENMODE Input for setting of automatic energizing mode
MENMODE Input for setting of manual energizing mode
Table 260: Output signals for the SESRSYN_25 (SYN1-) function block
Signal Description
SYNOK Synchronizing OK output
AUTOSYOK Auto synchro check OK
AUTOENOK Automatic energizing check OK
MANSYOK Manual synchro check OK
MANENOK Manual energizing check OK
TSTSYNOK Synchronizing OK test output
TSTAUTSY Auto synchro check OK test output
TSTMANSY Manual synchro check OK test output
TSTENOK Energizing check OK test output
USELFAIL Selected voltage transformer fuse failed
B1SEL Bus1 selected
B2SEL Bus2 selected
LN1SEL Line1 selected
LN2SEL Line2 selected
SYNPROGR Synchronizing in progress
SYNFAIL Synchronizing failed
UOKSYN Voltage amplitudes for synchronizing above set limits
UDIFFSYN Voltage difference out of limit for synchronizing
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
FRDIFSYN Frequency difference out of limit for synchronizing
FRDIFFOK Frequency difference in band for synchronizing
FRDERIVA Frequency derivative out of limit for synchronizing
UOKSC Voltage amplitudes above set limits
UDIFFSC Voltage difference out of limit
FRDIFFA Frequency difference out of limit for Auto operation
PHDIFFA Phase angle difference out of limit for Auto operation
FRDIFFM Frequency difference out of limit for Manual operation
PHDIFFM Phase angle difference out of limit for Manual Operation
UDIFFME Calculated difference in voltage
FRDIFFME Calculated difference in frequency
PHDIFFME Calculated difference of phase angle
MODEAEN Selected mode for automatic energizing
MODEMEN Selected mode for manual energizing
Table 261: Basic parameter group settings for the SESRSYN_25 (SYN1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
SelPhaseBus1 phase1 - phase2 - Select phase for bus1
phase2
phase3
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
SelPhaseBus2 phase1 - phase2 - Select phase for bus2
phase2
phase3
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
SelPhaseLine1 phase1 - phase2 - Select phase for line1
phase2
phase3
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
SelPhaseLine2 phase1 - phase2 - Select phase for line2
phase2
phase3
phase1-phase2
phase2-phase3
phase3-phase1
Table continued on next page
Table 262: Synchronizing, synchrocheck check and energizing check (RSYN, 25)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Phase shift, jline - jbus (-180 to 180) degrees -
11.2.1 Introduction
The autoreclosing function provides high-speed and/or delayed auto-reclosing for
single or multi-breaker applications.
Up to five reclosing attempts can be programmed. The first attempt can be single-,
two and/or three phase for single phase or multi-phase faults respectively.
The logic diagrams below illustrate the principles applicable in the understanding of
the functionality.
Operation of the automatic reclosing can be set to Off or On via the setting parameters
and through external control. With the setting Operation=ON, the function is
activated while with the setting Operation=OFF the function is deactivated. With the
setting Operation=External ctrl, the activation/deactivation is made by input signal
pulses, for example from a control system.
When the function is set On and is operative the output SETON is activated (high).
Other input conditions such as CBPOS and CBREADY must also be fulfilled. At this
point the automatic recloser is prepared to start the reclosing cycle and the output
signal READY on the AR function block is activated (high).
When INTZERO from Fixed signal function block is connected to the input
MODEINT the parameter setting selected will be valid.
The usual way in which to start a reclosing cycle, or sequence, is to start it when a
line protection tripping has occurred, by applying a signal to the START input. Should
it be necessary to adjust three-phase auto-reclosing open time, (dead time) for
different power system configurations or during tripping at different protection
stages, the input STARTHS (start high-speed reclosing) can also be used.
The logic for switching the auto-recloser ON/OFF and the starting of the reclosing is
shown in figure 235. The following should be considered.
• Setting Operation can be set to Off, External ctrl or ON. External ctrl offers the
possibility of switching by external switches to inputs ON and OFF,
communication commands to the same inputs etc.
• Autoreclose AR is normally started by tripping. It is either a Zone 1 and
Communication aided trip or a general trip. If the general trip is used the function
must be blocked from all back-up tripping connected to INHIBIT. In both
alternatives the breaker failure function must be connected to inhibit the function.
START makes a first attempt with synchrocheck, STARTHS makes its first
attempt without synchrocheck. TRSOTF starts shots 2-5.
• Circuit breaker checks that the breaker was closed for a certain length of time
before the starting occurred and that the CB has sufficient stored energy to
perform an auto-reclosing sequence and is connected to inputs CBPOS and
CBREADY.
Operation:On
Operation:Off
Operation:External Ctrl
OR
ON AND SETON
AND S
OR
OFF AND R
START
STARTHS OR
OR initiate
autoInitiate
Additional conditions
TRSOTF AND
start
120 ms
CBREADY AND
t AND
AND S
tCBClosedMin
CBPOS CB Closed
t R
AND
Blocking conditions READY
AND
OR
Inhibit condistions
count 0
en05000782.vsd
It is possible to use up to four different time settings for the first shot, and one
extension time. There are separate settings for single-, two- and three-phase auto-
reclosing open times, t1 1Ph, t1 2Ph, t1 3Ph. If no particular input signal is applied,
and an auto-reclosing program with single-phase reclosing is selected, the auto-
reclosing open time t1 1Ph will be used. If one of the inputs TR2P or TR3P is activated
in connection with the start, the auto-reclosing open time for two-phase or three-phase
reclosing is used. There is also a separate time setting facility for three-phase high-
speed auto-reclosing, t1 3PhHS available for use when required. It is activated by
input STARTHS.
An auto-reclosing open time extension delay, tExtended t1, can be added to the normal
shot 1 delay. It is intended to come into use if the communication channel for
permissive line protection is lost. In a case like this there can be a significant time
difference in fault clearance at the two line ends. A longer auto-reclosing open time
can then be useful. This extension time is controlled by setting parameter Extended
t1 = On and the input PLCLOST.
In normal circumstances the trip command resets quickly due to fault clearing. The
user can set a maximum trip pulse duration tTrip. When trip signals are longer, the
auto-reclosing open time is extended by tExtended t1. If Extended t1 = Off. A long
trip signal interrupts the reclosing sequence in the same way as a signal to input
INHIBIT.
Extended t1
PLCLOST Extend t1
initiate AND OR AND
AND
tTrip
t
AND
start
long duration
AND
(block AR)
en05000783.vsd
Figure 236: Control of extended auto-reclosing open time and long trip pulse detection
The synchronism check or energizing check must be fulfilled within a set time
interval, tSync. If it is not, or if other conditions are not met, the reclosing is interrupted
and blocked.
The reclaim timer defines a time from the issue of the reclosing command, after which
the reclosing function resets. Should a new trip occur during this time, it is treated as
a continuation of the first fault. The reclaim timer is started when the CB closing
command is given.
A number of outputs for Autoreclosing state control keeps track of the actual state in
the reclosing sequence.
t1 1Ph
"AR Open time" timers
t
SYNC
initiate AND Blocking X
CBREADY AND OR
AR State
tSync Control
AND t
COUNTER
0 Shot 0
CL Shot 1
1
2 Shot 2
3 Shot 3
tReclaim
Pulse AR (above) AND t R 4 Shot 4
OR Shot 5
5
TR2P LOGIC Reclaim Timer On
TR3P reclosing
1PT1
programs
start 2PT1
initiate 3PHS INPROGR
Shot 0 3PT1 OR
Shot 1 3PT2
Shot 2
Shot 3 3PT3
Shot 4
Shot 5 3PT4
PERMIT1P
3PT5
PREP3P
1
Y Blocking tInhibit
OR Inhibit Y
INHIBIT t
en05000784.vsd
CutPulse=On. In case of a new trip pulse, the closing command pulse is cut
(interrupted). The minimum duration of the pulse is always 50 ms. See figure 238
tPulse
pulse
**) AND CLOSECB
OR
initiate
50 ms
2PT1 AND
counter
COUNT2P
counter COUNTAR
RSTCOUNT
en05000785.vsd
Figure 238: Pulsing of closing command and driving the operation counters
Transient fault
After the reclosing command the reclaim timer tReclaim starts running for the set
time. If no tripping occurs within this time, the auto-reclosing will reset.
be ended. After the reclaim time has elapsed, the auto-reclosing function resets but
the CB remains open. The CB closed data at the CBPOS input will be missing.
Because of this, the reclosing function will not be ready for a new reclosing cycle.
Normally the signal UNSUCCL appears when a new trip and start is received after
the last reclosing shot has been made and the auto-reclosing function is blocked. The
signal resets once the reclaim time has elapsed. The “unsuccessful“ signal can also
be made to depend on CB position input. The parameter UnsucClByCBChk should
then be set to CBCheck, and a timer tUnsucCl should also be set. If the CB does not
respond to the closing command and does not close, but remains open, the output
UNSUCCL is set high after time tUnsucCl.
initiate
block start AND
OR UNSUCCL
AND S
shot 0
R
UnsucClByCBchk = CBcheck
eno5000786.vsd
tAutoContWait
t
AND
CLOSECB
AND
S Q
AND
CBPOS CBClosed
OR
initiate
START OR
en05000787.vsd
StartByCBOpen = On
START AND
STARTHS AND
start
³1
100 ms
AND
100 ms
AND
en05000788.vsd
Some examples of the timing of internal and external signals at typical transient and
permanent faults are shown below in figures 242 to 245.
Fault
CB POS
Closed Open Closed
CB READY
START (Trip)
SYNC
tReclaim
READY
INPROG
1PT1
ACTIVE
PREP3P
SUCCL
Time
en04000196.vsd
Fault
CB POS Open
Closed Open C C
CB READY
START (Trip)
TR3P
SYNC
READY
INPROGR
3PT1 t1 3Ph
3PT2 t2 3Ph
ACTIVE tReclaim
PREP3P
UNSUCCL
Time
en04000197.vsd
Fault
AR01-CBCLOSED
AR01-CBREADY(CO)
AR01-START
AR01-TR3P
AR01-SYNC
AR01-READY
AR01-INPROGR
AR01-1PT1
AR01-T1
AR01-T2
AR01-CLOSECB t1s
AR01-P3P
AR01-UNSUC
tReclaim
en04000198.vsd
Fault
AR01-CBCLOSED
AR01-CBREADY(CO)
AR01-START
AR01-TR3P
AR01-SYNC
AR01-READY
AR01-INPROGR
AR01-1PT1
AR01-T1
AR01-T2
t2
AR01-CLOSECB t1s
AR01-P3P
AR01-UNSUC
tReclaim
en04000199.vsd
Figure 245: Permanent single-phase fault. Program 1ph + 3ph or 1/2ph + 3ph,
two-shot reclosing
en06000189.vsd
Table 263: Input signals for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function block
Signal Description
ON Switches the AR On (at Operation = ExternalCtrl)
OFF Switches the AR Off (at Operation = ExternalCtrl)
BLKON Sets the AR in blocked state
BLKOFF Releases the AR from the blocked state
RESET Resets the AR to initial conditions
INHIBIT Interrupts and inhibits reclosing sequence
START Reclosing sequence starts by a protection trip signal
STARTHS Start HS reclosing without SC: t13PhHS
TRSOTF Makes AR to continue to shots 2-5 at a trip from SOTF
SKIPHS Will skip the high speed shot and continue on delayed shots
ZONESTEP Coordination between local AR and down stream devices
TR2P Signal to the AR that a two-phase tripping occurred
TR3P Signal to the AR that a three-phase tripping occurred
THOLHOLD Hold the AR in wait state
CBREADY CB must be ready for CO/OCO operation to allow start / close
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
CBPOS Status of the circuit breaker Closed/Open
PLCLOST Power line carrier or other form of permissive sigÂnal lost
SYNC Synchronizing check fulfilled (for 3Ph attempts)
WAIT Wait for master (in Multi-breaker arrangements)
RSTCOUNT Resets all counters
MODEINT Integer input used to set the reclosingMode, alternative to
setting
Table 264: Output signals for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCKED The AR is in blocked state
SETON The AR operation is switched on, operative
READY Indicates that the AR function is ready for a new sequence
ACTIVE Reclosing sequence in progress
SUCCL Activated if CB closes during the time tUnsucCl
UNSUCCL Reclosing unsuccessful, signal resets after the reclaim time
INPROGR Reclosing shot in progress, activated during open time
1PT1 Single-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1
2PT1 Two-phase reclosing is in progress, shot 1
3PT1 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 1
3PT2 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 2
3PT3 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 3
3PT4 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 4
3PT5 Three-phase reclosing in progress, shot 5
PERMIT1P Permit single-phase trip, inverse signal to PREP3P
PREP3P Prepare three-phase trip, control of the next trip operation
CLOSECB Closing command for CB
WFMASTER Signal to Slave issued by Master for sequential reclosing
COUNT1P Counting the number of single-phase reclosing shots
COUNT2P Counting the number of two-phase reclosing shots
COUNT3P1 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 1
COUNT3P2 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 2
COUNT3P3 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 3
COUNT3P4 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 4
COUNT3P5 Counting the number of three-phase reclosing shot 5
COUNTAR Counting total number of reclosing shots
MODE Integer output for reclosing mode
Table 265: Basic parameter group settings for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - External ctrl - Off, ExternalCtrl, On
External ctrl
On
ARMode 3 phase - 1/2/3ph - The AR mode
1/2/3ph selection e.g. 3ph,
1/2ph 1/3ph
1ph+1*2ph
1/2ph+1*3ph
1ph+1*2/3ph
t1 1Ph 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 1.000 s Open time for shot 1,
single-phase
t1 3Ph 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 6.000 s Open time for shot 1,
delayed reclosing 3ph
t1 3PhHS 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.400 s Open time for shot 1,
high speed reclosing
3ph
tReclaim 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 60.00 s Duration of the
reclaim time
tSync 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 30.00 s Maximum wait time
for synchrocheck OK
tTrip 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Maximum trip pulse
duration
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Duration of the circuit
breaker closing pulse
tCBClosedMin 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 5.00 s Min time that CB must
be closed before new
sequence allows
tUnsucCl 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 30.00 s Wait time for CB
before indicating
Unsuccessful/
Successful
Priority None - None - Priority selection
Low between adjacent
High terminals None/Low/
High
tWaitForMaster 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 60.00 s Maximum wait time
for release from
Master
Table 266: Advanced parameter group settings for the SMBRREC_79 (AR01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
NoOfShots 1 - 1 - Max number of
2 reclosing shots 1-5
3
4
5
StartByCBOpen Off - Off - To be set ON if AR is
On to be started by CB
open position
CBAuxContType NormClosed - NormOpen - Select the CB aux
NormOpen contact type NC/NO
for CBPOS input
CBReadyType CO - CO - Select type of circuit
OCO breaker ready signal
CO/OCO
t1 2Ph 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 1.000 s Open time for shot 1,
two-phase
t2 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 30.00 s Open time for shot 2,
three-phase
t3 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 30.00 s Open time for shot 3,
three-phase
t4 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 30.00 s Open time for shot 4,
three-phase
t5 3Ph 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 30.00 s Open time for shot 5,
three-phase
Extended t1 Off - Off - Extended open time
On at loss of permissive
channel Off/On
tExtended t1 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.500 s 3Ph Dead time is
extended with this
value at loss of perm
ch
tInhibit 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Inhibit reclosing reset
time
CutPulse Off - Off - Shorten closing pulse
On at a new trip Off/On
Follow CB Off - Off - Advance to next shot
On if CB has been closed
during dead time
AutoCont Off - Off - Continue with next
On reclosing-shot if
breaker did not close
tAutoContWait 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 2.000 s Wait time after close
command before
proceeding to next
shot
Table continued on next page
11.3.1 Introduction
The apparatus control is a function for control and supervision of circuit breakers,
disconnectors and earthing switches within a bay. Permission to operate is given after
evaluation of conditions from other functions such as interlocking, synchrocheck,
operator place selection and external or internal blockings.
Primary apparatuses such as breakers and disconnectors are controlled and supervised
by one software module (SCSWI) each. Because the number and type of signals
connected to a breaker and a disconnector are almost the same, the same software is
used to handle these two types of apparatuses.
The software module is connected to the physical process in the switchyard via an
interface module by means of a number of digital inputs and outputs. One type of
interface module is intended for a circuit breaker (SXCBR) and another type is
intended for a disconnector or earthing switch (SXSWI). Four types of function blocks
are available to cover most of the control and supervision within the bay. These
function blocks are interconnected to form a control function reflecting the switchyard
configuration. The total number used depends on the switchyard configuration. These
four types are:
The three latter functions are logical nodes according to IEC 61850. The function
blocks LocalRemote and LocRemControl, to handle the local/remote switch, and the
function blocks QCRSV and RESIN, for the reservation function, also belong to the
apparatus control function. The principles of operation, function block, input and
output signals and setting parameters for all these functions are described below.
11.3.3.1 Introduction
This function is used to handle the selection of the operator place per bay. The bay
control function also provides blocking functions that can be distributed to different
apparatuses within the bay.
The functionality of the bay control function is not defined in the IEC 61850–8–1
standard, which means that the function is a vendor specific logical node.
The function sends information about the Permitted Source To Operate (PSTO) and
blocking conditions to other functions within the bay e.g. switch control functions,
voltage control functions and measurement functions.
When the local panel switch is in Off position all commands from remote and local
level will be ignored. If the position for the local/remote switch is not valid the PSTO
output will always be set to faulty state (3), which means no possibility to operate.
To adapt the signals from the local HMI or from an external local/remote switch, the
function blocks LocalRemote and LocRemControl are needed and connected to
QCBAY. For more information, see section "Local/Remote switch (LocalRemote,
LocRemControl)".
Table 268: PSTO values for different Local panel switch positions
Local panel switch PSTO value AllPSTOValid Possible locations that shall be able to
positions (configuration operate
parameter)
0 = Off 0 -- Not possible to operate
1 = Local 1 FALSE Local Panel
1 = Local 5 TRUE Local or Remote level without any priority
2 = Remote 2 FALSE Remote level
2 = Remote 5 TRUE Local or Remote level without any priority
3 = Faulty 3 -- Not possible to operate
Blockings
The blocking states for position indications and commands are intended to provide
the possibility for the user to make common blockings for the functions configured
within a complete bay.
The blocking facilities provided by the bay control function are the following:
• Blocking of position indications, BL_UPD. This input will block all inputs
related to apparatus positions for all configured functions within the bay.
• Blocking of commands, BL_CMD. This input will block all commands for all
configured functions within the bay.
• Blocking of function, BLOCK, signal from DO (Data Object) Behavior (IEC
61850–8–1). If DO Behavior is set to "blocked" it means that the function is
active, but no outputs are generated, no reporting, control commands are rejected
and functional and configuration data is visible.
The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level.
The password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been
defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the
control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the UMT.
en05000796.vsd
Table 269: Input signals for the QCBAY (CB01-) function block
Signal Description
LR_OFF External Local/Remote switch is in Off position
LR_LOC External Local/Remote switch is in Local position
LR_REM External Local/Remote switch is in Remote position
LR_VALID Data representing the L/R switch position is valid
BL_UPD Steady signal to block the position updates
BL_CMD Steady signal to block the command
Table 270: Output signals for the QCBAY (CB01-) function block
Signal Description
PSTO The value for the operator place allocation
UPD_BLKD The update of position is blocked
CMD_BLKD The function is blocked for commands
11.3.4.1 Introduction
The signals from the local LCD HMI or from an external local/remote switch are
applied via function blocks LocalRemote and LocRemControl to the Bay control
QCBAY function block. A parameter in function block LocalRemote is set to choose
if the switch signals are coming from the local LCD HMI or from an external hardware
switch connected via binary inputs.
The function block LocalRemote handles the signals coming from the local/remote
switch. The connections are seen in figure 248, where the inputs on function block
LocalRemote are connected to binary inputs if an external switch is used. When a
local LCD HMI is used, the inputs are not used and are set to FALSE in the
configuration. The outputs from the LocalRemote function block control the output
PSTO (Permitted Source To Operate) on QCBAY.
LR01- CB01-
LocalRemote QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_LOC UPD_BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_REM CMD_BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_VALID
BL_UPD
BL_CMD
LR02- CB02-
LocalRemote QCBAY
CTRLOFF OFF LR_OFF PSTO
LOCCTRL LOCAL LR_LOC UPD_BLKD
REMCTRL REMOTE LR_REM CMD_BLKD
LHMICTRL VALID LR_VALID
BL_UPD
BL_CMD
LRC1-
LocRemControl
PSTO1 HMICTR1
PSTO2 HMICTR2
PSTO3 HMICTR3
PSTO4 HMICTR4
PSTO5 HMICTR5
PSTO6 HMICTR6
PSTO7 HMICTR7
PSTO8 HMICTR8
PSTO9 HMICTR9
PSTO10 HMICTR10
PSTO11 HMICTR11
PSTO12 HMICTR12
en05000250.vsd
Figure 248: Configuration for the local/remote handling for a local LCD HMI with
two bays and two screen pages
If the IED contains control functions for several bays, the local/remote position can
be different for the included bays. When the local LCD HMI is used the position of
the local/remote switch can be different depending on which single line diagram
screen page that is presented on the local HMI. The function block LocRemControl
controls the presentation of the LEDs for the local/remote position to applicable bay
and screen page.
The switching of the Local/Remote switch requires at least system operator level.
The password will be requested at an attempt to operate if authority levels have been
defined in the IED. Otherwise the default authority level, SuperUser, can handle the
control without LogOn. The users and passwords are defined with the UMT.
LR01-
LocalRemote
CT RLOFF OFF
LOCCT RL LOCAL
REMCT RL REMOT E
LHMICT RL VALID
en05000360.vsd
LRC1-
LocRemControl
PST O1 HMICT R1
PST O2 HMICT R2
PST O3 HMICT R3
PST O4 HMICT R4
PST O5 HMICT R5
PST O6 HMICT R6
PST O7 HMICT R7
PST O8 HMICT R8
PST O9 HMICT R9
PST O10 HMICT R10
PST O11 HMICT R11
PST O12 HMICT R12
en05000361.vsd
Table 272: Input signals for the LocalRemote (LR01-) function block
Signal Description
CTRLOFF Disable control
LOCCTRL Local in control
REMCTRL Remote in control
LHMICTRL LHMI control
Table 273: Output signals for the LocalRemote (LR01-) function block
Signal Description
OFF Control is disabled
LOCAL Local control is activated
REMOTE Remote control is activated
VALID Outputs are valid
Table 274: Input signals for the LocRemControl (LRC1-) function block
Signal Description
PSTO1 PSTO input channel 1
PSTO2 PSTO input channel 2
PSTO3 PSTO input channel 3
PSTO4 PSTO input channel 4
PSTO5 PSTO input channel 5
PSTO6 PSTO input channel 6
PSTO7 PSTO input channel 7
PSTO8 PSTO input channel 8
PSTO9 PSTO input channel 9
PSTO10 PSTO input channel 10
PSTO11 PSTO input channel 11
PSTO12 PSTO input channel 12
Table 275: Output signals for the LocRemControl (LRC1-) function block
Signal Description
HMICTR1 Bitmask output 1 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR2 Bitmask output 2 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR3 Bitmask output 3 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR4 Bitmask output 4 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR5 Bitmask output 5 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR6 Bitmask output 6 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR7 Bitmask output 7 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR8 Bitmask output 8 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR9 Bitmask output 9 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR10 Bitmask output 10 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR11 Bitmask output 11 to local remote LHMI input
HMICTR12 Bitmask output 12 to local remote LHMI input
Table 276: Basic general settings for the LocalRemote (LR01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
ControlMode Internal LR-switch - Internal LR-switch - Control mode for
External LR- internal/external LR-
switch switch
11.3.5.1 Introduction
The Switch controller (SCSWI) initializes and supervises all functions to properly
select and operate switching primary apparatuses. The Switch controller may handle
and operate on one three-phase device or three one-phase switching devices.
The function is provided with verification checks for the select - execute sequence,
i.e. checks the conditions prior each step of the operation. The involved functions for
these condition verifications are interlocking, reservation, blockings and
synchrocheck.
Command handling
Two types of command models can be used. The two command models are "direct
with enhanced security" and "SBO (Select-Before-Operate) with enhanced security".
Which one of these two command models that are used is defined by the parameter
CtlModel. The meaning with "direct with enhanced security" model is that no select
is required. The meaning with "SBO with enhanced security" model is that a select
is required before execute.
There is not any relation between the command direction and the
actual position. For example, if the switch is in close position it is
possible to execute a close command.
Evaluation of position
In the case when there are three one-phase switches connected to the switch control
function, the switch control will "merge" the position of the three switches to the
resulting three-phase position. In the case when the position differ between the one-
phase switches, following principles will be applied:
The time stamp of the output three-phase position from switch control will have the
time stamp of the last changed phase when it goes to end position. When it goes to
intermediate position or bad state, it will get the time stamp of the first changed phase.
In addition, there is also the possibility that one of the one-phase switches will change
position at any time due to a trip. Such situation is here called pole discordance and
is supervised by this function. In case of a pole discordance situation, i.e. the position
of the one-phase switches are not equal for a time longer than the setting
tPoleDiscord, an error signal POLEDISC will be set.
In the supervision phase, the switch controller function evaluates the "cause" values
from the switch modules XCBR/XSWI. At error the "cause" value with highest
priority is shown.
Blocking principles
The blocking signals are normally coming from the bay control function (QCBAY)
and via the IEC61850 communication from the operator place.
The different block conditions will only affect the operation of this
function, i.e. no blocking signals will be "forwarded" to other
functions. The above blocking outputs are stored in a non-volatile
memory.
continuously in operation and gives the result to the SCSWI. The result from the
synchrocheck function is evaluated during the close execution. If the operator
performs an override of the synchrocheck, the evaluation of the synchrocheck state
is omitted. When there is a positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function,
the switch controller SCSWI will send the close signal EXE_CL to the switch function
SXCBR.
When there is no positive confirmation from the synchrocheck function, the SCSWI
will send a start signal START_SY to the synchronizing function, which will send
the closing command to the SXCBR when the synchronizing conditions are fulfilled,
see figure 251. If no synchronizing function is included, the timer for supervision of
the "synchronizing in progress signal" is set to 0, which means no start of the
synchronizing function. The SCSWI will then set the attribute "blocked-by-
synchrocheck" in the "cause" signal. See also the time diagram in figure 255.
SCSWI SXCBR
EXE_CL
OR CLOSE
SYNC_OK
START_SY
SY_INPRO
SECRSYN
CLOSE. CB
Synchro Synchronizing
Check function
en05000091.vsd
Time diagrams
The SCSWI function has timers for evaluating different time supervision conditions.
These timers are explained here.
The timer tSelect is used for supervising the time between the select and the execute
command signal, i.e. the time the operator has to perform the command execution
after the selection of the object to operate.
select
execute command
tSelect
timer t1 t1>tSelect, then long-
operation-time in 'cause'
is set
en05000092.vsd
The parameter tResResponse is used to set the maximum allowed time to make the
reservation, i.e. the time between reservation request and the feedback reservation
granted from all bays involved in the reservation function.
select
command termination
tResResponse t1>tResResponse, then
timer 1-of-n-control in 'cause'
t1 is set
en05000093.vsd
The timer tExecutionFB supervises the time between the execute command and the
command termination, see figure 254.
execute command
position L1 open
close
position L2 open
close
position L3 open
close
cmd termination L1
cmd termination L2
cmd termination L3
cmd termination *
position open
close
The parameter tSynchrocheck is used to define the maximum allowed time between
the execute command and the input SYNC_OK to become true. If SYNC_OK=true
at the time the execute command signal is received, the timer "tSynchrocheck" will
not start. The start signal for the synchronizing is obtained if the synchrocheck
conditions are not fulfilled.
execute command
SYNC_OK
tSynchrocheck
t1
START_SY
SY_INPRO
en05000095.vsd
Error handling
Depending on what error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal
will be set with a value. Table 277 describes vendor specific cause values in addition
to these specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard. The list of values of the “cause” are in
order of priority. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE
on the function block indicates the latest value of the error during the command.
en05000337.vsd
Table 278: Input signals for the SCSWI (CS01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
PSTO Operator place selection
L_SEL Select signal from local panel
L_OPEN Open signal from local panel
L_CLOSE Close signal from local panel
AU_OPEN Used for local automation function
AU_CLOSE Used for local automation function
BL_CMD Steady signal for block of the command
RES_GRT Positive acknowledge that all reservations are made
RES_EXT Reservation is made externally
SY_INPRO Synchronizing function in progress
SYNC_OK Closing is permitted at set to true by the synchrocheck
EN_OPEN Enables open operation
EN_CLOSE Enables close operation
XPOS1 Group signal for XCBR input
XPOS2 Group signal for XCBR input
XPOS3 Group signal for XCBR input
Table 279: Output signals for the SCSWI (CS01-) function block
Signal Description
EXE_OP Execute command for open direction
EXE_CL Execute command for close direction
SELECTED The select conditions are fulfilled
RES_RQ Request signal to the reservation function
START_SY Starts the synchronizing function
POSITION Position indication
OPENPOS Open position indication
CLOSEPOS Closed position indication
POLEDISC The positions for poles L1-L3 are not equal after a set time
CMD_BLK Commands are blocked
L_CAUSE Latest value of the error indication during command
XOUT Execution information to XCBR/XSWI
Table 280: Basic general settings for the SCSWI (CS01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
CtlModel Dir Norm - SBO Enh - Specifies the type for
SBO Enh (ABB) control model
Dir Norm (ABB) according to IEC
SBO Enh 61850
PosDependent Always permitted - Always permitted - Permission to operate
Not perm at 00/11 depending on the
position
tSelect 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 30.000 s Max time between
select and execute
signals
tResResponse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 5.000 s Allowed time from
reservation request to
reservation granted
tSynchrocheck 0.00 - 6000.00 0.01 10.00 s Allowed time for
synchrocheck to fulfil
close conditions
tSynchronizing 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Supervision time to
get the signal
synchronizing in
progress
tExecutionFB 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 30.000 s Max time from
command execution
to termination
tPoleDiscord 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 2.000 s Allowed time to have
discrepancy between
the poles
11.3.6.1 Introduction
The purpose of this function is to provide the actual status of positions and to perform
the control operations, i.e. pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the form
of circuit breakers via output boards and to supervise the switching operation and
position.
The intended user of this function is other functions such as e.g. Switch controller,
protection functions, autorecloser function or an IEC 61850 client residing in another
IED or the operator place. This switch function executes commands, evaluate block
conditions and evaluate different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions
indicate a switch operation to be allowed, the function performs the execution
command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate
"cause" value.
The function has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The
counter value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from
a binary input or remotely from the operator place.
Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in this function to indicate the local/
remote switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is
set to TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level.
If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is
permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position)
from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions
are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in figure 257.
Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR
en05000096.vsd
Blocking principles
The function includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking
signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients e.g. operators place,
protection functions, autoreclosure etc.
Substitution
The substitution part in this function is used for manual set of the position for the
switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value
because that the real process value is erroneous of some reason. The function will
then use the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by
the process.
Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and
tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the
execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for
intermediate position. Figure 258 explains these two timers during the execute phase.
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
en05000097.vsd
The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses
to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close
command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive
with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 259 shows the principle of
the execute output pulse. The adaptively parameter will have affect on both execute
output pulses.
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed
tOpenPulse or tClosePulse.
• the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
• the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
• an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, i.e. tStartMove has
elapsed.
There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position
and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that
the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always
activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the pulse
duration timer has elapsed.
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE
tOpenPulse
EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE
tOpenPulse
tStartMove timer
en05000099.vsd
Error handling
Depending on what error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal
will be set with a value. Table 281 describes vendor specific cause values in addition
to these specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard. The list of values of the “cause” are in
order of priority. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE
on the function block indicates the latest value of the error during the command.
Table 281: Vendor specific cause values for Apparatus control in priority order
Apparatus control Description
function
–22 wrongCTLModel
–23 blockedForCommand
–24 blocked-for-open-command
–25 blocked-for-close-command
–30 longOperationTime
–31 switch-not-start-moving
–32 persistent-intermediate-state
–33 switch-returned-to-initial-position
–34 switch-in-bad-state
–35 not-expected-final-position
en05000338.vsd
Table 282: Input signals for the SXCBR (XC01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
LR_SWI Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
TR_OPEN Signal for open position of truck from I/O
TR_CLOSE Signal for close position of truck from I/O
RS_CNT Resets the operation counter
XIN Execution information from CSWI
Table 283: Output signals for the SXCBR (XC01-) function block
Signal Description
XPOS Group signal for XCBR output
EXE_OP Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL Executes the command for close direction
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
SUBSTED Indication that the position is substituted
OP_BLKD Indication that the function is blocked for open commands
CL_BLKD Indication that the function is blocked for close commands
UPD_BLKD The update of position indication is blocked
POSITION Apparatus position indication
OPENPOS Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS Apparatus closed position
TR_POS Truck position indication
CNT_VAL The value of the operation counter
L_CAUSE Latest value of the error indication during command
Table 284: Basic general settings for the SXCBR (XC01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Supervision time for
the apparatus to
move after a
command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.150 s Allowed time for
intermediate position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - Not adaptive - The output resets
Adaptive when a new correct
end position is
reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Output pulse length
for open command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Output pulse length
for close command
11.3.7.1 Introduction
The purpose of this function is to provide the actual status of positions and to perform
the control operations, i.e. pass all the commands to primary apparatuses in the form
of disconnectors or earthing switches via output boards and to supervise the switching
operation and position.
The intended user of this function is other functions such as e.g. Switch controller,
protection functions, autorecloser function or a 61850 client residing in another IED
or the operator place. This switch function executes commands, evaluate block
conditions and evaluate different time supervision conditions. Only if all conditions
indicate a switch operation to be allowed, the function performs the execution
command. In case of erroneous conditions, the function indicates an appropriate
"cause" value.
The function has an operation counter for closing and opening commands. The
counter value can be read remotely from the operator place. The value is reset from
a binary input or remotely from the operator place.
Local/Remote switch
One binary input signal LR_SWI is included in this function to indicate the local/
remote switch position from switchyard provided via the I/O board. If this signal is
set to TRUE it means that change of position is allowed only from switchyard level.
If the signal is set to FALSE it means that command from IED or higher level is
permitted. When the signal is set to TRUE all commands (for change of position)
from internal IED clients are rejected, even trip commands from protection functions
are rejected. The functionality of the local/remote switch is described in figure 262.
Local= Operation at
UE switch yard level
TR
en05000096.vsd
Blocking principles
The function includes several blocking principles. The basic principle for all blocking
signals is that they will affect commands from all other clients e.g. operators place,
protection functions, autoreclosure etc.
Substitution
The substitution part in this function is used for manual set of the position for the
switch. The typical use of substitution is that an operator enters a manual value
because that the real process value is erroneous of some reason. The function will
then use the manually entered value instead of the value for positions determined by
the process.
Time diagrams
There are two timers for supervising of the execute phase, tStartMove and
tIntermediate. tStartMove supervises that the primary device starts moving after the
execute output pulse is sent. tIntermediate defines the maximum allowed time for
intermediate position. Figure 263 explains these two timers during the execute phase.
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
en05000097.vsd
The timers tOpenPulse and tClosePulse are the length of the execute output pulses
to be sent to the primary equipment. Note that the output pulses for open and close
command can have different pulse lengths. The pulses can also be set to be adaptive
with the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse. Figure 264 shows the principle of
the execute output pulse. The adaptively parameter will have affect on both execute
output pulses.
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
AdaptivePulse=FALSE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
AdaptivePulse=TRUE
EXE_CL
tClosePulse
en05000098.vsd
If the pulse is set to be adaptive, it is not possible for the pulse to exceed
tOpenPulse or tClosePulse.
• the new expected final position is reached and the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to true
• the timer tOpenPulse or tClosePulse has elapsed
• an error occurs due to the switch does not start moving, i.e. tStartMove has
elapsed.
There is one exception from the first item above. If the primary device is in open
position and an open command is executed or if the primary device is in close position
and a close command is executed. In these cases, with the additional condition that
the configuration parameter AdaptivePulse is true, the execute output pulse is always
activated and resets when tStartMove has elapsed. If the configuration parameter
AdaptivePulse is set to false the execution output remains active until the pulse
duration timer has elapsed.
OPENPOS
CLOSEPOS
EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=FALSE
tOpenPulse
EXE_OP AdaptivePulse=TRUE
tOpenPulse
tStartMove timer
en05000099.vsd
Error handling
Depending on what error that occurs during the command sequence the error signal
will be set with a value. Table 285 describes vendor specific cause values in addition
to these specified in IEC 61850-8-1 standard. The list of values of the “cause” are in
order of priority. The values are available over the IEC 61850. An output L_CAUSE
on the function block indicates the latest value of the error during the command.
en05000339.vsd
Table 286: Input signals for the SXSWI (XS01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
LR_SWI Local/Remote switch indication from switchyard
OPEN Pulsed signal used to immediately open the switch
CLOSE Pulsed signal used to immediately close the switch
BL_OPEN Signal to block the open command
BL_CLOSE Signal to block the close command
BL_UPD Steady signal for block of the position updating
POSOPEN Signal for open position of apparatus from I/O
POSCLOSE Signal for close position of apparatus from I/O
RS_CNT Resets the operation counter
XIN Execution information from CSWI
Table 287: Output signals for the SXSWI (XS01-) function block
Signal Description
XPOS Group signal for XSWI output
EXE_OP Executes the command for open direction
EXE_CL Executes the command for close direction
SUBSTED Indication that the position is substituted
OP_BLKD Indication that the function is blocked for open commands
CL_BLKD Indication that the function is blocked for close commands
UPD_BLKD The update of position indication is blocked
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
POSITION Apparatus position indication
OPENPOS Apparatus open position
CLOSEPOS Apparatus closed position
CNT_VAL The value of the operation counter
L_CAUSE Latest value of the error indication during command
Table 288: Basic general settings for the SXSWI (XS01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
tStartMove 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 3.000 s Supervision time for
the apparatus to
move after a
command
tIntermediate 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 15.000 s Allowed time for
intermediate position
AdaptivePulse Not adaptive - Not adaptive - The output resets
Adaptive when a new correct
end position is
reached
tOpenPulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Output pulse length
for open command
tClosePulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Output pulse length
for close command
SwitchType Load Break - Disconnector - Switch Type
Disconnector
Earthing Switch
HS Earthing
Switch
11.3.8.1 Introduction
The function block QCRSV handles the reservation. The function starts to operate in
two ways. It starts when there is a request for reservation of the own bay or if there
is a request for reservation from another bay. It is only possible to reserve the function
if it is not currently reserved. The signal that can reserve the own bay is the input
signal RES_RQx (x=1-8) coming from switch controller SCWI. The signals for
request from another bay are the outputs RE_RQ_B and V_RE_RQ from function
block RESIN. These signals are included in signal EXCH_OUT from RESIN and are
connected to RES_DATA in QCRSV.
The parameters ParamRequestx (x=1-8) are chosen at reservation of the own bay
only (TRUE) or other bays (FALSE). To reserve the own bay only means that no
reservation request RES_BAYS is created.
If the RESERVED output is not set, the selection is made with the output RES_GRTx
(where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus), which is connected to switch
controller SCSWI. If the bay already is reserved the command sequence will be reset
and the SCSWI will set the attribute "1-of-n-control" in the "cause" signal.
When it receives acknowledge from the bays via the input RES_DATA, it sets the
output RES_GRTx (where x=1-8 is the number of the requesting apparatus). If not
acknowledgement from all bays is received within a certain time defined in SCSWI
(tResResponse), the SCSWI will reset the reservation and set the attribute "1-of-n-
control" in the "cause" signal.
The reservation function can also be overridden in the own bay with the OVERRIDE
input signal, i.e. reserving the own bay without waiting for the external acknowledge.
If there are more than eight apparatuses in the bay there has to be one additional
QCRSV. The both functions QCRSV have to communicate and this is done through
the input EXCH_IN and EXCH_OUT according to figure 10. If more then one
QCRSV are used, the execution order is very important. The execution order must
be in the way that the first QCRSV has a lower number than the next one.
CR01-
QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLK_RES ACK_TO_B
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT
CR02-
QCRSV
EXCH_IN RES_GRT1
RES_RQ1 RES_GRT2
RES_BAYS
RES_RQ2 RES_GRT3 ³1
RES_RQ3 RES_GRT4
RES_RQ4 RES_GRT5
RES_RQ5 RES_GRT6 ACK_TO_B
RES_RQ6 RES_GRT7 ³1
RES_RQ7 RES_GRT8
RES_RQ8 RES_BAYS
BLK_RES ACK_TO_B RESERVED
³1
OVERRIDE RESERVED
RES_DATA EXCH_OUT
en05000088.vsd
en05000340.vsd
Table 289: Input signals for the QCRSV (CR01-) function block
Signal Description
EXCH_IN Used for exchange signals between different BayRes blocks
RES_RQ1 Signal for app. 1 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ2 Signal for app. 2 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ3 Signal for app. 3 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ4 Signal for app. 4 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ5 Signal for app. 5 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ6 Signal for app. 6 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ7 Signal for app. 7 that requests to do a reservation
RES_RQ8 Signal for app. 8 that requests to do a reservation
BLK_RES Reservation is not possible and the output signals are reset
OVERRIDE Signal to override the reservation
RES_DATA Reservation data coming from function block ResIn
Table 290: Output signals for the QCRSV (CR01-) function block
Signal Description
RES_GRT1 Reservation is made and the app. 1 is allowed to operate
RES_GRT2 Reservation is made and the app. 2 is allowed to operate
RES_GRT3 Reservation is made and the app. 3 is allowed to operate
RES_GRT4 Reservation is made and the app. 4 is allowed to operate
RES_GRT5 Reservation is made and the app. 5 is allowed to operate
RES_GRT6 Reservation is made and the app. 6 is allowed to operate
RES_GRT7 Reservation is made and the app. 7 is allowed to operate
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
RES_GRT8 Reservation is made and the app. 8 is allowed to operate
RES_BAYS Request for reservation of other bays
ACK_TO_B Acknowledge to other bays that this bay is reserved
RESERVED Indicates that the bay is reserved
EXCH_OUT Used for exchange signals between different BayRes blocks
11.3.9.1 Introduction
The function block RESIN receives the reservation information from other bays. The
number of instances is the same as the number of involved bays (up to 60 instances
are available).
The reservation input function is based purely on Boolean logic conditions. The logic
diagram in figure 269 shows how the output signals are created. The inputs of the
function block are connected to a receive function block representing signals
transferred over the station bus from another bay.
EXCH_IN INT
BIN
ACK_F_B
&
FutureUse
³1
ANY_ACK
BAY_ACK ³1
VALID_TX
&
BAY_VAL ³1
RE_RQ_B
³1
BAY_RES &
V _RE_RQ
³1
BIN
EXCH_OUT
INT
en05000089.vsd
Figure 270 describes the principle of the data exchange between all RESIN modules
in the current bay. There is one RESIN function block per "other bay" used in the
reservation mechanism. The output signal EXCH_OUT in the last RESIN functions
block are connected to the module QCRSV that handles the reservation function in
the own bay. The value to the input EXCH_IN on the first RESIN module in the chain
has the integer value 5. This is provided by the use of instance number one of the
function block RESIN (RE01-), where the input EXCH_IN is set to #5, but is hidden
for the user.
RE01-
RESIN
BAY_ACK ACK_F_B
Bay 1 BAY_VAL ANY_ACK
BAY_RES VALID_TX
RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
RE02-
RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
Bay 2 BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT
REnn-
RESIN
EXCH_IN ACK_F_B
BAY_ACK ANY_ACK
CR01-
Bay n BAY_VAL VALID_TX
BAY_RES RE_RQ_B QCRSV
V_RE_RQ
EXCH_OUT RES_DATA
en05000090.vsd
en05000341.vsd
Table 292: Input signals for the RESIN (RE01-) function block
Signal Description
BAY_ACK Another bay has acknow. the reservation req. from this bay
BAY_VAL The reserv. and acknow. signals from another bay are valid
BAY_RES Request from other bay to reserve this bay
Table 293: Output signals for the RESIN (RE01-) function block
Signal Description
ACK_F_B All other bays have acknow. the reserv. req. from this bay
ANY_ACK Any other bay has acknow. the reserv. req. from this bay
VALID_TX The reserv. and acknow. signals from other bays are valid
RE_RQ_B Request from other bay to reserve this bay
V_RE_RQ Check if the request of reserving this bay is valid
EXCH_OUT Used for exchange signals between different ResIn blocks
Table 294: Basic general settings for the RESIN (RE01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
FutureUse Bay in use - Bay in use - The bay for this ResIn
Bay future use block is for future use
11.4 Interlocking
11.4.1 Introduction
The interlocking function blocks the possibility to operate high-voltage switching
devices, for instance when a disconnector is under load, in order to prevent material
damage and/or accidental human injury.
Each control IED has interlocking functions for different switchyard arrangements,
each handling the interlocking of one bay. The function is distributed to each control
IED and not dependent on any central function. For the station-wide interlocking, the
IEDs communicate via the station bus or by using hard wired binary inputs/outputs.
The interlocking conditions depend on the circuit configuration and status of the
installation at any given time.
The reservation function (see section "Apparatus control (APC)") is used to ensure
that HV apparatuses that might affect the interlock are blocked during the time gap,
which arises between position updates. This can be done by means of the
communication system, reserving all HV apparatuses that might influence the
After the selection and reservation of an apparatus, the function has complete data on
the status of all apparatuses in the switchyard that are affected by the selection. Other
operators cannot interfere with the reserved apparatus or the status of switching
devices that may affect it.
The open or closed positions of the HV apparatuses are inputs to software modules
distributed in the control IEDs. Each module contains the interlocking logic for a bay.
The interlocking logic in a module is different, depending on the bay function and
the switchyard arrangements, that is, double-breaker or 1 1/2 breaker bays have
different modules. Specific interlocking conditions and connections between standard
interlocking modules are performed with an engineering tool. Bay-level interlocking
signals can include the following kind of information:
Apparatus control
Interlocking
modules
modules in
SCILO SCSWI
other bays SXSWI
Apparatus control
modules
Interlocking SCILO SCSWI SXCBR
module
Apparatus control
modules
en04000526.vsd SCILO SCSWI SXSWI
Bays communicate via the station bus and can convey information regarding the
following:
• Unearthed busbars
• Busbars connected together
• Other bays connected to a busbar
• Received data from other bays is valid
Station bus
Disc QB1 and QB2 closed Disc QB1 and QB2 closed WA1 unearthed
WA1 unearthed
WA1 and WA2 interconn
...
WA1 not earthed WA1 not earthed
WA2 not earthed WA2 not earthed WA1 and WA2 interconn
WA1 and WA2 interconn WA1 and WA2 interconn in other bay
..
WA1
WA2
QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2 QB1 QB2 QC1 QC2
QB9 QB9
en05000494.vsd
When invalid data such as intermediate position, loss of a control terminal, or input
board error are used as conditions for the interlocking condition in a bay, a release
for execution of the function will not be given.
On the station HMI an override function exists, which can be used to bypass the
interlocking function in cases where not all the data required for the condition is valid.
The input signals EXDU_xx shall be set to true if there is no transmission error at the
transfer of information from other bays. Required signals with designations ending
in TR are intended for transfer to other bays.
11.4.3.1 Introduction
The function contains logic to enable the open and close commands respectively if
the interlocking conditions are fulfilled. That means also, if the switch has a defined
end position e.g. open, then the appropriate enable signal (in this case EN_OPEN) is
false. The enable signals EN_OPEN and EN_CLOSE can be true at the same time
only in the intermediate and bad position state and if they are enabled by the
interlocking function. The position inputs come from the logical nodes Circuit
breaker/switch SXCBR/SXSWI and the enable signals come from the interlocking
logic. The outputs are connected to the logical node Switch controller SCSWI. One
instance per switching device is needed.
POSOPEN SCILO
POSCLOSE =1 1
EN_OPEN
&
>1
&
OPEN_EN
CLOSE_EN & EN_CLOSE
>1
&
en04000525.vsd
en05000359.vsd
Table 295: Input signals for the SCILO (CI01-) function block
Signal Description
POSOPEN Open position of switch device
POSCLOSE Closed position of switch device
OPEN_EN Open operation from interlocking logic is enabled
CLOSE_EN Close operation from interlocking logic is enabled
Table 296: Output signals for the SCILO (CI01-) function block
Signal Description
EN_OPEN Open operation at closed or interm. or bad pos. is enabled
EN_CLOSE Close operation at open or interm. or bad pos. is enabled
11.4.4.1 Introduction
The interlocking module ABC_LINE is used for a line connected to a double busbar
arrangement with a transfer busbar according to figure 276. The module can also be
used for a double busbar arrangement without transfer busbar or a single busbar
arrangement with/without transfer busbar.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1 QB2 QB7
QC1
QA1
QC2
QB9
QC9
en04000478.vsd
en05000357.vsd
ABC_LINE
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QA1CLREL
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1 QA1CLITL
& 1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QB7_OP
QB7_CL =1 VPQB7
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
QC71_OP
QC71_CL =1 VPQC71
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB9REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB9ITL
1
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC9
&
QC2_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX2
en04000527.vsd
VPQA1 QB1REL
& ³1
VPQB2
VPQC1 1 QB1ITL
VPQC2
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2 &
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1 &
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1EX3
en04000528.vsd
VPQA1 QB2REL
& ³1
VPQB1
VPQC1 1 QB2ITL
VPQC2
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1 &
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1 &
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3
en04000529.vsd
VPQC9 QB7REL
& >1
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D 1 QB7ITL
VP_BC_17
VP_BC_27
QC9_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_OP
BC_27_OP
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX1
VPQA1
VPQB1
VPQC9
&
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_17
QA1_CL
QB1_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_17_CL
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX2
VPQA1
VPQB2
& >1
VPQC9
VPQB9
VPQC71
VP_BB7_D
VP_BC_27
QA1_CL
QB2_CL
QC9_OP
QB9_CL
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
BB7_D_OP
EXDU_BPB
BC_27_CL
EXDU_BC
QB7_EX3
VPQC9
VPQC71
&
QC9_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX4
VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB2 QC1ITL
VPQB9 & 1
QC2REL
QB1_OP
QB2_OP QC2ITL
1
QB9_OP
VPQB7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT &
QC9ITL
QB7_OP 1
QB9_OP
VOLT_OFF
en04000531.vsd
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB7_OP QB7OPTR
QB7_CL QB7CLTR
VPQB7 VPQB7TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
en04000532.vsd
Table 297: Input signals for the ABC_LINE (IF01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1_OP QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL QA1 is in closed position
QB9_OP QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL QB9 is in closed position
QB1_OP QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL QB2 is in closed position
QB7_OP QB7 is in open position
QB7_CL QB7 is in closed position
QC1_OP QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL QC2 is in closed position
QC9_OP QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL QC9 is in closed position
QC11_OP Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position
QC21_OP Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position
QC71_OP Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in open position
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
QC71_CL Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed position
BB7_D_OP Disconnectors on busbar WA7 except in the own bay are
open
BC_12_CL A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and
WA2
BC_17_OP No bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and
WA7
BC_17_CL A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and
WA7
BC_27_OP No bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and
WA7
BC_27_CL A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA2 and
WA7
VOLT_OFF There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure
VP_BB7_D Switch status of the disconnectors on busbar WA7 are valid
VP_BC_12 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are
valid
VP_BC_17 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA7 are
valid
VP_BC_27 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and WA7 are
valid
EXDU_ES No transm error from any bay containing earthing switches
EXDU_BPB No transm error from any bay with disconnectors on WA7
EXDU_BC No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
QB9_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB1_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX3 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX3 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB7_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX3 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX4 External condition for apparatus QB7
Table 298: Output signals for the ABC_LINE (IF01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1CLREL Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB9REL Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QB1REL Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QB7REL Switching of QB7 is allowed
QB7ITL Switching of QB7 is forbidden
QC1REL Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QC9REL Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL Switching of QC9 is forbidden
QB1OPTR QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR QB1 is in closed position
QB2OPTR QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR QB2 is in closed position
QB7OPTR QB7 is in open position
QB7CLTR QB7 is in closed position
QB12OPTR QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
VPQB1TR Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB7TR Switch status of QB7 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or closed)
11.4.5.1 Introduction
The interlocking module ABC_BC is used for a bus-coupler bay connected to a double
busbar arrangement according to figure 278. The module can also be used for a single
busbar arrangement with transfer busbar or double busbar arrangement without
transfer busbar.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
WA7 (C)
QB1 QB2 QB20 QB7
QC1
QA1
QC2
en04000514.vsd
en05000350.vsd
ABC_BC
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB20_OP
QB20_CL =1 VPQB20
QB7_OP
QB7_CL =1 VPQB7
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
QC71_OP
QC71_CL =1 VPQC71
VPQB1
QB1_OP QA1OPREL
& >1 QA1OPITL
QA1O_EX1 1
VPQB20
QB20_OP &
QA1O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP &
EXDU_12
QA1O_EX3
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 QA1CLITL
VPQB7 & 1
VPQB20
en04000533.vsd
VPQA1
VPQB2 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB1ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VP_BC_12
&
QB2_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3
en04000534.vsd
VPQA1
VPQB1 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB2ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VP_BC_12
&
QB1_CL
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC21
&
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3
en04000535.vsd
VPQA1
VPQB20 QB7REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB7ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC71
QA1_OP
QB20_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC71_OP
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC71
&
QC2_CL
QC71_CL
EXDU_ES
QB7_EX2
VPQA1
VPQB7 QB20REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB20ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB7_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC21
&
QC2_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB20_EX2
en04000536.vsd
VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB20 QC1ITL
& 1
VPQB7
QC2REL
VPQB2
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB20_OP
QB7_OP
QB2_OP
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB20_OP QB220OTR
QB2_OP & QB220CTR
VPQB20 1
VQB220TR
VPQB2 &
QB7_OP QB7OPTR
QB7_CL QB7CLTR
VPQB7 VPQB7TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
QA1_OP BC12OPTR
QB1_OP >1 BC12CLTR
QB20_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC12TR
VPQB1 &
VPQB20
QA1_OP BC17OPTR
QB1_OP >1 BC17CLTR
QB7_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC17TR
VPQB1 &
VPQB7
QA1_OP BC27OPTR
QB2_OP >1 BC27CLTR
QB7_OP 1
VPQA1
VPBC27TR
VPQB2 &
VPQB7
en04000537.vsd
Table 299: Input signals for the ABC_BC (IG01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1_OP QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL QB1 is in closed position
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
QB2_OP QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL QB2 is in closed position
QB7_OP QB7 is in open position
QB7_CL QB7 is in closed position
QB20_OP QB20 is in open position
QB20_CL QB20 is in closed position
QC1_OP QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL QC2 is in closed position
QC11_OP Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position
QC21_OP Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position
QC71_OP Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in open position
QC71_CL Earthing switch QC71 on busbar WA7 is in closed position
BBTR_OP No busbar transfer is in progress
BC_12_CL A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and
WA2
VP_BBTR Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar transfer
VP_BC_12 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are
valid
EXDU_ES No transm error from any bay containing earthing switches
EXDU_12 No transm error from any bay connected to WA1/WA2
busbars
EXDU_BC No transmission error from any other bus coupler bay
QA1O_EX1 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX2 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX3 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QB1_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX3 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX3 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB20_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB20
QB20_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB20
QB7_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB7
QB7_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB7
Table 300: Output signals for the ABC_BC (IG01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1OPREL Opening of QA1 is allowed
QA1OPITL Opening of QA1 is forbidden
QA1CLREL Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB1REL Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QB7REL Switching of QB7 is allowed
QB7ITL Switching of QB7 is forbidden
QB20REL Switching of QB20 is allowed
QB20ITL Switching of QB20 is forbidden
QC1REL Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QB1OPTR QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR QB1 is in closed position
QB220OTR QB2 and QB20 are in open position
QB220CTR QB2 or QB20 or both are not in open position
QB7OPTR QB7 is in open position
QB7CLTR QB7 is in closed position
QB12OPTR QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
BC12OPTR No connection via the own bus coupler between WA1 and
WA2
BC12CLTR Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA2
BC17OPTR No connection via the own bus coupler between WA1 and
WA7
BC17CLTR Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between WA1 and WA7
BC27OPTR No connection via the own bus coupler between WA2 and
WA7
BC27CLTR Conn. exists via the own bus coupler between WA2 and WA7
VPQB1TR Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VQB220TR Switch status of QB2 and QB20 are valid (open or closed)
VPQB7TR Switch status of QB7 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or closed)
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
VPBC12TR Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are
valid
VPBC17TR Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA7 are
valid
VPBC27TR Status of the bus coupler app. between WA2 and WA7 are
valid
11.4.6.1 Introduction
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1
QA1
AB_TRAFO
QC2
QC3
QA2
QA2 and QC4 are not
QC4 used in this interlocking
QB3 QB4
en04000515.vsd
en05000358.vsd
AB_TRAFO
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QB3_OP
QB3_CL =1 VPQB3
QB4_OP
QB4_CL =1 VPQB4
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 QA1CLITL
VPQC1 & 1
VPQC2
VPQB3
VPQB4
VPQC3
QA1_EX2
QC3_OP
QA1_EX3
QC1_CL >1
QC2_CL
QC3_CL &
QA1_EX1
en04000538.vsd
VPQA1
VPQB2 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB1ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC3
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QB2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQB2
VPQC3
&
VP_BC_12
QB2_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB1_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
&
VPQC3
VPQC11
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX3
en04000539.vsd
VPQA1
VPQB1 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC1 QB2ITL
VPQC2 1
VPQC3
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QB1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQB1
VPQC3
&
VP_BC_12
QB1_CL
QC3_OP
BC_12_CL
EXDU_BC
QB2_EX2
VPQC1
VPQC2
&
VPQC3
VPQC21
QC1_CL
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX3
en04000540.vsd
VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB2 QC1ITL
& 1
VPQB3
QC2REL
VPQB4
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB2_OP
QB3_OP
QB4_OP
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB1_OP QB12OPTR
QB2_OP >1 QB12CLTR
VPQB1 1
VPQB12TR
VPQB2 &
en04000541.vsd
Table 301: Input signals for the AB_TRAFO (IE01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1_OP QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL QB2 is in closed position
QC1_OP QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL QC2 is in closed position
QB3_OP QB3 is in open position
QB3_CL QB3 is in closed position
QB4_OP QB4 is in open position
QB4_CL QB4 is in closed position
QC3_OP QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL QC3 is in closed position
QC11_OP QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position
QC21_OP QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
BC_12_CL A bus coupler connection exists between busbar WA1 and
WA2
VP_BC_12 Status of the bus coupler app. between WA1 and WA2 are
valid
EXDU_ES No transm error from any bay containing earthing switches
EXDU_BC No transmission error from any bus coupler bay
QA1_EX1 External condition for apparatus QA1
QA1_EX2 External condition for apparatus QA1
QA1_EX3 External condition for apparatus QA1
QB1_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX3 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX3 External condition for apparatus QB2
Table 302: Output signals for the AB_TRAFO (IE01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1CLREL Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB1REL Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC1REL Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QB1OPTR QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR QB1 is in closed position
QB2OPTR QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR QB2 is in closed position
QB12OPTR QB1 or QB2 or both are in open position
QB12CLTR QB1 and QB2 are not in open position
VPQB1TR Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB12TR Switch status of QB1 and QB2 are valid (open or closed)
11.4.7.1 Introduction
The interlocking module A1A2_BS is used for one bus-section circuit breaker
between section 1 and 2 according to figure 282. The module can be used for different
busbars, which includes a bus-section circuit breaker.
QA1
QC3 QC4
en04000516.vsd
A1A2_BS
en05000348.vsd
A1A2_BS
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
S1QC1_OP
S1QC1_CL =1 VPS1QC1
S2QC2_OP
S2QC2_CL =1 VPS2QC2
VPQB1
QB1_OP QA1OPREL
& >1
QA1O_EX1 QA1OPITL
1
VPQB2
QB2_OP
&
QA1O_EX2
VP_BBTR
BBTR_OP
&
EXDU_12
QA1O_EX3
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB2 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC3 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC4 QB1ITL
1
VPS1QC1
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S1QC1_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQC3
VPS1QC1
&
QC3_CL
S1QC1_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2
en04000542.vsd
VPQA1
VPQC3 QB2REL
VPQC4 & >1
QB2ITL
VPS2QC2 1
QA1_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
S2QC2_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC4
VPS2QC2
&
QC4_CL
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2
VPQB1 QC3REL
VPQB2 QC3ITL
QB1_OP & 1
QC4REL
QB2_OP
QC4ITL
1
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
QB1_OP S1S2OPTR
QB2_OP >1 S1S2CLTR
QA1_OP 1
VPQB1
VPS1S2TR
VPQB2 &
VPQA1
en04000543.vsd
Table 303: Input signals for the A1A2_BS (IH01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1_OP QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL QB1 is in closed position
QB2_OP QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL QB2 is in closed position
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
QC3_OP QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL QC3 is in closed position
QC4_OP QC4 is in open position
QC4_CL QC4 is in closed position
S1QC1_OP QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position
S1QC1_CL QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position
S2QC2_OP QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position
S2QC2_CL QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position
BBTR_OP No busbar transfer is in progress
VP_BBTR Status are valid for app. involved in the busbar transfer
EXDU_12 No transm error from any bay connected to busbar 1 and 2
EXDU_ES No transm error from bays containing earth. sw. QC1 or QC2
QA1O_EX1 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX2 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QA1O_EX3 External open condition for apparatus QA1
QB1_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB2_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB2
Table 304: Output signals for the A1A2_BS (IH01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1OPREL Opening of QA1 is allowed
QA1OPITL Opening of QA1 is forbidden
QA1CLREL Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB1REL Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QB2REL Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC3REL Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QC4REL Switching of QC4 is allowed
QC4ITL Switching of QC4 is forbidden
S1S2OPTR No bus section connection between bus section 1 and 2
S1S2CLTR Bus coupler connection between bus section 1 and 2 exists
QB1OPTR QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR QB1 is in closed position
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
QB2OPTR QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR QB2 is in closed position
VPS1S2TR Status of the app. between bus section 1 and 2 are valid
VPQB1TR Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
VPQB2TR Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)
11.4.8.1 Introduction
The interlocking module A1A2_DC is used for one bus-section disconnector between
section 1 and 2 according to figure 284. The module can be used for different busbars,
which includes a bus-section disconnector.
QB
WA1 (A1) WA2 (A2)
QC1 QC2
A1A2_DC en04000492.vsd
en05000349.vsd
A1A2_DC
QB_OP
VPQB VPDCTR
QB_CL =1
DCOPTR
DCCLTR
S1QC1_OP
VPS1QC1
S1QC1_CL =1
S2QC2_OP
VPS2QC2
S2QC2_CL =1
VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
VPS1_DC & >1 QBOPREL
S1QC1_OP QBOPITL
1
S2QC2_OP
S1DC_OP
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX1
VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
VPS2_DC &
S1QC1_OP
S2QC2_OP
S2DC_OP
EXDU_ES
EXDU_BB
QBOP_EX2
VPS1QC1
VPS2QC2
S1QC1_CL &
S2QC2_CL
EXDU_ES
QBOP_EX3
en04000544.vsd
Table 305: Input signals for the A1A2_DC (II01-) function block
Signal Description
QB_OP QB is in open position
QB_CL QB is in closed position
S1QC1_OP QC1 on bus section 1 is in open position
S1QC1_CL QC1 on bus section 1 is in closed position
S2QC2_OP QC2 on bus section 2 is in open position
S2QC2_CL QC2 on bus section 2 is in closed position
S1DC_OP All disconnectors on bus section 1 are in open position
S2DC_OP All disconnectors on bus section 2 are in open position
VPS1_DC Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 1 are valid
VPS2_DC Switch status of disconnectors on bus section 2 are valid
EXDU_ES No transm error from bays containing earth. sw. QC1 or QC2
EXDU_BB No transm error from bays with disc conn to section 1 and 2
QBCL_EX1 External close condition for section disconnector QB
QBCL_EX2 External close condition for section disconnector QB
QBOP_EX1 External open condition for section disconnector QB
QBOP_EX2 External open condition for section disconnector QB
QBOP_EX3 External open condition for section disconnector QB
Table 306: Output signals for the A1A2_DC (II01-) function block
Signal Description
QBOPREL Opening of QB is allowed
QBOPITL Opening of QB is forbidden
QBCLREL Closing of QB is allowed
QBCLITL Closing of QB is forbidden
DCOPTR The bus section disconnector is in open position
DCCLTR The bus section disconnector is in closed position
VPDCTR Switch status of QB is valid (open or closed)
11.4.9.1 Introduction
The interlocking module BB_ES is used for one busbar earthing switch on any busbar
parts according to figure 286.
QC
en04000504.vsd
en05000347.vsd
BB_ES
VP_BB_DC QCREL
BB_DC_OP QCITL
EXDU_BB & 1
QC_OP BBESOPTR
QC_CL BBESCLTR
en04000546.vsd
Table 307: Input signals for the BB_ES (IJ01-) function block
Signal Description
QC_OP Busbar earthing switch QC is in open position
QC_CL Busbar earthing switch QC is in closed position
BB_DC_OP All disconnectors on this busbar part are open
VP_BB_DC Status for all disconnectors on this busbar part are valid
EXDU_BB No transm error from bays with disc on this busbar part
Table 308: Output signals for the BB_ES (IJ01-) function block
Signal Description
QCREL Switching of QC is allowed
QCITL Switching of QC is forbidden
BBESOPTR QC on this busbar part is in open position
BBESCLTR QC on this busbar part is in closed position
11.4.10.1 Introduction
The interlocking modules DB_BUS_A, DB_LINE and DB_BUS_B are used for a
line connected to a double circuit breaker arrangement according to figure 288.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1 QC4
QA1 QA2
DB_BUS_A DB_BUS_B
QC2 QC5
QB61 QB62
QC3
QB9
DB_LINE
QC9
en04000518.vsd
Three types of interlocking modules per double circuit breaker bay are defined.
DB_LINE is the connection from the line to the circuit breaker parts that are connected
to the busbars. DB_BUS_A and DB_BUS_B are the connections from the line to the
busbars.
IB01-
DB_BUS_A
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB1_OP QB61REL
QB1_CL QB61ITL
QB61_OP QB1REL
QB61_CL QB1ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QB1OPTR
QC3_CL QB1CLTR
QC11_OP VPQB1TR
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
en05000354.vsd
IA01-
DB_LINE
QA1_OP QB9REL
QA1_CL QB9ITL
QA2_OP QC3REL
QA2_CL QC3ITL
QB61_OP QC9REL
QB61_CL QC9ITL
QC1_OP
QC1_CL
QC2_OP
QC2_CL
QB62_OP
QB62_CL
QC4_OP
QC4_CL
QC5_OP
QC5_CL
QB9_OP
QB9_CL
QC3_OP
QC3_CL
QC9_OP
QC9_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
en05000356.vsd
IC01-
DB_BUS_B
QA2_OP QA2CLREL
QA2_CL QA2CLITL
QB2_OP QB62REL
QB2_CL QB62ITL
QB62_OP QB2REL
QB62_CL QB2ITL
QC4_OP QC4REL
QC4_CL QC4ITL
QC5_OP QC5REL
QC5_CL QC5ITL
QC3_OP QB2OPTR
QC3_CL QB2CLTR
QC21_OP VPQB2TR
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
en05000355.vsd
DB_BUS_A
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
VPQB61 QA1CLREL
VPQB1 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB61REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB61ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB61_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB61_EX2
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB1REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB1ITL
1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2
en04000547.vsd
VPQB61 QC1REL
VPQB1 QC1ITL
& 1
QB61_OP QC2REL
QB1_OP QC2ITL
1
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
en04000548.vsd
DB_LINE
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QA2_OP
QA2_CL =1 VPQA2
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
QC5_OP
QC5_CL =1 VPQC5
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQA1
VPQA2 QB9REL
VPQC1 & >1
QB9ITL
1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA1_OP
QA2_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX1
& en04000549.vsd
VPQA1
VPQC1
VPQC2 & >1
VPQC3
VPQC9
VPQB62
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX2
VPQA2
VPQB61
&
VPQC3
VPQC4
VPQC5
VPQC9
QA2_OP
QB61_OP
QC3_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC9_OP
QB9_EX3
VPQC3
VPQC9
&
VPQB61
VPQB62
QC3_OP
QC9_OP
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_EX4
VPQC3
VPQC9
&
QC3_CL
QC9_CL
QB9_EX5
en04000550.vsd
VPQB61
VPQB62 QC3REL
VPQB9 &
QC3ITL
1
QB61_OP
QB62_OP
QB9_OP
VPQB9
VPVOLT QC9REL
QB9_OP &
QC9ITL
1
VOLT_OFF
en04000551.vsd
DB_BUS_B
QA2_OP
QA2_CL =1 VPQA2
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QC4_OP
QC4_CL =1 VPQC4
QC5_OP
QC5_CL =1 VPQC5
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VPQB62 QA2CLREL
VPQB2 & QA2CLITL
1
VPQA2
VPQC4 QB62REL
& >1
VPQC5 QB62ITL
1
VPQC3
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC3_OP
QB62_EX1
VPQC5
VPQC3
&
QC5_CL
QC3_CL
QB62_EX2
VPQA2
VPQC4 QB2REL
& >1
VPQC5 QB2ITL
1
VPQC21
QA2_OP
QC4_OP
QC5_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC4
VPQC21
&
QC4_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2
en04000552.vsd
VPQB62 QC4REL
VPQB2 QC4ITL
& 1
QB62_OP QC5REL
QB2_OP QC5ITL
1
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
en04000553.vsd
Table 309: Input signals for the DB_BUS_A (IB01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1_OP QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL QA1 is in closed position
QB1_OP QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL QB1 is in closed position
QB61_OP QB61 is in open position
QB61_CL QB61 is in closed position
QC1_OP QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL QC2 is in closed position
QC3_OP QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL QC3 is in closed position
QC11_OP Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position
EXDU_ES No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC11
QB61_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB61_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB1_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB1
Table 310: Output signals for the DB_BUS_A (IB01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1CLREL Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB61REL Switching of QB61 is allowed
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
QB61ITL Switching of QB61 is forbidden
QB1REL Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QC1REL Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QB1OPTR QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR QB1 is in closed position
VPQB1TR Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
Table 311: Input signals for the DB_LINE (IA01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1_OP QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL QA1 is in closed position
QA2_OP QA2 is in open position
QA2_CL QA2 is in closed position
QB61_OP QB61 is in open position
QB61_CL QB61 is in closed position
QC1_OP QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL QC2 is in closed position
QB62_OP QB62 is in open position
QB62_CL QB62 is in closed position
QC4_OP QC4 is in open position
QC4_CL QC4 is in closed position
QC5_OP QC5 is in open position
QC5_CL QC5 is in closed position
QB9_OP QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL QB9 is in closed position
QC3_OP QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL QC3 is in closed position
QC9_OP QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL QC9 is in closed position
VOLT_OFF There is no voltage on the line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure
QB9_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB9
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
QB9_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX3 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX4 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX5 External condition for apparatus QB9
Table 312: Output signals for the DB_LINE (IA01-) function block
Signal Description
QB9REL Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QC3REL Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QC9REL Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL Switching of QC9 is forbidden
Table 313: Input signals for the DB_BUS_B (IC01-) function block
Signal Description
QA2_OP QA2 is in open position
QA2_CL QA2 is in closed position
QB2_OP QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL QB2 is in closed position
QB62_OP QB62 is in open position
QB62_CL QB62 is in closed position
QC4_OP QC4 is in open position
QC4_CL QC4 is in closed position
QC5_OP QC5 is in open position
QC5_CL QC5 is in closed position
QC3_OP QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL QC3 is in closed position
QC21_OP Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position
EXDU_ES No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC21
QB62_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB62
QB62_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB62
QB2_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB2
Table 314: Output signals for the DB_BUS_B (IC01-) function block
Signal Description
QA2CLREL Closing of QA2 is allowed
QA2CLITL Closing of QA2 is forbidden
QB62REL Switching of QB62 is allowed
QB62ITL Switching of QB62 is forbidden
QB2REL Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC4REL Switching of QC4 is allowed
QC4ITL Switching of QC4 is forbidden
QC5REL Switching of QC5 is allowed
QC5ITL Switching of QC5 is forbidden
QB2OPTR QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR QB2 is in closed position
VPQB2TR Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)
11.4.11.1 Introduction
The interlocking modules BH_LINE_A, BH_CONN and BH_LINE_B are used for
lines connected to a breaker-and-a-half diameter according to figure 292.
WA1 (A)
WA2 (B)
QB1 QB2
QC1 QC1
QA1 QA1
QC2 QC2
QB6 QB6
QC3 QC3
BH_LINE_A BH_LINE_B
QB9 QB9
QC1 QC2
QC9 QC9
BH_CONN
en04000513.vsd
Three types of interlocking modules per diameter are defined. BH_LINE_A and
BH_LINE_B are the connections from a line to a busbar. BH_CONN is the
connection between the two lines of the diameter in the breaker and a half switchyard
layout.
IL01-
BH_LINE_A
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB6_OP QB6REL
QB6_CL QB6ITL
QB1_OP QB1REL
QB1_CL QB1ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
QC3_OP QC3REL
QC3_CL QC3ITL
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9ITL
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9ITL
CQA1_OP QB1OPTR
CQA1_CL QB1CLTR
CQB61_OP VPQB1TR
CQB61_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC11_OP
QC11_CL
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB1_EX1
QB1_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7
en05000352.vsd
IM01-
BH_LINE_B
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLIT L
QB6_OP QB6REL
QB6_CL QB6IT L
QB2_OP QB2REL
QB2_CL QB2IT L
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1IT L
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2IT L
QC3_OP QC3REL
QC3_CL QC3IT L
QB9_OP QB9REL
QB9_CL QB9IT L
QC9_OP QC9REL
QC9_CL QC9IT L
CQA1_OP QB2OPT R
CQA1_CL QB2CLT R
CQB62_OP VPQB2T R
CQB62_CL
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL
QC21_OP
QC21_CL
VOLT _OFF
VOLT _ON
EXDU_ES
QB6_EX1
QB6_EX2
QB2_EX1
QB2_EX2
QB9_EX1
QB9_EX2
QB9_EX3
QB9_EX4
QB9_EX5
QB9_EX6
QB9_EX7
en05000353.vsd
IK01-
BH_CONN
QA1_OP QA1CLREL
QA1_CL QA1CLITL
QB61_OP QB61REL
QB61_CL QB61ITL
QB62_OP QB62REL
QB62_CL QB62ITL
QC1_OP QC1REL
QC1_CL QC1ITL
QC2_OP QC2REL
QC2_CL QC2ITL
1QC3_OP
1QC3_CL
2QC3_OP
2QC3_CL
QB61_EX1
QB61_EX2
QB62_EX1
QB62_EX2
en05000351.vsd
BH_LINE_A
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB1_OP
QB1_CL =1 VPQB1
QB6_OP
QB6_CL =1 VPQB6
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL =1 VPCQA1
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL =1 VPCQC1
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL =1 VPCQC2
CQB61_OP
CQB61_CL =1 VPCQB61
QC11_OP
QC11_CL =1 VPQC11
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQB1 QA1CLREL
VPQB6 QA1CLITL
& 1
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB6REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB6ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2
en04000554.vsd
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB1REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB1ITL
1
VPQC11
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC11_OP
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX1
VPQC1
VPQC11
&
QC1_CL
QC11_CL
EXDU_ES
QB1_EX2
VPQB1 QC1REL
VPQB6 QC1ITL
QB1_OP & 1
QC2REL
QB6_OP QC2ITL
VPQB6 1
VPQB9 QC3REL
VPCQB61 &
QC3ITL
1
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB61_OP
VPQA1 QB9REL
VPQB6 QB9ITL
VPQC9 & >1 1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB61
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
>1
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP &
QB9_EX3
en04000555.vsd
CQB61_OP
QB9_EX4
>1 & >1
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP &
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
&
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT QC9ITL
QB9_OP & 1
VOLT_OFF
QB1_OP QB1OPTR
QB1_CL QB1CLTR
VPQB1 VPQB1TR
en04000556.vsd
BH_LINE_B
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB2_OP
QB2_CL =1 VPQB2
QB6_OP
QB6_CL =1 VPQB6
QC9_OP
QC9_CL =1 VPQC9
QB9_OP
QB9_CL =1 VPQB9
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
QC3_OP
QC3_CL =1 VPQC3
CQA1_OP
CQA1_CL =1 VPCQA1
CQC1_OP
CQC1_CL =1 VPCQC1
CQC2_OP
CQC2_CL =1 VPCQC2
CQB62_OP
CQB62_CL =1 VPCQB62
QC21_OP
QC21_CL =1 VPQC21
VOLT_OFF
VOLT_ON =1 VPVOLT
VPQB2 QA1CLREL
VPQB6 QA1CLITL
& 1
VPQB9
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB6REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB6ITL
1
VPQC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC3_OP
QB6_EX1
VPQC2
VPQC3
&
QC2_CL
QC3_CL
QB6_EX2
en04000557.vsd
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB2REL
VPQC2 & >1
QB2ITL
1
VPQC21
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
QC21_OP
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX1
VPQC1
VPQC21
&
QC1_CL
QC21_CL
EXDU_ES
QB2_EX2
VPQB2 QC1REL
VPQB6 QC1ITL
QB2_OP & 1
QC2REL
QB6_OP QC2ITL
VPQB6 1
VPQB9 QC3REL
VPCQB62 &
QC3ITL
1
QB6_OP
QB9_OP
CQB62_OP
VPQA1 QB9REL
VPQB6 QB9ITL
VPQC9 & >1 1
VPQC1
VPQC2
VPQC3
VPCQA1
VPCQB62
VPCQC1
VPCQC2
QB9_EX1
QB6_OP
QB9_EX2
>1
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP &
QB9_EX3
en04000558.vsd
CQB62_OP
QB9_EX4
>1 & >1
CQA1_OP
CQC1_OP
CQC2_OP &
QB9_EX5
QC9_OP
QC3_OP
QB9_EX6
VPQC9
VPQC3
&
QC9_CL
QC3_CL
QB9_EX7
VPQB9 QC9REL
VPVOLT QC9ITL
QB9_OP & 1
VOLT_OFF
QB2_OP QB2OPTR
QB2_CL QB2CLTR
VPQB2 VPQB2TR
en04000559.vsd
BH_CONN
QA1_OP
QA1_CL =1 VPQA1
QB61_OP
QB61_CL =1 VPQB61
QB62_OP
QB62_CL =1 VPQB62
QC1_OP
QC1_CL =1 VPQC1
QC2_OP
QC2_CL =1 VPQC2
1QC3_OP
1QC3_CL =1 VP1QC3
2QC3_OP
2QC3_CL =1 VP2QC3
VPQB61 QA1CLREL
VPQB62 & QA1CLITL
1
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB61REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB61ITL
1
VP1QC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
1QC3_OP
QB61_EX1
VPQC1
VP1QC3
&
QC1_CL
1QC3_CL
QB61_EX2
VPQA1
VPQC1 QB62REL
& >1
VPQC2 QB62ITL
1
VP2QC3
QA1_OP
QC1_OP
QC2_OP
2QC3_OP
QB62_EX1
VPQC2
VP2QC3
&
QC2_CL
2QC3_CL
QB62_EX2
VPQB61 QC1REL
VPQB62 QC1ITL
& 1
QB61_OP QC2REL
QB62_OP QC2ITL
1
en04000560.vsd
Table 315: Input signals for the BH_LINE_A (IL01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1_OP QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL QA1 is in closed position
QB6_OP QB6 is in open position
QB6_CL QB6 is in close position
QB1_OP QB1 is in open position
QB1_CL QB1 is in closed position
QC1_OP QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL QC2 is in closed position
QC3_OP QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL QC3 is in closed position
QB9_OP QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL QB9 is in closed position
QC9_OP QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL QC9 is in closed position
CQA1_OP QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQA1_CL QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQB61_OP QB61 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQB61_CL QB61 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC1_OP QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC1_CL QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC2_OP QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC2_CL QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
QC11_OP Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in open position
QC11_CL Earthing switch QC11 on busbar WA1 is in closed position
VOLT_OFF There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure
EXDU_ES No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC11
QB6_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB6_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB1_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB1_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB1
QB9_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX3 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX4 External condition for apparatus QB9
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
QB9_EX5 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX6 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX7 External condition for apparatus QB9
Table 316: Output signals for the BH_LINE_A (IL01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1CLREL Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB6REL Switching of QB6 is allowed
QB6ITL Switching of QB6 is forbidden
QB1REL Switching of QB1 is allowed
QB1ITL Switching of QB1 is forbidden
QC1REL Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QC3REL Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QB9REL Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QC9REL Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL Switching of QC9 is forbidden
QB1OPTR QB1 is in open position
QB1CLTR QB1 is in closed position
VPQB1TR Switch status of QB1 is valid (open or closed)
Table 317: Input signals for the BH_LINE_B (IM01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1_OP QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL QA1 is in closed position
QB6_OP QB6 is in open position
QB6_CL QB6 is in close position
QB2_OP QB2 is in open position
QB2_CL QB2 is in closed position
QC1_OP QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP QC2 is in open position
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
QC2_CL QC2 is in closed position
QC3_OP QC3 is in open position
QC3_CL QC3 is in closed position
QB9_OP QB9 is in open position
QB9_CL QB9 is in closed position
QC9_OP QC9 is in open position
QC9_CL QC9 is in closed position
CQA1_OP QA1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQA1_CL QA1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQB62_OP QB62 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQB62_CL QB62 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC1_OP QC1 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC1_CL QC1 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
CQC2_OP QC2 in module BH_CONN is in open position
CQC2_CL QC2 in module BH_CONN is in closed position
QC21_OP Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in open position
QC21_CL Earthing switch QC21 on busbar WA2 is in closed position
VOLT_OFF There is no voltage on line and not VT (fuse) failure
VOLT_ON There is voltage on the line or there is a VT (fuse) failure
EXDU_ES No transm error from bay containing earthing switch QC21
QB6_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB6_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB6
QB2_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB2_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB2
QB9_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX3 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX4 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX5 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX6 External condition for apparatus QB9
QB9_EX7 External condition for apparatus QB9
Table 318: Output signals for the BH_LINE_B (IM01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1CLREL Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB6REL Switching of QB6 is allowed
QB6ITL Switching of QB6 is forbidden
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
QB2REL Switching of QB2 is allowed
QB2ITL Switching of QB2 is forbidden
QC1REL Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL Switching of QC2 is forbidden
QC3REL Switching of QC3 is allowed
QC3ITL Switching of QC3 is forbidden
QB9REL Switching of QB9 is allowed
QB9ITL Switching of QB9 is forbidden
QC9REL Switching of QC9 is allowed
QC9ITL Switching of QC9 is forbidden
QB2OPTR QB2 is in open position
QB2CLTR QB2 is in closed position
VPQB2TR Switch status of QB2 is valid (open or closed)
Table 319: Input signals for the BH_CONN (IK01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1_OP QA1 is in open position
QA1_CL QA1 is in closed position
QB61_OP QB61 is in open position
QB61_CL QB61 is in closed position
QB62_OP QB62 is in open position
QB62_CL QB62 is in closed position
QC1_OP QC1 is in open position
QC1_CL QC1 is in closed position
QC2_OP QC2 is in open position
QC2_CL QC2 is in closed position
1QC3_OP QC3 on line 1 is in open position
1QC3_CL QC3 on line 1 is in closed position
2QC3_OP QC3 on line 2 is in open position
2QC3_CL QC3 on line 2 is in closed position
QB61_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB61_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB61
QB62_EX1 External condition for apparatus QB62
QB62_EX2 External condition for apparatus QB62
Table 320: Output signals for the BH_CONN (IK01-) function block
Signal Description
QA1CLREL Closing of QA1 is allowed
QA1CLITL Closing of QA1 is forbidden
QB61REL Switching of QB61 is allowed
QB61ITL Switching of QB61 is forbidden
QB62REL Switching of QB62 is allowed
QB62ITL Switching of QB62 is forbidden
QC1REL Switching of QC1 is allowed
QC1ITL Switching of QC1 is forbidden
QC2REL Switching of QC2 is allowed
QC2ITL Switching of QC2 is forbidden
en07000048.vsd
Table 321: Input signals for the IntlReceive (GR01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of output signals
Table 322: Output signals for the IntlReceive (GR01-) function block
Signal Description
RESREQ Reservation request
RESGRANT Reservation granted
APP1_OP Apparatus 1 position is open
APP1_CL Apparatus 1 position is closed
APP1VAL Apparatus 1 position is valid
APP2_OP Apparatus 2 position is open
APP2_CL Apparatus 2 position is closed
APP2VAL Apparatus 2 position is valid
APP3_OP Apparatus 3 position is open
APP3_CL Apparatus 3 position is closed
APP3VAL Apparatus 3 position is valid
APP4_OP Apparatus 4 position is open
APP4_CL Apparatus 4 position is closed
APP4VAL Apparatus 4 position is valid
APP5_OP Apparatus 5 position is open
APP5_CL Apparatus 5 position is closed
APP5VAL Apparatus 5 position is valid
APP6_OP Apparatus 6 position is open
APP6_CL Apparatus 6 position is closed
APP6VAL Apparatus 6 position is valid
APP7_OP Apparatus 7 position is open
APP7_CL Apparatus 7 position is closed
APP7VAL Apparatus 7 position is valid
APP8_OP Apparatus 8 position is open
APP8_CL Apparatus 8 position is closed
APP8VAL Apparatus 8 position is valid
APP9_OP Apparatus 9 position is open
APP9_CL Apparatus 9 position is closed
APP9VAL Apparatus 9 position is valid
APP10_OP Apparatus 10 position is open
APP10_CL Apparatus 10 position is closed
APP10VAL Apparatus 10 position is valid
APP11_OP Apparatus 11 position is open
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
APP11_CL Apparatus 11 position is closed
APP11VAL Apparatus 11 position is valid
APP12_OP Apparatus 12 position is open
APP12_CL Apparatus 12 position is closed
APP12VAL Apparatus 12 position is valid
APP13_OP Apparatus 13 position is open
APP13_CL Apparatus 13 position is closed
APP13VAL Apparatus 13 position is valid
APP14_OP Apparatus 14 position is open
APP14_CL Apparatus 14 position is closed
APP14VAL Apparatus 14 position is valid
APP15_OP Apparatus 15 position is open
APP15_CL Apparatus 15 position is closed
APP15VAL Apparatus 15 position is valid
COM_VAL Receive communication status is valid
Table 323: Basic general settings for the IntlReceive (GR01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off/On
On
11.5.1 Introduction
The SLGGIO function block (or the selector switch function block) is used within
the CAP tool in order to get a selector switch functionality similar with the one
provided by a hardware selector switch. Hardware selector switches are used
extensively by utilities, in order to have different functions operating on pre-set
values. Hardware switches are however sources for maintenance issues, lower system
reliability and extended purchase portfolio. The virtual selector switches eliminate
all these problems.
Besides the inputs visible in “CAP configuration tool”, there are other executable
inputs that will allow an user to set the desired position directly (without activating
the intermediate positions), either locally or remotely, using a “select before execute”
dialog. One can block the function operation, by activating the BLOCK input. In this
case, the present position will be kept and further operation will be blocked. The
operator place (local or remote) is specified through the PSTO input. If any operation
is allowed the signal INTONE from the Fixed signal function block can be connected.
The SLGGIO function block has also an integer value output, that generates the actual
position number. The positions and the block names are fully settable by the user.
These names will appear in the menu, so the user can see the position names instead
of a number.
1 2 3
../Ctrl/Com/Sel Sw ../Com/Sel Sw/SL03 ../Com/Sel Sw/SL03
SL01 Damage ctrl Damage ctrl
4 4
SL02
..
..
SL15
OK Cancel
4
5
The dialog window that appears
../Com/Sel Sw/ shows the present position (P:)
DmgCtrl 7
and the new position (N:), both
Damage ctrl: in clear names, given by the
user (max. 13 characters).
E
Modify the position with arrows.
The pos will not be modified (outputs
will not be activated) until you press
the E-button for O.K. en06000420.vsd
Figure 297: Example 1 on handling the switch from the local HMI.
• if it is used just for the monitoring, the switches will be listed with their actual
position names, as defined by the user (max. 13 characters);
• if it is used for control, the switches will be listed with their actual positions, but
only the first three letters of the name will be used;
In both cases, the switch full name will be shown, but the user has to redefine it when
building the Graphical Display Editor, under the "Caption". If used for the control,
the following sequence of commands will ensue:
../Control/SLD/Switch
O I ../Control/SLD/Switch
AR control AR control
WFM Select switch. Press the
WFM
I or O key. A dialog box
Pilot setup appears.
Pilot setup
OFF OFF
Damage control E P: Disc N: Disc Fe
DAL
The pos will not be modified
(outputs will not be activated) until OK Cancel
you press the E-button for O.K.
../Control/SLD/Switch
AR control
WFM
Pilot setup
OFF
Damage control
DFW
en06000421.vsd
Figure 298: Example 2 on handling the switch from the local HMI.
en05000658.vsd
Table 324: Input signals for the SLGGIO (SL01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
PSTO Operator place selection
UP Binary "UP" command
DOWN Binary "DOWN" command
Table 325: Output signals for the SLGGIO (SL01-) function block
Signal Description
SWPOS01 Selector switch position 1
SWPOS02 Selector switch position 2
SWPOS03 Selector switch position 3
SWPOS04 Selector switch position 4
SWPOS05 Selector switch position 5
SWPOS06 Selector switch position 6
SWPOS07 Selector switch position 7
SWPOS08 Selector switch position 8
SWPOS09 Selector switch position 9
SWPOS10 Selector switch position 10
SWPOS11 Selector switch position 11
SWPOS12 Selector switch position 12
SWPOS13 Selector switch position 13
SWPOS14 Selector switch position 14
SWPOS15 Selector switch position 15
SWPOS16 Selector switch position 16
SWPOS17 Selector switch position 17
SWPOS18 Selector switch position 18
SWPOS19 Selector switch position 19
SWPOS20 Selector switch position 20
SWPOS21 Selector switch position 21
SWPOS22 Selector switch position 22
SWPOS23 Selector switch position 23
SWPOS24 Selector switch position 24
SWPOS25 Selector switch position 25
SWPOS26 Selector switch position 26
SWPOS27 Selector switch position 27
SWPOS28 Selector switch position 28
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
SWPOS29 Selector switch position 29
SWPOS30 Selector switch position 30
SWPOS31 Selector switch position 31
SWPOS32 Selector switch position 32
SWPOSN Switch position (integer)
Table 326: Basic general settings for the SLGGIO (SL01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off/On
On
NrPos 32 1 2 - 32 - Number of positions
in the switch
OutType Pulsed - Steady - Output type, steady or
Steady pulse
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Operate pulse
duration, in [s]
tDelay 0.000 - 60000.000 0.010 0.000 s Time delay on the
output, in [s]
StopAtExtremes Disabled - Disabled - Stop when min or max
Enabled position is reached
11.6.1 Introduction
The VSGGIO function block (or the versatile switch function block) is a multipurpose
function used within the CAP tool for a variety of applications, as a general – purpose
switch.
The switch can be controlled from the menu or from a symbol on the SLD of the
LHMI.
• for indication, receiving position through the IPOS1 and IPOS2 inputs and
distributing it in the configuration through the POS1 and POS2 outputs or to
IEC61850 through reporting or GOOSE
• for command, receiving commands via the HMI. HMI symbols Select button or
Indication button from menu (Control / Commands / Versatile Switch) or
IEC61850 and sending them in the configuration and especially to the outputs
(through a SMBO function block)
The PSTO input is connected to the Local remote switch to have a selection of
operators place , operation from local HMI (Local pos) or through IEC 61850 (Remote
pos). An INTONE connection from Fixed signal function block will allow operation
from Local HMI.
en06000508.vsd
Table 327: Input signals for the VSGGIO (VS01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
PSTO Operator place selection
IPOS1 Position 1 indicating input
IPOS2 Position 2 indicating input
Table 328: Output signals for the VSGGIO (VS01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCKED The function is active but the functionality is blocked
POSITION Position indication, integer
POS1 Position 1 indication, logical signal
POS2 Position 2 indication, logical signal
CMDPOS12 Execute command from position 1 to position 2
CMDPOS21 Execute command from position 2 to position 1
Table 329: Basic general settings for the VSGGIO (VS01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
CtlModel Dir Norm - Dir Norm - Specifies the type for
SBO Enh control model
according to IEC
61850
Mode Steady - Pulsed - Operation mode
Pulsed
tSelect 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 30.000 s Max time between
select and execute
signals
tPulse 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Command pulse
lenght
11.7.1 Introduction
The DPGGIO function block is used to send three logical signals to other systems or
equipment in the substation. It is especially conceived to be used in the interlocking
and reservation station-wide logics.
en07000200.vsd
Table 330: Input signals for the DPGGIO (DP01-) function block
Signal Description
OPEN Open indication
CLOSE Close indication
VALID Valid indication
Table 331: Output signals for the DPGGIO (DP01-) function block
Signal Description
POSITION Double point indication
11.8.1 Introduction
The SC function block is a collection of 8 single point commands, designed to bring
in commands from REMOTE (SCADA) or LOCAL (HMI) to those parts of the logic
configuration that do not need complicated function blocks that have the capability
to receive commands (for example SCSWI). In this way, simple commands can be
sent directly to the IED outputs, without confirmation. Confirmation (status) of the
result of the commands is supposed to be achieved by other means, such as binary
inputs and SPGGIO function blocks.
en07000143.vsd
Table 332: Input signals for the SPC8GGIO (SC01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Blocks the function operation
PSTO Operator place selection
Table 333: Output signals for the SPC8GGIO (SC01-) function block
Signal Description
OUT1 Output 1
OUT2 Output2
OUT3 Output3
OUT4 Output4
OUT5 Output5
OUT6 Output6
OUT7 Output7
OUT8 Output8
Table 334: Basic general settings for the SPC8GGIO (SC01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off/On
On
Latched1 Pulsed - Pulsed - Setting for pulsed/
Latched latched mode for
output 1
tPulse1 0.01 - 6000.00 0.01 0.10 s Output1 Pulse Time
Latched2 Pulsed - Pulsed - Setting for pulsed/
Latched latched mode for
output 2
tPulse2 0.01 - 6000.00 0.01 0.10 s Output2 Pulse Time
Latched3 Pulsed - Pulsed - Setting for pulsed/
Latched latched mode for
output 3
tPulse3 0.01 - 6000.00 0.01 0.10 s Output3 Pulse Time
Latched4 Pulsed - Pulsed - Setting for pulsed/
Latched latched mode for
output 4
tPulse4 0.01 - 6000.00 0.01 0.10 s Output4 Pulse Time
Latched5 Pulsed - Pulsed - Setting for pulsed/
Latched latched mode for
output 5
tPulse5 0.01 - 6000.00 0.01 0.10 s Output5 Pulse Time
Table continued on next page
Also Local acceleration logic (ZCLC) is discussed which is a function that can
generate instantaneous tripping as a result of remote end faults without any
telecommunication.
The chapter contains a short description of the design, simplified logical block
diagrams, figure of the function block, input and output signals and setting
parameters.
12.1.1 Introduction
To achieve instantaneous fault clearance for all line faults, a scheme communication
logic is provided. All types of communication schemes e.g. permissive underreach,
permissive overreach, blocking, intertrip etc. are available. The built-in
communication module (LDCM) can be used for scheme communication signalling
when included.
A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false tripping
than a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends on a
received signal for a fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a blocking
scheme.
The received signal, which shall be connected to CR, is used to not release the zone
to be accelerated to clear the fault instantaneously (after time tCoord). The
overreaching zone to be accelerated is connected to the input CACC, see
figure 303.
In case of external faults, the blocking signal (CR) must be received before the settable
timer tCoord elapses, to prevent a false trip, see figure 303.
The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip by
activating the input BLKTR, Block of carrier send by activating the input BLKCS.
tCoord
CACC
t TRIP
CR AND
en05000512.vsd
The logic for trip carrier in permissive scheme is shown in figure 304.
tCoord
CACC
t TRIP
CR AND
en05000513.vsd
The permissive underreach scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned
for blocking scheme above.
The logic for trip carrier is the same as for permissive underreach, i.e. figure 304.
The permissive overreach scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned
for blocking scheme above.
The unblocking function uses a carrier guard signal CRG, which must always be
present, even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal for a
time longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 305. This
also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal
transmission.
The carrier received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after
the security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated
for signalling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard
signal is present again.
CR
tSecurity CRL
t >1
1
CRG
200 ms 150 ms
t OR t AND
AND
LCG
en05000746.vsd
The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):
In the direct inter-trip scheme, the carrier send signal CS is sent from an underreaching
zone that is tripping the line.
The received signal CR is directly transferred to a TRIP for tripping without local
criteria. The signal is further processed in the tripping logic. In case of single-pole
tripping in multi-phase systems, a phase selection is performed.
The simplified logic diagram for the complete logic is shown in figure 306.
Unblock =
Off
CR
Unblock =
OR CRL
NoRestart AND
CRL
Unblock =
tSecurit
Restart
y
CRG 1 t AND
SchemeType =
Intertrip
CSUR
tSendMi
n AND
OR
BLOCK AND
CSBLK OR
CRL
Schemetype =
Permissive UR AND CS
OR
tCoord
AND 25 ms
OR t TRIP
CACC t
Schemetype =
Permissive OR
CSOR OR AND
AND
tSendMin
OR
AND
SchemeType =
Blocking
BLKCS
AND
en05000515.vsd
Figure 306: Scheme communication logic for distance protection, simplified logic
diagram
en06000286.vsd
Table 335: Input signals for the ZCPSCH_85 (ZCOM-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTR Signal for block of trip output from communication logic
BLKCS Block of carrier send in permissive OR and blocking schemes
CSBLK Reverse directed distance protection zone signal
CACC Permissive distance protection zone signal
CSOR Overreaching distance protection zone signal
CSUR Underreaching distance protection zone signal
CR Carrier Signal Received
CRG Carrier guard signal received
Table 336: Output signals for the ZCPSCH_85 (ZCOM-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip output
CS Carrier Send signal
CRL Carrier signal received or missing carrier guard signal
LCG Loss of carrier guard signal
Table 337: Basic parameter group settings for the ZCPSCH_85 (ZCOM-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
SchemeType Off - Permissive UR - Scheme type
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
tCoord 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.035 s Co-ordination time for
blocking
communication
scheme
tSendMin 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Minimum duration of a
carrier send signal
Table 338: Advanced parameter group settings for the ZCPSCH_85 (ZCOM-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Unblock Off - Off - Operation mode of
NoRestart unblocking logic
Restart
tSecurity 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.035 s Security timer for loss
of carrier guard
detection
Table 339: Scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Scheme type Intertrip -
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
Co-ordination time for blocking (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
communication scheme
Minimum duration of a carrier send (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
signal
Security timer for loss of carrier guard (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
detection
Operation mode of unblocking logic Off -
NoRestart
Restart
12.2.1 Introduction
Communication between line ends is used to achieve fault clearance for all faults on
a power line. All possible types of communication schemes e.g. permissive
underreach, permissive overreach and blocking schemes are available. To manage
problems with simultaneous faults on parallel power lines phase segregated
communication is needed. This will then replace the standard scheme communication
module (ZCOM) on important lines where three communication channels (in each
subsystem) are available for the distance protection communication.
The main purpose of the ZC1P scheme communication logic is to supplement the
distance protection function such that:
• fast clearance of faults is also achieved at the line end for which the faults are on
the part of the line not covered by its underreaching zone.
• correct phase selection can be maintained to support single-pole tripping for
faults occurring anywhere on the entire length of a double circuit line.
To accomplish this, three separate communication channels, i.e. one per phase, each
capable of transmitting a signal in each direction are required.
The Phase segregated communication logic can be completed with the current
reversal and WEI logic for phase segregated communication, when found necessary
in Blocking and Permissive overreaching schemes.
A permissive scheme is inherently faster and has better security against false tripping
than a blocking scheme. On the other hand, a permissive scheme depends on a
received signal for a fast trip, so its dependability is lower than that of a blocking
scheme.
The ability to select which distance protection zone is assigned to which input of the
scheme communication logic makes this logic able to support practically any scheme
communication requirements regardless of their basic operating principle. The
outputs to initiate tripping and sending of the teleprotection signal are given in
accordance with the type of communication-aided scheme selected and the zone(s)
and phase(s) of the distance protection which have operated.
When power line carrier communication channels are used for permissive schemes
communication, unblocking logic which uses the loss of guard signal as a receive
criteria is provided. This logic compensates for the lack of dependability due to the
transmission of the command signal over the faulted line.
The function can be totally blocked by activating the input BLOCK, block of trip is
achieved by activating the input BLKTRLx, Block of carrier send is done by
activating the input BLKCSLx.
tCoord 25 ms
CACCLx
t t TRLx
CRLx AND
en06000310.vsd
Figure 308: Basic logic for trip carrier in one phase of a blocking scheme
tCoord 25 ms
CACCLx
t t TRLx
CRLx AND
en07000088.vsd
Figure 309: Basic logic for trip carrier in one phase of a permissive underreach
scheme
The permissive overreach scheme has the same blocking possibilities as mentioned
for blocking scheme above. The blocking inputs are activated from the current
reversal logic when this function is included.
In the direct intertrip scheme, the carrier send signal CS is sent from an underreaching
zone that is tripping the line.
The received signal per phase is directly transferred to the trip function block for
tripping without local criteria. The signal is not further processed in the phase
segregated communication logic. In case of single-pole tripping the phase selection
and logic for tripping the three phases is performed in the trip function block.
The simplified logic diagram for one phase (Lx) is shown in figure 310.
SchemeType =
Intertrip
CSURLx
tSendMin AND
OR
BLOCK
AND
CSBLKLx OR
CRLx
Schemetype =
Permissive UR AND CSLx
OR
tCoord 25 ms
AND t TRLx
OR t
CACCLx
Schemetype =
Permissive OR
CSORLx OR AND
AND
tSendMin
OR
AND
SchemeType =
Blocking
BLKCSx
AND
CSL1
CSL2 AND
CSL2
OR CSMPH
CSL3 AND
CSL3
CSL1 AND
CSL1
CSL2 GENERAL
OR
CSL3
en06000311.vsd
en06000427.vsd
Table 340: Input signals for the ZC1PPSCH_85 (ZC1P-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTR Common signal for block of trip output from communication
logic in all phases
BLKTRL1 Signal for block of trip output from communication logic in
Phase L1
BLKTRL2 Signal for block of trip output from communication logic in
Phase L2
BLKTRL3 Signal for block of trip output from communication logic in
Phase L3
CACCL1 Accelerated Distance protection zone start in Phase L1
CACCL2 Accelerated Distance protection zone signal in Phase L2
CACCL3 Accelerated Distance protection zone signal in Phase L3
CSURL1 Underreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L1
CSURL2 Underreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L2
CSURL3 Underreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L3
CSORL1 Overreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L1
CSORL2 Overreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L2
CSORL3 Overreaching distance protection zone signal in Phase L3
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
CSBLKL1 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal in Phase L1
CSBLKL2 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal in Phase L2
CSBLKL3 Reverse directed distance protection zone signal in Phase L3
BLKCSL1 Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking schemes in Phase
L1
BLKCSL2 Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking schemes in Phase
L2
BLKCSL3 Block of carrier send in POR and Blocking schemes in Phase
L3
CRL1 Carrier signal received in Phase L1
CRL2 Carrier signal received in Phase L2
CRL3 Carrier signal received in Phase L3
CRMPH Carrier Signal received for multiphase fault
Table 341: Output signals for the ZC1PPSCH_85 (ZC1P-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Common trip output in any of the phase
TRL1 Trip output in Phase L1
TRL2 Trip output in Phase L2
TRL3 Trip output in Phase L3
CSL1 Carrier Send in phase L1
CSL2 Carrier Send in phase L2
CSL3 Carrier Send in phase L3
CSMPH carrier Send for mulitphase fault
CRLL1 Carrier signal received in Phase L1
CRLL2 Carrier signal received in Phase L2
CRLL3 Carrier signal received in Phase L3
Table 342: Parameter group settings for the ZC1PPSCH_85 (ZC1P-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation On / Off
On
Scheme Type Off - Permissive UR - Scheme type
Intertrip
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
tCoord 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Trip coordinate time
tSendMin 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Minimum duration of
Carrier Send signal
Table 343: Phase segregated scheme communication logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Scheme type Intertrip -
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
Co-ordination time for blocking (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
communication scheme
Minimum duration of a carrier send (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
signal
Security timer for loss of carrier guard (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
detection
Operation mode of unblocking logic Off -
NoRestart
Restart
12.3.1 Introduction
The current reversal function is used to prevent unwanted operations due to current
reversal when using permissive overreach protection schemes in application with
parallel lines when the overreach from the two ends overlaps on the parallel line.
The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the apparent power behind the
protection can be too low to activate the distance protection function. When activated,
received carrier signal together with local under voltage criteria and no reverse zone
operation gives an instantaneous trip. The received signal is also echoed back to
accelerate the sending end.
The current reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IRLVLx to
recognize the fault on the parallel line in phase Lx. When the reverse zone has been
activated for a certain settable time tPickUpRev it prevents sending of a
communication signal and activation of trip signal for a predefined time tDelayRev.
This makes it possible for the carrier receive signal to reset before the carrier aided
trip signal is activated due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone, see
figure 312.
The preventing of sending carrier send signal CSLx and activating of the TRIPLx in
the scheme communication block ZCOM is carried out by connecting the IRVL signal
to input BLOCK in the ZCOM function.
The function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which secure that the current
reversal logic will be activated for short input signals even if the pick-up timer is set
to zero.
The WEI function sends back (echoes) the received carrier signal under the condition
that no fault has been detected on the weak end by different fault detection elements
(distance protection in forward and reverse direction).
The WEI function returns the received carrier signal, see figure 313, when:
en06000287.vsd
Table 344: Input signals for the ZCRWPSCH_85 (ZCAL-) function block
Signal Description
U3P Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK Block of function
IRVBLK Block of current reversal function
IRV Activation of current reversal logic
WEIBLK1 Block of WEI logic
WEIBLK2 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other protections
VTSZ Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure function
CBOPEN Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL POR Carrier receive for WEI logic
Table 345: Output signals for the ZCRWPSCH_85 (ZCAL-) function block
Signal Description
IRVL Operation of current reversal logic
TRWEI Trip of WEI logic
TRWEIL1 Trip of WEI logic in phase L1
TRWEIL2 Trip of WEI logic in phase L2
TRWEIL3 Trip of WEI logic in phase L3
ECHO Carrier send by WEI logic
Table 346: Basic parameter group settings for the ZCRWPSCH_85 (ZCAL-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
CurrRev Off - Off - Operating mode of
On Current Reversal
Logic
tPickUpRev 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Pickup time for
current reversal logic
tDelayRev 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.060 s Time Delay to prevent
Carrier send and local
trip
WEI Off - Off - Operating mode of
Echo WEI logic
Echo & Trip
tPickUpWEI 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.010 s Coordination time for
the WEI logic
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base setting for
voltage level
UPP< 10 - 90 1 70 %UB Phase to Phase
voltage for detection
of fault condition
UPN< 10 - 90 1 70 %UB Phase to Neutral
voltage for detection
of fault condition
Table 347: Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for distance protection (PSCH, 85)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Detection level phase to neutral (10-90)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur
voltage
Detection level phase to phase (10-90)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur
voltage
Reset ratio <105% -
Operate time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Coordination time for weak-end (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
infeed logic
12.4.1 Introduction
To achieve fast clearing of faults on the whole line, when no communication channel
is available, local acceleration logic (ZCLC) can be used. This logic enables fast fault
clearing during certain conditions, but naturally, it can not fully replace a
communication channel.
The logic can be controlled either by the auto re-closer (zone extension) or by the
loss of load current (loss-of-load acceleration).
The overreaching zone is connected to the input -EXACC. For this reason, configure
the ARREADY functional input to a READY functional output of a used auto-
reclosing function or via the selected binary input to an external autoreclosing device,
see figure 316.
After the auto-recloser initiates the close command and remains in the reclaim state,
there will be no ARREADY signal, and the protection will trip normally with step
distance time functions. In case of a fault on the adjacent line within the overreaching
zone range, an unwanted auto-reclosing cycle will occur. The step distance function
at the reclosing attempt will prevent an unwanted retrip when the breaker is reclosed.
On the other hand, at a persistent line fault on line section not covered by instantaneous
zone (normally zone 1) only the first trip will be "instantaneous".
The function will be blocked if the input BLOCK is activated (common with loss of
load acceleration).
When the "acceleration" is controlled by a loss of load, the overreaching zone used
for "acceleration" connected to LLACC is not allowed to trip "instantaneously" during
normal non-fault system conditions. When all three-phase currents have been above
the set value MinCurr for more than setting tLowCurr, an overreaching zone will be
allowed to trip "instantaneously" during a fault condition when one or two of the
phase currents will become low due to a three phase trip at the opposite terminal, see
figure 317. The current measurement is performed internally and the STILL signal
becomes logical one under the described conditions. The load current in a healthy
phase is in this way used to indicate the tripping at the opposite terminal. Note that
this function will not operate in case of three-phase faults, because none of the phase
currents will be low when the opposite terminal is tripped.
Breaker closing signals can if decided be connected to block the function during
normal closing.
en05000333.vsd
Table 348: Input signals for the ZCLCPLAL (ZCLC-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current input
BLOCK Block of function
ARREADY Autoreclosure ready, releases function used for fast trip
NDST Non directional criteria used to prevent instantaneous trip
EXACC Connected to function used for tripping at zone xtension
BC Breaker Close
LLACC Connected to function used for tripping at loss of load
Table 349: Output signals for the ZCLCPLAL (ZCLC-) function block
Signal Description
TRZE Trip by zone extension
TRLL Trip by loss of load
Table 350: Basic parameter group settings for the ZCLCPLAL (ZCLC-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base setting for
current values
LoadCurr 1 - 100 1 10 %IB Load current before
disturbance in % of
IBase
LossOfLoad Off - Off - Enable/Disable
On operation of Loss of
load.
ZoneExtension Off - Off - Enable/Disable
On operation of Zone
extension
MinCurr 1 - 100 1 5 %IB Lev taken as curr loss
due to remote CB trip
in % of IBase
tLowCurr 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.200 s Time delay on pick-up
for MINCURR value
tLoadOn 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Time delay on pick-up
for load current
release
tLoadOff 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.300 s Time delay on drop off
for load current
release
12.5.1 Introduction
To achieve fast fault clearance of earth faults on the part of the line not covered by
the instantaneous step of the residual overcurrent protection, the directional residual
overcurrent protection can be supported with a logic that uses communication
channels.
The communication logic module for directional residual current protection for the
REx670 IEDs enables blocking as well as permissive under/overreach schemes. The
logic can also be supported by additional logic for weak-end-infeed and current
reversal, included in the EFCA function.
In the blocking scheme a signal is sent to the other line end if the directional element
detects an earth fault in the reverse direction. When the forward directional element
operates, it trips after a short time delay if no blocking signal is received from the
other line end. The time delay, normally 30 – 40 ms, depends on the communication
transmission time and a chosen safety margin.
One advantage of the blocking scheme is that only one channel (carrier frequency) is
needed if the ratio of source impedances at both end is approximately equal for zero
and positive sequence source impedances, the channel can be shared with the
impedance-measuring system, if that system also works in the blocking mode. The
power line carrier communication signal is transmitted on a healthy line and no signal
attenuation will occur due to the fault.
If the fault is on the line, the forward direction measuring element operates. If no
blocking signal comes from the other line end via the CR binary input (carrier receive)
the TRIP output is activated after the tCoord set time delay.
In the permissive scheme the forward directed earth fault measuring element sends a
permissive signal to the other end, if an earth fault is detected in the forward direction.
The directional element at the other line end must wait for a permissive signal before
activating an operation signal. Independent channels must be available for the
communication in each direction.
An impedance measuring relay which works in the same type of permissive mode,
with one channel in each direction, can share the channels with the communication
scheme for residual overcurrent protection. If the impedance measuring relay works
in the permissive overreach mode, common channels can be used in single-line
applications. In case of double lines connected to a common bus at both ends, use
common channels only if the ratio Z1S/Z0S (positive through zero-sequence source
impedance) is about equal at both ends. If the ratio is different, the impedance
measuring and the directional earth-fault current system of the healthy line may detect
a fault in different directions, which could result in unwanted tripping.
Common channels cannot be used when the weak-end-infeed function is used in the
distance or earth fault protection.
In case of an internal earth fault, the forward directed measuring element operates
and sends a permissive signal to the remote end via the CS output (carrier send). Local
tripping is permitted when the forward direction measuring element operates and a
permissive signal is received via the CR binary input (carrier receive).
The permissive scheme can of either underreach or overreach type. In the underreach
alternative an underreach directional residual overcurrent measurement element will
be used as sending criterion of the permissive send signal CSUR.
The unblocking function uses a carrier guard signal CRG, which must always be
present, even when no CR signal is received. The absence of the CRG signal for a
time longer than the setting tSecurity time is used as a CR signal, see figure 320. This
also enables a permissive scheme to operate when the line fault blocks the signal
transmission.
The carrier received signal created by the unblocking function is reset 150 ms after
the security timer has elapsed. When that occurs an output signal LCG is activated
for signalling purpose. The unblocking function is reset 200 ms after that the guard
signal is present again.
CR
tSecurity CRL
t >1
1
CRG
200 ms 150 ms
t OR t AND
AND
LCG
en05000746.vsd
The unblocking function can be set in three operation modes (setting Unblock):
en06000288.vsd
Table 351: Input signals for the ECPSCH_85 (EFC1-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
BLKTR Signal for blocking trip due to communication logic
BLKCS Signal for blocking CS in Overreach and Blocking schemes
CSBLK Reverse residual overcurrent signal for Carrier Send
CACC Signal to be used for tripping by Communication Scheme
CSOR Overreaching residual overcurrent signal for Carrier Send
CSUR Underreaching residual overcurrent signal for Carrier Send
CR Carrier Receive for Communication Scheme Logic
CRG Carrier guard signal received
Table 352: Output signals for the ECPSCH_85 (EFC1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP Trip by Communication Scheme Logic
CS Carrier Send by Communication Scheme Logic
CRL Carrier Receive from Communication Scheme Logic
LCG loss of carrier guard signal
Table 353: Basic parameter group settings for the ECPSCH_85 (EFC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
SchemeType Off - Permissive UR - Scheme type, Mode
Intertrip of Operation
Permissive UR
Permissive OR
Blocking
tCoord 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.035 s Communication
scheme coordination
time
tSendMin 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s Minimum duration of a
carrier send signal
Table 354: Advanced parameter group settings for the ECPSCH_85 (EFC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Unblock Off - Off - Operation mode of
NoRestart unblocking logic
Restart
tSecurity 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.035 s Security timer for loss
of carrier guard
detection
Table 355: Scheme communication logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH, 85)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Communication scheme (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
coordination time
Scheme type Permissive UR -
Permissive OR
Blocking
12.6.1 Introduction
The EFCA additional communication logic is a supplement to the EFC scheme
communication logic for the residual overcurrent protection.
To achieve fast fault clearing for all earth faults on the line, the directional earth-fault
protection function can be supported with logic, that uses communication channels.
REx670 terminals have for this reason available additions to scheme communication
logic.
The directional comparison function contains logic for blocking overreach and
permissive overreach schemes.
The circuits for the permissive overreach scheme contain logic for current reversal
and weak end infeed functions. These functions are not required for the blocking
overreach scheme.
Use the independent or inverse time functions in the directional earth-fault protection
module to get back-up tripping in case the communication equipment malfunctions
and prevents operation of the directional comparison logic.
Connect the necessary signal from the auto-recloser for blocking of the directional
comparison scheme, during a single-phase auto-reclosing cycle, to the BLOCK input
of the directional comparison module.
The fault current reversal logic uses a reverse directed element, connected to IRV,
which recognizes that the fault is in reverse direction. When the reverse direction
element is activated during the tPickUp time, the IRVL signal is activated, see
figure 322. The logic is now ready to handle a current reversal without tripping. IRVL
will be connected to the block input on the permissive overreach scheme.
When the fault current is reversed on the non faulty line, IRV is deactivated and
IRVBLK is activated. The reset of IRVL is delayed by the tDelay time, see
figure 322. This ensures the reset of the carrier receive CR signal.
The weak end infeed function can be set to send only an echo signal (WEI=Echo) or
an echo signal and a trip signal (WEI=Trip). See figure 323 and figure 324.
The weak end infeed logic uses normally a reverse and a forward direction element,
connected to WEIBLK via an OR-gate. See figure 323. If neither the forward nor the
reverse directional measuring element is activated during the last 200 ms. The weak-
end-infeed logic echoes back the received permissive signal. See figure 323.
If the forward or the reverse directional measuring element is activated during the
last 200 ms, the fault current is sufficient for the IED to detect the fault with the
earth-fault function that is in operation.
With the Trip setting, the logic sends an echo according to above. Further, it activates
the TRWEI signal to trip the breaker if the echo conditions are fulfilled and the neutral
point voltage is above the set operate value for 3U0>
The voltage signal that is used to calculate the zero sequence voltage is set in the
earth-fault function that is in operation.
The weak end infeed echo sent to the strong line end has a maximum duration of 200
ms. When this time period has elapsed, the conditions that enable the echo signal to
be sent are set to zero for a time period of 50 ms. This avoids ringing action if the
weak end echo is selected for both line ends.
en06000289.vsd
Table 356: Input signals for the ECRWPSCH_85 (EFCA-) function block
Signal Description
U3P Group signal for voltage input
BLOCK Block of function
IRVBLK Block of current reversal function
IRV Activation of current reversal logic
WEIBLK1 Block of WEI Logic
WEIBLK2 Block of WEI logic due to operation of other protections
VTSZ Block of trip from WEI logic through fuse-failure function
CBOPEN Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL POR Carrier receive for WEI logic
Table 357: Output signals for the ECRWPSCH_85 (EFCA-) function block
Signal Description
IRVL Operation of current reversal logic
TRWEI Trip of WEI logic
ECHO Carrier send by WEI logic
CR POR Carrier signal received from remote end
Table 358: Basic parameter group settings for the ECRWPSCH_85 (EFCA-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
CurrRev Off - Off - Operating mode of
On Current Reversal
Logic
tPickUpRev 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Pickup time for
current reversal logic
tDelayRev 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.060 s Time Delay to prevent
Carrier send and local
trip
WEI Off - Off - Operating mode of
Echo WEI logic
Echo & Trip
tPickUpWEI 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Coordination time for
the WEI logic
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base setting for
voltage level
3U0> 5 - 70 1 25 %UB Neutral voltage
setting for fault
conditions
measurement
Table 359: Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for residual overcurrent protection (PSCH,
85)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Operate voltage 3Uo for WEI trip (5-70)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur
12.7.1 Introduction
The current reversal function is used to prevent unwanted operations due to current
reversal when using permissive overreach protection schemes in application with
parallel lines when the overreach from the two ends overlaps on the parallel line.
The weak-end infeed logic is used in cases where the apparent power behind the
protection can be too low to activate the distance protection function. When activated,
received carrier signal together with local under voltage criteria and no reverse zone
operation gives an instantaneous trip. The received signal is also echoed back to
accelerate the sending end.
The current reversal logic uses a reverse zone connected to the input IRVLx to
recognize the fault on the parallel line in phase Lx. When the reverse zone has been
activated for a certain settable time tPickUpRev it prevents sending of a
communication signal and activation of trip signal for a predefined time tDelayRev.
This makes it possible for the carrier receive signal to reset before the carrier aided
trip signal is activated due to the current reversal by the forward directed zone, see
figure 326.
tPickUpRev 10 ms tPickUpRev
IRVLn t t t
tDelayRev
IRVOPLn
IRVBLKLn & t
en06000474.vsd
The preventing of sending carrier send signal CSLn and activating of the TRIPLn in
the scheme communication block ZCOM is carried out by connecting the IRVOPLn
signal to input BLOCKLn in the ZCOM function.
The function has an internal 10 ms drop-off timer which secure that the current
reversal logic will be activated for short input signals even if the pick-up timer is set
to zero.
The WEI function sends back (echoes) the received carrier signal under the condition
that no fault has been detected at the weak end by different fault detection elements
(distance protection in forward and reverse direction).
VTSZ
BLOCK >1
200 ms
WEIBLK2
t
en07000085.vsd
The WEI function returns the received carrier signal, see figure 327, when:
• The functional input CRLx is active. This input is usually connected to the CRLx
output on the scheme communication logic ZCOM.
• The WEI function is not blocked by the active signal connected to the
WEIBLKLx functional input or to the VTSZ functional input. The later is usually
configured to the STGEN functional output of the fuse-failure function.
• No active signal has been present for at least 200 ms on the WEIBLK2 functional
input. An OR combination of all fault detection functions (not undervoltage) as
present within the terminal is usually used for this purpose.
WEI = Echo&Trip
ECHOLn - cont.
CBOPEN
STUL1N
100 ms TRWEI
OR OR
STUL2N AND t
STUL3N 15 ms
TRWEIL1
AND t
15 ms
TRWEIL2
AND t
15 ms
TRWEIL3
AND t
en00000551.vsd
en06000477.vsd
Table 360: Input signals for the ZC1WPSCH_85 (ZC1W-) function block
Signal Description
U3P Voltage
BLOCK Block of function
BLKZ Block of trip from WEI logic by the fuse-failure function
CBOPEN Block of trip from WEI logic by an open breaker
CRL1 Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L1
CRL2 Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L2
CRL3 Carrier receive for WEI logic in Phase L3
IRVL1 Activation of current reversal logic in Phase L1
IRVL2 Activation of current reversal logic in Phase L2
IRVL3 Activation of current reversal logic in phase L3
IRVBLKL1 Block of current reversal function in Phase L1
IRVBLKL2 Block of current reversal function in Phase L2
IRVBLKL3 Block of current reversal function in Phase L3
WEIBLK Block of WEI logic
WEIBLKL1 Block of WEI logic in Phase L1
WEIBLKL2 Block of WEI logic in Phase L2
WEIBLKL3 Block of WEI logic in Phase L3
WEIBLKOP Block of WEI logic due to operation of other protection
WEIBLKO1 Block of WEI logic in Phase L1 due to operation of other
protection
WEIBLKO2 Block of WEI logic in Phase L2 due to operation of other
protections
WEIBLKO3 Block of WEI logic in Phase L3 due to operation of other
protections
Table 361: Output signals for the ZC1WPSCH_85 (ZC1W-) function block
Signal Description
TRPWEI Trip of WEI logic
TRPWEIL1 Trip of WEI logic in Phase L1
TRPWEIL2 Trip of WEI logic in Phase L2
TRPWEIL3 Trip of WEI logic in Phase L3
IRVOP Operation of current reversal logic
IRVOPL1 Operation of current reversal logic in Phase L1
IRVOPL2 Operation of current reversal logic in Phase L2
IRVOPL3 Operation of current reversal logic in Phase L3
ECHO Carrier Send by WEI logic
ECHOL1 Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase L1
ECHOL2 Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase L2
ECHOL3 Carrier Send by WEI logic in Phase L3
Table 362: Basic parameter group settings for the ZC1WPSCH_85 (ZC1W-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base setting for
Voltage level
OperCurrRev Off - Off - Operating mode of
On Current Reversal
Logic
tPickUpRev 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.020 s Pickup time for
current reversal logic
tDelayRev 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.060 s Time Delay to prevent
Carrier send and local
trip
OperationWEI Off - Off - Operating mode of
Echo WEI logic
Echo & Trip
UPE< 10 - 90 1 70 %UB Phase to Earth
voltage for detection
of fault condition
UPP< 10 - 90 1 70 %UB Phase to Phase
voltage for detection
of fault condition
tPickUpWEI 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.010 s Coordination time for
the WEI logic
Table 363: Current reversal and weak-end infeed logic for phase segregated communication
(PSCH, 85)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Detection level phase to neutral (10-90)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur
voltage
Detection level phase to phase (10-90)% of Ubase ± 1.0% of Ur
voltage
Reset ratio <105% -
Operate time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Delay time for current reversal (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
Coordination time for weak-end (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% ± 10 ms
infeed logic
Section 13 Logic
13.1.1 Introduction
A function block for protection tripping is provided for each circuit breaker involved
in the tripping of the fault. It provides the pulse prolongation to ensure a trip pulse of
sufficient length, as well as all functionality necessary for correct co-operation with
autoreclosing functions.
The trip function block includes functionality for evolving faults and breaker lock-
out.
For three-pole tripping, TRPx function has a single input (TRIN) through which all
trip output signals from the protection functions within the IED, or from external
protection functions via one or more of the IEDs binary inputs, are routed. It has a
single trip output (TRIP) for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary outputs,
as well as to other functions within the IED requiring this signal.
BLOCK
tTripMin TRIP
TRIN OR
AND t
Operation Mode = On
Program = 3Ph
en05000789.vsd
The TRPx function for single- and two-pole tripping has additional phase segregated
inputs for this, as well as inputs for faulted phase selection. The latter inputs enable
single- and two-pole tripping for those functions which do not have their own phase
selection capability, and therefore which have just a single trip output and not phase
segregated trip outputs for routing through the phase segregated trip inputs of the
expanded TRPx function. Examples of such protection functions are the residual
overcurrent protections. The expanded TRPx function has two inputs for these
functions, one for impedance tripping (e.g. carrier-aided tripping commands from the
scheme communication logic), and one for earth fault tripping (e.g. tripping output
from a residual overcurrent protection). Additional logic secures a three-pole final
trip command for these protection functions in the absence of the required phase
selection signals.
The expanded TRPx function has three trip outputs TRL1, TRL2, TRL3 (besides the
trip output TRIP), one per phase, for connection to one or more of the IEDs binary
outputs, as well as to other functions within the IED requiring these signals. There
are also separate output signals indicating single pole, two pole or three pole trip.
These signals are important for cooperation with the auto-reclosing function.
The expanded TRPx function is equipped with logic which secures correct operation
for evolving faults as well as for reclosing on to persistent faults. A special input is
also provided which disables single- and two-pole tripping, forcing all tripping to be
three-pole.
In multi-breaker arrangements, one TRPx function block is used for each breaker.
This can be the case if single pole tripping and auto-reclosing is used.
The breaker close lockout function can be activated from an external trip signal from
another protection function via input (SETLKOUT) or internally at a three pole trip,
if desired.
It is possible to lockout seal in the tripping output signals or use blocking of closing
only the choice is by setting TripLockout.
TRINL1
TRINL2
OR
TRINL3
1PTRZ OR
1PTREF
OR
TRIN RSTTRIP - cont.
AND
Program = 3ph
en05000517.vsd
TRIN
TRINL1
PSL1 L1TRIP
OR
AND
TRINL2
PSL2 L2TRIP
OR
AND
TRINL3
PSL3 L3TRIP
OR
AND
OR
OR OR
-loop
-loop
OR
AND AND
AND
1PTREF AND 50 ms
1PTRZ OR t
en05000518.vsd
150 ms
L1TRIP OR
t RTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
OR
AND
150 ms
L2TRIP OR
t STRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
OR
AND
150 ms
L3TRIP OR
t TTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
OR
AND
OR
OR AND
P3PTR
OR
-loop
en05000519.vsd
150 ms
L1TRIP - cont.
t OR RTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
AND
150 ms
L2TRIP
t OR STRIP
OR
2000 ms
t AND
AND
150 ms
L3TRIP
t OR TTRIP
OR
2000 ms
t
AND
OR
AND
TRIP OR
OR
-loop
en05000520.vsd
BLOCK
RTRIP TRL1
AND
OR
STRIP TRL2
AND
OR
TTRIP TRL3
AND
OR
RSTTRIP
TRIP
OR
TR3P
AND AND
OR
-loop
AND 10 ms
TR1P
AND t
AND 5 ms
TR2P
AND t
OR
AND
-loop
en05000521.vsd
en05000707.vsd
Table 364: Input signals for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
BLKLKOUT Blocks circuit breaker lockout output (CLLKOUT)
TRIN Trip all phases
TRINL1 Trip phase 1
TRINL2 Trip phase 2
TRINL3 Trip phase 3
PSL1 Functional input for phase selection in phase L1
PSL2 Functional input for phase selection in phase L2
PSL3 Functional input for phase selection in phase L3
1PTRZ Zone Trip with a separate phase selection
1PTREF Single phase DEF Trip for separate phase selection
P3PTR Prepare all tripping to be three-phase
SETLKOUT Input for setting the circuit breaker lockout function
RSTLKOUT Input for resetting the circuit breaker lockout function
Table 365: Output signals for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function block
Signal Description
TRIP General trip output signal
TRL1 Trip signal from phase L1
TRL2 Trip signal from phase L2
TRL3 Trip signal from phase L3
TR1P Tripping single-pole
TR2P Tripping two-pole
TR3P Tripping three-pole
CLLKOUT Circuit breaker lockout output (set until reset)
Table 366: Basic parameter group settings for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - On - Operation Off / On
On
Program 3 phase - 1ph/3ph - Three ph; single or
1ph/3ph three ph; single, two
1Ph/2Ph/3Ph or three ph trip
tTripMin 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.150 s Minimum duration of
trip output signal
Table 367: Advanced parameter group settings for the SMPPTRC_94 (TRP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
TripLockout Off - Off - On: activate output
On (CLLKOUT) and trip
latch, Off: only outp
AutoLock Off - Off - On: lockout from input
On (SETLKOUT) and
trip, Off: only inp
13.2.1 Application
Twelve trip matrix logic blocks are included in the IED. The function blocks are used
in the configuration of the IED to route trip signals and/or other logical output signals
to the different output relays.
The matrix and the physical outputs will be seen in the PCM 600 engineering tool
and this allows the user to adapt the signals to the physical tripping outputs according
to the specific application needs.
Internal built-in OR logic is made in accordance with the following three rules:
1. when any one of first 16 inputs signals (i.e. INPUT1 to INPUT16) has logical
value 1 (i.e. TRUE) the first output signal (i.e. OUTPUT1) will get logical value
1 (i.e. TRUE). Additional time delays can be introduced for OUTPUT1 via
setting parameters "PulseTime1", "OnDelayTime1" & "OffDelayTime1".
2. when any one of second 16 inputs signals (i.e. INPUT17 to INPUT32) has logical
value 1 (i.e. TRUE) the second output signal (i.e. OUTPUT2) will get logical
value 1 (i.e. TRUE). Additional time delays can be introduced for OUTPUT2
via setting parameters "PulseTime2", "OnDelayTime2" & "OffDelayTime2"
3. when any one of all 32 input signals (i.e. INPUT1 to INPUT32) has logical value
1 (i.e. TRUE) the third output signal (i.e. OUTPUT3) will get logical value 1
(i.e. TRUE). Additional time delays can be introduced for OUTPUT3 via setting
parameters "PulseTime3", "OnDelayTime3" & "OffDelayTime3".
Pulse Time 1
&
Pulse t pulse
Input 1 Output 1
On Delay Time 1
&
³1
Input 2
Input 16
³1
t on t off
Off Delay Time 1
Pulse Time 2
&
t pulse
Pulse
Input 17 Output 2
Input 18
On Delay Time 2
&
³1
Input 32
³1
t on t off
Off Delay Time 2
Pulse Time 3
&
Pulse t pulse
Output 3
On Delay Time 3
&
³1
³1
t on t off
Off Delay Time 3
en06000514.vsd
Output signals from this function block are typically connected to other logic blocks
or directly to output contacts from the IED. When used for direct tripping of the circuit
breaker(s) the pulse time delay on that output signal shall be set to approximately
0,150s in order to obtain satisfactory minimum duration of the trip pulse to the circuit
breaker trip coils.
en05000370.vsd
Table 369: Input signals for the TMAGGIO (TR01-) function block
Signal Description
INPUT1 Binary input 1
INPUT2 Binary input 2
INPUT3 Binary input 3
INPUT4 Binary input 4
INPUT5 Binary input 5
INPUT6 Binary input 6
INPUT7 Binary input 7
INPUT8 Binary input 8
INPUT9 Binary input 9
INPUT10 Binary input 10
INPUT11 Binary input 11
INPUT12 Binary input 12
INPUT13 Binary input 13
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
INPUT14 Binary input 14
INPUT15 Binary input 15
INPUT16 Binary input 16
INPUT17 Binary input 17
INPUT18 Binary input 18
INPUT19 Binary input 19
INPUT20 Binary input 20
INPUT21 Binary input 21
INPUT22 Binary input 22
INPUT23 Binary input 23
INPUT24 Binary input 24
INPUT25 Binary input 25
INPUT26 Binary input 26
INPUT27 Binary input 27
INPUT28 Binary input 28
INPUT29 Binary input 29
INPUT30 Binary input 30
INPUT31 Binary input 31
INPUT32 Binary input 32
Table 370: Output signals for the TMAGGIO (TR01-) function block
Signal Description
OUTPUT1 OR function betweeen inputs 1 to 16
OUTPUT2 OR function between inputs 17 to 32
OUTPUT3 OR function between inputs 1 to 32
Table 371: Basic parameter group settings for the TMAGGIO (TR01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - ON - Operation Off / On
ON
PulseTime 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Output pulse time
OnDelay 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Output on delay time
OffDelay 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Output off delay time
Table continued on next page
13.3.1 Introduction
A number of logic blocks and timers are available for user to adapt the configuration
to the specific application needs.
I001-
INV
INPUT OUT
en04000404.vsd
Table 372: Input signals for the INV (I001-) function block
Signal Description
INPUT Input
Table 373: Output signals for the INV (I001-) function block
Signal Description
OUT Output
O001-
OR
INPUT1 OUT
INPUT2 NOUT
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
en04000405.vsd
A001-
AND
INPUT 1 OUT
INPUT 2 NOUT
INPUT 3
INPUT 4N
en04000406.vsd
Table 376: Input signals for the AND (A001-) function block
Signal Description
INPUT1 Input 1
INPUT2 Input 2
INPUT3 Input 3
INPUT4N Input 4 inverted
Table 377: Output signals for the AND (A001-) function block
Signal Description
OUT Output
NOUT Output inverted
T M01-
Timer
INPUT ON
T OFF
en04000378.vsd
Table 378: Input signals for the Timer (TM01-) function block
Signal Description
INPUT Input to timer
Table 379: Output signals for the Timer (TM01-) function block
Signal Description
ON Output from timer , pick-up delayed
OFF Output from timer, drop-out delayed
TP01-
Pulse
INPUT OUT
en04000407.vsd
Table 381: Input signals for the Pulse (TP01-) function block
Signal Description
INPUT Input to pulse timer
Table 382: Output signals for the Pulse (TP01-) function block
Signal Description
OUT Output from pulse timer
XO01-
XOR
INPUT 1 OUT
INPUT 2 NOUT
en04000409.vsd
Table 384: Input signals for the XOR (XO01-) function block
Signal Description
INPUT1 Input 1 to XOR gate
INPUT2 Input 2 to XOR gate
Table 385: Output signals for the XOR (XO01-) function block
Signal Description
OUT Output from XOR gate
NOUT Inverted output from XOR gate
Table 386: Truth table for the Set-Reset (SRM) function block
SET RESET OUT NOUT
1 0 1 0
0 1 0 1
1 1 0 1
0 0 0 1
SM01-
SRM
SET OUT
RESET NOUT
en04000408.vsd
Table 387: Input signals for the SRM (SM01-) function block
Signal Description
SET Set input
RESET Reset input
Table 388: Output signals for the SRM (SM01-) function block
Signal Description
OUT Output
NOUT Output inverted
Table 389: Parameter group settings for the SRM (SM01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Memory Off - Off - Operating mode of
On the memory function
GT 01-
GT
INPUT OUT
en04000410.vsd
TS01-
TimerSet
INPUT ON
OFF
en04000411.vsd
Table 393: Input signals for the TimerSet (TS01-) function block
Signal Description
INPUT Input to timer
Table 394: Output signals for the TimerSet (TS01-) function block
Signal Description
ON Output from timer, pick-up delayed
OFF Output from timer, drop-out delayed
Table 395: Parameter group settings for the TimerSet (TS01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off/On
On
t 0.000 - 90000.000 0.001 0.000 s Delay for settable
timer n
13.4.1 Introduction
The fixed signals function block generates a number of pre-set (fixed) signals that
can be used in the configuration of an IED, either for forcing the unused inputs in the
other function blocks to a certain level/value, or for creating a certain logic.
en05000445.vsd
Table 397: Output signals for the FixedSignals (FIXD-) function block
Signal Description
OFF Boolean signal fixed off
ON Boolean signal fixed on
INTZERO Integer signal fixed zero
INTONE Integer signal fixed one
REALZERO Real signal fixed zero
STRNULL String signal with no characters
ZEROSMPL Channel id for zero sample
GRP_OFF Group signal fixed off
13.5.1 Introduction
The B16I function block (or the Boolean 16 to Integer conversion function block) is
used within the CAP tool to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an
integer.
The B16I function block is used within the CAP tool to transform an integer into a
set of 16 binary (logical) signals. The B1I6 function block is designed for receiving
the integer input locally. The BLOCK input will freeze the logical outputs at the last
value.
en07000128.vsd
Table 398: Input signals for the B16I (BB01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
IN1 Input 1
IN2 Input 2
IN3 Input 3
IN4 Input 4
IN5 Input 5
IN6 Input 6
IN7 Input 7
IN8 Input 8
IN9 Input 9
IN10 Input 10
IN11 Input 11
IN12 Input 12
IN13 Input 13
IN14 Input 14
IN15 Input 15
IN16 Input 16
Table 399: Output signals for the B16I (BB01-) function block
Signal Description
OUT Output value
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM600)
13.6.1 Introduction
The B16IGGIO function block (or the Boolean 16 to integer conversion with logic
node representation function block) is used within CAP tool to transform an integer
to 16 binary (logic) signals.
TheIB16IGGIO can receive it's value from remote like IEC61850 depending on the
PSTO input.
The PSTO input determines the operator place. The integer number can be written to
the block while in “Remote”. If PSTO is in ”Off” or ”Local” then no change is applied
to the outputs.
Table 400: Input signals for the B16IGGIO (BA01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
IN1 Input 1
IN2 Input 2
IN3 Input 3
IN4 Input 4
IN5 Input 5
IN6 Input 6
IN7 Input 7
IN8 Input 8
IN9 Input 9
IN10 Input 10
IN11 Input 11
IN12 Input 12
IN13 Input 13
IN14 Input 14
IN15 Input 15
IN16 Input 16
Table 401: Output signals for the B16IGGIO (BA01-) function block
Signal Description
OUT Output value
13.7.1 Introduction
The IB16 function block (or the integer to Boolean 16 conversion function block) is
used within the CAP tool to transform a set of 16 binary (logical) signals into an
integer.
en06000501.vsd
Table 402: Input signals for the IB16 (IY01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
IN input
Table 403: Output signals for the IB16 (IY01-) function block
Signal Description
OUT1 Output 1
OUT2 Output 2
OUT3 Output 3
OUT4 Output 4
OUT5 Output 5
OUT6 Output 6
OUT7 Output 7
OUT8 Output 8
OUT9 Output 9
OUT10 Output 10
OUT11 Output 11
OUT12 Output 12
OUT13 Output 13
OUT14 Output 14
OUT15 Output 15
OUT16 Output 16
13.8.1 Introduction
The IB16GGIO function block (or the integer to Boolean conversion with logic node
representation function block) is used within CAP tool to transform an integer to 16
binary (logic) signals.
The IB16GGIO can receive it's value from remote like IEC61850 depending on the
PSTO input.
The PSTO input determines the operator place. The integer number can be written to
the block while in “Remote”. If PSTO is in ”Off” or ”Local” then no change is applied
to the outputs.
en06000502.vsd
Table 404: Input signals for the IB16GGIO (IX01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
PSTO Operator place selection
Table 405: Output signals for the IB16GGIO (IX01-) function block
Signal Description
OUT1 Output 1
OUT2 Output 2
OUT3 Output 3
OUT4 Output 4
OUT5 Output 5
OUT6 Output 6
OUT7 Output 7
OUT8 Output 8
OUT9 Output 9
OUT10 Output 10
OUT11 Output 11
OUT12 Output 12
OUT13 Output 13
OUT14 Output 14
OUT15 Output 15
OUT16 Output 16
Section 14 Monitoring
14.1.1 Introduction
Measurement functions is used for power system measurement, supervision and
reporting to the local HMI, monitoring tool within PCM 600 or to station level e.g.via
IEC61850). The possibility to continuously monitor measured values of active power,
reactive power, currents, voltages, frequency, power factor etc. is vital for efficient
production, transmission and distribution of electrical energy. It provides to the
system operator fast and easy overview of the present status of the power system.
Additionally it can be used during testing and commissioning of protection and
control IEDs in order to verify proper operation and connection of instrument
transformers (i.e. CTs & VTs). During normal service by periodic comparison of the
measured value from the IED with other independent meters the proper operation of
the IED analog measurement chain can be verified. Finally it can be used to verify
proper direction orientation for distance or directional overcurrent protection
function.
All measured values can be supervised with four settable limits, i.e. low-low limit,
low limit, high limit and high-high limit. A zero clamping reduction is also supported,
i.e the measured value below a settable limit is forced to zero which reduces the impact
of noise in the inputs.
Dead-band supervision can be used to report measured signal value to station level
when change in measured value is above set threshold limit or time integral of all
changes since the last time value updating exceeds the threshold limit. Measure value
can also be based on periodic reporting.
The measuring function, SVR (CVMMXU), provides the following power system
quantities:
It is possible to calibrate the measuring function above to get better then class 0.5
presentation. This is accomplished by angle and amplitude compensation at 5, 30 and
100% of rated current and at 100% of rated voltage.
The measuring functions CSQ (CMSQI) and VSQ (VMSQI) provides sequential
quantities:
The protection, control, and monitoring IEDs have functionality to measure and
further process information for currents and voltages obtained from the pre-
processing blocks. The number of processed alternate measuring quantities depends
on the type of IED and built-in options.
The information on measured quantities is available for the user at different locations:
• Overfunction, when the measured current exceeds the High limit (XHiLim) or
High-high limit (XHiHiLim) pre-set values
• Underfunction, when the measured current decreases under the Low limit
(XLowLim) or Low-low limit (XLowLowLim) pre-set values.
X_RANGE = 3
High-high limit
X_RANGE= 1 Hysteresis
High limit
X_RANGE=0
X_RANGE=0 t
Low limit
X_RANGE=2
Low-low limit
X_RANGE=4
en05000657.vsd
Each analog output has one corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE).
The output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4 (0: Normal, 1: High limit exceeded,
3: High-high limit exceeded, 2: below Low limit and 4: below Low-low limit). The
output may be connected to a measurement expander block (XP (RANGE_XP)) to
get measurement supervision as binary signals.
The logical value of the functional output signals changes according to figure 353.
The user can set the hysteresis (XLimHyst), which determines the difference between
the operating and reset value at each operating point, in wide range for each measuring
channel separately. The hysteresis is common for all operating values within one
channel.
Cyclic reporting
The cyclic reporting of measured value is performed according to chosen setting
(XRepTyp). The measuring channel reports the value independent of amplitude or
integral dead-band reporting.
Y
Value Reported Value Reported
Value Reported Value Reported
(1st)
Y3 Value Reported
Y2 Y4
Y1 Y5
t
Value 1
Value 2
Value 3
Value 4
Value 5
en05000500.vsd
(*)Set value for t: XDbRepInt
Value Reported
Y
99000529.vsd
After the new value is reported, the ±ΔY limits for dead-band are automatically set
around it. The new value is reported only if the measured quantity changes more than
defined by the ±ΔY set limits.
The last value reported, Y1 in figure 356 serves as a basic value for further
measurement. A difference is calculated between the last reported and the newly
measured value and is multiplied by the time increment (discrete integral). The
absolute values of these integral values are added until the pre-set value is exceeded.
This occurs with the value Y2 that is reported and set as a new base for the following
measurements (as well as for the values Y3, Y4 and Y5).
The integral dead-band supervision is particularly suitable for monitoring signals with
small variations that can last for relatively long periods.
Y A1 >=
A >= pre-set value
A2 >=
pre-set value pre-set value
Y3 A3 + A4 + A5 + A6 + A7 >=
pre-set value
Y2 A1 A2
A4 A6
Value Reported Y4 A3 A5 A7
(1st) Value
Value Reported Y5
A Reported Value
Reported Value
Y1 Reported
t
99000530.vsd
Mode of operation
The measurement function must be connected to three-phase current and three-phase
voltage input in the configuration tool (group signals), but it is capable to measure
and calculate above mentioned quantities in nine different ways depending on the
available VT inputs connected to the IED. The end user can freely select by a
parameter setting, which one of the nine available measuring modes shall be used
within the function. Available options are summarized in the following table:
Set value for Formula used for complex, three- Formula used for voltage and Comment
parameter phase power calculation current magnitude calculation
“Mode”
1 L1, L2, L3 Used when
* * *
S = U L1 × I L1 + U L 2 × I L 2 + U L 3 × I L 3 U = ( U L1 + U L 2 + U L 3 ) / 3 three phase-
to-earth
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 + I L 3 ) / 3 voltages are
available
2 Arone Used when
three two
S = U L1 L 2 × I L1 - U L 2 L 3 × I L 3
* *
U = ( U L1 L 2 + U L 2 L 3 ) / 2
phase-to-
phase
I = ( I L1 + I L 3 ) / 2 voltages are
available
3 PosSeq Used when
only
S = 3 × U PosSeq × I PosSeq
*
U = 3 × U PosSeq symmetrical
three phase
I = I PosSeq power shall
be measured
Table continued on next page
Set value for Formula used for complex, three- Formula used for voltage and Comment
parameter phase power calculation current magnitude calculation
“Mode”
4 L1L2 Used when
only UL1L2
S = U L1 L 2 × ( I L1 - I L 2 )
* *
U = U L1 L 2
phase-to-
phase voltage
I = ( I L1 + I L 2 ) / 2 is available
7 L1 Used when
only UL1
S = 3 × U L1 × I L1
*
U = 3 × U L1
phase-to-
earth voltage
I = I L1 is available
8 L2 Used when
only UL2
S = 3 ×U L2 × I L2
*
U = 3 × U L2
phase-to-
earth voltage
I = IL2 is available
9 L3 Used when
only UL3
S = 3 ×U L3 × I L3
*
U = 3 × U L3
phase-to-
earth voltage
I = I L3 is available
It shall be noted that only in the first two operating modes (i.e. 1 & 3) the measurement
function calculates exact three-phase power. In other operating modes (i.e. from 3 to
9) it calculates the three-phase power under assumption that the power system is fully
symmetrical. Once the complex apparent power is calculated then the P, Q, S, & PF
are calculated in accordance with the following formulas:
P = Re( S )
(Equation 154)
Q = Im( S )
(Equation 155)
S = S = P +Q
2 2
(Equation 156)
PF = cosj = P
S (Equation 157)
Additionally to the power factor value the two binary output signals from the function
are provided which indicates the angular relationship between current and voltage
phasors. Binary output signal ILAG is set to one when current phasor is lagging
behind voltage phasor. Binary output signal ILEAD is set to one when current phasor
is leading the voltage phasor.
Each analog output has a corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The
output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement
supervision".
Amplitude
% of Ir compensation
-10
IAmpComp5 Measured
IAmpComp30 current
IAmpComp100
5 30 100 % of Ir
0-5%: Constant
-10 5-30-100%: Linear
>100%: Constant
Degrees Angle
compensation
-10
IAngComp30 Measured
current
IAngComp5
IAngComp100
5 30 100 % of Ir
-10
en05000652.vsd
The first current and voltage phase in the group signals will be used as reference and
the amplitude and angle compensation will be used for related input signals.
X = k × X Old + (1 - k ) × X Calculated
(Equation 158)
where:
X is a new measured value (i.e. P, Q, S, U, I or PF) to be given out from the function
XOld is the measured value given from the measurement function in previous execution cycle
k is settable parameter by the end user which influence the filter properties
Default value for parameter k is 0.00. With this value the new calculated value is
immediately given out without any filtering (i.e. without any additional delay). When
k is set to value bigger than 0, the filtering is enabled. Appropriate value of k shall be
determined separately for every application. Some typical value for k =0.14.
Compensation facility
In order to compensate for small magnitude and angular errors in the complete
measurement chain (i.e. CT error, VT error, IED input transformer errors etc.) it is
possible to perform on site calibration of the power measurement. This is achieved
by setting the complex constant which is then internally used within the function to
multiply the calculated complex apparent power S. This constant is set as magnitude
(i.e. setting parameter PowAmpFact, default value 1.000) and angle (i.e. setting
parameter PowAngComp, default value 0.0 degrees). Default values for these two
parameters are done in such way that they do not influence internally calculated value
(i.e. complex constant has default value 1). In this way calibration, for specific
operating range (e.g. around rated power) can be done at site. However to perform
this calibration it is necessary to have external power meter of the high accuracy class
available.
Directionality
In CT earthing parameter is set as described in section "Analog inputs", active and
reactive power will be measured always towards the protected object. This is shown
in the following figure 358.
Busbar
P Q
Protected
Object
en05000373.vsd
That practically means that active and reactive power will have positive values when
they flow from the busbar towards the protected object and they will have negative
values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
In some application, like for example when power is measured on the secondary side
of the power transformer it might be desirable, from the end client point of view, to
have actually opposite directional convention for active and reactive power
measurements. This can be easily achieved by setting parameter PowAngComp to
value of 180.0 degrees. With such setting the active and reactive power will have
positive values when they flow from the protected object towards the busbar.
Frequency
Frequency is actually not calculated within measurement block. It is simply obtained
from the pre-processing block and then just given out from the measurement block
as an output.
Phase currents (amplitude and angle) are available on the outputs and each
amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output (ILx_RANG). The
supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement
supervision".
The voltages (phase or phase-phase voltage, amplitude and angle) are available on
the outputs and each amplitude output has a corresponding supervision level output
(ULxy_RANG). The supervision output signal is an integer in the interval 0-4, see
section "Measurement supervision".
Positive, negative and three times zero sequence quantities are available on the
outputs (voltage and current, amplitude and angle). Each amplitude output has a
corresponding supervision level output (X_RANGE). The output signal is an integer
in the interval 0-4, see section "Measurement supervision".
SVR1-
CVMMXU
I3P S
U3P S_RANGE
P_INST
P
P_RANGE
Q_INST
Q
Q_RANGE
PF
PF_RANGE
ILAG
ILEAD
U
U_RANGE
I
I_RANGE
F
F_RANGE
en05000772.vsd
CP01-
CMMXU
I3P IL1
IL1RANG
IL1ANGL
IL2
IL2RANG
IL2ANGL
IL3
IL3RANG
IL3ANGL
en05000699.vsd
VP01-
VMMXU
U3P UL12
UL12RANG
UL23
UL23RANG
UL31
UL31RANG
en05000701.vsd
CSQ1-
CMSQI
I3P 3I0
3I0RANG
I1
I1RANG
I2
I2RANG
en05000703.vsd
VSQ1-
VMSQI
U3P 3U0
3U0RANG
U1
U1RANG
U2
U2RANG
en05000704.vsd
VSQ1-
VMSQI
V3P 3V0
3V0RANG
V1
V1RANG
V2
V2RANG
en05000704_ansi.vsd
Table 406: Input signals for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group signal for current input
U3P Group signal for voltage input
Table 407: Output signals for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function block
Signal Description
S Apparent Power magnitude of deadband value
S_RANGE Apparent Power range
P_INST Active Power
P Active Power magnitude of deadband value
P_RANGE Active Power range
Q_INST Reactive Power
Q Active Power magnitude of deadband value
Q_RANGE Reactive Power range
PF Power Factor magnitude of deadband value
PF_RANGE Power Factor range
ILAG Current is lagging voltage
ILEAD Current is leading voltage
U Calculate voltage magnitude of deadband value
U_RANGE Calcuate voltage range
I Calculated current magnitude of deadband value
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
I_RANGE Calculated current range
F System frequency magnitude of deadband value
F_RANGE System frequency range
Table 408: Input signals for the CMMXU (CP01-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group connection abstract block 1
Table 409: Output signals for the CMMXU (CP01-) function block
Signal Description
IL1 IL1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL1RANG IL1 Amplitude range
IL1ANGL IL1 Angle, magnitude of reported value
IL2 IL2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL2RANG IL2 Amplitude range
IL2ANGL IL2 Angle, magnitude of reported value
IL3 IL3 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
IL3RANG IL3 Amplitude range
IL3ANGL IL3 Angle, magnitude of reported value
Table 410: Input signals for the VMMXU (VP01-) function block
Signal Description
U3P Group connection abstract block 2
Table 411: Output signals for the VMMXU (VP01-) function block
Signal Description
UL12 UL12 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL12RANG UL12 Amplitude range
UL23 UL23 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL23RANG UL23 Amplitude range
UL31 UL31 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
UL31RANG UL31 Amplitude range
Table 412: Input signals for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function block
Signal Description
I3P Group connection abstract block 3
Table 413: Output signals for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function block
Signal Description
3I0 3I0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3I0RANG 3I0 Amplitude range
I1 I1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I1RANG I1 Amplitude range
I2 I2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
I2RANG I2 Amplitude range
Table 414: Input signals for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function block
Signal Description
U3P Group connection abstract block 4
Table 415: Output signals for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function block
Signal Description
3U0 3U0 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
3U0RANG 3U0 Amplitude range
U1 U1 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U1RANG U1 Amplitude range
U2 U2 Amplitude, magnitude of reported value
U2RANG U2 Amplitude range
Table 416: Basic general settings for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
SLowLim 0.000 - 0.001 0.000 VA Low limit (physical
10000000000.000 value)
SLowLowLim 0.000 - 0.001 0.000 VA Low Low limit
10000000000.000 (physical value)
SMin 0.000 - 0.001 0.000 VA Minimum value
10000000000.000
SMax 0.000 - 0.001 1000000000.000 VA Maximum value
10000000000.000
SRepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
PMin -10000000000.00 0.001 -1000000000.000 W Minimum value
0-
10000000000.000
PMax -10000000000.00 0.001 1000000000.000 W Maximum value
0-
10000000000.000
PRepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
QMin -10000000000.00 0.001 -1000000000.000 VAr Minimum value
0-
10000000000.000
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base setting for
current level in A
QMax -10000000000.00 0.001 1000000000.000 VAr Maximum value
0-
10000000000.000
QRepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base setting for
voltage level in kV
Mode L1, L2, L3 - L1, L2, L3 - Selection of
Arone measured current and
Pos Seq voltage
L1L2
L2L3
L3L1
L1
L2
L3
PowAmpFact 0.000 - 6.000 0.001 1.000 - Amplitude factor to
scale power
calculations
PowAngComp -180.0 - 180.0 0.1 0.0 Deg Angle compensation
for phase shift
between measured I
&U
Table continued on next page
Table 417: Advanced general settings for the CVMMXU (SVR1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
SDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 Type Cycl: Report interval
(s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
SZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 m% Zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
SHiHiLim 0.000 - 0.001 900000000.000 VA High High limit
10000000000.000 (physical value)
SHiLim 0.000 - 0.001 800000000.000 VA High limit (physical
10000000000.000 value)
SLimHyst 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %
of range (common for
all limits)
Table continued on next page
Table 418: Basic general settings for the CMMXU (CP01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IL1DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 Type Cycl: Report interval
(s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
Operation Off - Off - Operation Mode On /
On Off
IBase 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Base setting for
current level in A
IL1Max 0.000 - 0.001 1000.000 A Maximum value
10000000000.000
IL1RepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
IL1AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 Type Cycl: Report interval
(s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
IL2DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 Type Cycl: Report interval
(s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
IL2Max 0.000 - 0.001 1000.000 A Maximum value
10000000000.000
IL2RepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
IL2AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 Type Cycl: Report interval
(s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
IL3DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 Type Cycl: Report interval
(s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
IL3Max 0.000 - 0.001 1000.000 A Maximum value
10000000000.000
IL3RepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
IL3AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 Type Cycl: Report interval
(s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
Table 419: Advanced general settings for the CMMXU (CP01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
IL1ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 m% Zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
IL1HiHiLim 0.000 - 0.001 900.000 A High High limit
10000000000.000 (physical value)
IL1HiLim 0.000 - 0.001 800.000 A High limit (physical
10000000000.000 value)
IAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate current at
5% of Ir
Table continued on next page
Table 420: Basic general settings for the VMMXU (VP01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
UL12DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%, Cycl: Report interval
%s (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
Operation Off - On - Operation Mode On /
On Off
UL12ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/100 Zero point clamping in
0% 0,001% of range
UBase 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Base setting for
voltage level in kV
UL12HiHiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 460000.000 V High High limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
UL12HiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 450000.000 V High limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
UAmpComp5 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
5% of Ur
UAmpComp30 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
30% of Ur
UL12LowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 380000.000 V Low limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
UL12LowLowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 350000.000 V Low Low limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
UAmpComp100 -10.000 - 10.000 0.001 0.000 % Amplitude factor to
calibrate voltage at
100% of Ur
UL12Min -10000000000.00 0.001 0.000 V Minimum value
0-
10000000000.000
UL12Max -10000000000.00 0.001 450000.000 V Maximum value
0-
10000000000.000
UL12RepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UL12LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
UL12AnDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%, Cycl: Report interval
%s (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
UL12AngRepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
UL23DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%, Cycl: Report interval
%s (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
Table continued on next page
Table 421: Basic general settings for the CMSQI (CSQ1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
3I0DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%, Cycl: Report interval
%s (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
3I0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/100 Zero point clamping in
0% 0,001% of range
3I0HiHiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 900.000 A High High limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
3I0HiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 800.000 A High limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
3I0LowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 -800.000 A Low limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
3I0LowLowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 -900.000 A Low Low limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
3I0Min -10000000000.00 0.001 0.000 A Minimum value
0-
10000000000.000
3I0Max -10000000000.00 0.001 1000.000 A Maximum value
0-
10000000000.000
3I0RepTyp Cyclic - Cyclic - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
3I0LimHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %
of range and is
common for all limits
3I0AngDbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%, Cycl: Report interval
%s (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
Table continued on next page
Table 422: Basic general settings for the VMSQI (VSQ1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
3U0DbRepInt 1 - 300 1 10 s,%, Cycl: Report interval
%s (s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
3U0ZeroDb 0 - 100000 1 0 1/100 Zero point clamping in
0% 0,001% of range
3U0HiHiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 460000.000 V High High limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
3U0HiLim -10000000000.00 0.001 450000.000 V High limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
3U0LowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 380000.000 V Low limit (physical
0- value)
10000000000.000
3U0LowLowLim -10000000000.00 0.001 350000.000 V Low Low limit
0- (physical value)
10000000000.000
3U0Min -10000000000.00 0.001 0.000 V Minimum value
0-
10000000000.000
3U0Max -10000000000.00 0.001 450000.000 V Maximum value
0-
10000000000.000
Table continued on next page
14.2.1 Introduction
The function consists of six counters which are used for storing the number of times
each counter input has been activated.
To not risk that the flash memory is worn out due to too many writings, a mechanism
for limiting the number of writings per time period is included in the product. This
however gives as a result that it can take long time, up to several minutes, before a
new value is stored in the flash memory. And if a new CNTGGIO value is not stored
before auxiliary power interruption, it will be lost. The CNTGGIO stored values in
flash memory will however not be lost at an auxiliary power interruption.
The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all six
counters are blocked. The input can for example be used for blocking the counters at
testing.
All inputs are configured via PCM 600, CAP531 Application configuration tool.
14.2.2.1 Reporting
The content of the counters can be read in the local HMI. Refer to “Operators
manual” for procedure.
Reset of counters can be performed in the local HMI and a binary input. Refer to
“Operators manual” for procedure.
Reading of content can also be performed remotely, for example from MicroSCADA.
The value can also be presented as a measuring value on the local HMI graphical
display.
14.2.2.2 Design
The function block has six inputs for increasing the counter values for each of the six
counters respectively. The content of the counters are stepped one step for each
positive edge of the input respectively.
The function block also has an input BLOCK. At activation of this input all six
counters are blocked and are not updated. Valid number is held.
The function block has an input RESET. At activation of this input all six counters
are set to 0.
en05000345.vsd
Table 424: Input signals for the CNTGGIO (CNT1-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
COUNTER1 Input for counter1
COUNTER2 Input for counter2
COUNTER3 Input for counter3
COUNTER4 Input for counter4
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
COUNTER5 Input for counter5
COUNTER6 Input for counter6
RESET Reset of function
14.3.1 Introduction
When using a Substation Automation system with LON or SPA communication,
time-tagged events can be sent at change or cyclically from the IED to the station
level. These events are created from any available signal in the IED that is connected
to the Event function block. The event function block is used for LON and SPA
communication.
Analog and double indication values are also transferred through the event block.
Each event function block has 16 inputs INPUT1 - INPUT16. Each input can be given
a name from the CAP configuration tool. The inputs are normally used to create single
events, but are also intended for double indication events.
The function also has an input BLOCK to block the generation of events.
The events that are sent from the IED can originate from both internal logical signals
and binary input channels. The internal signals are time-tagged in the main processing
module, while the binary input channels are time-tagged directly on the input module.
The time-tagging of the events that are originated from internal logical signals have
a resolution corresponding to the execution cyclicity of the event function block. The
time-tagging of the events that are originated from binary input signals have a
resolution of 1 ms.
The outputs from the event function block are formed by the reading of status, events
and alarms by the station level on every single input. The user-defined name for each
input is intended to be used by the station level.
All events according to the event mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to
1000 events. If new events appear before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the
oldest event is overwritten and an overflow alarm appears.
The events are produced according to the set-event masks. The event masks are treated
commonly for both the LON and SPA communication. The event mask can be set
individually for each input channel. These settings are available:
• NoEvents
• OnSet
• OnReset
• OnChange
• AutoDetect
It is possible to define which part of the event function block that shall generate events.
This can be performed individually for the LON and SPA communication
respectively. For each communication type these settings are available:
• Off
• Channel 1-8
• Channel 9-16
• Channel 1-16
For LON communication the events normally are sent to station level at change. It is
possibly also to set a time for cyclic sending of the events individually for each input
channel.
To protect the SA system from signals with a high change rate that can easily saturate
the event system or the communication subsystems behind it, a quota limiter is
implemented. If an input creates events at a rate that completely consume the granted
quota then further events from the channel will be blocked. This block will be
removed when the input calms down and the accumulated quota reach 66% of the
maximum burst quota. The maximum burst quota per input channel equals 3 times
the configurable setting MaxEvPerSec.
en05000697.vsd
Table 426: Input signals for the Event (EV01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
INPUT1 Input 1
INPUT2 Input 2
INPUT3 Input 3
INPUT4 Input 4
INPUT5 Input 5
INPUT6 Input 6
INPUT7 Input 7
INPUT8 Input 8
INPUT9 Input 9
INPUT10 Input 10
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
INPUT11 Input 11
INPUT12 Input 12
INPUT13 Input 13
INPUT14 Input 14
INPUT15 Input 15
INPUT16 Input 16
Table 427: Basic general settings for the Event (EV01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
SPAChannelMask Off - Off - SPA channel mask
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
LONChannelMask Off - Off - LON channel mask
Channel 1-8
Channel 9-16
Channel 1-16
EventMask1 NoEvents - AutoDetect - Reporting criteria for
OnSet input 1
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask2 NoEvents - AutoDetect - Reporting criteria for
OnSet input 2
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask3 NoEvents - AutoDetect - Reporting criteria for
OnSet input 3
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask4 NoEvents - AutoDetect - Reporting criteria for
OnSet input 4
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask5 NoEvents - AutoDetect - Reporting criteria for
OnSet input 5
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
EventMask6 NoEvents - AutoDetect - Reporting criteria for
OnSet input 6
OnReset
OnChange
AutoDetect
Table continued on next page
14.4.1 Introduction
The accurate fault locator is an essential component to minimize the outages after a
persistent fault and/or to pin-point a weak spot on the line.
The built-in fault locator is an impedance measuring function giving the distance to
the fault in percent, km or miles. The main advantage is the high accuracy achieved
by compensating for load current and for the mutual zero sequence effect on double
circuit lines.
The compensation includes setting of the remote and local sources and calculation of
the distribution of fault currents from each side. This distribution of fault current,
together with recorded load (pre-fault) currents, is used to exactly calculate the fault
position. The fault can be recalculated with new source data at the actual fault to
further increase the accuracy.
Specially on heavily loaded long lines (where the fault locator is most important)
where the source voltage angles can be up to 35-40 degrees apart the accuracy can
be still maintained with the advanced compensation included in fault locator.
When calculating distance to fault, pre-fault and fault phasors of currents and voltages
are selected from the Trip Value Recorder data, thus the analog signals used by the
fault locator must be among those connected to the disturbance report function. The
analog configuration (channel selection) is performed using the parameter setting tool
within PCM 600.
The calculation algorithm considers the effect of load currents, double-end infeed and
additional fault resistance.
R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L
R1A+jX1A R1B+jX1B
Z0m=Z0m+jX0m
R0L+jX0L
R1L+jX1L en05000045.vsd
DRP
FL
Figure 365: Simplified network configuration with network data, required for
settings of the fault location-measuring function.
If source impedance in the near and far end of the protected line have changed in a
significant manner relative to the set values at fault location calculation time (due to
exceptional switching state in the immediate network, power generation out of order
etc.), new values can be entered via the local HMI and a recalculation of the distance
to the fault can be ordered using the algorithm described below. It’s also possible to
change fault loop. In this way, a more accurate location of the fault can be achieved.
The function indicates the distance to the fault as a percentage of the line length, in
kilometers or miles as selected on the local HMI. The fault location is stored as a part
of the disturbance report information (ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL) and managed via
the LHMI or PCM 600.
For transmission lines with voltage sources at both line ends, the effect of double-end
infeed and additional fault resistance must be considered when calculating the
distance to the fault from the currents and voltages at one line end. If this is not done,
the accuracy of the calculated figure will vary with the load flow and the amount of
additional fault resistance.
The calculation algorithm used in the fault locator in compensates for the effect of
double-end infeed, additional fault resistance and load current.
Figure 366 shows a single-line diagram of a single transmission line, that is fed from
both ends with source impedances ZA and ZB. Assume, that the fault occurs at a
distance F from terminal A on a line with the length L and impedance ZL. The fault
resistance is defined as RF. A single-line model is used for better clarification of the
algorithm.
A B
ZA IA pZL IB (1-p).ZL ZB
IF
UA RF
xx01000171.vsd
U A = I A × p × Z L + IF × R F
(Equation 159)
Where:
IA is the line current after the fault, that is, pre-fault current plus current change due to the fault,
IF A
IF = --------
DA
(Equation 160)
Where:
IFA is the change in current at the point of measurement, terminal A and
DA is a fault current-distribution factor, that is, the ratio between the fault current at line end A and
the total fault current.
( 1 – p ) × Z L + ZB
DA = -----------------------------------------
Z A + Z L + ZB
(Equation 161)
Thus, the general fault location equation for a single line is:
I FA
U A = I A × p × Z L + -------
- × RF
DA
(Equation 162)
Table 428: Expressions for UA, IA and IFA for different types of faults
The KN complex quantity for zero-sequence compensation for the single line is equal
to:
Z0L – Z 1L
K N = ------------------------
3 × Z1L
(Equation 169)
DI is the change in current, that is the current after the fault minus the current before
the fault.
In the following, the positive sequence impedance for ZA, ZB and ZL is inserted into
the equations, because this is the value used in the algorithm.
I FA
U A = I A × p × Z 1L + -------- × RF + I 0P × Z 0M
DA
(Equation 170)
Where:
I0P is a zero sequence current of the parallel line,
( 1 – p ) × ( ZA + ZA L + ZB ) + Z B
DA = ----------------------------------------------------------------------------
-
2 × ZA + Z L + 2 × Z B
Z0L – Z 1L Z 0M I 0P
K N = ----------------------- - × -------
- + ----------------
3 × Z1L 3 × Z1L I 0A
(Equation 172)
From these equations it can be seen, that, if Z0m = 0, then the general fault location
equation for a single line is obtained. Only the distribution factor differs in these two
cases.
Where:
UA ZB
K 1 = ---------------
- + --------------------------
-+1
I A × ZL Z L + ZA DD
(Equation 174)
UA ZB
K2 = --------------- × æè --------------------------- + 1öø
IA × Z L Z L + Z A DD
(Equation 175)
IF A æ ZA + ZB
- × --------------------------- + 1ö
K 3 = ---------------
I A × Z L è Z 1 + ZA DD ø
(Equation 176)
and:
For a single line, Z0M = 0 and ZADD = 0. Thus, equation 173 applies to both single
and parallel lines.
– p × Im × ( K1 ) + Im × ( K 2 ) – R F × Im × ( K3 ) = 0
(Equation 178)
If the imaginary part of K3 is not zero, RF can be solved according to equation 178,
and then inserted to equation 177. According to equation 177, the relative distance
to the fault is solved as the root of a quadratic equation.
Equation 177 gives two different values for the relative distance to the fault as a
solution. A simplified load compensated algorithm, that gives an unequivocal figure
for the relative distance to the fault, is used to establish the value that should be
selected.
If the load compensated algorithms according to the above do not give a reliable
solution, a less accurate, non-compensated impedance model is used to calculate the
relative distance to the fault.
In the non-compensated impedance model, IA line current is used instead of IFA fault
current:
U A = p × Z 1 L × IA + R F × IA
(Equation 179)
Where:
IA is according to table 428.
The communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 may be used to poll fault location
information from the IED to a master (i.e. station HSI). There are two outputs that
must be connected to appropriate inputs on the function block I103StatFltDis,
FLTDISTX gives distance to fault (reactance, according the standard) and
CALCMADE gives a pulse (100 ms) when a result is obtainable on FLTDISTX
output.
en05000679.vsd
Table 429: Input signals for the LMBRFLO (FLO1-) function block
Signal Description
PHSELL1 Phase selecton L1
PHSELL2 Phase selecton L2
PHSELL3 Phase selecton L3
CALCDIST Do calculate fault distance (release)
Table 430: Output signals for the LMBRFLO (FLO1-) function block
Signal Description
FLTDISTX Reactive distance to fault
CALCMADE Fault calculation made
BCD_80 Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 80%
BCD_40 Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 40%
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
BCD_20 Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 20%
BCD_10 Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 10%
BCD_8 Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 8%
BCD_4 Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 4%
BCD_2 Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 2%
BCD_1 Distance in binary coded data, bit represents 1%
Table 431: Basic general settings for the LMBRFLO (FLO1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
DrepChNoIL1 1 - 30 1 1 Ch Recorder input
number recording
phase current, IL1
DrepChNoIL2 1 - 30 1 2 Ch Recorder input
number recording
phase current, IL2
DrepChNoIL3 1 - 30 1 3 Ch Recorder input
number recording
phase current, IL3
DrepChNoIN 0 - 30 1 4 Ch Recorder input
number recording
residual current, IN
DrepChNoIP 0 - 30 1 0 Ch Recorder input
number recording 3I0
on parallel line
DrepChNoUL1 1 - 30 1 5 Ch Recorder input
number recording
phase voltage, UL1
DrepChNoUL2 1 - 30 1 6 Ch Recorder input
number recording
phase voltage, UL2
DrepChNoUL3 1 - 30 1 7 Ch Recorder input
number recording
phase voltage, UL3
Table 432: Basic parameter group settings for the LMBRFLO (FLO1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
R1A 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 2.000 ohm/p Source resistance A
(near end)
X1A 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 12.000 ohm/p Source reactance A
(near end)
R1B 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 2.000 ohm/p Source resistance B
(far end)
X1B 0.001 - 1500.000 0.001 12.000 ohm/p Source reactance B
(far end)
Table continued on next page
14.5.1 Introduction
The functions MMXU (SVR, CP and VP), MSQI (CSQ and VSQ) and MVGGIO
(MV) are provided with measurement supervision functionality. All measured values
can be supervised with four settable limits, i.e. low-low limit, low limit, high limit
and high-high limit. The measure value expander block (XP) has been introduced to
be able to translate the integer output signal from the measuring functions to 5 binary
signals i.e. below low-low limit, below low limit, normal, above high-high limit or
above high limit. The output signals can be used as conditions in the configurable
logic.
en05000346.vsd
Table 435: Input signals for the RANGE_XP (XP01-) function block
Signal Description
RANGE Measured value range
Table 436: Output signals for the RANGE_XP (XP01-) function block
Signal Description
HIGHHIGH Measured value is above high-high limit
HIGH Measured value is between high and high-high limit
NORMAL Measured value is between high and low limit
LOW Measured value is between low and low-low limit
LOWLOW Measured value is below low-low limit
Function block name: DRP--, DRA1- – DRA4-, IEC 60617 graphical symbol:
DRB1- – DRB6-
ANSI number:
IEC 61850 logical node name:
ABRDRE
14.6.1 Introduction
Complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in the
secondary system together with continuous event-logging is accomplished by the
disturbance report functionality.
The disturbance report, always included in the IED, acquires sampled data of all
selected analog input and binary signals connected to the function block i.e. maximum
40 analog and 96 binary signals.
Every disturbance report recording is saved in the IED in the standard Comtrade
format. The same applies to all events, which are continuously saved in a ring-buffer.
The Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) is used to get information about the
recordings, but the disturbance report files may be uploaded to the PCM 600
(Protection and Control IED Manager) and further analysis using the disturbance
handling tool.
Figure 369Figure "" shows the relations among Disturbance Report, included
functions and function blocks. EL, ER and IND uses information from the binary
input function blocks (DRB1- 6). TVR uses analog information from the analog input
function blocks (DRA1-3) which is used by FL after estimation by TVR. The DR
function acquires information from both DRAx and DRBx.
DRP- - FL01
A4RADR RDRE FL
Analog signals
Trip Value Rec Fault Locator
DRB1-- 6- Disturbance
Recorder
Event Recorder
Indications
en05000124.vsd
The whole disturbance report can contain information for a number of recordings,
each with the data coming from all the parts mentioned above. The event list function
is working continuously, independent of disturbance triggering, recording time etc.
All information in the disturbance report is stored in non-volatile flash memories.
This implies that no information is lost in case of loss of auxiliary power. Each report
will get an identification number in the interval from 0-999.
Disturbance report
en05000125.vsd
Number of recordings
100
3,4 s
80 3,4 s 20 analog
96 binary
40 analog
96 binary
60 6,3 s
6,3 s
6,3 s 50 Hz
40
60 Hz
Total recording time
en05000488.vsd
Disturbance information
Date and time of the disturbance, the indications, events, fault location and the trip
values are available on the local human-machine interface (LHMI). To acquire a
complete disturbance report the use of a PC and PCM600 is required. The PC may
be connected to the IED-front, rear or remotely via the station bus (Ethernet ports).
Indications (IND)
Indications is a list of signals that were activated during the total recording time of
the disturbance (not time-tagged). (See section "Indications (RDRE)" for more
detailed information.)
Time tagging
The IED has a built-in real-time calendar and clock. This function is used for all time
tagging within the disturbance report
Recording times
The disturbance report (DRP) records information about a disturbance during a
settable time frame. The recording times are valid for the whole disturbance report.
The disturbance recorder (DR), the event recorder (ER) and indication function
register disturbance data and events during tRecording, the total recording time.
Trig point
TimeLimit
PreFaultRecT PostFaultRecT
1 2 3
en05000487.vsd
PreFaultRecT, 1 Pre-fault or pre-trigger recording time. The time before the fault including the operate
time of the trigger. Use the setting PreFaultRecT to set this time.
tFault, 2 Fault time of the recording. The fault time cannot be set. It continues as long as any
valid trigger condition, binary or analog, persists (unless limited by TimeLimit the
limit time).
PostFaultRecT, 3 Post fault recording time. The time the disturbance recording continues after all
activated triggers are reset. Use the setting PostFaultRecT to set this time.
TimeLimit Limit time. The maximum allowed recording time after the disturbance recording was
triggered. The limit time is used to eliminate the consequences of a trigger that does
not reset within a reasonable time interval. It limits the maximum recording time of
a recording and prevents subsequent overwriting of already stored
disturbances.Use the setting TimeLimit to set this time.
Analog signals
Up to 40 analog signals can be selected for recording by the Disturbance recorder and
triggering of the Disturbance report function. Out of these 40, 30 are reserved for
external analog signals, i.e. signals from the analog input modules (TRM) and line
differential communication module (LDCM) via preprocessing function blocks
(SMAI) and summation block (Sum3Ph). The last 10 channels may be connected to
internally calculated analog signals available as function block output signals (mA
input signals, phase differential currents, bias currents etc.).
PRxx- DRA1-
SMAI A1RADR DRA2-
GRPNAME AI3P A2RADR DRA3-
External analog AI1NAME AI1 INPUT1 A3RADR
signals
AI2NAME AI2 INPUT2
TRM, LDCM AI3NAME AI3 INPUT3
SUxx
AI4NAME AI4 INPUT4
AIN INPUT5
INPUT6
...
A4RADR
INPUT31
Internal analog signals
T2Dx, T3Dx, INPUT32
REFx, HZDx, INPUT33
L3D, L6D,
LT3D, LT6D INPUT34
INPUT35
SVRx, CPxx, VP0x,
CSQx, VSQx, MVxx INPUT36
...
INPUT40
en05000653.vsd
The external input signals will be acquired, filtered and skewed and (after
configuration) available as an input signal on the DRAx- function block via the PRxx
function block. The information is saved at the Disturbance report base sampling rate
(1000 or 1200 Hz). Internally calculated signals are updated according to the cycle
time of the specific function. If a function is running at lower speed than the base
sampling rate, the Disturbance recorder will use the latest updated sample until a new
updated sample is available.
If the IED is preconfigured the only tool needed for analog configuration of the
Disturbance report is the Signal Matrix Tool (SMT, external signal configuration).
In case of modification of a preconfigured IED or general internal configuration the
Application Configuration tool within PCM600 is used.
The preprocessor function block (PRxx) calculates the residual quantities in cases
where only the three phases are connected (AI4-input not used). PRxx makes the
information available as a group signal output, phase outputs and calculated residual
output (AIN-output). In situations where AI4-input is used as a input signal the
corresponding information is available on the non-calculated output (AI4) on the
PRxx-block. Connect the signals to the DRAx accordingly.
For each of the analog signals, Operation = On means that it is recorded by the
disturbance recorder. The trigger is independent of the setting of Operation, and
triggers even if operation is set to Off. Both undervoltage and overvoltage can be used
as trigger conditions. The same applies for the current signals.
The analog signals are presented only in the disturbance recording, but they affect
the entire disturbance report when being used as triggers.
Binary signals
Up to 96 binary signals can be selected to be handled by the disturbance report.The
signals can be selected from internal logical and binary input signals. A binary signal
is selected to be recorded when:
The selected signals are presented in the event recorder, event list and the disturbance
recording. But they affect the whole disturbance report when they are used as triggers.
The indications are also selected from these 96 signals with the LHMI
IndicationMask=Show/Hide.
Trigger signals
The trigger conditions affect the entire disturbance report, except the event list, which
runs continuously. As soon as at least one trigger condition is fulfilled, a complete
disturbance report is recorded. On the other hand, if no trigger condition is fulfilled,
there is no disturbance report, no indications, and so on. This implies the importance
of choosing the right signals as trigger conditions.
• Manual trigger
• Binary-signal trigger
• Analog-signal trigger (over/under function)
Manual trigger
A disturbance report can be manually triggered from the local HMI, from PCM600
or via station bus (IEC61850). When the trigger is activated, the manual trigger signal
is generated. This feature is especially useful for testing. Refer to “Operators
manual” for procedure.
Binary-signal trigger
Any binary signal state (logic one or a logic zero) can be selected to generate a trigger
(Triglevel = Trig on 0/Trig on 1). When a binary signal is selected to generate a trigger
from a logic zero, the selected signal will not be listed in the indications list of the
disturbance report.
Analog-signal trigger
All analog signals are available for trigger purposes, no matter if they are recorded
in the disturbance recorder or not. The settings are OverTrigOp, UnderTrigOp,
OverTrigLe and UnderTrigLe.
The check of the trigger condition is based on peak-to-peak values. When this is
found, the absolute average value of these two peak values is calculated. If the average
value is above the threshold level for an overvoltage or overcurrent trigger, this trigger
is indicated with a greater than (>) sign with the user-defined name.
If the average value is below the set threshold level for an undervoltage or
undercurrent trigger, this trigger is indicated with a less than (<) sign with its name.
The procedure is separately performed for each channel.
This method of checking the analog start conditions gives a function which is
insensitive to DC offset in the signal. The operate time for this start is typically in the
range of one cycle, 20 ms for a 50 Hz network.
All under/over trig signal information is available on the LHMI and PCM600, see
table 437.
Post Retrigger
The disturbance report function does not respond to any new trig condition, during a
recording. Under certain circumstances the fault condition may reoccur during the
post-fault recording, for instance by automatic reclosing to a still faulty power line.
When the retrig parameter is disabled (PostRetrig = Off), a new recording will not
start until the post-fault (PostFaultrecT or TimeLimit) period is terminated. If a new
trig occurs during the post-fault period and lasts longer than the proceeding recording
a new complete recording will be fetched.
DRP--
RDRE
DRPOFF
RECSTART
RECMADE
CLEARED
MEMUSED
en05000406.vsd
DRA1-
A1RADR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
NAME1
NAME2
NAME3
NAME4
NAME5
NAME6
NAME7
NAME8
NAME9
NAME10
en05000430.vsd
Figure 375: DRA1 function block, analog inputs, example for DRA1–DRA3
DRA4-
A4RADR
INPUT31
INPUT32
INPUT33
INPUT34
INPUT35
INPUT36
INPUT37
INPUT38
INPUT39
INPUT40
NAME31
NAME32
NAME33
NAME34
NAME35
NAME36
NAME37
NAME38
NAME39
NAME40
en05000431.vsd
DRB1-
B1RBDR
INPUT 1
INPUT 2
INPUT 3
INPUT 4
INPUT 5
INPUT 6
INPUT 7
INPUT 8
INPUT 9
INPUT 10
INPUT 11
INPUT 12
INPUT 13
INPUT 14
INPUT 15
INPUT 16
NAME1
NAME2
NAME3
NAME4
NAME5
NAME6
NAME7
NAME8
NAME9
NAME10
NAME11
NAME12
NAME13
NAME14
NAME15
NAME16
en05000432.vsd
Figure 377: DRB1 function block, binary inputs, example for DRB1–DRB6
Table 437: Output signals for the RDRE (DRP--) function block
Signal Description
DRPOFF Disturbance report function turned off
RECSTART Disturbance recording started
RECMADE Disturbance recording made
CLEARED All disturbances in the disturbance report cleared
MEMUSED More than 80% of memory used
Table 438: Input signals for the A1RADR (DRA1-) function block
Signal Description
INPUT1 Group signal for input 1
INPUT2 Group signal for input 2
INPUT3 Group signal for input 3
INPUT4 Group signal for input 4
INPUT5 Group signal for input 5
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
INPUT6 Group signal for input 6
INPUT7 Group signal for input 7
INPUT8 Group signal for input 8
INPUT9 Group signal for input 9
INPUT10 Group signal for input 10
Table 439: Input signals for the A4RADR (DRA4-) function block
Signal Description
INPUT31 Analogue channel 31
INPUT32 Analogue channel 32
INPUT33 Analogue channel 33
INPUT34 Analogue channel 34
INPUT35 Analogue channel 35
INPUT36 Analogue channel 36
INPUT37 Analogue channel 37
INPUT38 Analogue channel 38
INPUT39 Analogue channel 39
INPUT40 Analogue channel 40
Table 440: Input signals for the B1RBDR (DRB1-) function block
Signal Description
INPUT1 Binary channel 1
INPUT2 Binary channel 2
INPUT3 Binary channel 3
INPUT4 Binary channel 4
INPUT5 Binary channel 5
INPUT6 Binary channel 6
INPUT7 Binary channel 7
INPUT8 Binary channel 8
INPUT9 Binary channel 9
INPUT10 Binary channel 10
INPUT11 Binary channel 11
INPUT12 Binary channel 12
INPUT13 Binary channel 13
INPUT14 Binary channel 14
INPUT15 Binary channel 15
INPUT16 Binary channel 16
Table 441: Basic general settings for the RDRE (DRP--) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off/On
On
PreFaultRecT 0.05 - 1.00 0.01 0.10 s Pre-fault recording
time
PostFaultRecT 0.1 - 10.0 0.1 0.5 s Post-fault recording
time
TimeLimit 0.5 - 10.0 0.1 1.0 s Fault recording time
limit
PostRetrig Off - Off - Post-fault retrig
On enabled (On) or not
(Off)
ZeroAngleRef 1 - 30 1 1 Ch Trip value recorder,
phasor reference
channel
OpModeTest Off - Off - Operation mode
On during test mode
Table 442: Basic general settings for the A1RADR (DRA1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation01 Off - Off - Operation On/Off
On
NomValue01 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value for
analogue channel 1
UnderTrigOp01 Off - Off - Use under level trig
On for analogue cha 1
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe01 0 - 200 1 50 % Under trigger level for
analogue cha 1 in %
of signal
OverTrigOp01 Off - Off - Use over level trig for
On analogue cha 1 (on)
or not (off)
OverTrigLe01 0 - 5000 1 200 % Over trigger level for
analogue cha 1 in %
of signal
Operation02 Off - Off - Operation On/Off
On
NomValue02 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value for
analogue channel 2
UnderTrigOp02 Off - Off - Use under level trig
On for analogue cha 2
(on) or not (off)
Table continued on next page
Table 443: Basic general settings for the A4RADR (DRA4-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation31 Off - Off - Operation On/off
On
NomValue31 0.0 - 999999.9 0.1 0.0 - Nominal value for
analogue channel 31
UnderTrigOp31 Off - Off - Use under level trig
On for analogue cha 31
(on) or not (off)
UnderTrigLe31 0 - 200 1 50 % Under trigger level for
analogue cha 31 in %
of signal
Table continued on next page
Table 444: Basic general settings for the B1RBDR (DRB1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation01 Off - Off - Trigger operation On/
On Off
TrigLevel01 Trig on 0 - Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1) or
Trig on 1 negative (0) slope for
binary inp 1
IndicationMa01 Hide - Hide - Indication mask for
Show binary channel 1
SetLED01 Off - Off - Set red-LED on HMI
On for binary channel 1
Operation02 Off - Off - Trigger operation On/
On Off
TrigLevel02 Trig on 0 - Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1) or
Trig on 1 negative (0) slope for
binary inp 2
IndicationMa02 Hide - Hide - Indication mask for
Show binary channel 2
SetLED02 Off - Off - Set red-LED on HMI
On for binary channel 2
Operation03 Off - Off - Trigger operation On/
On Off
TrigLevel03 Trig on 0 - Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1) or
Trig on 1 negative (0) slope for
binary inp 3
IndicationMa03 Hide - Hide - Indication mask for
Show binary channel 3
SetLED03 Off - Off - Set red-LED on HMI
On for binary channel 3
Operation04 Off - Off - Trigger operation On/
On Off
TrigLevel04 Trig on 0 - Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1) or
Trig on 1 negative (0) slope for
binary inp 4
IndicationMa04 Hide - Hide - Indication mask for
Show binary channel 4
SetLED04 Off - Off - Set red-LED on HMI
On for binary channel 4
Operation05 Off - Off - Trigger operation On/
On Off
TrigLevel05 Trig on 0 - Trig on 1 - Trig on positiv (1) or
Trig on 1 negative (0) slope for
binary inp 5
IndicationMa05 Hide - Hide - Indication mask for
Show binary channel 5
SetLED05 Off - Off - Set red-LED on HMI
On for binary channel 5
Operation06 Off - Off - Trigger operation On/
On Off
Table continued on next page
14.7.1 Introduction
Continuous event-logging is useful for monitoring of the system from an overview
perspective and is a complement to specific disturbance recorder functions.
The event list logs all binary input signals connected to the Disturbance report
function. The list may contain of up to 1000 time-tagged events stored in a ring-buffer.
The event list information is available in the IED and is reported to higher control
systems via the station bus together with other logged events in the IED. In absence
of any software tool the information seeker may use the local HMI to view the event
list.
chronological order. The list can contain up to 1000 events from both internal logic
signals and binary input channels. If the list is full, the oldest event is overwritten
when a new event arrives.
The list can be configured to show oldest or newest events first with a setting on the
LHMI.
The event list function runs continuously, in contrast to the event recorder function,
which is only active during a disturbance.
The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the user-
defined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is used in the
disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and the event recorder function
(ER).
The event list is stored and managed separate from the disturbance report information
(ER, DR, IND, TVR and FL).
14.8.1 Introduction
To get fast, condensed and reliable information about disturbances in the primary
and/or in the secondary system it is important to know e.g. binary signals that have
changed status during a disturbance. This information is used in the short perspective
to get information via the LHMI in a straightforward way.
There are three LEDs on the LHMI (green, yellow and red), which will display status
information about the IED and the Disturbance Report function (trigged).
The Indication list function shows all selected binary input signals connected to the
Disturbance Report function that have changed status during a disturbance.
The indication information is available for each of the recorded disturbances in the
IED and the user may use the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) to get the
information.
Green LED:
Yellow LED:
Red LED:
Indication list:
The possible indicated signals are the same as the ones chosen for the disturbance
report function and disturbance recorder
The indication function tracks 0 to 1 changes of binary signals during the recording
period of the collection window. This means that constant logic zero, constant logic
one or state changes from logic one to logic zero will not be visible in the list of
indications. Signals are not time tagged. In order to be recorded in the list of
indications the:
Indications are selected with the indication mask (IndicationMask) when configuring
the binary inputs.
The name of the binary input signal that appears in the Indication function is the user-
defined name assigned at configuration of the IED. The same name is used in
disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and event recorder function
(ER).
14.9.1 Introduction
Quick, complete and reliable information about disturbances in the primary and/or in
the secondary system is vital e.g. time tagged events logged during disturbances. This
information is used for different purposes in the short term (e.g. corrective actions)
and in the long term (e.g. Functional Analysis).
The event recorder logs all selected binary input signals connected to the Disturbance
Report function. Each recording can contain up to 150 time-tagged events.
The event recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the IED.
The information may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED
Manager) and further analyzed using the Disturbance Handling tool.
The name of the binary input signal that appears in the event recording is the user-
defined name assigned when configuring the IED. The same name is used in the
disturbance recorder function (DR), indications (IND) and event recorder function
(ER).
The event record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER, DR,
IND, TVR and FL) and managed via the LHMI or PCM 600.
14.10.1 Introduction
Information about the pre-fault and fault values for currents and voltages are vital for
the disturbance evaluation.
The Trip value recorder calculates the values of all selected analog input signals
connected to the Disturbance report function. The result is magnitude and phase angle
before and during the fault for each analog input signal.
The trip value recorder information is available for the disturbances locally in the
IED.
The information may be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection and Control IED
Manager) and further analyzed using the Disturbance Handling tool.
The trip value recorder information is an integrated part of the disturbance record
(Comtrade file).
When the disturbance report function is triggered the sample for the fault interception
is searched for, by checking the non-periodic changes in the analog input signals. The
channel search order is consecutive, starting with the analog input with the lowest
number.
When a starting point is found, the Fourier estimation of the pre-fault values of the
complex values of the analog signals starts 1.5 cycle before the fault sample. The
estimation uses samples during one period. The post-fault values are calculated using
the Recursive Least Squares (RLS) method. The calculation starts a few samples after
the fault sample and uses samples during 1/2 - 2 cycles depending on the shape of the
signals.
If no starting point is found in the recording, the disturbance report trig sample is used
as the start sample for the Fourier estimation. The estimation uses samples during one
cycle before the trig sample. In this case the calculated values are used both as pre-
fault and fault values.
The name of the analog input signal that appears in the Trip value recorder function
is the user-defined name assigned when the IED is configured. The same name is
used in the Disturbance recorder function (DR).
The trip value record is stored as a part of the disturbance report information (ER,
DR, IND, TVR and FLOC) and managed in via the LHMI or PCM 600.
14.11.1 Introduction
The Disturbance Recorder function supplies fast, complete and reliable information
about disturbances in the power system. It facilitates understanding system behavior
and related primary and secondary equipment during and after a disturbance.
Recorded information is used for different purposes in the short perspective (e.g.
corrective actions) and long perspective (e.g. Functional Analysis).
The Disturbance Recorder acquires sampled data from all selected analog input and
binary signals connected to the Disturbance Report function (maximum 40 analog
and 96 binary signals). The binary signals are the same signals as available under the
event recorder function.
The function is characterized by great flexibility and is not dependent on the operation
of protection functions. It can record disturbances not detected by protection
functions.
The disturbance recorder information for the last 100 disturbances are saved in the
IED and the Local Human Machine Interface (LHMI) is used to view the list of
recordings.
The disturbance recording information can be uploaded to the PCM 600 (Protection
and Control IED Manager) and further analyzed using the Disturbance Handling tool.
DR collects analog values and binary signals continuously, in a cyclic buffer. The
pre-fault buffer operates according to the FIFO principle; old data will continuously
be overwritten as new data arrives when the buffer is full. The size of this buffer is
determined by the set pre-fault recording time.
Upon detection of a fault condition (triggering), the disturbance is time tagged and
the data storage continues in a post-fault buffer. The storage process continues as long
as the fault condition prevails - plus a certain additional time. This is called the post-
fault time and it can be set in the disturbance report.
The above mentioned two parts form a disturbance recording. The whole memory,
intended for disturbance recordings, acts as a cyclic buffer and when it is full, the
oldest recording is overwritten. The last 100 recordings are stored in the IED.
The time tagging refers to the activation of the trigger that starts the disturbance
recording. A recording can be trigged by, manual start, binary input and/or from
analog inputs (over-/underlevel trig).
A user-defined name for each of the signals can be set. These names are common for
all functions within the disturbance report functionality.
• Saving the data for analog channels with corresponding data for binary signals
• Add relevant data to be used by the Disturbance Handling tool (part of PCM 600)
• Compression of the data, which is performed without losing any data accuracy
• Storing the compressed data in a non-volatile memory (flash memory)
The recording files comply with the Comtrade standard IEC 60255-24 and are divided
into three files; a header file (HDR), a configuration file (CFG) and a data file (DAT).
The header file (optional in the standard) contains basic information about the
disturbance i.e. information from the Disturbance Report functions (ER, TVR and
FL). The Disturbance Handling tool use this information and present the recording
in a user-friendly way.
General:
Analog:
Binary:
• Signal names
• Status of binary input signals
The data file, which also is mandatory, containing values for each input channel for
each sample in the record (scaled value). The data file also contains a sequence
number and time stamp for each set of samples.
The last 8 recordings, out of maximum 100, are available for transfer to the master.
When the last one is transferred and acknowledged new recordings in the IED will
appear, in the master points of view (even if they already where stored in the IED).
To be able to report 40 analog channels from the IED using IEC 60870-5-103 the first
8 channels are placed in the public range and the next 32 are placed in the private
range. To comply the standard the first 8 must be configured according to
table 450.
The binary signals connected to DRB1-DRB6 are reported by polling. The function
blocks include function type and information number.
Section 15 Metering
15.1.1 Introduction
The pulse counter logic function counts externally generated binary pulses, for
instance pulses coming from an external energy meter, for calculation of energy
consumption values. The pulses are captured by the binary input module and then
read by the pulse counter function. A scaled service value is available over the station
bus. The special Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities must
be ordered to achieve this functionality.
The integration time period can be set in the range from 30 seconds to 60 minutes
and is synchronized with absolute system time. Interrogation of additional pulse
counter values can be done with a command (intermediate reading) for a single
counter. All active counters can also be read by the LON General Interrogation
command (GI) or IEC 61850.
The reported value to station HMI over the station bus contains Identity, Value, Time,
and Pulse Counter Quality. The Pulse Counter Quality consists of:
The transmission of the counter value by SPA can be done as a service value, that is,
the value frozen in the last integration cycle is read by the station HMI from the
database. The pulse counter function updates the value in the database when an
integration cycle is finished and activates the NEW_VAL signal in the function block.
This signal can be connected to an Event function block, be time tagged, and
transmitted to the station HMI. This time corresponds to the time when the value was
frozen by the function.
The pulse counter function requires a binary input card, BIMp, that
is specially adapted to the pulse counter function.
Figure 378 shows the pulse counter function block with connections of the inputs and
outputs.
The BLOCK and READ_VAL inputs can be connected to Single Command blocks,
which are intended to be controlled either from the station HMI or/and the local HMI.
As long as the BLOCK signal is set, the pulse counter is blocked. The signal connected
to READ_VAL performs one additional reading per positive flank. The signal must
be a pulse with a length >1 second.
The BI_PULSE input is connected to the used input of the function block for the
Binary Input Module (BIM).
Each pulse counter function block has four binary output signals that can be connected
to an Event function block for event recording: INVALID, RESTART, BLOCKED
and NEW_VAL. The SCAL_VAL signal can be connected to the IEC Event function
block.
The INVALID signal is a steady signal and is set if the Binary Input Module, where
the pulse counter input is located, fails or has wrong configuration.
The RESTART signal is a steady signal and is set when the reported value does not
comprise a complete integration cycle. That is, in the first message after IED start-
up, in the first message after deblocking, and after the counter has wrapped around
during last integration cycle.
The BLOCKED signal is a steady signal and is set when the counter is blocked. There
are two reasons why the counter is blocked:
The NEW_VAL signal is a pulse signal. The signal is set if the counter value was
updated since last report.
en05000709.vsd
Table 452: Input signals for the PCGGIO (PC01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
READ_VAL Initiates an additional pulse counter reading
BI_PULSE Connect binary input channel for metering
RS_CNT Resets pulse counter value
Table 453: Output signals for the PCGGIO (PC01-) function block
Signal Description
INVALID The pulse counter value is invalid
RESTART The reported value does not comprise a complete integration
cycle
BLOCKED The pulse counter function is blocked
NEW_VAL A new pulse counter value is generated
SCAL_VAL Scaled value with time and status information
Table 454: Basic general settings for the PCGGIO (PC01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off/On
On
EventMask NoEvents - NoEvents - Report mask for
ReportEvents analog events from
pulse counter
CountCriteria Off - RisingEdge - Pulse counter criteria
RisingEdge
Falling edge
OnChange
Scale 1.000 - 90000.000 0.001 1.000 - Scaling value for
SCAL_VAL output to
unit per counted value
Quantity Count - Count - Measured quantity for
ActivePower SCAL_VAL output
ApparentPower
ReactivePower
ActiveEnergy
ApparentEnergy
ReactiveEnergy
tReporting 0 - 3600 1 60 s Cycle time for
reporting of counter
value
15.2.1 Introduction
Outputs from measurement function (MMXU) can be used to calculate energy. Active
as well as reactive values are calculated in import respectively export direction.
Values can be read or generated as pulses. Maximum demand power values are also
calculated by the function.
The maximum demand values for active and reactive power are calculated for the set
time tEnergy and the maximum value is stored in a register available over
communication and from outputs MAXPAFD, MAXPARD, MAXRAFD,
MAXRARD for the active and reactive power forward and reverse direction until
reset with input RSTDMD or from the LHMI reset menu.
SVR1 ETP1
CVMMXU ETPMMTR
PINST P
QINST Q
STACC
TRUE
RSTACC
FALSE
RSTDMD
FALSE
en07000121.vsd
Figure 380: Connection of the energy metering function to the outputs of the
measuring function
en07000120.vsd
Table 456: Input signals for the ETPMMTR (ETP1-) function block
Signal Description
P Measured active power
Q Measured reactive power
STACC Start to accumulate energy values
RSTACC Reset accumulated energy values. Level sensitive
RSTDMD used by ch: reset maximum demand
Table 457: Output signals for the ETPMMTR (ETP1-) function block
Signal Description
ACCST Start of accumulating energy values.
EAFPULSE Accumulated forward active energy pulse
EARPULSE Accumulated reverse active energy pulse
ERFPULSE Accumulated forward reactive energy pulse
ERRPULSE Accumulated reverse reactive energy pulse
EAFALM Alarm for active forward energy exceed limit in set interval
EARALM Alarm for active reverse energy exceed limit in set interval
ERFALM Alarm for reactive forward energy exceed limit in set interval
ERRALM Alarm for reactive reverse energy exceed limit in set interval
EAFACC Accumulated forward active energy value in KWh
EARACC Accumulated reverse active energy value in kWh
ERFACC Accumulated forward reactive energy value in kVArh
ERRACC Accumulated reverse reactive energy value in kVArh
MAXPAFD Maximum forward active power demand value for set interval
MAXPARD Maximum reverse active power demand value for set interval
MAXPRFD Maximum forward reactive power demand value for set
interval
MAXPRRD Maximum reactive power demand value in reverse direction
Table 458: Basic general settings for the ETPMMTR (ETP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off/On
On
StartAcc Off - Off - Activate the
On accumulation of
energy values
tEnergy 1 Minute - 1 Minute - Time interval for
5 Minutes energy calculation
10 Minutes
15 Minutes
30 Minutes
60 Minutes
180 Minutes
tEnergyOnPls 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 1.000 s Energy accumulated
pulse ON time in secs
tEnergyOffPls 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.500 s Energy accumulated
pulse OFF time in
secs
EAFAccPlsQty 0.001 - 10000.000 0.001 100.000 MWh Pulse quantity for
active forward
accumulated energy
value
Table continued on next page
Table 459: Advanced general settings for the ETPMMTR (ETP1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
EALim 0.001 - 0.001 1000000.000 MWh Active energy limit
10000000000.000
ERLim 0.001 - 0.001 1000.000 MVAr Reactive energy limit
10000000000.000 h
DirEnergyAct Forward - Forward - Direction of active
Reverse energy flow Forward/
Reverse
DirEnergyReac Forward - Forward - Direction of reactive
Reverse energy flow Forward/
Reverse
EnZeroClamp Off - On - Enable of zero point
On clamping detection
function
LevZeroClampP 0.001 - 10000.000 0.001 10.000 MW Zero point clamping
level at active Power
LevZeroClampQ 0.001 - 10000.000 0.001 10.000 MVAr Zero point clamping
level at reactive
Power
EAFPrestVal 0.000 - 10000.000 0.001 0.000 MWh Preset Initial value for
forward active energy
EARPrestVal 0.000 - 10000.000 0.001 0.000 MWh Preset Initial value for
reverse active energy
ERFPresetVal 0.000 - 10000.000 0.001 0.000 MVAr Preset Initial value for
h forward reactive
energy
ERVPresetVal 0.000 - 10000.000 0.001 0.000 MVAr Preset Initial value for
h reverse reactive
energy
16.1 Overview
16.2.1 Introduction
Single or double optical Ethernet ports for the new substation communication
standard IEC61850-8-1 for the station bus are provided. IEC61850-8-1 allows
intelligent devices (IEDs) from different vendors to exchange information and
simplifies SA engineering. Peer- to peer communication according to GOOSE is part
of the standard. Disturbance files uploading is provided.
When double Ethernet ports are activated, make sure that the two ports
are connected to different subnets. For example: Port 1 has IP-address
138.227.102.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0 and port 2 has IP-
address 138.227.103.10 with subnet mask 255.255.255.0
16.2.2.1 Introduction
The SPGGIO function block is used to send one single logical signal to other systems
or equipment in the substation.
Upon receiving a signal at its input, the SPGGIO function block will send the signal
over IEC 61850-8-1 to the equipment or system that requests this signal. To be able
to get the signal, one must use other tools, described in the Application Manual,
Chapter 2: “Engineering of the IED” and define which function block in which
equipment or system should receive this information.
MP01-
SP16GGIO
BLOCK NAMEOR
IN1
IN2
IN3
IN4
IN5
IN6
IN7
IN8
IN9
IN10
IN11
IN12
IN13
IN14
IN15
IN16
NAME1
NAME2
NAME3
NAME4
NAME5
NAME6
NAME7
NAME8
NAME9
NAME10
NAME11
NAME12
NAME13
NAME14
NAME15
NAME16
en07000125.vsd
Table 460: Input signals for the SPGGIO (SP01-) function block
Signal Description
IN Input status
The function does not have any parameters available in Local HMI or Protection and
Control IED Manager (PCM 600)
16.2.3.1 Introduction
The MVGGIO function block is used to send the instantaneous value of an analog
output to other systems or equipment in the substation. It can also be used inside the
same IED, to attach a “RANGE” aspect to an analog value and to permit measurement
supervision on that value.
Upon receiving an analog signal at its input, the MVGGIO block will give the
instantaneous value of the signal and the range, as output values. In the same time, it
will send over IEC61850-8-1 the value and the deadband, to other equipment or
systems in the substation.
en05000408.vsd
Table 461: Input signals for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
IN Analogue input value
Table 462: Output signals for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function block
Signal Description
VALUE Magnitude of deadband value
RANGE Range
Table 463: Basic general settings for the MVGGIO (MV01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
MV db 1 - 300 1 10 Type Cycl: Report interval
(s), Db: In % of range,
Int Db: In %s
MV zeroDb 0 - 100000 1 500 m% Zero point clamping in
0,001% of range
MV hhLim -10000000000.00 0.001 90.000 - High High limit
0-
10000000000.000
MV hLim -10000000000.00 0.001 80.000 - High limit
0-
10000000000.000
MV lLim -10000000000.00 0.001 -80.000 - Low limit
0-
10000000000.000
MV llLim -10000000000.00 0.001 -90.000 - Low Low limit
0-
10000000000.000
MV min -10000000000.00 0.001 -100.000 - Minimum value
0-
10000000000.000
MV max -10000000000.00 0.001 100.000 - Maximum value
0-
10000000000.000
MV dbType Cyclic - Dead band - Reporting type
Dead band
Int deadband
MV limHys 0.000 - 100.000 0.001 5.000 % Hysteresis value in %
of range (common for
all limits)
Table 464: Basic general settings for the IEC61850-8-1 (IEC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off/On
ON
GOOSE Front - OEM311_AB - Port for GOOSE
OEM311_AB communication
OEM311_CD
16.3.1 Introduction
An optical network can be used within the Substation Automation system. This
enables communication with the IED through the LON bus from the operator’s
workplace, from the control center and also from other terminals.
In this document the most common addresses for commands and events are available.
Other addresses can be found in a separate document, refer to section "Related
documents".
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the LON communication protocol in
general.
The LON bus links the different parts of the protection and control system. The
measured values, status information, and event information are spontaneously sent
to the higher-level devices. The higher-level devices can read and write memorized
values, setting values, and other parameter data when required. The LON bus also
enables the bay level devices to communicate with each other to deliver, for example,
interlocking information among the terminals without the need of a bus master.
The LonTalk protocol supports two types of application layer objects: network
variables and explicit messages. Network variables are used to deliver short messages,
such as measuring values, status information, and interlocking/blocking signals.
Explicit messages are used to transfer longer pieces of information, such as events
and explicit read and write messages to access device data.
The benefits achieved from using the LON bus in protection and control systems
include direct communication among all terminals in the system and support for
multi-master implementations. The LON bus also has an open concept, so that the
terminals can communicate with external devices using the same standard of network
variables.
LON protocol
Configuration of LON
Lon Network Tool (LNT 505) is a multi-purpose tool for LonWorks network
configuration. All the functions required for setting up and configuring a LonWorks
network is easily accessible on a single tool program. For details see the “Operators
manual”.
Activate LONCommunication
Activate LON communication in the PST Parameter Setting Tool under Settings ->
General settings – > Communication – > SLM configuration – > Rear optical LON,
where ADE should be set to ON.
Vertical communication
Vertical communication describes communication between the monitoring devices
and protection and control IEDs. This communication includes sending of changed
process data to monitoring devices as events and transfer of commands, parameter
data and disturbance recorder files. This communication is implemented using
explicit messages.
Binary events
Binary events are generated in event function blocks EV01 to EV20 in the 670IEDs.
The event function blocks have predefined LON addresses. table 466 shows the LON
addresses to the first input on the event function blocks. The addresses to the other
inputs on the event function block are consecutive after the first input. For example,
input 15 on event block EV17 has the address 1280 + 14 (15-1) = 1294.
For double indications only the first eight inputs 1–8 must be used. Inputs 9–16 can
be used for other type of events at the same event block.
As basic, 3 event function blocks EV01-EV03 running with a fast loop time (3 ms)
is available in the 670IEDS. The remaining event function blocks EV04-EV09 runs
with a loop time on 8 ms and EV10-EV20 runs with a loop time on 100 ms. The event
blocks are used to send binary signals, integers, real time values like analogue data
from measuring functions and mA input modules as well as pulse counter signals.
16 pulse counter value function blocks PC01 to PC16 and 24 mA input service values
function blocks SMMI1_In1 to 6 – SMMI4_In1 to 6 are available in the 670IEDs.
The first LON address in every event function block is found in table 466
Event masks
The event mask for each input can be set individually from the Parameter Setting
Tool (PST) Under: Settings – > General Settings –> Monitoring –> Event function
as.
• No events
• OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
• OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
• OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
• AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria
for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)
The following type of signals from application functions can be connected to the event
function block.
Single indication
Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is always
reported on change, no changed detection is done in the event function block. Other
Boolean signals, for example a start or a trip signal from a protection function is event
masked in the event function block.
Double indications
Double indications can only be reported via switch-control (SCSWI) functions, the
event reporting is based on information from switch-control, no change detection is
done in the event function block.
Directly connected binary IO signal via binary input function block (SMBI) is not
possible to handle as double indication. Double indications can only be reported for
the first 8 inputs on an event function block.
Analog value
All analog values are reported cyclic, the reporting interval is taken from the
connected function if there is a limit supervised signal, otherwise it is taken from the
event function block.
Command handling
Commands are transferred using transparent SPA-bus messages. The transparent
SPA-bus message is an explicit LON message, which contains an ASCII character
message following the coding rules of the SPA-bus protocol. The message is sent
using explicit messages with message code 41H and using acknowledged transport
service.
Both the SPA-bus command messages (R or W) and the reply messages (D, A or N)
are sent using the same message code. It is mandatory that one device sends out only
one SPA-bus message at a time to one node and waits for the reply before sending
the next message.
For commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus control, i.e. the
function blocks type SCSWI 1 to 32, SXCBR 1 to 18and SXSWI 1 to 28; the SPA
addresses are according to table 467
Horizontal communication
Network variables are used for communication between REx 5xx and 670IEDs. The
supported network variable type is SNVT_state (NV type 83). SNVT_state is used
to communicate the state of a set of 1 to 16 Boolean values.
The multiple command send function block (MTxx) is used to pack the information
to one value. This value is transmitted to the receiving node and presented for the
application by a multiple command function block (CMxx). At horizontal
communication the input BOUND on the event function block (MTxx) must be set
to 1. There are 10 MT and 60 CM function blocks available. The MT and CM function
blocks are connected using Lon Network Tool (LNT 505). This tool also defines the
service and addressing on LON.
This is an overview description how to configure the network variables for 670IEDs.
LON
en05000718.vsd
The network variable connections are done from the NV Connection window. From
LNT window select Connections -> NVConnections -> New
en05000719.vsd
There are two ways of downloading NV connections. Either you use the drag-and-
drop method where you select all nodes in the device window, drag them to the
Download area in the bottom of the program window and drop them there. Or the
traditional menu selection, Configuration -> Download...
en05000720.vsd
Communication ports
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 and
LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the
Main Processing Module (NUM). The serial communication module can have
connectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST,
bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three different types are available
depending on type of fiber. The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver
input, and the outgoing optical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic
cables are laid out, pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling,
connection, etc. of the optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on the
label on the module.
Table 467: SPA addresses for commands from the operator workplace to the IED for apparatus
control
Name Function SPA Description
block address
BL_CMD SCSWI01 1 I 5115 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI02 1 I 5139 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI02 1 I 5161 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI04 1 I 5186 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI05 1 I 5210 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI06 1 I 5234 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI07 1 I 5258 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI08 1 I 5283 SPA parameters for block command
BL_CMD SCSWI09 1 I 5307 SPA parameters for block command
Table continued on next page
16.4.1 Introduction
In this section the most common addresses for commands and events are available.
Other addresses can be found in a separate document, refer to section "Related
documents".
It is assumed that the reader is familiar with the SPA communication protocol in
general.
The master requests slave information using request messages and sends information
to the slave in write messages. Furthermore, the master can send all slaves in common
a broadcast message containing time or other data. The inactive state of bus transmit
and receive lines is a logical "1".
SPA protocol
The tables below specify the SPA addresses for reading data from and writing data
to an IED 670 with the SPA communication protocol implemented.
The SPA addresses for the mA input service values (MI03-MI16) are found in
table471
The SPA addresses for the pulse counter values PC01 – PC16 are found in table 472
I/O modules
To read binary inputs, the SPA-addresses for the outputs of the I/O-module function
block are used, i.e. the addresses for BI1 – BI16. The SPA addresses are found in a
separate document, refer to section "Related documents".
The single command function consists of three function blocks; CD01 – CD03 for
16 binary output signals each.
The signals can be individually controlled from the operator station, remote-control
gateway, or from the local HMI on the IED. The SPA addresses for the single
command function (CD) are shown in Table 3. For the single command function
block, CD01 to CD03, the address is for the first output. The other outputs follow
consecutively after the first one. For example, output 7 on the CD02 function block
has the 5O533 address.
The SPA addresses for the single command functions CD01 – CD03 are found in
table 473
Function block SPA address CMD Input SPA address CMD output
CD02-Cmd13 4-S-4684 5-O-539
CD02-Cmd14 4-S-4685 5-O-540
CD02-Cmd15 4-S-4686 5-O-541
CD02-Cmd16 4-S-4687 5-O-542
CD03-Cmd1 4-S-4705 5-O-543
CD03-Cmd2 4-S-4706 5-O-544
CD03-Cmd3 4-S-4707 5-O-545
CD03-Cmd4 4-S-4708 5-O-546
CD03-Cmd5 4-S-4709 5-O-547
CD03-Cmd6 4-S-4710 5-O-548
CD03-Cmd7 4-S-4711 5-O-549
CD03-Cmd8 4-S-4712 5-O-550
CD03-Cmd9 4-S-4713 5-O-551
CD03-Cmd10 4-S-4714 5-O-552
CD03-Cmd11 4-S-4715 5-O-553
CD03-Cmd12 4-S-4716 5-O-554
CD03-Cmd13 4-S-4717 5-O-555
CD03-Cmd14 4-S-4718 5-O-556
CD03-Cmd15 4-S-4719 5-O-557
CD03-Cmd16 4-S-4720 5-O-558
Table 473 SPA addresses for the signals on the single command functions
Figure 389 shows an application example of how the user can, in a simplified way,
connect the command function via the configuration logic circuit in a protection
terminal for control of a circuit breaker.
A pulse via the binary outputs of the terminal normally performs this type of command
control. The SPA addresses to control the outputs OUT1 – OUT16 in CD01 are shown
in table 473
Figure 389: Application example showing a simplified logic diagram for control of
a circuit breaker.
The MODE input defines if the output signals from CD01 shall be off, steady or
pulsed signals. This is set in Parameter Setting Tool (PST) under: Setting – > General
Settings – > Control – > Commands – > Single Command.
Event function
This event function is intended to send time-tagged events to the station level (e.g.
operator workplace) over the station bus. The events are there presented in an event
list. The events can be created from both internal logical signals and binary input
channels. All must The internal signals are time tagged in the main processing module,
while the binary input channels are time tagged directly on each I/O module. The
events are produced according to the set event masks. The event masks are treated
commonly for both the LON and SPA channels. All events according to the event
mask are stored in a buffer, which contains up to 1000 events. If new events appear
before the oldest event in the buffer is read, the oldest event is overwritten and an
overflow alarm appears.
Two special signals for event registration purposes are available in the terminal,
Terminal Restarted (0E50) and Event buffer overflow (0E51).
The input parameters can be set individually from the Parameter Setting Tool (PST)
under: Setting –> General Setting – > Monitoring – > Event Function as.
• No events
• OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
• OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
• OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
• AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria
for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)
The Status and event codes for the Event functions are found in table 474
1) These values are only applicable if the Event mask is masked ≠ OFF.
Note that corresponding Event mask must be set to an applicable value via the
Parameter Setting Tool (PST), under: Settings – > General Settings – > Monitoring
– > Event Function as.
• No events
• OnSet, at pick-up of the signal
• OnReset, at drop-out of the signal
• OnChange, at both pick-up and drop-out of the signal
• AutoDetect, event system itself make the reporting decision, (reporting criteria
for integers has no semantic, prefer to be set by the user)
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 and
LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the
Analog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication module can
have connectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST,
bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three different types are available
depending on type of fiber.
The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing
optical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic cables are laid out,
pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. of
the optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.
The procedure to set the transfer rate and slave number can be found in the Installation
and commissioning manual for respective IED.
16.4.3 Design
When communicating locally with a Personal Computer (PC) in the station, using the
rear SPA port, the only hardware needed for a station monitoring system is:
• Optical fibres
• Opto/electrical converter for the PC
• PC
When communicating remotely with a PC using the rear SPA port, the same hardware
is needed plus telephone modems.
The software needed in the PC, either local or remote, is PCM 600.
When communicating between the LHMI and a PC, the only hardware required is a
front-connection cable.
16.5.1 Introduction
The IEC 60870-5-103 communication protocol is mainly used when a protection
terminal communicates with a third party control or monitoring system. This system
must have software that can interpret the IEC 60870-5-103 communication messages.
16.5.2.1 General
• Event handling
• Report of analog service values (measurements)
• Fault location
• Command handling
• Autorecloser ON/OFF
• Teleprotection ON/OFF
• Protection ON/OFF
• LED reset
• Characteristics 1 - 4 (Setting groups)
• File transfer (disturbance files)
• Time synchronization
For detailed information about IEC 60870-5-103, refer to the IEC60870 standard part
5: Transmission protocols, and to the section 103: Companion standard for the
informative interface of protection equipment.
IEC 60870-5-103
The tables in the following sections specify the information types supported by the
IED 670 products with the communication protocol IEC 60870-5-103 implemented.
Number of instances: 1
Number of instances: 1
Number of instances: 4
FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values are
defined in private range 1 - 4. One for each instance.
INFORMATION NUMBER is required for each output signal. Default values are 1
- 8.
Info. no. Message Supported
1 Output signal 01 Yes
2 Output signal 02 Yes
3 Output signal 03 Yes
4 Output signal 04 Yes
5 Output signal 05 Yes
6 Output signal 06 Yes
7 Output signal 07 Yes
8 Output signal 08 Yes
Status
Terminal status indications in monitor direction, I103IED
Indication block for status in monitor direction with defined terminal functions.
Number of instances: 1
Number of instances: 20
FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values are
defined in private range 5 - 24. One for each instance.
INFORMATION NUMBER is required for each input signal. Default values are
defined in range 1 - 8
Info. no. Message Supported
1 Input signal 01 Yes
2 Input signal 02 Yes
3 Input signal 03 Yes
4 Input signal 04 Yes
5 Input signal 05 Yes
6 Input signal 06 Yes
7 Input signal 07 Yes
8 Input signal 08 Yes
Number of instances: 1
Number of instances: 1
Number of instances: 1
Info. no. Message Supported
64 Start L1 Yes
65 Start L2 Yes
66 Start L3 Yes
67 Start IN Yes
84 General start Yes
69 Trip L1 Yes
70 Trip L2 Yes
71 Trip L3 Yes
68 General trip Yes
74 Fault forward/line Yes
75 Fault reverse/busbar Yes
78 Zone 1 Yes
79 Zone 2 Yes
80 Zone 3 Yes
81 Zone 4 Yes
82 Zone 5 Yes
76 Signal transmitted Yes
77 Signal received Yes
73 SCL, Fault location in ohm Yes
The instance type is suitable for linediff, transformerdiff, overcurrent and earthfault
protection functions.
Number of instances: 1
Info. no. Message Supported
64 Start L1 Yes
65 Start L2 Yes
66 Start L3 Yes
Table continued on next page
Number of instances: 1
Measurands
Function blocks in monitor direction for input measurands. Typically connected to
monitoring function, for example to power measurement CVMMXU.
The IED will report all valid measuring types depending on connected signals.
Upper limit for measured currents, active/reactive-power is 2.4 times rated value.
Upper limit for measured voltages and frequency is 1.2 times rated value.
FUNCTION TYPE parameter for each block in private range. Default values are
defined in private range 25 – 27. One for each instance.
Disturbance recordings
The following elements are used in the ASDUs (Application Service Data Units)
defined in the standard.
Analog signals, 40-channels: the channel number for each channel has to be specified.
Channels used in the public range are 1 to 8 and with:
Channel number used for the remaining 32 analog signals are numbers in the private
range 64 to 95.
Binary signals, 96-channels: for each channel the user can specify a FUNCTION
TYPE and an INFORMATION NUMBER.
Disturbance Upload
All analog and binary signals that are recorded with disturbance recorder will be
reported to the master. The last eight disturbances that are recorded are available for
transfer to the master. A successfully transferred disturbance (acknowledged by the
master) will not be reported to the master again.
This section describes all data that is not exactly as specified in the standard.
ASDU23
• Bit TP: the protection equipment has tripped during the fault
• Bit TM: the disturbance data are currently being transmitted
• Bit TEST: the disturbance data have been recorded during normal operation or
test mode.
• Bit OTEV: the disturbance data recording has been initiated by another event
than start/pick-up
The only information that is easily available is test-mode status. The other information
is always set (hard coded) to:
ASDU26
When a disturbance has been selected by the master; (by sending ASDU24), the
protection equipment answers by sending ASDU26, which contains an information
element named NOF (number of grid faults). This number should indicate fault
number in the power system, i.e. a fault in the power system with several trip and
auto-reclosing has the same NOF (while the FAN should be incremented). NOF is in
Rex67x, just as FAN, equal to disturbance number.
To get INF and FUN for the recorded binary signals there are parameters on the
disturbance recorder for each input. The user must set these parameters to whatever
he connects to the corresponding input.
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 and
LON communication. This module is a mezzanine module, and can be placed on the
Analog/Digital conversion module (ADM). The serial communication module can
have connectors for two plastic fiber cables (snap-in) or two glass fiber cables (ST,
bayonet) or a combination of plastic and glass fiber. Three different types are available
depending on type of fiber.
The incoming optical fiber is connected to the RX receiver input, and the outgoing
optical fiber to the TX transmitter output. When the fiber optic cables are laid out,
pay special attention to the instructions concerning the handling, connection, etc. of
the optical fibers. The module is identified with a number on the label on the module.
en05000689.vsd
ICMD-
I103CMD
BLOCK 16-AR
17-DIFF
18-PROT
en05000684.vsd
ICM1-
I103UserCMD
BLOCK OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
OUTPUT4
OUTPUT5
OUTPUT6
OUTPUT7
OUTPUT8
en05000693.vsd
IEV1-
I103IED
BLOCK
19_LEDRS
23_GRP1
24_GRP2
25_GRP3
26_GRP4
21_TESTM
en05000688.vsd
IS01-
I103UsrDef
BLOCK
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
en05000694.vsd
ISU1-
I103Superv
BLOCK
32_MEASI
33_MEASU
37_IBKUP
38_VTFF
46_GRWA
47_GRAL
en05000692.vsd
ISEF-
I103EF
BLOCK
51_EFFW
52_EFREV
en05000685.vsd
IZ01-
I103FltDis
BLOCK
64_STL1
65_STL2
66_STL3
67_STIN
84_STGEN
69_TRL1
70_TRL2
71_TRL3
68_TRGEN
74_FW
75_REV
78_ZONE1
79_ZONE2
80_ZONE3
81_ZONE4
82_ZONE5
76_TRANS
77_RECEV
73_SCL
FLTLOC
ARINPROG
en05000686.vsd
IFL1-
I103FltStd
BLOCK
64_STL1
65_STL2
66_STL3
67_STIN
84_STGEN
69_TRL1
70_TRL2
71_TRL3
68_TRGEN
74_FW
75_REV
85_BFP
86_MTRL1
87_MTRL2
88_MTRL3
89_MTRN
90_IOC
91_IOC
92_IEF
93_IEF
ARINPROG
en05000687.vsd
IAR1-
I103AR
BLOCK
16_ARACT
128_CBON
130_UNSU
en05000683.vsd
IMM1-
I103Meas
BLOCK
IL1
IL2
IL3
IN
UL1
UL2
UL3
UL1L2
UN
P
Q
F
en05000690.vsd
IMU1-
I103MeasUsr
BLOCK
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
en05000691.vsd
Table 479: Input signals for the I103AR (IAR1-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of status reporting
16_ARACT Information number 16, auto-recloser active
128_CBON Information number 128, circuit breaker on by auto-recloser
130_UNSU Information number 130, unsuccessful reclosing
Table 480: Input signals for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of commands
Table 481: Input signals for the I103CMD (ICMD-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of commands
Table 482: Input signals for the I103IED (IEV1-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of status reporting
19_LEDRS Information number 19, reset LEDs
23_GRP1 Information number 23, setting group 1 is active
24_GRP2 Information number 24, setting group 2 is active
25_GRP3 Information number 25, setting group 3 is active
26_GRP4 Information number 26, setting group 4 is active
21_TESTM Information number 21, test mode is active
Table 483: Input signals for the I103UserCMD (ICM1-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of commands
Table 484: Input signals for the I103UsrDef (IS01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of status reporting
INPUT1 Binary signal Input 1
INPUT2 Binary signal input 2
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
INPUT3 Binary signal input 3
INPUT4 Binary signal input 4
INPUT5 Binary signal input 5
INPUT6 Binary signal input 6
INPUT7 Binary signal input 7
INPUT8 Binary signal input 8
Table 485: Input signals for the I103Superv (ISU1-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of status reporting
32_MEASI Information number 32, measurand supervision of I
33_MEASU Information number 33, measurand supervision of U
37_IBKUP Information number 37, I high-high back-up protection
38_VTFF Information number 38, fuse failure VT
46_GRWA Information number 46, group warning
47_GRAL Information number 47, group alarm
Table 486: Input signals for the I103EF (ISEF-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of status reporting
51_EFFW Information number 51, earth-fault forward
52_EFREV Information number 52, earth-fault reverse
Table 487: Input signals for the I103FltDis (IZ01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of status reporting
64_STL1 Information number 64, start phase L1
65_STL2 Information number 65, start phase L2
66_STL3 Information number 66, start phase L3
67_STIN Information number 67, start residual current IN
84_STGEN Information number 84, start general
69_TRL1 Information number 69, trip phase L1
70_TRL2 Information number 70, trip phase L2
71_TRL3 Information number 71, trip phase L3
68_TRGEN Information number 68, trip general
74_FW Information number 74, forward/line
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
75_REV Information number 75, reverse/bus
78_ZONE1 Information number 78, zone 1
79_ZONE2 Information number 79, zone 2
80_ZONE3 Information number 79, zone 3
81_ZONE4 Information number 79, zone 4
82_ZONE5 Information number 79, zone 5
76_TRANS Information number 76, signal transmitted
77_RECEV Information number 77, signal recevied
73_SCL Information number 73, fault location in ohm
FLTLOC Faultlocator faultlocation valid (LMBRFLO-CALCMADE)
ARINPROG Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)
Table 488: Input signals for the I103FltStd (IFL1-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of status reporting
64_STL1 Information number 64, start phase L1
65_STL2 Information number 65, start phase L2
66_STL3 Information number 66, start phase L3
67_STIN Information number 67, start residual curent IN
84_STGEN Information number 84, start general
69_TRL1 Information number 69, trip phase L1
70_TRL2 Information number 70, trip phase L2
71_TRL3 Information number 71, trip phase L3
68_TRGEN Information number 68, trip general
74_FW Information number 74, forward/line
75_REV Information number 75, reverse/bus
85_BFP Information number 85, breaker failure
86_MTRL1 Information number 86, trip measuring system phase L1
87_MTRL2 Information number 87, trip measuring system phase L2
88_MTRL3 Information number 88, trip measuring system phase L3
89_MTRN Information number 89, trip measuring system neutral N
90_IOC Information number 90, over current trip, stage low
91_IOC Information number 91, over current trip, stage high
92_IEF Information number 92, earth-fault trip, stage low
93_IEF Information number 93, earth-fault trip, stage high
ARINPROG Autorecloser in progress (SMBRREC- INPROGR)
Table 489: Input signals for the I103MeasUsr (IMU1-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of service value reporting
INPUT1 Service value for measurement on input 1
INPUT2 Service value for measurement on input 2
INPUT3 Service value for measurement on input 3
INPUT4 Service value for measurement on input 4
INPUT5 Service value for measurement on input 5
INPUT6 Service value for measurement on input 6
INPUT7 Service value for measurement on input 7
INPUT8 Service value for measurement on input 8
INPUT9 Service value for measurement on input 9
Table 490: Input signals for the I103Meas (IMM1-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of service value reporting
IL1 Service value for current phase L1
IL2 Service value for current phase L2
IL3 Service value for current phase L3
IN Service value for residual current IN
UL1 Service value for voltage phase L1
UL2 Service value for voltage phase L2
UL3 Service value for voltage phase L3
UL1L2 Service value for voltage phase-phase L1-L2
UN Service value for residual voltage UN
P Service value for active power
Q Service value for reactive power
F Service value for system frequency
Table 491: Output signals for the I103IEDCMD (ICMA-) function block
Signal Description
19-LEDRS Information number 19, reset LEDs
23-GRP1 Information number 23, activate setting group 1
24-GRP2 Information number 24, activate setting group 2
25-GRP3 Information number 25, activate setting group 3
26-GRP4 Information number 26, activate setting group 4
Table 492: Output signals for the I103CMD (ICMD-) function block
Signal Description
16-AR Information number 16, block of autorecloser
17-DIFF Information number 17, block of differential protection
18-PROT Information number 18, block of protection
Table 493: Output signals for the I103UserCMD (ICM1-) function block
Signal Description
OUTPUT1 Command output 1
OUTPUT2 Command output 2
OUTPUT3 Command output 3
OUTPUT4 Command output 4
OUTPUT5 Command output 5
OUTPUT6 Command output 6
OUTPUT7 Command output 7
OUTPUT8 Command output 8
Table 505: Basic general settings for the I103Meas (IMM1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
RatedIL1 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated current phase
L1
RatedIL2 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated current phase
L2
RatedIL3 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated current phase
L3
RatedIN 1 - 99999 1 3000 A Rated residual
current IN
RatedUL1 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 230.00 kV Rated voltage for
phase L1
RatedUL2 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 230.00 kV Rated voltage for
phase L2
RatedUL3 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 230.00 kV Rated voltage for
phase L3
RatedUL1-UL2 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 400.00 kV Rated voltage for
phase-phase L1-L2
RatedUN 0.05 - 2000.00 0.05 230.00 kV Rated residual
voltage UN
RatedP 0.00 - 2000.00 0.05 1200.00 MW Rated value for active
power
RatedQ 0.00 - 2000.00 0.05 1200.00 MVA Rated value for
reactive power
RatedF 50.0 - 60.0 10.0 50.0 Hz Rated system
frequency
FUNTYPE 1 - 255 1 1 FunT Function type (1-255)
16.6.1 Introduction
The AUBI function block (or the automation bits function block) is used within the
CAP tool in order to get into the configuration the commands coming through the
DNP3.0 protocol. In this respect, this function block plays the same role as the
BinGOOSEReceive (for IEC61850) or MultiCmdReceive (for LON).
en06000504.vsd
Table 507: Input signals for the AutoBits (ABI1-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
PSTO Operator place selection
Table 508: Output signals for the AutoBits (ABI1-) function block
Signal Description
CMDBIT1 Command out bit 1
CMDBIT2 Command out bit 2
CMDBIT3 Command out bit 3
CMDBIT4 Command out bit 4
CMDBIT5 Command out bit 5
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
CMDBIT6 Command out bit 6
CMDBIT7 Command out bit 7
CMDBIT8 Command out bit 8
CMDBIT9 Command out bit 9
CMDBIT10 Command out bit 10
CMDBIT11 Command out bit 11
CMDBIT12 Command out bit 12
CMDBIT13 Command out bit 13
CMDBIT14 Command out bit 14
CMDBIT15 Command out bit 15
CMDBIT16 Command out bit 16
CMDBIT17 Command out bit 17
CMDBIT18 Command out bit 18
CMDBIT19 Command out bit 19
CMDBIT20 Command out bit 20
CMDBIT21 Command out bit 21
CMDBIT22 Command out bit 22
CMDBIT23 Command out bit 23
CMDBIT24 Command out bit 24
CMDBIT25 Command out bit 25
CMDBIT26 Command out bit 26
CMDBIT27 Command out bit 27
CMDBIT28 Command out bit 28
CMDBIT29 Command out bit 29
CMDBIT30 Command out bit 30
CMDBIT31 Command out bit 31
CMDBIT32 Command out bit 32
Table 509: Basic general settings for the AutoBits (ABI1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
On
Table 510: Basic general settings for the DNP3 (DNP--) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation mode Off /
ON On
Table 511: Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch1RS485 (DNC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation mode
Serial-Mode
BaudRate 300 Bd - 9600 Bd - Baud-rate for serial
600 Bd port
1200 Bd
2400 Bd
4800 Bd
9600 Bd
19200 Bd
WireMode Four-wire - Two-wire - RS485 wire mode
Two-wire
Table 512: Advanced general settings for the DNP3Ch1RS485 (DNC1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
DLinkConfirm Never - Never - Data-link confirm
Sometimes
Always
tDLinkTimeout 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 2.000 s Data-link confirm
timeout in s
DLinkRetries 0 - 255 1 3 - Data-link maximum
retries
tRxToTxMinDel 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s Rx to Tx minimum
delay in s
DataBits 5-8 1 8 - Data bits
StopBits 1-2 1 1 - Stop bits
Parity No - Even - Parity
Even
Odd
RTSEnable No - No - RTS enable
Yes
tRTSWarmUp 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s RTS warm-up in s
tRTSWarmDown 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.000 s RTS warm-down in s
tBackOffDelay 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.050 s RS485 back-off delay
in s
tMaxRndDelBkOf 0.000 - 60.000 0.001 0.100 s RS485 maximum
back-off random
delay in s
Table 513: Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch2TCPIP (DNC2-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation mode
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
TCPIPLisPort 1 - 65535 1 20000 - TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 - 65535 1 20000 - UDP port to accept
UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 - 65535 1 20000 - UDP portfor initial
NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 - 65535 1 0 - UDP port to remote
client/master
Table 514: Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch3TCPIP (DNC3-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation mode
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
TCPIPLisPort 1 - 65535 1 20000 - TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 - 65535 1 20000 - UDP port to accept
UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 - 65535 1 20000 - UDP port for initial
NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 - 65535 1 0 - UDP port to remote
client/master
Table 515: Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch4TCPIP (DNC4-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation mode
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
TCPIPLisPort 1 - 65535 1 20000 - TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 - 65535 1 20000 - UDP port to accept
UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 - 65535 1 20000 - UDP port for initial
NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 - 65535 1 0 - UDP port to remote
client/master
Table 516: Basic general settings for the DNP3Ch5TCPIP (DNC5-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation mode
TCP/IP
UDP-Only
TCPIPLisPort 1 - 65535 1 20000 - TCP/IP listen port
UDPPortAccData 1 - 65535 1 20000 - UDP port to accept
UDP datagrams from
master
UDPPortInitNUL 1 - 65535 1 20000 - UDP port for initial
NULL response
UDPPortCliMast 0 - 65535 1 0 - UDP port to remote
client/master
Table 517: Basic general settings for the DNP3Mast1RS485 (DNM1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
ON
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 1 1 - Slave address
MasterAddres 0 - 65519 1 1 - Master address
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - 1:BISingleBit - Object 1, default
2:BIWithStatus variation
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - 3:BIChWithRelTi - Object 2, default
e me variation
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - 3:DIChWithRelTi - Object 4, default
e me variation
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - 2:BOStatus - Object 10, default
2:BOStatus variation
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - 5:BinCnt32WoutF - Object 20, default
2:BinCnt16 variation
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Table continued on next page
Table 518: Advanced general settings for the DNP3Mast1RS485 (DNM1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
ValMasterAddr No - Yes - Validate source
Yes (master) address
AddrQueryEnbl No - Yes - Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 10.00 s Application layer
confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - Yes - Enable application for
Yes multiple fragment
response
ConfMultFrag No - Yes - Confirm each multiple
Yes fragment
UREnable No - Yes - Unsolicited response
Yes enabled
URSendOnline No - No - Unsolicited response
Yes sends when on-line
UREvClassMask Off - Off - Unsolicited response,
Class 1 event class mask
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
Table continued on next page
Table 519: Basic general settings for the DNP3Mast2TCPIP (DNM2-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
ON
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 1 1 - Slave address
MasterAddres 0 - 65519 1 1 - Master address
ValMasterAddr No - Yes - Validate source
Yes (master) address
Table continued on next page
Table 520: Advanced general settings for the DNP3Mast2TCPIP (DNM2-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
AddrQueryEnbl No - Yes - Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 10.00 s Application layer
confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - Yes - Enable application for
Yes multiple fragment
response
ConfMultFrag No - Yes - Confirm each multiple
Yes fragment
UREnable No - Yes - Unsolicited response
Yes enabled
URSendOnline No - No - Unsolicited response
Yes sends when on-line
UREvClassMask Off - Off - Unsolicited response,
Class 1 event class mask
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 1 5 - Unsolicited response
retries before off-line
retry mode
tURRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 30.00 s Unsolicited response
off-line retry delay in s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 1 5 - Unsolicited response
class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
class 1 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 - 100 1 5 - Unsolicited response
class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
class 2 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 - 100 1 5 - Unsolicited response
class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
class 3 event buffer
timeout
DelOldBufFull No - No - Delete oldest event
Yes when buffer is full
tSynchTimeout 1 - 3600 1 1800 s Time synch timeout
before error status is
generated
Table continued on next page
Table 521: Basic general settings for the DNP3Mast3TCPIP (DNM3-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
ON
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 1 1 - Slave address
MasterAddres 0 - 65519 1 1 - Master address
ValMasterAddr No - Yes - Validate source
Yes (master) address
MasterIP-Addr 0 - 18 1 0.0.0.0 - Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk 0 - 18 1 255.255.255.255 - Master IP net mask
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - 1:BISingleBit - Object 1, default
2:BIWithStatus variation
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - 3:BIChWithRelTi - Object 2, default
e me variation
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - 3:DIChWithRelTi - Object 4, default
e me variation
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - 2:BOStatus - Object 10, default
2:BOStatus variation
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - 5:BinCnt32WoutF - Object 20, default
2:BinCnt16 variation
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Table continued on next page
Table 522: Advanced general settings for the DNP3Mast3TCPIP (DNM3-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
AddrQueryEnbl No - Yes - Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 10.00 s Application layer
confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - Yes - Enable application for
Yes multiple fragment
response
ConfMultFrag No - Yes - Confirm each multiple
Yes fragment
UREnable No - Yes - Unsolicited response
Yes enabled
URSendOnline No - No - Unsolicited response
Yes sends when on-line
UREvClassMask Off - Off - Unsolicited response,
Class 1 event class mask
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 1 5 - Unsolicited response
retries before off-line
retry mode
Table continued on next page
Table 523: Basic general settings for the DNP3Mast4TCPIP (DNM4-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
ON
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 1 1 - Slave address
MasterAddres 0 - 65519 1 1 - Master address
ValMasterAddr No - Yes - Validate source
Yes (master) address
Table continued on next page
Table 524: Advanced general settings for the DNP3Mast4TCPIP (DNM4-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
AddrQueryEnbl No - Yes - Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 10.00 s Application layer
confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - Yes - Enable application for
Yes multiple fragment
response
ConfMultFrag No - Yes - Confirm each multiple
Yes fragment
UREnable No - Yes - Unsolicited response
Yes enabled
URSendOnline No - No - Unsolicited response
Yes sends when on-line
UREvClassMask Off - Off - Unsolicited response,
Class 1 event class mask
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 1 5 - Unsolicited response
retries before off-line
retry mode
tURRetryDelay 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
retry delay in s
tUROfflRtryDel 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 30.00 s Unsolicited response
off-line retry delay in s
UREvCntThold1 1 - 100 1 5 - Unsolicited response
class 1 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout1 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
class 1 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold2 1 - 100 1 5 - Unsolicited response
class 2 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout2 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
class 2 event buffer
timeout
UREvCntThold3 1 - 100 1 5 - Unsolicited response
class 3 event count
report treshold
tUREvBufTout3 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 5.00 s Unsolicited response
class 3 event buffer
timeout
DelOldBufFull No - No - Delete oldest event
Yes when buffer is full
tSynchTimeout 1 - 3600 1 1800 s Time synch timeout
before error status is
generated
Table continued on next page
Table 525: Basic general settings for the DNP3Mast5TCPIP (DNM5-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Operation Off - Off - Operation Off / On
ON
SlaveAddress 0 - 65519 1 1 - Slave address
MasterAddres 0 - 65519 1 1 - Master address
ValMasterAddr No - Yes - Validate source
Yes (master) address
MasterIP-Addr 0 - 18 1 0.0.0.0 - Master IP-address
MasterIPNetMsk 0 - 18 1 255.255.255.255 - Master IP net mask
Obj1DefVar 1:BISingleBit - 1:BISingleBit - Object 1, default
2:BIWithStatus variation
Obj2DefVar 1:BIChWithoutTim - 3:BIChWithRelTi - Object 2, default
e me variation
2:BIChWithTime
3:BIChWithRelTi
me
Obj4DefVar 1:DIChWithoutTim - 3:DIChWithRelTi - Object 4, default
e me variation
2:DIChWithTime
3:DIChWithRelTi
me
Obj10DefVar 1:BO - 2:BOStatus - Object 10, default
2:BOStatus variation
Obj20DefVar 1:BinCnt32 - 5:BinCnt32WoutF - Object 20, default
2:BinCnt16 variation
5:BinCnt32WoutF
6:BinCnt16WoutF
Table continued on next page
Table 526: Advanced general settings for the DNP3Mast5TCPIP (DNM5-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
AddrQueryEnbl No - Yes - Address query enable
Yes
tApplConfTout 0.00 - 60.00 0.01 10.00 s Application layer
confim timeout
ApplMultFrgRes No - Yes - Enable application for
Yes multiple fragment
response
ConfMultFrag No - Yes - Confirm each multiple
Yes fragment
UREnable No - Yes - Unsolicited response
Yes enabled
URSendOnline No - No - Unsolicited response
Yes sends when on-line
UREvClassMask Off - Off - Unsolicited response,
Class 1 event class mask
Class 2
Class 1 and 2
Class 3
Class 1 and 3
Class 2 and 3
Class 1, 2 and 3
UROfflineRetry 0 - 10 1 5 - Unsolicited response
retries before off-line
retry mode
Table continued on next page
16.7.1 Introduction
The IEDs can receive commands either from a substation automation system or from
the local human-machine interface, LHMI. The command function block has outputs
that can be used, for example, to control high voltage apparatuses or for other user
defined functionality.
The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. This configuration setting
is done via the LHMI or PCM 600 and is common for the whole function block. The
length of the output pulses are 100 ms. In steady mode the function block has a
memory to remember the output values at power interruption of the IED. Also a
BLOCK input is available used to block the updating of the outputs.
The output signals, here OUT1 to OUT16, are then available for configuration to
built-in functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the
IED.
en05000698.vsd
Table 527: Input signals for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block single command function
Table 528: Output signals for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function block
Signal Description
OUT1 Single command output 1
OUT2 Single command output 2
OUT3 Single command output 3
OUT4 Single command output 4
OUT5 Single command output 5
OUT6 Single command output 6
OUT7 Single command output 7
OUT8 Single command output 8
OUT9 Single command output 9
OUT10 Single command output 10
OUT11 Single command output 11
OUT12 Single command output 12
OUT13 Single command output 13
OUT14 Single command output 14
OUT15 Single command output 15
OUT16 Single command output 16
Table 529: Basic general settings for the SingleCmd (CD01-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
Mode Off - Off - Operation mode
Steady
Pulsed
16.8.1 Introduction
The IED may be provided with a function to send and receive signals to and from
other IEDs via the interbay bus. The send and receive function blocks has 16 outputs/
inputs that can be used, together with the configuration logic circuits, for control
purposes within the IED or via binary outputs. When it is used to communicate with
other IEDs, these IEDs have a corresponding Multiple transmit function block with
16 outputs to send the information received by the command block.
Sixteen signals can be connected and they will then be sent to the multiple command
block in the other IED. The connections are set with the LON Network Tool (LNT).
Twelve multiple command function block CM12 with fast execution time and 48
multiple command function blocks CM13-CM60 with slower execution time are
available in the IED 670s.
The multiple command function block has 16 outputs combined in one block, which
can be controlled from other IEDs.
The output signals, here OUT1 to OUT16, are then available for configuration to
built-in functions or via the configuration logic circuits to the binary outputs of the
terminal.
The command function also has a supervision function, which sets the output VALID
to 0 if the block did not receive data within set maximum time.
16.8.3 Design
16.8.3.1 General
The output signals can be of the types Off, Steady, or Pulse. The setting is done on
the MODE settings, common for the whole block, from the PCM 600 setting tool.
• 0 = Off sets all outputs to 0, independent of the values sent from the station level,
that is, the operator station or remote-control gateway.
• 1 = Steady sets the outputs to a steady signal 0 or 1, depending on the values sent
from the station level.
• 2 = Pulse gives a pulse with one execution cycle duration, if a value sent from
the station level is changed from 0 to 1. That means that the configured logic
connected to the command function blocks may not have a cycle time longer
than the execution cycle time for the command function block.
CM01-
MultiCmd
BLOCK ERROR
NEWDATA
OUTPUT1
OUTPUT2
OUTPUT3
OUTPUT4
OUTPUT5
OUTPUT6
OUTPUT7
OUTPUT8
OUTPUT9
OUTPUT10
OUTPUT11
OUTPUT12
OUTPUT13
OUTPUT14
OUTPUT15
OUTPUT16
VALID
en06000007.vsd
MT01-
MultiTransm
BLOCK ERROR
INPUT1
INPUT2
INPUT3
INPUT4
INPUT5
INPUT6
INPUT7
INPUT8
INPUT9
INPUT10
INPUT11
INPUT12
INPUT13
INPUT14
INPUT15
INPUT16
en06000008.vsd
Table 530: Input signals for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
Table 531: Input signals for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function block
Signal Description
BLOCK Block of function
INPUT1 Input 1
INPUT2 Input 2
INPUT3 Input 3
INPUT4 Input 4
INPUT5 Input 5
INPUT6 Input 6
INPUT7 Input 7
INPUT8 Input 8
INPUT9 Input 9
INPUT10 Input 10
INPUT11 Input 11
INPUT12 Input 12
INPUT13 Input 13
INPUT14 Input 14
INPUT15 Input 15
INPUT16 Input 16
Table 532: Output signals for the MultiCmd (CM01-) function block
Signal Description
ERROR MultiReceive error
NEWDATA New data is received
OUTPUT1 Output 1
OUTPUT2 Output 2
OUTPUT3 Output 3
OUTPUT4 Output 4
OUTPUT5 Output 5
OUTPUT6 Output 6
OUTPUT7 Output 7
OUTPUT8 Output 8
OUTPUT9 Output 9
OUTPUT10 Output 10
OUTPUT11 Output 11
OUTPUT12 Output 12
OUTPUT13 Output 13
OUTPUT14 Output 14
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
OUTPUT15 Output 15
OUTPUT16 Output 16
VALID Output data is valid
Table 533: Output signals for the MultiTransm (MT01-) function block
Signal Description
ERROR MultiSend error
17.1.1 Introduction
The remote end data communication is used either for the transmission of current
values together with maximum 8 binary signals in the line differential protection in
RED670, or for transmission of only binary signals, up to 192 signals, in the other
600 series IEDs. The binary signals are freely configurable and can thus be used for
any purpose e.g. communication scheme related signals, transfer trip and/or other
binary signals between IEDs.
Communication between two IEDs requires that each IED is equipped with an
LDCMs (Line Data Communication Module). The LDCMs are then interfaces to a
64 kbit/s communication channel for duplex communication between the IEDs.
Each IED can be equipped with up to four LDCMs, thus enabling communication
with four remote IEDs.
Start Stop
Information CRC
flag flag
The start and stop flags are the 0111 1110 sequence (7E hexadecimal), defined in the
HDLC standard. The CRC is designed according to the standard CRC16 definition.
The optional address field in the HDLC frame is not used instead a separate addressing
is included in the data field.
The address field is used for checking that the received message originates from the
correct equipment. There is always a risk that multiplexers occasionally mix the
messages up. Each terminal in the system is given a number. The terminal is then
programmed to accept messages from a specific terminal number. If the CRC function
detects a faulty message, the message is thrown away and not used in the evaluation.
When the communication is used for line differential purpose, the transmitted data
consists of three currents, clock information, trip-, block- and alarm-signals and eight
binary signals which can be used for any purpose. The three currents are represented
as sampled values.
When the communication is used exclusively for binary signals, the full data capacity
of the communication channel is used for the binary signal purpose which gives the
capacity of 192 signals.
CRM1-
LDCMRecBinStat
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL
en07000043.vsd
CRM2-
LDCMRecBinStat
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGTHERR
CRCERROR
TRDELERR
SYNCERR
REMCOMF
REMGPSER
SUBSTITU
LOWLEVEL
en07000044.vsd
CRB1-
LDCMRecBinStat
COMFAIL
YBIT
NOCARR
NOMESS
ADDRERR
LNGT HERR
CRCERROR
REMCOMF
LOWLEVEL
en05000451.vsd
Table 536: Output signals for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM1-) function block
Signal Description
COMFAIL Detected error in the differential communication
YBIT Detected error in remote end with incoming message
NOCARR No carrier is detected in the incoming message
NOMESS No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message
ADDRERR Incoming message from a wrong terminal
Table continued on next page
Signal Description
LNGTHERR Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
TRDELERR Transmission time is longer than permitted
SYNCERR Indicates when echo synchronication is used
REMCOMF Remote terminal indicates problem with received message
REMGPSER Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS synchronization
SUBSTITU Link error, values are substituted
LOWLEVEL Low signal level on the receive link
Table 537: Output signals for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM2-) function block
Signal Description
COMFAIL Detected error in the differential communication
YBIT Detected error in remote end with incoming message
NOCARR No carrier is detected in the incoming message
NOMESS No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message
ADDRERR Incoming message from a wrong terminal
LNGTHERR Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
TRDELERR Transmission time is longer than permitted
SYNCERR Indicates when echo synchronication is used
REMCOMF Remote terminal indicates problem with received message
REMGPSER Remote terminal indicates problem with GPS synchronization
SUBSTITU Link error, values are substituted
LOWLEVEL Low signal level on the receive link
Table 538: Output signals for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRB1-) function block
Signal Description
COMFAIL Detected error in the differential communication
YBIT Detected error in remote end with incoming message
NOCARR No carrier is detected in the incoming message
NOMESS No start and stop flags identified for the incoming message
ADDRERR Incoming message from a wrong terminal
LNGTHERR Wrong length of the incoming message
CRCERROR Identified error by CRC check in incoming message
REMCOMF Remote terminal indicates problem with received message
LOWLEVEL Low signal level on the receive link
Table 539: Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
ChannelMode Off - On - Channel mode of
On LDCM, 0=OFF,
OutOfService 1=ON,
2=OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 1 0 - 255 - Terminal number
used for line
differential
communication
RemoteTermNo 0 1 0 - 255 - Terminal number on
remote terminal
DiffSync Echo - Echo - Diff Synchronization
GPS mode of LDCM,
0=ECHO, 1=GPS
GPSSyncErr Block - Block - Operation mode
Echo when GPS
synchroniation signal
is lost
CommSync Slave - Slave - Com Synchronization
Master mode of LDCM,
0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower LowPower - LowPower - Transmission power
HighPower for LDCM, 0=Low,
1=High
TransmCurr CT-GRP1 - CT-GRP1 - Summation mode for
CT-GRP2 transmitted current
CT-SUM values
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
ComFailAlrmDel 5 - 500 5 100 ms Time delay before
communication error
signal is activated
ComFailResDel 5 - 500 5 100 ms Reset delay before
communication error
signal is reset
RedChSwTime 5 - 500 5 5 ms Time delay before
switching in
redundant channel
RedChRturnTime 5 - 500 5 100 ms Time delay before
switching back from
redundant channel
AsymDelay -20.00 - 20.00 0.01 0.00 ms Asymmetric delay
when communication
use echo synch.
MaxTransmDelay 0 - 40 1 20 ms Max allowed
transmission delay
CompRange 0-10kA - 0-25kA - Compression range
0-25kA
0-50kA
0-150kA
Table continued on next page
Table 540: Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRM2-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
ChannelMode Off - On - Channel mode of
On LDCM, 0=OFF,
OutOfService 1=ON,
2=OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 1 0 - 255 - Terminal number
used for line
differential
communication
RemoteTermNo 0 1 0 - 255 - Terminal number on
remote terminal
DiffSync Echo - Echo - Diff Synchronization
GPS mode of LDCM,
0=ECHO, 1=GPS
GPSSyncErr Block - Block - Operation mode
Echo when GPS
synchroniation signal
is lost
CommSync Slave - Slave - Com Synchronization
Master mode of LDCM,
0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower LowPower - LowPower - Transmission power
HighPower for LDCM, 0=Low,
1=High
TransmCurr CT-GRP1 - CT-GRP1 - Summation mode for
CT-GRP2 transmitted current
CT-SUM values
CT-DIFF1
CT-DIFF2
RedundantChann
el
ComFailAlrmDel 5 - 500 5 100 ms Time delay before
communication error
signal is activated
ComFailResDel 5 - 500 5 100 ms Reset delay before
communication error
signal is reset
RedChSwTime 5 - 500 5 5 ms Time delay before
switching in
redundant channel
RedChRturnTime 5 - 500 5 100 ms Time delay before
switching back from
redundant channel
Table continued on next page
Table 541: Basic general settings for the LDCMRecBinStat (CRB1-) function
Parameter Range Step Default Unit Description
ChannelMode Off - On - Channel mode of
On LDCM, 0=OFF,
OutOfService 1=ON,
2=OutOfService
TerminalNo 0 1 0 - 255 - Terminal number
used for line
differential
communication
RemoteTermNo 0 1 0 - 255 - Terminal number on
remote terminal
CommSync Slave - Slave - Com Synchronization
Master mode of LDCM,
0=Slave, 1=Master
OptoPower LowPower - LowPower - Transmission power
HighPower for LDCM, 0=Low,
1=High
ComFailAlrmDel 5 - 500 5 100 ms Time delay before
communication error
signal is activated
ComFailResDel 5 - 500 5 100 ms Reset delay before
communication error
signal is reset
InvertPolX21 Off - Off - Invert polarization for
On X21 communication
Section 18 Hardware
18.1 Overview
xx04000458.eps
xx04000459.eps
xx05000763.eps
xx04000460.eps
xx04000461.eps
Table 542: Designations for 1/2 x 19” casing with 1 TRM slot
Table 543: Designations for 3/4 x 19” casing with 1 TRM slot
Table 544: Designations for 3/4 x 19” casing with 2 TRM slot
Table 545: Designations for 1/1 x 19” casing with 1 TRM slot
Table 546: Designations for 1/1 x 19” casing with 2 TRM slots
18.2.1 Overview
Table 547: Basic modules, always included
Module Description
Combined backplane module (CBM) A backplane PCB that carries all internal signals
between modules in an IED. Only the TRM is not
connected directly to this board.
Universal backplane module (UBM) A backplane PCB that forms part of the IED
backplane with connectors for TRM, ADM etc.
Power supply module (PSM) Including a regulated DC/DC converter that
supplies auxiliary voltage to all static circuits.
Module Description
Numerical module (NUM) Module for overall application control. All
information is processed or passed through this
module, such as configuration, settings and
communication.
Local Human machine interface (LHMI) The module consists of LED:s, an LCD, a push
button keyboard and an ethernet connector used to
connect a PC to the IED.
Transformer input module (TRM) Transformer module that galvanically separates the
internal circuits from the VT and CT circuits. It has
12 analog inputs.
Analog digital conversion module (ADM) Slot mounted PCB with A/D conversion.
18.2.2.1 Introduction
The combined backplane module (CBM) carries signals between modules in an IED.
18.2.2.2 Functionality
The Compact PCI makes 3.3V or 5V signaling in the backplane possible. The CBM
backplane and connected modules are 5V PCI-compatible.
Some pins on the Compact PCI connector are connected to the CAN bus, to be able
to communicate with CAN based modules.
If a modules self test discovers an error it informs other modules using the Internal
Fail signal IRF.
18.2.2.3 Design
Each PCI connector consists of 2 compact PCI receptacles. The euro connectors are
connected to the CAN bus and used for I/O modules and power supply.
1 2
en05000516.vsd
1 2
en05000755.vsd
en05000756.vsd
18.2.3.1 Introduction
The Universal Backplane Module (UBM) is part of the IED backplane and is mounted
above the CBM. It connects the Transformer input module (TRM) to the Analog
digital conversion module (ADM) and the Numerical module (NUM).
18.2.3.2 Functionality
The Universal Backplane Module connects the CT and VT analog signals from the
transformer input module to the analog digital converter module. The Numerical
processing module (NUM) is also connected to the UBM. The ethernet contact on
the front panel as well as the internal ethernet contacts are connected to the UBM
which provides the signal path to the NUM board.
18.2.3.3 Design
It connects the Transformer input module (TRM) to the Analog digital conversion
module (ADM) and the Numerical module (NUM).
• for IEDs with two TRM and two ADM. It has four 48 pin euro connectors and
one 96 pin euro connector, see figure 407
• for IEDs with one TRM and one ADM. It has two 48 pin euro connectors and
one 96 pin euro connector, see figure 408.
The 96 pin euro connector is used to connect the NUM board to the backplane. The
48 pin connectors are used to connect the TRM and ADM.
TRM ADM
NUM
AD Data
X1 X2
X3 X4
RS485
X10 X10
Front Ethernet
LHMI connection
port
Ethernet X5
en05000489.vsd
en05000757.vsd
en05000758.vsd
en05000759.vsd
18.2.4.1 Introduction
The power supply module is used to provide the correct internal voltages and full
isolation between the terminal and the battery system. An internal fail alarm output
is available.
18.2.4.2 Design
There are two types of the power supply module. They are designed for different DC
input voltage ranges see table 549. The power supply module contains a built-in, self-
regulated DC/DC converter that provides full isolation between the terminal and the
external battery system.
Block diagram
Input connector
Power
Filter supply
Backplane connector
Supervision
99000516.vsd
18.2.5.1 Introduction
The Numeric processing module (NUM), is a CPU-module that handles all protection
functions and logic.
For communication with high speed modules, e.g. analog input modules and high
speed serial interfaces, the NUM is equipped with a Compact PCI bus. The NUM is
the compact PCI system card i.e. it controls bus mastering, clock distribution and
receives interrupts.
18.2.5.2 Functionality
The NUM has one PMC slot (32-bit IEEE P1386.1 compliant) and two PC-MIP slots
onto which mezzanine cards such as SLM or LDCM can be mounted.
To reduce bus loading of the compact PCI bus in the backplane the NUM has one
internal PCI bus for internal resources and the PMC/PC-MIP slots and external PCI
accesses through the backplane are buffered in a PCI/PCI bridge.
The application code and configuration data are stored in flash memory using a flash
file system.
The NUM is equipped with a real time clock. It uses a capacitor for power backup of
the real time clock.
No forced cooling is used on this standard module because of the low power
dissipation.
Compact
Flash Logic
PMC
connector
PC-MIP
connector
UBM
Memory Ethernet
North
bridge
Backplane
PCI-PCI-
connector
bridge
CPU
en04000473.vsd
18.2.7.1 Introduction
The transformer input module is used to galvanically separate and transform the
secondary currents and voltages generated by the measuring transformers. The
module has twelve inputs in different combinations of currents and voltage inputs.
18.2.7.2 Design
The transformer module has 12 input transformers. There are several versions of the
module, each with a different combination of voltage and current input transformers.
Basic versions:
The TRM is connected to the ADM and NUM via the UBM.
Configuration of the input and output signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix
for analog inputs (SMAI)".
18.2.8.1 Introduction
The Analog/Digital module has twelve analog inputs, 2 PC-MIP slots and 1 PMC
slot. The PC-MIP slot is used for PC-MIP cards and the PMC slot for PMC cards
according to table 551. The OEM card should always be mounted on the ADM board.
The UBM connects the ADM to the transformer input module (TRM).
18.2.8.2 Design
The Analog digital conversion module input signals are voltage and current from the
transformer module. Shunts are used to adapt the current signals to the electronic
voltage level. To gain dynamic range for the current inputs, two shunts with separate
A\D channels are used for each input current. In this way a 20 bit dynamic range is
obtained with a 16 bit A\D converter.
The A\D converted signals goes through a filter with a cut off frequency of 500 Hz
and are reported to the numerical module (NUM) with 1 kHz at 50 Hz system
frequency and 1,2 kHz at 60 Hz system frequency.
Channel 1
AD1 Channel 2
Channel 3
Channel 4
AD2
Channel 5
1.2v Channel 6
AD3 Channel 7
Channel 8
Channel 9
AD4 Channel 10
Channel 11
Channel 12
PMC
level shift
PC-MIP
2.5v
PCI to PCI
PC-MIP
en05000474.vsd
18.2.9.1 Introduction
The binary input module has 16 optically isolated inputs and is available in two
versions, one standard and one with enhanced pulse counting capabilities on the inputs
to be used with the pulse counter function. The binary inputs are freely programmable
and can be used for the input of logical signals to any of the functions. They can also
be included in the disturbance recording and event-recording functions. This enables
extensive monitoring and evaluation of operation of the IED and for all associated
electrical circuits.
18.2.9.2 Design
The Binary input module contains 16 optical isolated binary inputs. The voltage level
of the binary input is selected at order.
For configuration of the input signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for binary
inputs (SMBI)".
Figure 413 shows the operating characteristics of the binary inputs of the four voltage
levels.
[V]
300
176
144
88
72
38
32
19
18
xx06000391.vsd
Guaranteed operation
Operation uncertain
No operation
This binary input module communicates with the Numerical module (NUM) via the
CAN-bus on the backplane.
The design of all binary inputs enables the burn off of the oxide of the relay contact
connected to the input, despite the low, steady-state power consumption, which is
shown in figure 414 and 415.
[mA]
30
1
35 70 [ms]
en07000104.vsd
Figure 414: Approximate binary input inrush current for the standard version of
BIM.
[mA]
30
1
3.5 7.0 [ms]
en07000105.vsd
Figure 415: Approximate binary input inrush current for the BIM version with
enhanced pulse counting capabilities.
Backplane connector
Process connector
99000503.vsd
Table 553: BIM - Binary input module with enhanced pulse counting capabilities
Quantity Rated value Nominal range
Binary inputs 16 -
DC voltage, RL 24/40 V RL ± 20%
48/60 V RL ± 20%
110/125 V RL ± 20%
220/250 V RL ± 20%
Power consumption
24/40 V max. 0.05 W/input -
48/60 V max. 0.1 W/input
110/125 V max. 0.2 W/input
220/250 V max. 0.4 W/input
Counter input frequency 10 pulses/s max -
Balanced counter input frequency 40 pulses/s max -
Oscillating signal discriminator Blocking settable 1–40 Hz
Release settable 1–30 Hz
18.2.10.1 Introduction
The binary output module has 24 independent output relays and is used for trip output
or any signalling purpose.
18.2.10.2 Design
The binary output module (BOM) has 24 software supervised output relays. Each
pair of relays have a common power source input to the contacts, see figure 417. This
should be considered when connecting the wiring to the connection terminal on the
back of the IED.
The high closing and carrying current capability allows connection directly to breaker
trip and closing coils. If breaking capability is required to manage fail of the breaker
auxiliary contacts normally breaking the trip coil current, a parallel reinforcement is
required.
For configuration of the output signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for
binary outputs (SMBO)".
Output module
xx00000299.vsd
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Process connector
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Relay
Backplane connector
Process connector
Relay Micro-
controller
Relay
Relay
CAN
Relay
Relay Memory
Relay
Relay
99000505.vsd
Table 554: BOM - Binary output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays
Binary outputs 24
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms
Current carrying capacity
Continuous 8A
1s 10 A
Table continued on next page
18.2.11.1 Introduction
The static binary output module has six fast static outputs and six change over output
relays for use in applications with high speed requirements.
18.2.11.2 Design
The Static output module (SOM) have 6 normally open (NO) static outputs and 6
electromechanical relay outputs with change over contacts.
• An MCU
• A CAN-driver
• 6 static relays outputs
• 6 electromechanical relay outputs
• A DC/DC converter
• Connectors interfacing
• CAN-bus to backplane CBM
• IO-connectors to binary outputs (2 pcs.)
Drive &
Read back
Drive &
Read back
Process connector
Drive &
Read back
Drive &
Read back
Drive &
Read back
MCU
CAN-
driver
Drive &
Read back
Drive &
Read back
Process connector
Backplane connector
DC/DC
Drive &
Read back
Internal_fail_n
Drive & AC_fail_n
Read back RCAN_ID
Sync
Drive &
Read back
Reset
Drive &
Read back
en07000115.vsd
Table 555: SOM - Static output module data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays
Static binary outputs 6
Electromechanical relay outputs 6
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC
Test voltage across open contact, 1 min 1000 V rms
Current carrying capacity
Continuous 8A
1s 10 A
Static binary outputs:
Making capacity at capacitive load with the maximum
capacitance of 0.2 mF
0.2 s 20 A
1.0 s 10 A
Electromechanical relay outputs:
Making capacity at inductive load with L/R>10 ms
0.2 s 20 A
1.0 s 10 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos j>0.4 250 V/8.0 A
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R < 40 ms 48 V/1 A
110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A
Operating time, Static outputs <1 ms
18.2.12.1 Introduction
The binary input/output module is used when only a few input and output channels
are needed. The ten standard output channels are used for trip output or any signalling
purpose. The two high speed signal output channels are used for applications where
short operating time is essential. Eight optically isolated binary inputs cater for
required binary input information.
18.2.12.2 Design
The binary input/output module is available in two basic versions, one with
unprotected contacts and one with MOV (Metal Oxide Varistor) protected contacts.
Inputs are designed to allow oxide burn-off from connected contacts, and increase
the disturbance immunity during normal protection operate times. This is achieved
with a high peak inrush current while having a low steady-state current, see figure
414. Inputs are debounced by software.
Well defined input high and input low voltages ensures normal operation at battery
supply earth faults, see figure 413.
I/O events are time stamped locally on each module for minimum time deviance and
stored by the event recorder if present.
The binary I/O module, IOM, has eight optically isolated inputs and ten output relays.
One of the outputs has a change-over contact. The nine remaining output contacts are
connected in two groups. One group has five contacts with a common and the other
group has four contacts with a common, to be used as single-output channels, see
figure 421.
The binary I/O module also has two high speed output channels where a reed relay
is connected in parallel to the standard output relay.
For configuration of the input and output signals, please refer to section "Signal
matrix for binary inputs (SMBI)" and section "Signal matrix for binary outputs
(SMBO)".
Figure 421: Binary in/out module (IOM), input contacts named XA corresponds
to rear position X31, X41, etc. and output contacts named XB to rear
position X32, X42, etc.
The binary input/output module version with MOV protected contacts can for
example be used in applications where breaking high inductive load would cause
excessive wear of the contacts.
The test voltage across open contact is lower for this version of the
binary input/output module.
xx04000069.vsd
Table 557: IOM - Binary input/output module contact data (reference standard: IEC 61810-2)
Function or quantity Trip and signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel reed
relay)
Binary outputs 10 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V AC, DC
Test voltage across open contact, 1000 V rms 800 V DC
1 min
Current carrying capacity
Continuous 8A 8A
1s 10 A 10 A
Making capacity at inductive load
with L/R>10 ms
0.2 s 30 A 0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 0.4 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos φ > 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A
0.4
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A
< 40 ms 110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
125 V/0.35 A 125 V/0.35 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF
Table 558: IOM with MOV - contact data (reference standard: IEC 60255-23)
Function or quantity Trip and Signal relays Fast signal relays (parallel
reed relay)
Binary outputs IOM: 10 IOM: 2
Max system voltage 250 V AC, DC 250 V AC, DC
Test voltage across open contact, 250 V rms 250 V DC
1 min
Current carrying capacity
Continuous 8A 8A
1s 10 A 10 A
Making capacity at inductive
loadwith L/R>10 ms
0.2 s 30 A 0.4 A
1.0 s 10 A 0.4 A
Breaking capacity for AC, cos 250 V/8.0 A 250 V/8.0 A
j>0.4
Breaking capacity for DC with L/R 48 V/1 A 48 V/1 A
< 40 ms 110 V/0.4 A 110 V/0.4 A
220 V/0.2 A 220 V/0.2 A
250 V/0.15 A 250 V/0.15 A
Maximum capacitive load - 10 nF
18.2.13.1 Introduction
The line data communication module (LDCM) is used for communication between
the IEDs situated at distances <150 km or from the IED to optical to electrical
converter with G.703 interface located on a distances <3 km away. The LDCM
module sends and rereceives data, to and from another LDCM module. The IEEE/
ANSI standard format is used.
The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. The module
has one optical port with ST connectors see figure 423.
The line data communication module is used for binary signal transfer. Each module
has one optical port, one for each remote end to which the IED communicates.
Alternative cards for Long range (1550 nm single mode), Medium range (1310 nm
single mode) and Short range (900 nm multi mode) are available.
18.2.13.2 Design
The LDCM is a PCMIP type II single width format module. The LDCM can be
mounted on:
• the ADM
• the NUM
ID
ST
16.000
IO-connector
MHz
32,768
MHz
ST
en07000087.vsd
Figure 423: The SR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width format with two PCI
connectors and one I/O ST type connector
X1
C
ADN 2.5V
ID
2841
PCI9054
FPGA TQ176
DS DS
256 FBGA
3904 3904
MAX
3645
3
2
en06000393.vsd
Figure 424: The MR-LDCM and LR-LDCM layout. PCMIP type II single width
format with two PCI connectors and one I/O FC/PC type connector
18.2.14.1 Introduction
The galvanic X21 line data communication module is used for connection to
telecommunication equipment, for example leased telephone lines. The module
supports 64 kbit/s data communication between IED:s.
Examples of applications:
• Line differential protection
• Binary signal transfer
18.2.14.2 Design
The galvanic X.21 line data communication module uses a ABB specific PC*MIP
Type II format.
C
en07000196.vsd
1 3
2 en07000195.vsd
Soft ground
To avoid ground loops when the grounds are connected, a soft ground connection for
the IO-ground can be used. This is handled in the ground selection connector.
X.21 connector
18.2.14.3 Functionality
The data format is HDLC. The speed for the transmission of the messages used is 64
kbit/s.
A maximum of 100 meter of cable is allowed to ensure the quality of the data
(deviation from X.21 standard cable length).
Synchronization
The X.21 LDCM works like a DTE (Data Terminal Equipment) and is normally
expecting synchronization from the DCE (Data Circuit Equipment). The transmission
is normally synchronized to the Signal Element Timing signal when a device is a
DTE. When the signal is high it will read the data at the receiver and when the signal
is low it will write data to the transmitter. This behaviour can be inverted in the control
register.
Normally an external multiplexer is used and it should act like the master.
When two X.21 LDCM is directly communicating with each other one must be set
as a master generating the synchronization for the other (the slave). The DTE Signal
Element Timing is created from the internal 64 kHz clock.
18.2.15.1 Introduction
The serial communication module (SLM) is used for SPA or IEC 60870-5-103 and
LON communication. The module has two communication ports, one for serial
communication and one dedicated for LON communication.
18.2.15.2 Design
The SLM is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM
module. Three variants of the SLM is available with different combinations of optical
fiber connectors, see figure 427. The plastic fiber connectors are of snap-in type and
the glass fiber connectors are of ST type.
1 Receiver, LON
2 Transmitter, LON
3 Receiver, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103
4 Transmitter, SPA/IEC 60870-5-103
18.2.16.1 Introduction
18.2.16.2 Design
The RS485 is a PMC card and it is factory mounted as a mezzanine card on the NUM
module. The internal structure of the RS485 can be seen in figure 429:
FPGA
32 MHz
Wishbone interconnect switch
Tx
PCI-con
Isolation
6-pole-connector
Internal UART RS485
bus tranceiver
PCI-bus Rx
Local bus Isolation
PCI-
to
Controller
wishbone
PCI-con
Isolation
Status
Register Termination
connector
Info
2-pole
Register
Control
ID-chip
Register Isolated Soft
DC/DC ground
Angle
bracket
Screw
1
terminal
X3 2
1
2 RS485
3 PWB
Screw
4
terminal
5
X1
6
Backplane
• Soft grounded: The IO is connected to the GND with an RC net parallel with a
MOV
18.2.17.1 Introduction
18.2.17.2 Functionality
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is used when communication systems according
to IEC61850–8–1 have been implemented.
18.2.17.3 Design
The Optical Ethernet module (OEM) is a PMC card and mounted as a mezzanine card
on the ADM. The OEM is a 100base Fx module and available as a single channel or
double channel unit.
PCI - bus Connector
100Base-FX
EEPROM
Transmitter ST fiber optic
Ethernet Controller connectors
100Base-FX
Receiver
100Base-FX
Transmitter
ID chip ST fiber optic
Ethernet Controller
connectors
100Base-FX
EEPROM
IO - bus Connector Receiver
en04000472.vsd
ID chip
Receiver
IO bus
LED
Ethernet cont.
25MHz oscillator
Transmitter
Receiver
LED
PCI bus
Ethernet cont. PCI to PCI
bridge
25MHz oscillator
Transmitter
en05000472.vsd
18.2.18.1 Introduction
The milli-ampere input module is used to interface transducer signals in the –20 to
+20 mA range from for example OLTC position, temperature or pressure
transducers.The module has six independent, galvanically separated channels.
18.2.18.2 Design
The Milliampere Input Module has six independent analog channels with separated
protection, filtering, reference, A/D-conversion and optical isolation for each input
making them galvanically isolated from each other and from the rest of the module.
For configuration of the input signals, please refer to section "Signal matrix for mA
inputs (SMMI)".
The analog inputs measure DC current in the range of +/- 20 mA. The A/D converter
has a digital filter with selectable filter frequency. All inputs are calibrated separately
The filter parameters and the calibration factors are stored in a non-volatile memory
on the module.
The calibration circuitry monitors the module temperature and starts an automatical
calibration procedure if the temperature drift is outside the allowed range. The module
communicates, like the other I/O-modules on the serial CAN-bus.
Memory Micro-
controller
99000504.vsd
Power consumption -
each mA-board £4W
each mA input £ 0.1 W
18.2.19.1 Introduction
This module includes the GPS receiver used for time synchronization. The GPS has
one SMA contact for connection to an antenna.
18.2.19.2 Design
The GPS time synchronization module is 6U high and occupies one slot. The slot
closest to the NUM shall always be used.
The CCM is a carrier board for the GCM mezzanine PMC card and GPS unit, see
figure 435. There is a cable between the external antenna input on the back of the
GCM and the GPS-receiver. This is a galvanic connection vulnerable to electro-
magnetic interference. The connector is shielded and directly attached to a grounded
plate to reduce the risk. The second cable is a flat cable that connects the GPS and
the GCM. It is used for communication between the GCM and the GPS-receiver. All
communication between the GCM and the NUM is via the CAN-bus.
The CMPPS signal is sent from the GCM to the rest of the time system to provide
1µs accuracy at sampling level.
PMC
GPS GPS clock
GPS antenna
receiver module
CMPPS
Backplane CAN
CAN
connector
controller CAN
en05000675.vsd
en07000086.vsd
Figure 435: A CCM with the GCM and GPS mounted with cables
1 GPS receiver
18.2.20.1 Introduction
In order to receive GPS signals from the satellites orbiting the earth a GPS antenna
with applicable cable must be used.
18.2.20.2 Design
The antenna with a console for mounting on a horizontal or vertical flat surface or on
an antenna mast. See figure 436
1 6
4 7
xx04000155.vsd
where:
1 GPS antenna
2 TNC connector
3 Console, 78x150 mm
4 Mounting holes 5.5 mm
5 Tab for securing of antenna cable
6 Vertical mounting position
7 Horizontal mounting position
Always position the antenna and its console so that a continuous clear line-of-sight
visibility to all directions is obtained, preferably more than 75%. A minimum of 50%
clear line-of-sight visibility is required for un-interrupted operation.
99001046.vsd
Antenna cable
Use a 50 ohm coaxial cable with a male TNC connector in the antenna end and a male
SMA connector in the receiver end to connect the antenna to GSM. Choose cable
type and length so that the total attenuation is max. 26 dB at 1.6 GHz.
Make sure that the antenna cable is not charged when connected to
the antenna or to the receiver. Short-circuit the end of the antenna
cable with some metal device, when first connected to the antenna.
When the antenna is connected to the cable, connect the cable to the
receiver. REx670 must be switched off when the antenna cable is
connected.
18.2.21.1 Introduction
This module includes the IRIG-B time synchronization and the PPS time
synchronization.
18.2.21.2 Design
The IRIG-B module have two inputs. One input is for the IRIG-B that can handle
both a pulse-width modulated signal (also called unmodulated) and an amplitude
modulated signal (also called sine wave modulated). The other is an optical input type
ST for PPS to synchronize the time between several protections.
32 MHz FPGA
connector
PCI-con
OPTO_INPUT
ST-
PCI-bus
Registers
PCI-Controller
PCI-con
4 mm barrier
IRIG- IRIG_INPUT
connector
Amplitude
ID-chip Decoder
BNC-
modulator
Capture1 Isolated
ZXING
receiver
Zero-cross
Capture2 detector
MPPS
IO-con
PPS
TSU Isolated
DC/DC
CMPPS 5 to +- 12V
en06000303.vsd
A1
DC//DC
ST
C
Y2
C
C
A1
C
O
T
3
2
O
en06000304.vsd
Figure 439: IRIG-B PC-MIP board with top left ST connector for PPS 820 nm
multimode fibre optic signal input and lower left BNC connector for
IRIG-B signal input
18.3 Dimensions
E
K
D
A F
B C
G J
xx04000448.vsd
H
D F
J
B G
C H xx05000502.vsd
xx05000501.vsd
xx05000503.vsd
Case size A B C D E F G H J K
(inches)
6U, 1/2 x 19” 10.47 8.81 9.53 10.07 8.10 7.50 8.02 - 9.00 -
6U, 3/4 x 19” 10.47 13.23 9.53 10.07 12.52 7.50 12.4 - 9.00 -
6U, 1/1 x 19” 10.47 17.65 9.53 10.07 16.86 7.50 16.86 18.31 9.00 19.00
The H and K dimensions are defined by the 19” rack mounting kit.
A C
E
D
xx04000465.vsd
xx06000182.vsd
Figure 446: A 1/2 x 19” size IED 670 side-by-side with RHGS6.
G
D
B
E
F
C
xx05000505.vsd
B
E
C
D
en04000471.vsd
[1.48]
[6.97]
[4.02]
Dimension
mm [inches] xx06000232.eps
[7.50]
en06000234.eps
[inches]
Figure 450: Dimension drawing of a three phase high impedance resistor unit
18.4.1.1 Overview
All IED sizes, 1/2 x 19”, 3/4 x 19” and 1/1 x 19” and RHGS6 6U 1/4 x 19”, cases,
can be flush mounted. Only a single case can be mounted in each cut-out on the cubicle
panel, for class IP54 protection.
The flush mounting kit are utilized for IEDs of sizes: 1/2 x 19”, 3/4 x 19” and 1/1 x
19” and are also suitable for mounting of RHGS6, 6U 1/4 x 19” cases.
1
7
2
6
5
3
xx06000246.vsd
18.4.2.1 Overview
All IED sizes can be mounted in a standard 19” cubicle rack by using the for each
size suited mounting kit which consists of two mounting angles and fastening screws
for the angles. The mounting angles are reversible which enables mounting of IED
size 1/2 x 19” or 3/4 x 19” either to the left or right side of the cubicle.
Please note that the separately ordered rack mounting kit for side-by-
side mounted IEDs, or IEDs together with RHGS cases, is to be
selected so that the total size equals 19”.
1a
1b
xx04000452.vs d
18.4.3.1 Overview
All case sizes, 1/2 x 19”, 3/4 x 19” and 1/1 x 19”, can be wall mounted. It is also
possible to mount the IED on a panel or in a cubicle.
When mounting the side plates, be sure to use screws that follows the
recommended dimensions. Using screws with other dimensions than
the original may damage the PCBs inside the IED.
If fiber cables are bent too much, the signal can be weakened. Wall
mounting is therefore not recommended for communication modules
with fiber connection; Serial SPA/IEC 60870-5-103 and LON
communication module (SLM), Optical Ethernet module (OEM) and
Line data communication module (LDCM).
3
4
2
6
xx04000453.vs d
The IED can be equipped with a rear protection cover which is recommended to use
with this type of mounting. See figure 454.
To reach the rear side of the IED, a free space of 80 mmis required on the unhinged
side.
3
1
80 mm 2
en06000135.vsd
Figure 454: How to reach the connectors on the rear side of the IED.
18.4.4.1 Overview
IED case sizes, 1/2 x 19” or 3/4 x 19” and RHGS cases, can be mounted side-by-side
up to a maximum size of 19”. For side-by-side rack mounting, the side-by-side
mounting kit together with the 19” rack panel mounting kit must be used. The
mounting kit has to be ordered separately.
When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use
screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with
other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the
IED.
2
1
xx04000456.vsd
An 1/2 x 19” or 3/4 x 19” size IED can be mounted with a RHGS (6 or 12 depending
on IED size) case. The RHGS case can be used for mounting a test switch of type
RTXP 24. It also has enough space for a terminal base of RX 2 type for mounting of,
for example, a DC-switch or two trip relays.
1 2
1 2 1 2
1 1 1 1
2 2 2 2
3 3 3 3
4 4 4 4
5 5 5 5
6 6 6 6
7 7 7 7
8 8 8 8
xx06000180.vsd
Figure 456: IED 670 (1/2 x 19”) mounted with a RHGS6 case containing a test
switch module equipped with only a test switch and a RX2 terminal
base.
18.4.5.1 Overview
It is not recommended to flush mount side by side mounted cases if IP54 is required.
If your application demands side-by-side flush mounting, the side-by-side mounting
details kit and the 19” panel rack mounting kit must be used. The mounting kit has
to be ordered separately. The maximum size of the panel cut out is 19”.
When mounting the plates and the angles on the IED, be sure to use
screws that follows the recommended dimensions. Using screws with
other dimensions than the original may damage the PCBs inside the
IED.
1 2
xx06000181.vsd
Figure 457: Side-by-side flush mounting details (RHGS6 side-by-side with 1/2 x
19” IED).
18.5.1 Enclosure
Table 572: Water and dust protection level according to IEC 60529
Section 19 Labels
2
3
6
6 5
7
xx06000574.eps
4
en06000573.eps
1 Warning label
2 Caution label
3 Class 1 laser product label
4 Warning label
This chapter includes diagrams of the IED with all slot, terminal block and optical
connector designations. It is a necessary guide when making electrical and optical
connections to the IED.
21.1 Application
Stage 3
Time
Stage 2 Stage 2
Fault point
position
en05000130.vsd
Time
Fault point
position
en05000131.vsd
The inverse time characteristic makes it possible to minimize the fault clearance time
and still assure the selectivity between protections.
To assure selectivity between protections there must be a time margin between the
operation time of the protections. This required time margin is dependent of following
factors, in a simple case with two protections in series:
A1 B1
Feeder
I> I>
Time axis
en05000132.vsd
where:
t=0 is The fault occurs
t=t1 is Protection B1 trips
In the case protection B1 shall operate without any intentional delay (instantaneous).
When the fault occurs the protections start to detect the fault current. After the time
t1 the protection B1 send a trip signal to the circuit breaker. The protection A1 starts
its delay timer at the same time, with some deviation in time due to differences
between the two protections. There is a possibility that A1 will start before the trip is
sent to the B1 circuit breaker.
At the time t2 the circuit breaker B1 has opened its primary contacts and thus the fault
current is interrupted. The breaker time (t2 - t1) can differ between different faults.
The maximum opening time can be given from manuals and test protocols. Still at
t2 the timer of protection A1 is active.
In most applications it is required that the delay times shall reset as fast as possible
when the current fed to the protection drops below the set current level, the reset time
shall be minimized. In some applications it is however beneficial to have some type
of delayed reset time of the overcurrent function. This can be the case in the following
applications:
• If there is a risk of intermittent faults. If the current relay, close to the faults,
starts and resets there is a risk of unselective trip from other protections in the
system.
• Delayed resetting could give accelerated fault clearance in case of automatic
reclosing to a permanent fault.
• Overcurrent protection functions are sometimes used as release criterion for other
protection functions. It can often be valuable to have a reset delay to assure the
release function.
If current in any phase exceeds the set start current value (here internal signal
startValue), a timer, according to the selected operate mode, is started. The component
always uses the maximum of the three phase current values as the current level used
in timing calculations.
In case of definite time the timer will run constantly until the trip time is reached or
until the current drops below the reset value (start value minus the hysteresis) and the
reset time has elapsed.
For definite time delay curve index no 5 (ANSI/IEEE Definite time) or 15 (IEC
Definite time) are chosen.
The general expression for inverse time curves is according to equation 180.
æ ö
ç A
÷
t[ s ] = ç + B÷×k
ç æ i öp ÷
çç ÷ -C ÷
è è in > ø ø (Equation 180)
where:
p, A, B, C are constants defined for each curve type,
in> is the set start current for step n,
k is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current.
For inverse time characteristics a time will be initiated when the current reaches the
set start level. From the general expression of the characteristic the following can be
seen:
ææ i öp ö
(top - B × k ) × ç ç ÷ - C ÷ = A×k
è è in > ø ø (Equation 181)
where:
top is the operation time of the protection
The time elapsed to the moment of trip is reached when the integral fulfils according
to equation 182, in addition to the constant time delay:
t
ææ i öp ö
ò ç çè in > ÷ø - C ÷ × dt ³ A × k
0 è ø (Equation 182)
For the numerical protection the sum below must fulfil the equation for trip.
n æ æ i( j ) ö p ö
Dt × å ç ç ÷ - C ÷ ³ A× k
j =1 è è in > ø ø (Equation 183)
where:
j=1 is the first protection execution cycle when a fault
has been detected, i.e. when
i
>1
in >
Dt is the time interval between two consecutive
executions of the protection algorithm,
n is the number of the execution of the algorithm
when the trip time equation is fulfilled, i.e. when a
trip is given and
i (j) is the fault current at time j
For inverse time operation, the inverse-time characteristic is selectable. Both the IEC
and ANSI/IEEE standardized inverse-time characteristics are supported. The list of
characteristics in table 584 matches the list in the IEC 61850-7-4 spec.
For the ANSI/IEEE characteristics the inverse time curves are defined according to
table 585:
For the IEC characteristics the inverse time curves are defined according to
table 586:
For the IEC curves there is also a setting of the minimum time delay of operation, see
figure 462.
Operate
time
tnMin
Current
en05000133.vsd
Figure 462: Minimum time delay operation for the IEC curves
In order to fully comply with IEC curves definition setting parameter tMin shall be
set to the value which is equal to the operating time of the selected IEC inverse curve
for measured current of twenty times the set current pickup value. Note that the
operating time value is dependent on the selected setting value for time multiplier k.
In addition to the ANSI and IEC standardized characteristics, there are also two
additional curves available; the 18 = RI time inverse and the 19 = RD time inverse.
æ ö
ç k ÷
t[ s ] = ç
in > ÷
ç 0.339 - 0.235 × ÷
è i ø (Equation 185)
where:
in> is the set start current for step n,
k is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current.
The 19 = RD time inverse curve gives a logarithmic delay, as used in the Combiflex
protection RXIDG. The curve enables a high degree of selectivity required for
sensitive residual earth fault current protection, with ability to detect high resistive
earth faults. The curve is described by equation 186:
æ i ö
t[ s ] = 5.8 - 1.35 × ln ç ÷
è k × in > ø (Equation 186)
where:
in> is the set start current for step n,
k is set time multiplier for step n and
i is the measured current
If the curve type is chosen as 17 the user can make a tailor made inverse time curve
according to the general equation 187.
æ ö
ç A
÷
t[ s ] = ç + B÷×k
ç æ i öp ÷
çç ÷ -C ÷
è è in > ø ø (Equation 187)
Also the reset time of the delayed function can be controlled. We have the possibility
to choose between three different reset type delays. Available alternatives are listed
in table 587.
If instantaneous reset is chosen the timer will be reset directly when the current drops
below the set start current level minus the hysteresis.
If IEC reset is chosen the timer is reset the timer will be reset after a set constant time
when the current drops below the set start current level minus the hysteresis.
If ANSI reset time is chosen the reset time will be dependent of the current after fault
clearance (when the current drops below the start current level minus the hysteresis).
The timer will reset according to equation 188.
æ ö
ç tr
÷
t[ s ] = ç ÷
ç æ i ö2 ÷
çç ÷ -1 ÷
è è in > ø ø (Equation 188)
where:
The set value tr is the reset time in case of zero current after fault clearance.
For the independent time delay characteristics (type 5 and 15) the possible delay time
settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).
For ANSI inverse time delay characteristics (type 1 - 4 and 6 - 8) all three types of
reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set constant time
reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time).
For IEC inverse time delay characteristics (type 9 - 14) the possible delay time settings
are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).
For the customer tailor made inverse time delay characteristics (type 17) all three
types of reset time characteristics are available; instantaneous (1), IEC (2 = set
constant time reset) and ANSI (3 = current dependent reset time). If the current
dependent type is used settings pr, tr and cr must be given, see equation 189:
æ ö
ç tr
÷
t[ s ] = ç ÷
ç æ i ö pr ÷
çç ÷ - cr ÷
è è in > ø ø (Equation 189)
For RI and RD inverse time delay characteristics (type 18 and 19) the possible delay
time settings are instantaneous (1) and IEC (2 = set constant time reset).
Reset characteristic:
tr
t = ×k
(I 2
)
-1
I = Imeasured/Iset
I = Imeasured/Iset
Time delay to reset, IEC inverse time (0.000-60.000) s ± 0.5% of set time ± 10 ms
IEC Normal Inverse no 9 A=0.14, P=0.02 IEC 60255-3, class 5 + 40 ms
IEC Very inverse no 10 A=13.5, P=1.0
IEC Inverse no 11 A=0.14, P=0.02
IEC Extremely inverse no 12 A=80.0, P=2.0
IEC Short-time inverse no 13 A=0.05, P=0.04
IEC Long-time inverse no 14 A=120, P=1.0
Table continued on next page
I = Imeasured/Iset
I = Imeasured/Iset
Table 590: Inverse time characteristics for Two step undervoltage protection (PUVM, 27)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of Class 5 +40 ms
0.01
k
t =
æ U < -U
ö
ç ÷
è U< ø
U< = Uset
U = UVmeasured
U< = Uset
U = Umeasured
Table 591: Inverse time characteristics for Two step overvoltage protection (POVM, 59)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of Class 5 +40 ms
0.01
k
t =
æU -U >ö
ç ÷
è U> ø
U> = Uset
U = Umeasured
Table 592: Inverse time characteristics for Two step residual overvoltage protection (POVM, 59N)
Function Range or value Accuracy
Type A curve: k = (0.05-1.10) in steps of Class 5 +40 ms
0.01
k
t =
æU -U >ö
ç ÷
è U> ø
U> = Uset
U = Umeasured
100
10
k=
15
10
7
1
5
3
2
1
0.1
0.5
0.01
1 10 100 I/I>
xx05000764.vsd
100
10
k=
15
10
1 7
5
3
2
1
0.1
0.5
0.01
1 10 100 I/I>
xx05000765.vsd
100
10
k=
15
10
1 7
5
3
2
1
0.1
0.5
0.01
1 10 100 I/I>
xx05000766.vsd
100
k=
15
10
10
7
5
1
1
0.5
0.1
0.01
1 10 100 I/I>
xx05000767.vsd
100
10
k=
1.1
0.9
0.7
1 0.5
0.3
0.2
0.1
0.1 0.05
0.01
1 10 100 I/I>
xx05000768.vsd
100
10
1
k=
1.1
0.9
0.7
0.5
0.3
0.1 0.2
0.1
0.05
0.01
1 10 100 I/I>
xx05000769.vsd
100
10
k=
0.1 1.1
0.9
0.7
0.5
0.3
0.2
0.01 0.1
1 10 100 I/I>
0.05 xx05000770.vsd
Section 22 Glossary
22.1 Glossary
AC Alternating current
A/D converter Analog to digital converter
ADBS Amplitude dead -band supervision
ADM Analog digital conversion module, with time synchronization
ANSI American National Standards Institute
AR Autoreclosing
ArgNegRes Setting parameter/ZD/
ArgDir Setting parameter/ZD/
ASCT Auxiliary summation current transformer
ASD Adaptive signal detection
AWG American Wire Gauge standard
BBP Busbar protection
BFP Breaker failure protection
BIM Binary input module
BOM Binary output module
BR External bi-stable relay
BS British standard
BSR Binary signal transfer function, receiver blocks
BST Binary signal transfer function, transmit blocks
C37.94 IEEE/ANSI protocol used when sending binary signals
between IEDs
CAN Controller Area Network. ISO standard (ISO 11898) for serial
communication
CAP 531 Configuration and programming tool
CB Circuit breaker
CBM Combined backplane module
CCITT Consultative Committee for International Telegraph and
Telephony. A United Nations sponsored standards body
within the International Telecommunications Union.
CCM CAN carrier module
CCVT Capacitive Coupled Voltage Transformer
Class C Protection Current Transformer class as per IEEE/ ANSI
CMPPS Combined mega pulses per second
CO cycle Close-open cycle
Co-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves two
twisted pairs making it possible to transmit information in both
directions
COMTRADE Standard format according to IEC 60255-24
Contra-directional Way of transmitting G.703 over a balanced line. Involves four
twisted pairs of with two are used for transmitting data in both
directions, and two pairs for transmitting clock signals
CPU Central processor unit
CR Carrier receive
CRC Cyclic redundancy check
CS Carrier send
CT Current transformer
CVT Capacitive voltage transformer
DAR Delayed auto-reclosing
DARPA Defense Advanced Research Projects Agency (The US
developer of the TCP/IP protocol etc.)
DBDL Dead bus dead line
DBLL Dead bus live line
DC Direct current
DFT Discrete Fourier transform
DIP-switch Small switch mounted on a printed circuit board
DLLB Dead line live bus
DNP Distributed Network Protocol as per IEEE/ANSI Std.
1379-2000
DR Disturbance recorder
DRAM Dynamic random access memory
DRH Disturbance report handler